The Laws of the Spirit World

O F T H E

KHORSHED BHAVNAGRI "There is no religion in the Spirit World. We worship one God only."

/ \

LAWS T H E

SPIRIT WORLD

T H E

LAWS O F T H E

SPIRIT WORLD

" There is no religion in the Spirit World. We worship one God only."

KHORSHED BHAVNAGRI

JAICO P U B L I S H I N G H O U S E Ahmedabad Bangalore Bhopal Bhubaneswar Chennai

Delhi Hyderabad Kolkata Lucknow Mumbai

Published by Jaico Publishing House A-2 Jash Chambers, 7-A Sir Phirozshah Mehta Road

Fort, Mumbai - 400 001 [email protected]

www.jaicobooks.com

© Shiamak Davar

THE LAWS OF THE SPIRIT WORLD ISBN 978-81-7992-985-8

First Jaico Impression: 2009 Fifteenth Jaico Impression: 2016

N o part of this book may be reproduced or utilized in any form or by any means, electronic or

mechanical including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval system,

without permission in writing from the publishers.

Printed by B.B. Press

A-37 Sector - 67 Noida - 201301

mailto:[email protected]

http://www.jaicobooks.com

Mrs. Khorshed Bhavnagri 27 September, 1925-13 August, 2007

To God

The One To W h o m We Owe

Everything &

My Dearest Sons Vispi And Ratoo

VISPI'S PRAYER

My dearest God Almighty,

Please our Lord,

Help us to avoid all evil

and save us f rom such evil creatures.

Please take us in Your hands and guide us.

We are Yours, our God,

and will be Yours always.

Keep us with You, our Lord, for eternity.

So always and forever we will be blessed,

guided and helped by You and only You.

Thank You, God Almighty.

CONTENTS

Foreword ix Preface xiii

PART I

SPIRIT C O M M U N I C A T I O N S FROM THE JOURNALS O F KHORSHED BHAVNAGRI

The Real Laws Of God 2 Improvement Through Self-Analysis 4 Justice 6 Spirit Communications The Story Of The Old Man And The Brook 9 Understanding God's Laws 11 How We Died And The Realms Of The Spirit World 12 The 7 Realms Or Planes 15 Our Real Home 18 Beasts Of Burden 19 Is It Godly To Help Everyone? 20 Earthly Crimes vs. Sins 22 You Have To Pay For Your Sins 23 The Devil Does No t Exist 25 You Truly Reap What You Sow 27 Rebirth 28 Fight Evil 32 Only Genuine Desire Can Lead To Change 3 3 Visiting Another Realm In The Spirit World 34 God's Justice 36

Spirit Communications 39 How The Realms Work 41 Your Soul Nature Is Your True

Self 44

The Silver Cord 45 When You Are Asleep, You Are Healed And Guided 46 Life On Different Realms 47 The Lower Realms Are Full 49 Why Some People Die Young 50 Good Souls Are Misled By

Negative Souls 5 3 Control Your Mind 54 Our Feelings In The Spirit World 56 Jimmy's Story: On Earth, People

Are Not What They Seem 57 Jimmy's Story Contd.:

You Cannot Fool God Almighty 60 Jimmy's Story Contd.:

God's Justice Always Catches Up 62 Jimmy's Story Contd.:

God Is Always Watching 64 The Earth Is A School 67 The Purpose Of Rebirth 68 The Story Of A Good Soul Who

Was Blinded By An Evil Man 69 Your Subconscious Mind Can Become Dormant 75 Awaken Your Subconscious M»nd 79 Satish's Story: You Must Have Courage To Improve 80

Contents

Soordas' Story: A Soul Risks All

To Be With His Loved One 83

Spordas' Story Contd.: Niloo's

Love For Soordas Is Tested 86

Soordas' Story Contd.: His

High Good Soul Comes Down

To Earth 88

Soordas' Story Contd.:

Soordas Falls Even Lower 91


A Weak Soul finds Courage 93


Pride Has A Fall 97 Soordas' Story Contd.: The Re-

Awakening Of The Subconscious

Mind 100


His High Good Soul Appears 103 The Subconscious Mind Is The

Real You 106

Why Past-Life Memory Is Not

Revealed 108

Spirit Guides 113

"twin Souls 114

Good Or Evil Is Your Choice 117

Spirit Communicat ions Help

Comfor t Loved Ones On Earth 118

Most Souls Have Been To Lower

Realms 121

Misconceptions About Spirit Communicat ions 121

Why Some People Fear Spirit

Communicat ions 123

Why You Choose To Be Born

O n Earth 125 Why You Dread Death 126

Suicide Is A Sin 127 The High Good Souls 128

What Is A Good Deed? 130

Revenge 132 Suresh's Story 133 You Cannot Treat Everyone In The Same Manner 13 5

Face Your Problems Now, Bravely And With A Smile 136 Never Encourage Negativity In Others 137 View Things From A Spiritual

Angle 137 Do N o t Let Horoscopes Influence You 13 8 Power Can Be Used For Good Or Bad — Projecting And

Receiving Powers 139 To Get Help From Spirit Souls,

Always Be Cool And Calm 140 Marriage 141 Develop Your Power In The

Right Manner 142 Prayers Should Always Be Short

And Sincere 143 Pride Always Makes You Fall Spiritually 144 You Cannot Escape Paying For

Your Sins 145

PART II Q & A

Automatic Writing 149 The Spirit World 157 The Soul And The Subconscious

Mind 182 Free Will 201 Karma 205 Your Mission On Earth 226 Suicide 2 4 4 God 2 5 4 Prayer 2 6 0 Positive Thinking 273 Pride And Humility 2 8 7 The Shift Of The Axis 306 Self Analysis Sheet 315 An Interview With Khorshed

Rumi Bhavnagri 325 Glossary 3 32 Recommended Reading 340 Afterword 341 About The Author 343

FOREWORD

All my l ife I have been ask ing q u e s t i o n s . I always pe rce ived t h i n g s d i f f e r e n t l y f r o m m o s t p e o p l e , which was a result of my thi rs t fo r knowledge. Ever

since I was young, I would gaze at the stars and somehow know tha t we were n o t alone in the universe, t ha t I had f r i e n d s in the S p i r i t W o r l d — my g u a r d i a n angels w h o always love and look a f te r me.

My family t aught me to be respect fu l of all religions. An inborn curiosi ty led me on a journey. In t ime I became a f i rm believer in Sai Baba of Shirdi*, and I to ld H i m abou t my deep yearning fo r a spi r i tual master on Ear th . It was then that I came across a lady, whose name was Khorshed Bhavnagr i . T h e f i r s t day I m e t her a n d s p o k e t o her depar ted sons, Vispi and Ra too , I felt a great k inship when they called me "Small Brother."

T h e knowledge tha t I gained abou t the a f te r l i fe t h r o u g h Khorshed Bhavnagri — or Khorshed Aunty, as I called her — was recognition more than discovery. It was s o m e t h i n g my s o u l a l ready knew. To me , t h e a f t e r l i f e is s i m p l y an

* Sai Baba o f Sh i rd i was an I n d i a n g u r u w h o d ied in 1 9 1 8 . Sai jSa ' ih is

t h e P e r s i a n t e r m f o r < " h o l y o n e o r " s a i n t w h e r e a s Baba is a w o r d

m e a n i n g "father used in Ind i an languages , t h u s r e f e r r i n g t o h im as "holy

l a t h e r " o r "sa in t ly f a t h e r " .

X F o r e w o r d

extension of this life. We are all spokes of a wheel, coming to a centre, which is O N E G O D . We are all connected.

In the 2 5 years of learning with her, Khorshed Aunty was m u c h m o r e than my sp i r i t ua l mas ter . She was my bes t f r i end , s o m e o n e I cou ld t r u s t , s o m e o n e who was o p e n -m i n d e d , n o n - j u d g e m e n t a l , aware, had a great sense of humour , and possessed a luminos i ty and healing energy.

She he lped me apprec ia te the value of exper iences . She made me under s t and that the posit ive experiences were my blessings, ones that I should be gra teful for, and tha t the negative ones were n o t to be feared, fo r they were my real teachers. A simple "God Bless" and "All will be well" f r o m her were enough to pu t all my fears to rest.

1 was completely open with her and discussed everything — G o d , my re la t ionships , my work, the d i f fe rence be tween religion and spirituality, karma, past lives, the p u r p o s e of r e b i r t h , p r o p h e t s , ange l s , p s y c h i c p h e n o m e n a , e x t r a -terrestr ials , why human beings are self-destruct ive, death, old age, loneliness, fear, the healing nature of crystals, the i m p o r t a n c e of now, the power of in ten t ion , t h o u g h t and prayer, whe the r G o d is k ind or p u n i s h i n g , how I c o u l d unde r s t and the meaning of it all and evolve — and realise my place and f u n c t i o n in the grand design and scheme of th ings .

Kh o r s h e d A u n t y answered all my q u e s t i o n s , b u t always told me that in the end, the m o s t impor t an t th ing was to be a g o o d h u m a n being on Ear th and always fo l low the God lv G o o d Path. She made me realise that I was solely responsible for mv actions and that I could no t blame G o d

Foreword XI

or anyone else lor whatever came my way. She also taught me the impor tance of selfless service, cont ro l l ing the mind, spreading G o d ' s knowledge and gu id ing and c o m f o r t i n g p e o p l e who had l o s t t h e i r loved ones . W h e n I n e e d e d guidance mos t , K h o r s h e d Aunty and her husband , R u m i Unc le whom I was also extremely close to, o f f e r ed me a loving envi ronment , ful l of wisdom and laughter, in which my spiri t was nu r tu red , t rained and eventually freed.

Even t hough they are n o t alive anymore, I feel I have two more angels in the spir i t world looking af ter me. I do no t m o u r n their absence because I know that they are with me all the t ime. Moreover , they have le f t w i th me the m o s t valuable of all gu ides — spi r i tua l knowledge . Please read this book with an open m i n d and under s t and how simple and power fu l the t r u t h really is. Vispi always emphasised that this knowledge could be u n d e r s t o o d even by a child, and that the t r u t h is always simple.

For tuna te ly , I am n o t the only one whose life has been changed by K h o r s h e d Aun ty and R u m i Unc le . Over the las t 2 5 years, t h o u s a n d s o f p e o p l e came t o t h e m and rece ived s p i r i t u a l k n o w l e d g e , g u i d a n c e , c o m f o r t and healing.

I hope this book does the same for you.

G o d Bless

Shiamak Davar

Rumi and Khorshed Bhavnagri at their Byculla residence

PREFACE

Kh o r s h e d and R u m i Bhavnagr i lived in Byculla in Bombay, India with their two sons, Vispi who was b o r n on A u g u s t 9 t h , 1 9 5 0 , a n d R a t o o , on

D e c e m b e r I 3 th , 195 I- As the boys grew up they were extremely interested in all aspects of mo to r ing . Eventually, Vispi and R a t o o set up a garage for m o t o r services and repairs. They also par t ic ipated in several m o t o r rallies.

In the fa te fu l year of 1980 , Vispi and R a t o o were to enter a 1 ,632 mile c ross -coun t ry m o t o r rally. T h e rally was to s tar t on February 2 3 rd, and Vispi and R a t o o decided to take the car ou t fo r a trial run f r o m Bombay to Khopoli , be fore the event. Khor shed nar ra ted what happened just before their sons set ou t on their journey. " R a t o o hugged me t i g h t , said g o o d b y e and went o u t . H e hard ly wen t down a few s t eps (we lived on the 2 n d f l o o r ) , t hen he came runn ing back to the door, to me. Again he hugged me t ight and kissed me. I could no t unde r s t and why, because this was unusual fo r Ra too . H e went down one floor, then once more he came runn ing back to me and held me t ight and hugged me. By then Vispi came to wish me goodbye as well. I told t h e m vxo drive carefully. They said, D o n ' t wait tor us, mama, we will go till Khopoli and re turn, or we may stay overnight and come back tomor row morn ing . '

XIV Pre face

j u s t as they got in to their car, the boys met their father. Rumi told them to drive carefully. R a t o o replied, 'Why are you w o r r i e d , daddy? In any case, we can ' t go over 3 0 [miles per hou r ] since we have just overhauled the engine.

We will be alright. ' So, at 8 .30 that night , Vispi and R a t o o set o u t in high sp i r i t s a long wi th two mechanics and a f r iend.

W h e n they did no t re turn by 8 o'clock the next morn ing , K h o r s h e d and R u m i b e g a n t o wor ry . At 8 .3 0 am a m e c h a n i c f r o m the boys ' garage came over saying t h a t there had been an accident somewhere near Khopol i , and that b o t h Vispi and R a t o o were in hospital .

R u m i r o u n d e d up a few f r i e n d s and sped t o w a r d s t h e a c c i d e n t s i t e at K h o p o l i . T h e r e they f o u n d Vi sp i and Ra too ' s car smashed in to a tree. N o b o d y was around, bu t they learned that the boys had been rushed to the hospi ta l a few m i n u t e s away. W h e n R u m i go t to the hospi ta l , he was to ld tha t b o t h Vispi and R a t o o had been killed on the spot , b u t the o ther occupants o f the car had escaped with mino r injur ies .

R u m i asked the mechanics what had caused the accident . All they said was, "We were asleep one minu te and the next m i n u t e there was a crash." Everything felt unreal to Rumi . H e was f o r t u n a t e to have his f r iends and ne ighbours with h im to help with the formal i t i es in the hospi ta l . W i t h a heavy heart he re turned home and wondered how to break this tragic news to his wife.

As R u m i pa in fu l ly c l imbed the s ta i rs to his a p a r t m e n t , Khor shed kept asking h im f r o m the landing, " W h y have

Preface xv

you taken so long? W h e r e are Vispi and Ratoo? W h y can't you move fas te r?" W h e n K h o r s h e d heard the news, she broke down. She felt she had no th ing to live for.

K h o r s h e d ' s f a i t h m G o d was shaken . "I had been verv rel igious," she said. "Now, for the f i rs t t ime, I began to ques t ion whether there was a God . If there was a G o d then why shou ld H e do th i s te r r ib le t h ing to me, sna tch my sons away when I have never ha rmed a hair on anyone ' s head? I was ready to give up God, religion and life."

T h e n s o m e t h i n g w o n d e r f u l happened . O n the 2 9 t h day a f t e r the funera l , a n e i g h b o u r named M r s . D a s t o o r to ld K h o r s h e d and R u m i an a m a z i n g s tory . M r s . D a s t o o r ' s s i s t e r - i n - l a w had g o n e t o a c o n c e r t and , d u r i n g t he intermiss ion, overheard a lady speak of two boys who had recently died in an accident and wanted to send a message to their parents . So Mrs . D a s t o o r ' s sister-in-law had taken down the lady 's t e lephone number .

T h e next day, Khorshed and Rumi got in t ouch with this lady and she invited t h e m to her house. She had lost her b r o t h e r and was in c o n t a c t w i t h h i m t h r o u g h seances organised by a power fu l m e d i u m named Mrs . Kapadia. O n one such occas ion , t he seance was i n t e r r u p t e d by a cry f r o m two young boys. T h e boys said they had died in an a c c i d e n t and t h a t t h e i r p a r e n t s were s h a t t e r e d . T h e y wanted their parents to know they were happy in the spiri t world and no t to worry as they could see their parents .

O n March 2 2 n d , 1 9 8 0 , Khorshed and R u m i a t t e n d e d a g roup seance at Mrs . Kapadia 's residence on Napean Sea Road. Mrs . Kapadia, the medium, sat in the centre and the

\\ I 1'ivlacc

others were seated around her. She moved f rom one person to a n o t h e r to assist t hem m the i r c o m m u n i c a t i o n with their dear ones who had died. W h e n Mrs. Kapadia came to the Bhavnagns, the f i rs t words ut tered bv her were, "Hel lo Mummy, fatso." That was what Vispi had always called his mothe r . T h e fact tha t a s t ranger knew such an i n t ima te detail was what gave Khorshed and Rumi proof that it was their sons, and this restored their faith in God .

Vispi and R a t o o then told their parents that they wanted to talk to t h e m alone. So M r s . Kapadia gave t h e m the name of another medium, an elderly lady called Mrs . Rishi . A few days l a t e r the B h a v n a g r i s s p o k e to t h e i r s o n s t h r o u g h M r s . Rishi . T h e y said, " M o m and Dad , th is is Vispi and Ratoo . Yes, we died and reached the spiri t world w i th in m i n u t e s of ou r dea th . It is G o d ' s will and G o d knows what is best for each one of us. G o d is good. You m u s t no t cry for us or miss us, we are much happier here. We can see you all the t ime, and are looking af ter you. We c a n n o t c o m m u n i c a t e with you un t i l you are comple te ly re laxed and happy . You have t o deve lop p o w e r s of concent ra t ion ." They also told her that she had to stay on

1 s

E a r t h t o do her s p i r i t u a l m i s s i o n , which was t o he lp people and spread spiri tual awareness.

Over the next few mon ths , Khorshed and Rumi, with the he lp of t h e i r sons , d e v e l o p e d p o w e r s of c o m p l e t e c o n c e n t r a t i o n and r e l a x a t i o n which m a d e d i r ec t c o m m u n i c a t i o n b e t w e e n t he p a r e n t s and t h e i r s o n s possible th rough a process known as 'Automatic Writing". She would hold a pen l ight ly o n t o a book, c o n c e n t r a t e intensely, and gradually the spi r i t s of her deceased sons would use her hand to move the pen slowly and unevenly

Preface xv 11

over the page. At f i r s t there were mere scratches, bu t with days of p r a c t i c e , w o r d s f o r m e d and she c o u l d ask ques t ions aloud, to which the answers would come, wri t ten o n t o the book.

Shor t ly a f t e r the boys ' death , a very u n f o r t u n a t e family p rob lem arose and K h o r s h e d and Rumi had to resor t to l i t igat ion. Cont ra ry to the advice of some lawyers who said they should no t f igh t the case, Khorshed and Rumi chose the lawyer on the advice that their deceased sons conveyed to them telepathically. To their surprise, against all odds, the l i t iga t ion came to a successful conc lus ion . T h i s was o n e m o r e s ign t h a t t h e Bhavnagr i s were i n d e e d b e i n g guided and pro tec ted .

A f t e r s o m e t i m e , V i s p i and R a t o o c o n v e y e d t o t h e i r p a r e n t s a des i r e t o d i c t a t e , by t h e s a m e p r o c e s s of a u t o m a t i c w r i t i n g a n d t h e n t e l e p a t h i c a l l y , a b o o k conta in ing the laws of the spiri t world, fo r which they had o b t a i n e d spec ia l p e r m i s s i o n f r o m h i g h e r s o u l s . T h e y t h o u g h t it w o u l d be o f cons ide rab l e b e n e f i t t o h u m a n be ings on Ear th to know the t rue laws of G o d and the spiri t world, which, if followed, would help them advance spiritually. It was the desire of Vispi and R a t o o tha t the b o o k be d i c t a t e d , p u b l i s h e d and d i s t r i b u t e d widely. H o w e v e r , V i sp i and R a t o o were very c lear t h a t t h e i r teachings and beliefs were no t to be forced on anyone.

As f r i e n d s , and even s t r a n g e r s , h e a r d of K h o r s h e d ' s communica t ion with her sons, they came pou r ing in at the Bhavnagri residence. Khorshed and Rumi slowly realised t h a t by r e d u c i n g t he pa in of o t h e r s t h r o u g h se l f l e s s service, their own pain was being cons ide rab ly reduced .

XV11I Pre face

T h i s was how they f o u n d solace a f te r the death of their sons. They provided guidance and c o m f o r t to b o t h young and old. By sharing their story, they prevented people who had s u f f e r e d a s i m i l a r lo s s f r o m b e i n g c o n s u m e d by s a d n e s s . T h e y c o u n s e l l e d p e o p l e r e g a r d i n g p r o b l e m s ranging f r o m addic t ions to physical abuse, bu t eventually they n o u r i s h e d t h o s e s o u l s w h o had a t r u e t h i r s t f o r sp i r i t ua l knowledge and a des i re t o improve spi r i tua l ly . People posed quest ions , b o t h spir i tual and personal . Many of those ques t ions have been reproduced in Part II of this book.

As there is no religion in the spiri t world, ques t ions and answers tha t relate purely to any par t icular rel igion have been excluded.

R u m i and Khorshed Bhavnagri passed away in 1 9 9 6 and 2 0 0 7 respectively, and are happily reuni ted with their sons in the spir i t world.

NOTE

Khorshed Aunty would communicate with Vispi at least twice a day, sometimes three to four times a day, only between sunrise and sunset,

with no fixed agenda or plan. She received messages on various topics, the sequence,

conversational tone and language of which have been preserved exactly as they were received. The

messages reproduced here are the ones she received in English even though her mother

tongue was Gujarati.

Ratoo Bhavnagri 13 December, 1951 - 2 2 February, 1980

Vispi Bhavnagri 9 August, 1950-22 February, 1980

PART I

Spirit Communicat ions trom the Journals

of Khorshed Bhavnagri

1 4 - 0 4 - 1 9 8 1

THE REAL LAWS OF G O D

My dearest M o m and Dad, this is Vispi and R a t o o speaking f r o m the spir i t wor ld to make people on E a r t h u n d e r s t a n d , t h r o u g h you , h o w t o

follow the r ight pa th , G o d Almigh ty ' s own path . So, my dearest M o m , wri te th is book for us and let your world know about the spir i t world, about the laws and rules of G o d Almigh ty , wh ich are m i s u n d e r s t o o d by p e o p l e on Earth, and abou t the Realms ' in the spir i t world.

It is qui te wrong to believe everything tha t your priest tells you, and what great p h i l o s o p h e r s preach, a b o u t the real justice of our G o d Almighty. They don ' t know all — they or you will come t o know all only when you leave f r o m vour Ear th plane and go to the spir i t plane. Well, it will not take just a few pages or a few chapters , no t even a few-books to explain to you what real just ice is. It will take you ages to learn what our G o d truly wants f r o m us. So our e f f o r t s t o exp la in t h i s t o you may n o t p rove q u i t e satisfactory. But we, f rom the spirit world, want our dear

1 I here are seven Rea lms or p lanes ot exis tence m the spiri t world , with

one be in^ the lowest and sc \en the h ighes t .

4 The 1 ,aws ()f The Spirit World

ones and all Ear th people to know what the t r u th is, to k n o w t h a t you are m a k i n g many, m a n y m i s t a k e s j u s t because o f some silly no t ions , or because of what some man who is supposed to be holy and phi losophical tells you. Somet imes what they say is qui te the oppos i t e of our G o d Almighty ' s real rules and regulat ions.

At this t ime on Earth, when evil and bad souls are on top and g o o d s o u l s are s u f f e r i n g , we feel t h i s b o o k will explain to you why — yes, why — bad souls seem to succeed and g o o d s o u l s s u f f e r . G o o d sou l s wan t t o b lame o u r dearest G o d Almighty for being u n j u s t towards them. So read on, my dears, and you will f ind many answers.

15-04-1981

IMPROVEMENT THROUGH SELF-ANALYSIS

Bad souls can be helped by G o d Almighty, if the bad s o u l so d e s i r e s . Bad s o u l s m u s t have t h e i n n e r ins t inc t and may pray to G o d Almighty to change

t h e m . G o d A l m i g h t y will d e f i n i t e l y h e l p t h e m . It is ent i rely in each sou l ' s hands to be g o o d or bad. T h o s e souls who are bad b u t want to change can be changed to good souls in no t ime. O n Earth, we have o f t e n heard you say, "Confess and G o d will forgive you". T h i s is true, bu t you mus t confess your sins to yourself and no t to a priest . A priest has no power to forgive you. W h o is that priest to forgive you? H e may be more s inful than you are, so don ' t confess to a priest , confess to yourself . Tell yourself tha t vou are bad, ask G o d Almighty to help you, and you can be sure that H e will. You m u s t be absolutely sincere. I repeat, absolutely. If you ask God Almighty half-heartedly, it will not help. But if you are complete ly sincere and posi t ive

improvement Through Self-Analysis

chat you need ro change, let us assure you that H e will help you change for the bet ter m no t ime.

N o w suppose a person th inks he is good bu t in reality, he is no t . W h a t abou t such souls? Many people th ink what they are do ing is as per G o d ' s laws. The) ' never have an ounce of real izat ion of how s infu l they are. They will say, "1 believe in G o d . I read holy books . I pray everyday. 1 go to the t emp le or church every day or every week. I give p lenty in chari ty. I give f o o d , c lo th ing , and jobs t o t he poor and needy. W h a t more does anyone want? I will surely go to heaven." Sorry to say, these poor souls th ink tha t heaven's d o o r is wide open for them, but they will never even reach the lowest ladder of heaven. It is really d i f f i cu l t for a soul on h a r t h to unde r s t and this, but it is t rue, they will n o t even see the lowes t s t e p of heaven. So l i s t en carefully with an open mind. W h y are they going to a place of w o r s h i p every day? S o m e go to show people a r o u n d them tha t they are so pious that they think of G o d o f t en . Ask yourself, "Can G o d Almighty ever be fooled?" You can fool your fellow men, but you will never be able to foo l God Almighty. You call yourself a God- fea r ing person? If you really were a God- fea r ing person, would you ever try to fool God?

Some go to a place of worsh ip every day or every week to ask G o d f o r m o r e money , m o r e h a p p i n e s s , and m o r e success. W h a t is this? You are going there for your own se l f i sh m o t i v e — n o t fo r G o d , b u t f o r yourse l f . C a n a selfish motive carry you to heaven?

Suppose you are giving a great deal to chanty , f i r s t ask yourself why. W h a t is your motive behind giving to chanty? Your motive is most important. If your motive is entirely

6 The 1 ,aws ( ) f The Spirit World

se l f less — f o r example , if your m o t i v e is only to he lp someone , and it comes au tomat ica l ly — then , of course , God is pleased and H e knows why you gave, which was no t to impress H i m . But suppose your mot ive is to get in to heaven, to impress G o d Almighty by saying, "If I give this to a p o o r person, G o d will send me to heaven." You can be sure that G o d knows your motive and you won ' t be sent to heaven . You can f o o l each other, y o u can try to f o o l yourself, but you can never foo l G o d Almighty. So your m o t i v e b e h i n d t h a t char i ty is very, very i m p o r t a n t . Be sincere in whatever you do. Even a t iny spark will b r ing you to heaven if you are sincere. But even the largest o f charit ies will take you to hell if you are selfish and try to fool G o d Almighty. So this is entirely in your own hands, isn't it?

16-04-1981

JUSTICE

We are very t h a n k f u l t o G o d tha t H e needs n o p r o o f f o r our ac t ions r igh t or wrong and H i s jus t ice is absolu te . In your wor ld m o s t of the

jus t ice , even by the h ighes t judges , may n o t always be correct, bu t G o d ' s just ice is always r ight as H e knows you inside out . If you try to hide someth ing f r o m your fellow man :t may stay hidden, but you cannot hide even a tiny bit f r o m G o d Almighty, and H i s just ice is always perfect . If you believe this you will never go wrong. You can be sure that this is absolutely t rue and whatever you do or say is alwavs r e c o r d e d . So lead a m o r a l , s ince re and c o m -passionate life.

Spirit Communicat ions 7

Try to improve yourself . You may th ink tha t no man on Ear th is per fec t , so how could you be? My dear readers, even we here, on a h igher p lane or Rea lm in the sp i r i t world are n o t perfect , so how can you be?

We are t ry ing so hard to become per fec t by ga in ing the good and discarding the bad. Every soul 's goal shou ld be se l f - improvement so tha t you can reach G o d Almighty — the Perfect Being — and it takes eons to reach H i m . So in your life, try very hard to do good, speak good and never harm your fellow man. Never be unk ind and try very hard no t to be a hypocri te . You can achieve this if you want t o — but the genuine desire should be there.

Now, since you are on Earth, you have more scope to try to improve yourself . Once you come to the spir i t wor ld , you progress very slowly. So if you really want to improve yourself, do it HOW. Yes, now is m o s t impor tan t .

SPIRIT COMMUNICATIONS

We are all t rying to improve; you on the Ear th plane, and we o n t h e s p i r i t p lane . But t h e r e is a vast d i f f e r e n c e between us. You cannot know all t r u t h s and we know m o s t of them. You will no t know how bad or good your fellow men are, bu t we know exactly how good or bad a soul is. You canno t read each o the r ' s minds . We can read minds up to a po in t . You cannot see or hear us, but we can see you, hear you and even know your m i n d and though t s , so we can know you bet ter than you can yourself.

If you t h i n k t h i s is all h u m b u g , let me give you an example. O u r dearest M o m . who is wri t ing for us, never realised what some people a round her were really like. She


had a bad op in ion about a man, whom we saw to be a good soul. And those who she t h o u g h t were good souls we saw t h e m as t he b igges t h y p o c r i t e s — j e a l o u s and h a r m f u l people. So we advised her. At f i rs t she did no t believe us, but when she and our Dad asked ques t ions all around, they found , to their surprise, tha t what we said was true. They f o u n d o u t wha t they m i g h t n o t have if we h a d n ' t to ld t h e m a b o u t how bad and s i n f u l s o m e sou l s near t h e m really were.

So, my dear readers , if you can c o m m u n i c a t e with your dear o n e s w h o are in t he s p i r i t w o r l d , and take t h e i r guidance, you will def in i te ly know which person is good and which one is no t . In this way, you can know whom to t rus t and w h o m n o t to.

You all have fixed ideas about so many things, which cause you t o go w r o n g . T h i s is why we are g u i d i n g you all t h rough this communica t ion . Evil souls are very d i f f icu l t t o improve , b u t there are c o u n t l e s s chances to improve even evil souls once you gain their conf idence . N u m e r o u s w o n d e r f u l t h i n g s have h a p p e n e d t h r o u g h s p i r i t communica t ions . You can even take souls on Ear th ou t of their misery by conveying a message f r o m their loved ones who have depa r t ed f r o m your wor ld . N o t everyone can receive messages f r o m the spirit world, bu t we are sure that those who can communica t e are will ing to help o thers . I am sorry to say that people on Ear th can be very fool ish somet imes. Even a cupfu l of happiness near their m o u t h s is like po i son to them. They are fool i sh no t to believe m spirit communica t ions , or in the soul and life af ter death. We feel very sorry for such souls, as they arc s tunned when they come to the spirit world.

The Story O f The Old Man And The Brook 9

18-04-1981

THE STORY OF THE OLD MAN AND THE BROOK

Now, we would like to tell you a very good s tory a b o u t s o m e t h i n g tha t happened with us a l i t t le while ago in the spi r i t world . The re was an old

man s i t t ing near our favouri te b rook . It is very rare to see an old man here, for as a soul becomes wiser it becomes younger here, so we were very surpr ised to see him.

We asked him, "Are you a newcomer, sir?"

H e said, "Yes, young men, how did you know that?"

We said, "It was ins t inct !"

H e said, "You seem to be wise y o u n g men, so I am sure you will show me the way home."

We asked, "Well, where is your home?" And he gave us the address of his home on Ear th .

We laughed and told him, "Sir, you are no t on Ear th , you are in t h e s p i r i t w o r l d . " W e t o l d h i m t h a t he was a newcomer to the spirit world.

H e looked at us as if we had come ou t of an asylum, and then said, very meekly, "I t h o u g h t you were wise, as I have s o m e h o w a r r ived at t h i s v a c a t i o n s p o t . Yes, I am a newcomer to this place."

Vacation? ' we said. "Sir, you have come home f r o m your vacation."


H e replied, "My God, these are real mad men, I mus t run away.'' And he fled. We felt very sorry for him, so we called one of our h igher souls t o join us, and approached h im again.

H i s face went white, and he said, "My God , now there are three lunatics. W h a t can I do?" And he began shou t ing ou t a name. Later, we learned that it was the name of his son on Ear th . N o m a t t e r how m u c h we t r ied to explain the s i tua t ion to him, he refused to believe that the spiri t world could be so beau t i fu l , tha t you could live in a place of such beauty af ter your death on Ear th .

We had to call some more high souls, who could tactful ly exp la in t h e s i t u a t i o n . W e all g o t t o g e t h e r , e x p l a i n e d everyth ing to h im, and showed h im a r o u n d . Af t e r some time, he believed us and realised that we were telling h im the t ru th . T h e n he became very fr iendly and said, "All the while I was a f r a id to die on E a r t h , t h i n k i n g t h a t a f t e r death we would have to sleep in e ternal peace on a very barren cloud where only angels can fly."

We laughed and to ld h im we had never seen an angel flying here! So he said, "Oh, that means we are no t in heaven, so how beaut i fu l m u s t heaven be!"

We laughed again and explained to him, " T h i s is a higher Realm and it is heaven, b u t the highest Realm is of course the mos t beau t i fu l — beyond our imaginat ion ." H e became a l i t t l e less o ld t h e n , as w i s d o m seeped i n t o his Subconsc ious M i n d 2 which began to open . H e got a bi t

J A c c o r d i n g no V i s p i che S u b c o n s c i o u s

is a l s o k n o w n as t h e H i g h e r M i n d

c o n t u s e d w i t h a n e o t h e r d e f i n i t i o n s

.Mind is v o u r t r u e s p i r i t u a l m i n d . It

o r t h e C o n s c i e n c e . It is n o t t o be

o 1 she S u b c o n s c i o u s M m c l .

Understanding God 's Laws U

wiser, bu t he still had a lot to learn. H e was very surpr i sed that the land of "eternal peace' ' could be so beau t i fu l and that ins tead of rest ing, we were all so lively and fu l l of zest .

From this story, you can tell how people on Ear th are so ignorant of the spiri t world and are t raumat ized when they f ind o u t what it is really like. So, dear people on Ear th , p r epa re your se lves f o r t h e s p i r i t w o r l d t h r o u g h s p i r i t communica t ions , and be sure to lead your life according to the G o d l y G o o d Path, so t ha t you can reach the h igher Realms.

19 .04-1981

UNDERSTANDING G O D ' S LAWS

Our fellow spir i t be ings here would like us to let the people o f Ea r th know what the real laws of G o d are, as peop le f r o m Ea r th are i g n o r a n t o f

such laws. We would like to give this knowledge to t h e m and, by all means, we have fu l l fa i th that they will believe us and use t h i s k n o w l e d g e f o r t h e g o o d of h u m a n i t y . The re are many false n o t i o n s tha t lead you entirely astray f r o m the laws of G o d Almighty.

M a n y of G o d ' s laws have been m i s u n d e r s t o o d . J u s t t ry this game — we played this game at part ies when we were young. Sit in a circle, and have a person start a sentence by whisper ing it to the person beside him, then pass on the sentence by whispering it f r o m one person to the next. By t he t i m e it r eaches t he o n e w h o s t a r t e d it, it will be abso lu te ly d i f f e r e n t . In the same way, the laws of G o d Almighty started f rom a po in t where they were absolutely

12 T h e 1 ,aws ()f T h e Spirit World

correct, bu t when they were passed down th rough the ages some t r u t h s were altered. N o t wholly, but partly.

20-04 -1981

H O W WE DIED AND THE REALMS OF THE SPIRIT WORLD

Now we w o u l d like to tell you m o r e a b o u t t he spir i t world so that you can unde r s t and how we live here and what a w o n d e r f u l spir i t world you

could be in if you fol low G o d Almighty 's laws and lead a g o o d l i fe . W e w o u l d a l so like t o te l l you wha t lower Realms are like, what evil souls s h o u l d expect and what good souls can expect.

Let 's s tar t f r o m our death so tha t we can explain to you what happened, how we went to the spir i t world, and where the spiri t world is.

We were travell ing by car, slow and steady, as we had to f ree t he eng ine , wh ich we had w o r k e d on a few h o u r s earlier. We were dr iv ing h o m e on t he highway and as I, Vispi, slowly drove the car, 1 real ised t h a t all t he o the r s were asleep. I slowed down some more as the po tho les were so bad that a bumpy ride might have woken everyone up.

We drove towards our Earth home, bu t at the time I never real ised, o f cou r se , t ha t my b r o t h e r R a t o o and I were actual ly m o v i n g t o w a r d s our real heavenly sp i r i t wor ld home.

All of a sudden a terrible form — black, huge and horr ible - came in my way. I swerved the car a l i t t le to my left and

How We Died And The Realms (>f The Spirit World 13

t r ied to apply the brakes, bu t the brakes failed and I saw a tree ahead of me. T h e car smashed in to that tree.

T h e n I saw myself ou ts ide of my physical body. I saw my physical body lying on the grass and 1 realised I was no longer in my physical body, bu t in my light spir i tual body. I also realised tha t I fe l t no pain or d i s c o m f o r t . T h a t ' s when 1 knew 1 was dead to the Ea r th world. 1 looked all a round me and saw no one. A shou t escaped f r o m my lips, " O G o d , no one has c o m e to welcome me to the sp i r i t w o r l d . " A f t e r a few seconds , I n o t i c e d a sou l s t a n d i n g b e s i d e m e and I was o v e r j o y e d as he l o o k e d l ike my brother , Ra too . I hugged and kissed h im and said, " R a t o o , at least we are together ." T h e soul smiled and said, "Vispi, I am no t Ra too . R a t o o is over there, still brea th ing in his physical body." I looked down at Ra too , bu t the o ther soul looked so s imilar tha t I pleaded, "Whoeve r you may be, please, please for G o d ' s sake, save R a t o o — don ' t let h i m die on Ear th as my M o m and D a d will be alone. W h o will look a f t e r t h e m ? " H e very k ind ly t o ld me, "Visp i , my deares t , i t ' s n o t in our hands , i t ' s m G o d ' s h a n d s . And Visp i , I am your g r a n d f a t h e r . " S o th i s was my M o m ' s father, w h o m we used to call Pappa or Popsie. I had n o t r e c o g n i z e d h im as he was m u c h y o u n g e r l o o k i n g t h a n when he had died in 1974- At the t ime of his passing, he was 93 years old and now, in 1980 , when we lef t Ear th , he looked abou t 30 years old, and somewhat like my b ro the r R a t o o . I h u g g e d h i m and r e q u e s t e d h i m aga in t o d o some th ing to save Ra too .

Pappa explained again, "Vispi, tnv dearest, it is not at all m our hands . Just let us pra\ to G o d as I am also fee l ing miserable about this . W h a t will mv dearest d a u g h t e r do


without you two?' ' As we joined our hands in prayer and said, "O G o d . . . " R a t o o came o u t of h is physical body, too . We s t o o d there, sad and miserable , t h i n k i n g of my M o m and Dad.

Ra too saw me and then not iced his smashed-up car, bu t he d id n o t see h i s p h y s i c a l b o d y ly ing on t h e grass . H e s h o u t e d at the t o p of his voice — he had a loud hoarse voice — I heard his same earthly voice, b u t m u c h louder : " W h a t have you done to my car?"

Then , he saw Pappa and recognized him. "Pappa, you are here . W h e r e am I? Pappa, you are dead . W h a t are you doing here?" Then , he spoke to me again, "Tell me, what have you done to my car?"

We explained to h im that we were dead to the Ear th world. Like me, R a t o o also said, " O G o d , what will happen t o M u m m y and Daddy?"

We sat s tar ing at ou r physical bodies, wonder ing if there was a way for us to go back in to our bodies for the sake of our dearest M o m , D a d and Gina (Visp i ' s 2 Vz year o ld d a u g h t e r ) , b u t we were s u m m o n e d up . S o m e o f o u r f r iends and relatives also came, and we all prepared to go up together . T h e r e was a H i g h G o o d SouL with us, who said, "Vispi, Ra too , close your eyes," and we felt as if we were g o i n g up at great speed. W h e n we arr ived at o u r des t ina t ion we were asked to open our eyes and we saw the mos t wonde r fu l place — our beau t i fu l spir i t world home.

Because we were very sad and in a state of shock we were

v A H i g h G o o d S o u l vo te r s t o a s p i r i t b e i n g t r o m R e a l m b S t a g e 7 . tnd

a b o v e .

The 7 Realms O r Planes 15

taken to a huge hall by a few High Good Souls. T h a t hall is called The Hall o f Rest. We were asked to lie down on a s o f t and fea ther - l ike , or shal l we say c loud- l ike c o u c h where we tell asleep.

After a while, I awoke and saw Ra too lying beside me on a couch. Some rays were being given to him. A H i g h G o o d Soul came to me and told me to follow him. I said, "I will stay here as Ra too is still no t properly rested." T h e High G o o d Soul said, "No, you mus t come with me. You cannot stay here any longer. Ra too will meet you outs ide when he is p r o p e r l y res ted . " I was led o u t s i d e and the re I saw Pappa, my f r iends and my relatives all waiting fo r us to come o u t of the Hal l of Rest . Af te r some time, we saw Ra too come out too. T h e n we decided that since we could n o t go back to our M o m and Dad, we would have to help them take this horrible blow courageouslv.

21-04 -1981

THE 7 REALMS OR PLANES

If you come here a f t e r a s h o r t or long i l lness you r d e p a r t e d f r i e n d s and re la t ives may be a r o u n d t o welcome you, b u t if your dea th is sudden they may

take a while to come down to welcome you. But you can be sure they will come, except if you are in the lower Realms. In that case, don' t expect any good soul to welcome you. Evil souls, however, will be ready to take you to the low Realms.

T here are 7 Realms, or planes, m the spirit world. In each Realm there are 10 stages, f rom 0 to <-). So Realm I — 0 would mean Realm I Stage O.


Realm 1 is the lowest and darkest and also the nearest to Ear th . It is the m o s t horr ible place. The re are bare rocks wi th c rawl ing c rea tu res — h u m a n sou l s wi th d i s f i g u r e d bod ie s and h o r r i b l e m i n d s , fu l l of bad fee l ings . T h e i r bodi es are much heavier than ours and thev live in a barren world, crawling a b o u t on rocks in p i t ch darkness . T h e y never see even a tiny spark of l ight at any t ime.

Realm 2 is also horrible, bu t no t as dark as Realm I, nor are the bod ie s so heavy or d i s f i gu red . T h e y also live in rocky caves, h a t i n g each o t h e r and us ing f i l thy, t e r r ib le language, seeing no light or good th ings .

Realm 3 is s t i l l be t te r , b u t yet the re is no l igh t . T h e bodies are l ighter than in Realms I and 2. T h e a tmosphere is extremely heavy and foggy, and their bodies look human , bu t are o lder- looking, and imperfec t . T h e souls on Realm 3 have bad fee l ings fo r each o the r and they blame each o ther for everything. They catch souls who have arrived on R e a l m 3 f o r t he f i r s t t ime and make these sou l s t he i r slaves, fo rc ing them to help them in their evil ways.

Realm 4 is an in-between Realm. It is more or less like Earth, where there is bo th night and day. It is the Realm in which a h u m a n soul s tar ts its life journey. You are given a chance to go up or down f r o m Realm 4 Stage 5, and it is entirely in your hands.

Rea lm 5 is t h e b e g i n n i n g of heaven , wh ich is l ike a beaut i fu l place on Ear th . The re is a l i t t le br igh tness in the sky at all t imes. Souls on this Realm are he lpful to each o ther . Thei r b o d i e s are m u c h l i gh te r and the re are no deformi t ies .

The 7 Realms O r Planes 17

Realm 6 is very beaut i fu l , ful l of wonder fu l b r igh t green grass , t rees and f l ower s of c o l o u r s you c a n n o t see on Ear th . It is always br ight t h r o u g h o u t , like a sunny day. T h e souls have nearly perfect , very light bodies and they all live in ha rmony and love, he lp ing each o ther and do ing work that they love. If you are on Realm 6 and above your sub-conscious mind (what you call conscience) , which is your true, sp i r i tua l mind , will work in such a way tha t it will s top you f r o m c o m m i t t i n g those sins on Ear th that would take you lower than Realm 4-

Realm 7 is the highest . T h e people on Ear th could never even imagine how beau t i fu l it is. T h e beauty of Realm 7 has to be seen to be believed. It is beyond any power of descr ip t ion — yes, it is beyond imaginat ion. Souls on th is Rea lm have the b r i g h t e s t , m o s t p e r f e c t , y o u n g - l o o k i n g sp i r i t bod ies . T h e y are as l ight as c louds . They live in u t m o s t ha rmony and love. It is more than heaven.

Af t e r Realm 7, what? We d o n ' t know, jus t as peop le on E a r t h d o n ' t k n o w m u c h a b o u t t he s p i r i t w o r l d . A f t e r Realm 7 Stage 9 we do no t reincarnate any more on Ear th . But our spir i tual journey cont inues .

T h o s e on Realm 7 are a lmost perfect , pur i f ied souls. But if they reincarnate on Ear th , and somehow sin even a lit t le, they have to go down to Realm 5 or 6. So it is always m every soul ' s own hands whether to take God ' s good pa th or go down the evil, dark path .


22-04 -1981

OUR REAL HOME

We all know that it is good to leave f r o m Ear th and go to the spir i t world. T h e spirit world is ou r real home. We go to Ear th for a shor t t ime

and re turn home. We go to Ear th to gain experience. Ear th is our School where we have to learn, gain experience and try to pur i fy our souls to reach a higher level.

Earth people have no memory o f their real home — the spirit world. If you had t ha t memory , you wou ld never th ink of staying on Ear th for even a minu te . So G o d has given you no memory of your real home, your real loved ones and how beaut i fu l the spir i t world is. G o d has kept it this way so you will no t be keen to r e tu rn w i thou t f i r s t comple t ing your t ra ining and school ing.

G o d is so sure that you would hate to live on Ear th if you remembered the spi r i t world so H e has entirely blocked that memory f r o m your physical mind; b u t your spir i tual m i n d , a lso k n o w n as your s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d , has fu l l m e m o r y of t he sp i r i t wor ld . However , the s u b c o n s c i o u s mind does n o t reveal this memory to your physical, logical mind .

If the subconsc ious mind is d o r m a n t in a person on Ear th , the person will no t know God ' s real laws. We want you to be aware of this fact so you can awaken your subconsc ious mind, as people on Ear th are going f r o m bad to worse. We want you to know the t ru th and be brave enough to follow the right path.

Beasts ( ) f Burden 19

23-04 -1981

BEASTS OF BURDEN

Very good souls suf fe r greatly, and evil souls seem to go scot - f ree on Earth. We o f t e n hear people cry out , "Is th is G c d ' s just ice?"

Very good souls m u s t go t h r o u g h all k inds of t ra in ing and gain exper ience . For th i s , they m u s t s u f f e r t o r ise t o a higher level. T h e more success evil souls reap on Ear th , the deeper in hell they will go. T h e r e is no o t h e r way o u t because one day everyone has to die and come to the spir i t world. So the more success bad people experience on Ear th the more p i t i fu l is their experience when they come to the spir i t world. If evil or bad souls succeed in ha rming others , p i ty t h e m because they will de f i n i t e l y go d o w n t o t h e lowest Realm and suf fe r the u t m o s t — so don ' t envy them and say, "See the evil p e r s o n is happy and s u c c e s s f u l . " Ins tead ask G o d to do what is best fo r that pe rson . T h e person m u s t die in your world and the day will come when his soul has to face the lowest Realm and endure extreme su f fe r ing for ages and ages to come.

You m u s t n o t say t ha t the re is no such t h i n g as G o d ' s jus t ice . W h e n evil sou l s go b e y o n d a cer ta in l imi t they s u f f e r t h e m o s t . T h e l owes t R e a l m m e a n s p i t c h da rk , humid , cold, bare rocks and creepy th ings crawling all over you. T h e r e is no hope to see even a t iny bit of l ight or any th ing good. T h e s e evil creatures have d i s t o r t ed l imbs and are t h e r e f o r e f o r c e d to crawl. T h e y have h o r r i b l e -looking faces and their c lothes are old ta t tered rags. Thev are ha l f -human and half-beast .


T here is ano ther way of going th rough your pun i shment . 4

If you truly repent and your call to G o d is genuine, you get to be born and suffer as a beast of burden, which will be a little be t te r than the lowest of the low Realms. As a beast o f burden, you have ful l memory o f the s ins o f your prev ious l ives on Earth. You go on s u f f e r i n g , remember ing every sin you had c o m m i t t e d and you repent for it. You can be sure that such souls do become beasts of burden and no t pets that are t reated kindly. (Th i s does no t mean t h a t h u m a n be ings s h o u l d t r ea t any l iving be ing unkindly.)

G o o d souls never want to sin, as they would hate to be in an evil soul 's place. It is so very terr ible that we have no words to describe it — if you can, try to improve evil souls so that they don ' t go to the lowest of the low Realms. If they are s u c c e s s f u l in the i r evil ways be sure it will be worse fo r t hem m a few years. So it is your du ty to try hard to improve t h e m by s h o w i n g t h e m what they are. Never encourage them m their ways by being nice to them, bu t show them how wrong they are.

24-04-1981

IS IT GODLY TO HELP EVERYONE?

It is a great pr ivi lege to know the real laws of G o d A l m i g h t y . You m u s t have hea rd p e o p l e say, " I t is Godly to help everyone." Yes, of course, it is Godly to

4 T h i s r e f e r s t o v o u r k a r m a — what vou sow y o u reap . Il is n o r G o d w h o

p u n i s h e s . K a r m a ts t h e c o n s e e j u e n c e s o f a s o u l s a e t i o n s , g o o d o r bad .

N e g a t i v e K.irma is no t on lv vou r p u n i s h m e n t . 1 he h i g h e r p u r p o s e is tha t

of l e a r n i n g . P o s i t i v e K a r m a a l so ov i s t s t h e b l e s s i n g s \ o u r e o e n e lot

soi l less g o o d d e e d s d o n e .

Is It Godly To 1 I t ip Kvervone.-' 21

help, bu t not everyone. It is good to help your fellow men, b u t you c a n n o t he lp all y o u r fe l low men , as s o m e are posit ively evil. It is up to you to f ind ou t which people you s h o u l d he lp and wh ich p e o p l e you s h o u l d n o t — because it you help an evil soul, you are encouraging evil. So have you done right? Is th is what G o d wants you to do? Th ink , and you will unders tand that you are ha rming yourself as well as that evil soul. You will say, "I won ' t help an evil pe r son m m u r d e r i n g or ha rming anyone." We do under s t and you wouldn ' t do that , bu t if you help that evil person by even giving food , money or c lo th ing to him, is it wrong? Yes, it is absolutely wrong. It is wrong because by giving h im this he susta ins his energy and con t inues to do more evil. So it is against G o d ' s laws to give even a li t t le help to such souls, as they will go on ha rming o the r s if you help them.

Be f i rm with an evil person . If you are no t f i rm you are encou rag ing h im. By d o i n g so you are also of the same ca t egory , of t h e s a m e s i n f u l n e s s . S u p p o s e you pas s a starving man lying on the road and you feel it is your du ty to give h im some m o n e y or f o o d . You c a n n o t ask h i m whe the r he is an evil p e r s o n and if he is evil he wou ld def ini te ly no t tell you the t r u th . So you don ' t know at all whether he is evil or good and your heart tells you to give h im someth ing , because he is starving. It your heart says so, you have t o give h i m s o m e t h i n g , b e c a u s e you are abso lu te ly i g n o r a n t of t ha t man ' s character . But if you knowingly give charitv to an evil man or help him it means you yourself are also evil, o therwise you would no t give an evil person any kind of help.

You would saw But he was s tarving, so shou ld 1 watch h im die of hunger? ' N o , it is n o t humane , so give h im


food , hut never help h im m o the r ways, except when that evil pe r son has repented for his deeds. T h i s means he has really repented and keenly and genuinely wants to improve. In that case, you mus t help h im in whatever way you can. It is your du ty to help bring him ou t of evil inf luences and progress to a h igher level. T h a t is a real good deed. But you should only give him full s u p p o r t if he really repents and genuinely wants to improve.

He lp a good man in doing good — go ou t of your way to help the good. But make sure your deed is selfless. Your action should be purely selfless. T h a t ' s what you should know abou t helping people, and we are sure you will never go wrong.

25-04-1981

EARTHLY CRIMES vs. SINS

Many t imes we have hea rd and also said, " G o d h e l p s t h o s e w h o h e l p t h e m s e l v e s . " T h i s is absolutely true. It is a real law of God Almighty.

Suppose you are on a lower Realm, bu t have the genuine desire t o go to a higher level and you truly try to improve, G o d will do H i s best t o help you. G o d Almighty wants you to rise spiritually. H e wants you to be really happy, so if you show a li t t le incl inat ion towards improvement , vou will get a lot of help.

Many people on a lower level will say, "I have harmed no one. I was a God- fea r ing man and I have never c o m m i t t e d crimes. You may have never commit ted crimes, but you may have c o m m i t t e d many sins. G o d is no t c o n c e r n e d

You Have To Pay For Your Sins 23

w i t h t h e laws p e o p l e on E a r t h have m a d e . W h a t is cons idered a cr ime in your wor ld may no t be a sin, and what is a sin may no t be a crime. For example, i t is n o t a crime to be selfish; nor is it a cr ime to show the world that you are a good soul when inside you are black as darkness . N o , it is no t a crime, bu t it is a big sin.

So you see, many of your cr imes — the breaking of man-made laws — are no t sins. S inn ing means breaking G o d -made laws. M a n y sins are n o t c o u n t e d m your wor ld as wrong, so the people on Ea r th are mis t aken a b o u t G o d A l m i g h t y ' s real laws. T h e r e are many sins tha t are taken lightly and some that are no t even t h o u g h t of as sins. So isn't it be t te r fo r the people on Ear th to know which sins will pu t you on the lower levels of the spiri t world, which is your real home?

26-04 -1981

YOU HAVE TO PAY FOR YOUR SINS

Now, pay careful a t t en t ion as this is very i m p o r t a n t . You m u s t not make any mistake in unde r s t and ing this . It is said tha t if evil people leave their evil

ways and walk on the r ight pa th G o d will take over. Yes, G o d does take over and help t h e m to rise higher, bu t th is does n o t mean H e forgives t h e m and welcomes t h e m to heaven as soon as the evil people say they want to be on the good side. Def in i te ly no t , you have to pay for your sins, no matter what. But if you have the genuine desire to c h a n g e , G o d will d e f i n i t e l y h e l p you . T h a t wil l on ly happen when you truly repent fo r your sins and G o d is sure that you will not go back to your old ways. Only then will H e help you rise up sooner. Ris ing up sooner does no t


mean G o d will take vou straight to the higher Realms, it means H e will guide vou and teach you to pav o f t your karma in a good manner. H e will guide you in this wav so viui can reach the h igher levels m u c h s o o n e r than you could otherwise.

Vou should bv no means believe that if vou are evil at one m o m e n t and t h e n th ink of G o d and w o r s h i p H i m the next, you will reach heaven. It is silly to confess to a priest and th ink that G o d has forgiven you. As I said before, the priest may be m o r e of a s inner than you. W h o is he to forgive you? Only G o d Almighty can forgive you for your sins, but not before you truly repent .

Your inner motive — a genuine desire to change for the better — is the only thing that matters. Your inner desire mus t be to reach G o d Almighty by leading a true, honest and kind life.

A person may be qui te ordinary and no one may bo ther to look at him twice, or no one mav even care to answer his humble ques t ions . H e mav be nobody in vour world, but in the spir i t world he may be even higher than any f amous man on Ear th . So you see, for you on Earth it is d i f f icul t to judge a real good soul f r o m an evil soul. There is a vast d i f ference between these souls, but you would still never be able to d i f f e r e n t i a t e be tween t h e m because you are absolutely blind to the vibrations and the aura o f a soul. Yes, it is mos t d i f f i cu l t tor vou to unde r s t and who is a sjood soul and who is evil.

Main t imes people on Earth have though t a person to be verv holv and pious, but that person mav be an evtremelv evil sou l . O u r advice to vou is t h a t if vou can

The Devil Does No t Kxist 25

c o m m u n i c a t e safely with the spir i t world , take gu idance so tha t you will n o t be foo led and d ragged to a lower level by the c o n s t a n t c o m p a n y and in f luence of evil souls .

27-04 -1981

THE DEVIL DOES NOT EXIST

It is said tha t there is a Devil who will t e m p t you. Well, let us tell you tha t there is n o Devi l in our universe, but there are as many devils as there are evil people —

here, o n t he lower levels of t he sp i r i t wor ld , as well on y o u r E a r t h p lane . T h e s e devi ls have m a d e y o u r w o r l d a hell ish place t o live in. O n Ea r th you all live t o g e t h e r — g o o d souls , bad souls , and even evil souls — bu t here in the spir i t wor ld g o o d souls d o no t live wi th bad or evil souls .

All g o o d souls toge ther .

All bad sou ls together .

All evil souls toge ther .

In the sp i r i t world, you need n o t fear tha t an evil soul will h a r m vou, or a bad soul will f oo l you. Here all g o o d sou ls live t o g e t h e r in h a r m o n y , love and he lp each o the r , and never ha rm anybody.

Bad s o u l s live t o g e t h e r and f o o l each o the r . T h e y have jealousy, d i shones ty and bad feel ings for each other . T h e y ha rm each other , even t o r t u r e each o the r mentally. But bad souls who want t o improve jus t have t o call f o r help . If t h i s call is g e n u i n e , h e l p will i m m e d i a t e l y c o m e f r o m : lgher Realms. Many kind souls f r o m higher Rea lms will go to their aid and try to b r ing t h e m out of their misery.


Evil souls on the lowest Realms h n d it very d i f f i cu l t t o rise spiri tually, as the evil souls a r o u n d them will try to make them m o r e evil and n o t let t h e m improve. As evil souls allow no goodness to come ou t of their souls, it is m o s t d i f f i c u l t — b u t n o t i m p o s s i b l e — f o r t h e m to improve. Even the worst kind of evil soul will improve in a very l imited t ime, bu t some evil souls remain on the lowest Realms for centuries , as they have no desire whatsoever t o improve. Such souls try to prevent o thers , who have the desire to advance, f r o m improving because they don ' t want to be alone. So you see it is very d i f f i c u l t to rise f r o m lower Realms, bu t as we said it is n o t imposs ible if you genuinely repent .

So dear readers, these are the real devils, the ones who try hard to make o thers evil like themselves. If o thers desire to r i se t o h i g h e r R e a l m s , t hey t ry t h e i r level b e s t t o discourage them and even harm them as m u c h as possible so that they don ' t rise.

N o w let 's talk about God Almighty. The re is no need to tell you abou t God , as everyone knows about H i m — our heavenly Father, King o f our universe and several other universes.

G o d is ful l of love, kindness, just ice and wisdom. H e is a just Lord of Heaven, who will never mis judge a soul. H i s sole in ten t ion is to improve you, help you throw away all vour evil feelings, pur i fy your soul and make you happy. H e has several helpers to guide souls on even the lowest of Realms. So vou can be sure that H i s kindness and love will never fail and that H e is the one who can bring even the most evil of souls to the higher Realms.

You Truly Reap What You Sow 27

28 -04 -1981

YOU TRULY REAP WHAT YOU SOW

Many people on Ear th simply refuse to believe in life af ter death . Those who do believe, believe m eternal peace, th ink ing tha t eternal peace means

you s l eep f o r e v e r — w h a t a si l ly c o n c l u s i o n , w h a t a misgu ided t h o u g h t !

In the spirit world, we are more alive than y o u are on Earth, as we are f ree o f bodi ly aches and pains . We are almost always happy and m o s t of all we are spi r i t s wi th no burden of the physical body. We can work at what we like the mos t . We don ' t quarrel with each other, we don ' t hur t each o ther and we never steal or do any harm to anybody and there fore we don ' t need t o pro tec t our homes . We are abso lu te ly f ree and o u r f r e e d o m is given to us by G o d Almighty. If we like to study, we study; if we like to work, we work; if we want to rest, we do; if we would like to visit a f r iend, we go; if we feel like praying, we pray. We can do whatever we feel like doing . So does that no t mean we are freer than you all are? Are we no t more alive and do we no t know more than you know, even about yourself? We just \\\int you to keep in mind that whatever we tell you will be bet ter than what you know, do, or think, and at the same t ime we would like to tell you that we are no t perfec t . We are a l so l e a r n i n g . We will be p e r f e c t and c o m p l e t e l y p u r i f i e d on ly when we reach G o d . N o w , as you f u l l y unders tand us, we f r o m the spiri t world want to send you these messages so that we can guide you. From the Ear th world vou can reach a higher level much sooner than when \ on are in the spirit world.

There are ce r t a in laws of o u r G o d A l m i g h t y t h a t are


observed very str ict ly by all souls. M o s t impor t an t of all is this, "Whatever you sow, you reap".

G o d A l m i g h t y is very k i n d - h e a r t e d and fu l l of love, so humans began to take advantage of H i s love and kindness . But G o d has given you a s u b c o n s c i o u s mind , or c o n s -cience. T h i s subconsc ious mind operates on the pr inciple of, "Whatever you sow, you reap". You get good for good and evil fo r evil. T h e r e is no in jus t ice . If you have been good you will get happ ines s in the sp i r i t wor ld . If you have harmed s o m e o n e you have to pay for it and your own subconsc ious mind will make you suffer. It is your own subconsc ious mind that gives you real justice, no one else. Your o w n s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d , w i t h o u t y o u r knowledge, gives you justice, as your physical m ind does no t even know why you are su f f e r ing . You automat ica l ly get your reward or pun i shmen t , as the case may be. From this, you will see that G o d Almighty is extremely kind and full of love and that H e never punishes anyone. Whatever you sow, you reap.

29-04-1981

REBIRTH

It is no t possible for us, in the spir i t world, to know all f u t u r e e v e n t s . W e d o k n o w s o m e , b u t we are n o t s u p p o s e d t o te l l you a b o u t t h e m u n l e s s we get

ins t ruc t ions or permiss ion f r o m high souls to tell people on Ear th . As soon as people on Ear th con tac t the spi r i t wor ld they ask h u n d r e d s of q u e s t i o n s r e g a r d i n g t h e i r fu ture . On ly a few refrain f r o m asking such ques t ions . We d o n ' t b l ame you f o r th i s , b u t we r e q u e s t you never t o bo the r us about the fu ture .

Rebirth 29

Aimai Navrojee Batliwalla reincarnated as Khorshed Rumi Bhavnagn (Khorshed Bhavnagri's great grandmother) nee Screwalla Date of Death: 1800s Date of Birth: 27 September, 1925

Rumi P. Mehta reincarnated as Burzin Vispi Mehta

(Burzin's father's brother) Date of Death: 5 January, 1969 Date of Birth: 5 August, 1980

Jal Dumasia reincarnated as (Vistasp's maternal grandfather) Date of Death: 15 January, 1994

Vistasp Nozer Kanga

Date of Birth: 1995

30 T h e 1 ,aws ()f The Spirit World

As we will explain, no one knows rhe exact fu tu re , as no one can know how others will act. For example, we migh t tell you tha t you will live fo r 9 0 years, b u t the next day you migh t be killed in an accident or be assassinated. It is all a b o u t a h u m a n being ' s f ree will and the choices one makes. O n Ear th , one canno t predic t be fo rehand what is going to happen.

S o m e t i m e s we do k n o w w h a t will h a p p e n — if i t is a de f in i t e t h i n g tha t shou ld happen — b u t we may n o t be pe rmi t t ed to tell you. We are pe rmi t t ed or even ins t ruc ted t o te l l you s o m e t h i n g s f o r t h e g o o d of o t h e r s a n d yourse l f For the m o s t par t , the f u t u r e is rarely correctly p r e d i c t e d o n E a r t h a n d if we d o k n o w a n d are n o t pe rmi t t ed to tell you then it is absolutely senseless to ask us abou t it. So please refrain f r o m that .

We, in the sp i r i t world, can know a lot abou t what will h a p p e n t o us as we want t o i m p r o v e and reach h i g h e r levels. W e ask G o d Almighty to send us back to Ea r th and we ourselves decide as to where we will take reb i r th . We always c h o o s e o u r m o t h e r . O u r f a t h e r c o m e s t o us automatical ly because, many times, we may no t know who our m o t h e r will marry. However, somet imes , we can also pick our fa thers .

We most ly choose a mo the r who will look af ter us, love us and care f o r us u n t i l we can look a f t e r ou r se lves . W e usua l ly p i ck a m o t h e r w h o is very dear t o us , b u t some t imes , t o gain experience, t o pay off karma and to advance higher, we pick a bad or evil soul as our mother . 1

t- R e a d " S o o r d a s S t o r e

s p i r i t u a l a d v a n c e m e n t .

o n p a g e 8 ? t o l e a r n a b o u t evil m o t h e r s a n d

Rebirth 31

N o one can force us to go to one mo the r when we want to go to another. If we need rough handl ing and p u n i s h m e n t for ou r sins, we natural ly choose a bad soul as our m o t h e r so tha t we will su f fe r and be good af ter going t h r o u g h a rough chi ldhood. In tha t case, we take a huge risk, as that m o t h e r may even r u m o u r l i fe if her i n f l u e n c e is t o o s t rong and we are n o t able to cont ro l our minds . We mus t , however, take such risks fo r our improvement — to pur i fy our soul.

You will ask, "Isn ' t there ano the r way to improve and to rise t o a h igher level?" Yes, there is a n o t h e r way, b u t it w o u l d take ages and ages to reach o u r goal . O n higher Realms you can choose never to be reborn on Earth and try to advance in the spirit world itself, but this process is extremely slow.

M o s t souls take the risk and are born even to bad m o t h e r s in o rde r to improve. O t h e r s choose reb i r th jus t t o he lp t h e i r loved o n e s . T h e y are t h e o n e s w h o c h o o s e t h e i r m o t h e r s f r o m a m o n g the i r loved ones and try ha rd t o fol low the good path, as they never want to fall spiritually.

F r o m th i s you can u n d e r s t a n d how f ree we are. In t h e sp i r i t world we can d o what we like. If it is wrong, ou r subconsc ious mind will never permi t it. There is no risk o f g o i n g lower i f y o u are o n a higher level in the spiri t world.

If you choose the risky way to improve you m i g h t ru in your life by no t fo l lowing the laws of G o d Almighty, as vou will have absolutely no idea what is r ight and wrong because vour subconsc ious mind does not work ful l t ime on Ear th . Only those on a high level who take rebir th can

32 The Laws Of The Spirit World

be guided by their subconsc ious mind on Ear th .

We, Vispi and R a t o o , b o t h chose our mother , w h o m we loved the mos t .

30-04 -1981

FIGHT EVIL

We all do some work here, each and every one of us. Whatever we like best , we do with joy. S o m e of us send messages to people on Ear th to br ing

them o u t of their misery and guide and help them to rise up h igher than they current ly are. M a n y souls do th is — some are successful and some are no t .

We are very keen to relieve the people on Ear th f r o m the aches and pains of daily physical fa t igue, b u t tha t can only be done when you discard your physical body, so it is n o t in our hands . But it is in our hands to guide you all as t o what the real laws of G o d Almighty are.

S o m e o f G o d ' s laws you neve r knew, and s o m e y o u m i s i n t e r p r e t e d . So we are here t o p u t you on the r igh t p a t h . If you are nice to evil sou l s you are e n c o u r a g i n g them. D o n ' t be nice to them; don ' t help them in any way. If tha t evil soul wants t o change, be sure of it f i r s t and then help tha t soul wholeheartedly. T h a t is your duty. But be sure of that person's intentions. H o w can you be sure? If you are absolutely sure, you would n o t ask how you could be sure, which means you are in d o u b t . T h a t means you may be r i gh t or you may be wrong . T h i s is where we sp i r i t beings come in for your guidance. W e can guide you on whether t o believe that person or no t . But, fo r those who

Only Genuine Desire Can Lead To Change 33

have no con tac t wi th the sp i r i t wor ld , we advise you to pray f r o m the b o t t o m of your heart and ask G o d Almighty to help you in that ma t t e r and G o d will somehow lead you to the r ight path .

So remember, never be nice or encourage evil people. Fight evil. That is an important rule o f G o d Almighty.

01 -05 -1981

ONLY GENUINE DESIRE CAN LEAD TO CHANGE

Go d Almighty is fu l l o f love and k indness . H e is absolute , a per fec t judge. H e wants every soul t o come up to a higher level, so H e has many helpers

to guide s in fu l and bad souls as well. H i s helpers are as k ind and loving as H e is.

Now, suppose an evil soul wants t o rise to a h igher level bu t has no desire t o improve, then what? H e will languish on whichever level he is. H e will never come up because he has no desire to improve his wrong ways.

Your own genuine desire works wonders . You may tel l yourse l f , "I have a g rea t des i re , b u t I d o n ' t t h i n k I am moving to a higher level." Jus t th ink for yourself , and ask yourself , " D o 1 have a real desire t o improve myself or am I just p re tend ing that I want to improve?"

T h e r e is a vast d i f f e r e n c e be tween the two — to have a genuine desire, and a make-believe desire in which you fool your se l f . By ana lys ing y o u r s e l f you will m o s t p r o b a b l y u n d e r s t a n d which of the two you are actually feel ing. If


you are really keen on improving you will def ini te ly s t o p foo l ing yourse l f and go abou t it genuinely.

Nowadays , good souls are few and bad souls are many. So it is the du ty o f every good soul t o improve a bad soul . But n o one can force another ; it shou ld come f r o m within . A bad soul saying, "Yes, I want t o improve," hundreds o f t imes will n o t help. Advice and guidance f r o m us will n o t he lp ei ther . O n l y you can b r i n g you r se l f o f f t he w r o n g pa th and o n t o the r ight one.

N o m a t t e r how m u c h we, f r o m the sp i r i t world, try, n o one, n o t even G o d Almighty will be able to br ing you ou t of your wrong ways as H e has given you a subconsc ious m i n d t o guide you and H e will never in terfere with it. Your s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d will de f in i t e ly p u n i s h you if you are wrong and you will stay on the same lower level unt i l you genuine ly try hard to progress . T h e r e is only one way to r ise t o a h i g h e r level and t h a t is t o genu ine ly i m p r o v e yourself . N o o ther way will ever help you — n o prayers, n o pleas to G o d Almighty — if you do n o t have the genuine desire. So s tar t immediately, before it is t oo late.

02-05 -1981

VISITING ANOTHER REALM IN THE SPIRIT WORLD

There are 7 Realms in the spir i t world. T h e lowest of t h e m is Realm I and the highest is Realm 7, so according to your good deeds and sins your own

subconsc ious mind takes you to the Realm you deserve to be on. N o one can go higher than he deserves, no ma t t e r how m u c h he tries.

Visiting Another Realm In The Spirit World 35

It is imposs ible for a soul t o visit a higher Realm, as tha t Rea lm is invisible t o h i m — you can only see y o u r own Rea lm and the ones be low you. F r o m Rea lm 5 onwards , however , a s o u l can v i s i t a h i g h e r R e a l m if c e r t a i n requi rements are ful f i l led:

1. Someone f r o m a higher Realm should invite h im.

2. Permiss ion should be granted by the H i g h G o o d Soul o f tha t higher Realm.6

3- H e has to undergo certain t raining.

4- H e m u s t wear a p r o t e c t i v e cloak so t h a t t h e extra b r i g h t l i g h t w o n ' t b l i n d h i m a n d t h e e x t r a - l i g h t a tmosphere won ' t su f foca t e him. As his soul is a l i t t le heavier t han sou l s in t he h igher Realm, he needs a cloak tha t makes h im lighter.

You canno t stay in t ha t h igher Rea lm f o r l ong and you cannot go o f t en . You can go f r o m Realm 5 to 6 and f r o m Realm 6 to 7 very rarely and fo r a very shor t t ime.

We have made such visits. S o m e of us have had the great privilege and h o n o u r o f visi t ing Realm 7- However, we can all go to the lower Realms to visit or t o improve someone as o f t e n as we would like.

If we m u s t visit the lower Realms, such as Realms I , 2 or 3. we also need a pro tec t ive cloak. Thi s protective cloak makes us invisible to all evil and bad souls, so that they and their bad vibrations don't harm us.

T h o s e on Realms I, 2 and 3 can never leave their Realms,

t>. T h e Ruler , King or H e a d o f each Rea lm is called the H i g h G o o d Sou l o f

tha t Rea lm.


except when they have repented greatly and genuinely and have been shown the way o u t by kind souls f r o m higher Realms. T h i s only occurs when the good souls are sure t h a t t h e s o u l f r o m t h e l ower R e a l m wil l never aga in c o m m i t those sins. T h e soul t hen has t o repay t h o s e he has h a r m e d by tak ing reb i r th and paying o f f his karma. T h i s can s o m e t i m e s take h u n d r e d s o f years, whereas at o ther t imes, can take only a few years. Th i s is entirely in the hands of each individual soul .

M a n y have risen f r o m the lowest Realms to the h ighes t Realm in a few hundred years. T h e r e are also some good souls t ha t have never seen Realms 1, 2 or 3 in their ent i re spir i tual life.

Every sou l s tarts i t s spir i tual journey f r o m Realm 4 , Stage 5.

M a n y s o u l s have r i sen very rapid ly , o t h e r s have t aken t h o u s a n d s of years, and still o the r s have been in the lowest Realms fo r eons. The re is no fixed rule or t ime fo r souls; it depends on the individual and if the desire to improve is d e f i n i t e a n d g e n u i n e i t t a k e s a s h o r t e r t i m e t o r i s e spiritually.

03-05 -1981

GOD'S JUSTICE

Go d A l m i g h t y is very k i n d , l o v i n g and f u l l o f justice. N o one ever gets t rea ted unjus t ly . Many people t h ink t ha t G o d has been u n j u s t t o t h e m

because they don ' t really know what is r ight and what is wrong — tha t is the real reason so many feel G o d has been u n j u s t .

God's Justice 37

For example, we know one soul, w h o m we will call Suresh. H e was very popular on Ear th and was qu i te f amous . H e had m a d e d o n a t i o n s o f t h o u s a n d s of r upees to va r ious char i t ies . H e created jobs and d o n a t e d c lo th ing , homes , and f o o d to many, so he was absolutely certain he would go to the highest Realm. W h e n he died on Ear th , a grand funera l was held in his memory and people kept speaking of what a good soul he was. A s ta tue o f Suresh was erected in the chari table in s t i t u t e he had helped establish.

W h e n he came to the spir i t world he f o u n d himsel f on a low Realm. H e was f u r i o u s and shouted , "Where is G o d ' s j u s t i c e ? I gave so m u c h t o c h a r i t y — p e o p l e a c t u a l l y worsh ipped me on Ear th — and G o d pu t me in th is hell! Why? W h e r e is H i s justice? H e is mos t unk ind and un jus t . H e is cruel."

Many good souls went t o h im and to ld h im to calm down and l i s ten to the r eason ing b e h i n d th is s i t u a t i o n . T h e y told h im to ask himself why he acted so chari tably — what was his motive?

H e said, "I did those th ings so tha t I could go to heaven, b u t look at where I am."

T h e g o o d s o u l s e x p l a i n e d t o h i m , "Your ac t was n o t selfless. You did all o f this to secure a place in heaven fo r yourself , isn' t that t rue?"

H e said, "Yes, it is t rue, bu t don ' t our holy people, pr iests , and ph i losophers say tha t if you help poor people and give them shelter, food and jobs, you will go to heaven? God , the pr ies ts and all the ph i losophers have fooled me."


T h e y e x p l a i n e d t o S u r e s h t h a t G o d A l m i g h t y h a d n o t f o o l e d h im, b u t ra the r he h a d f o o l e d h imse l f , as whatever he h a d d o n e was n o t o u t o f gene ros i t y . H i s d e e d s were n e i t h e r g o o d n o r self less. H e d id t h e m f o r his own se l f i sh mot ive , wh ich was t o go t o heaven by b r i b i n g G o d a f t e r h a v i n g c o m m i t t e d s ins . H e h a d on ly been c h a r i t a b l e t o wipe away his sins.

H e was f u r i o u s and said, " T h i s is w r o n g . I was d o n e a grea t injustice. I s h o u l d be in heaven. I deserve t o be in heaven as I d id so many g o o d t h i n g s t o wipe away my sins, t o g a i n h e a v e n l y b l i s s . I n s t e a d , G o d f o o l e d m e a n d is keep ing m e here ."

H e was so shocked to be o n such a low Realm t h a t he was unab le t o t h i n k s t ra igh t . H e cursed t he pr ies t s , holy m e n a n d G o d , b u t he d i d n o t r ea l i s e t h a t t h e s i n s h e h a d c o m m i t t e d cou ld n o t be wiped away by the selfish mo t ive o f giving t h o u s a n d s in charity.

You have to pay for your s ins n o matter how m u c h y o u give in charity. N o t h i n g will wipe away y o u r s ins except real, hea r t f e l t r epen tance and s o m e h o w repaying t he p e r s o n y o u h a r m e d . S o y o u see, m a n y p e o p l e have t h e w r o n g n o t i o n t h a t b e c a u s e t h e y have g i v e n t h o u s a n d s in d o n a t i o n s t h e y will go t o heaven. I f you d o g o o d d e e d s w i t h t h a t m o t i v e f o r g e t a b o u t see ing heaven, as you will never even reach heaven ' s d o o r s t e p . You can be s u r e o f t ha t .

Spirit Communications 39

04 -05 -1981

SPIRIT COMMUNICATIONS

We are here and you are there, bu t we can still see you , ta lk t o y o u and exchange o u r t h o u g h t s . M o s t people on Ear th don ' t know that , however,

so tha t is why only few can communica te with us. We are exhilarated when a soul f r o m Ear th is able to communica t e with us.

O n Ear th many believe that if anyone communica te s with the spir i t world they m u s t be real devils and tha t it is very bad and h a r m f u l t o do so. T h i s is absolutely un t rue . It is entirely false to think that it is bad to communicate with the spirit world.

Some are forced t o believe it is wrong to communica t e wi th t h e s p i r i t wor ld . T h e y are conv inced i t will h i n d e r us sp i r i t s and s top our progress by br ing ing us (ou r souls ) down to Ear th . T h e s e are all wrong ideas. O n the contrary, G o d Almighty and H i g h G o o d Souls are very happy if we seek permiss ion to communica t e with people on Ear th .

You see, some of us sp i r i t beings have to ' impress ' 7 u p o n o u r loved ones t o s t o p d o i n g what is wrong, as we want t h e m to be with us on the same high Realm. We face many d i f f icu l t ies while p ro jec t ing our t h o u g h t s to them.

M o s t of the t ime, af ter work ing so hard to impress u p o n people on Ear th , we fail very badly to even give you a tiny idea because many people do n o t accept our good t h o u g h t s

7. S p i r i t b e i n g s p r o v i d e g u i d a n c e t o E a r t h s o u l s t h r o u g h t e l e p a t h i c

t h o u g h t s k n o w n as p ro j ec t ed t h o u g h t s . T h e s e t h o u g h t s o r ' i m p r e s s i o n s '

can be i n t e r cep t ed by E a r t h sou l s t h r o u g h the i r s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d s .


and advice, because their m inds are l imited.

By communicat ing directly with people on Earth we can very easily tell them what is g o o d for them and prevent them from falling spiritually and going to lower Realms. However, we are n o t allowed to reveal what the sp i r i tua l test m igh t be. We can only help them by giving them hints and guidance.

It is easier fo r us to communica t e directly with people on Ear th , ra ther than t rying to p ro jec t ou r t h o u g h t s , which normal ly fail t o penet ra te your th ick skulls. T h e few who can safely and easily communica t e with us m u s t place all thei r r a n d o m t h o u g h t s aside, which will help b o t h o f us.

O u r progress is faster when aided by communica t ions , as we don ' t waste our precious t ime trying to p u t down good though t s , ideas and wisdom in people 's cons t r ic ted minds , as on ly a smal l p e r c e n t a g e o f y o u r s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d works on Ear th .

F rom now on, you mus t try to contac t your depar ted loved ones. B U T Y O U C A N N O T START O N Y O U R O W N . IT IS V E R Y D A N G E R O U S T O START C O M M U N I -C A T I N G T H R O U G H A U T O W R I T I N G O N Y O U R OWTM. You have to build up a link t h rough a pe r son who is au thor i sed and experienced at au tomat ic wri t ing.

It is easy fo r us to c o m m u n i c a t e con t inuous ly wi th our loved ones. I t ' s just like s i t t ing at h o m e and ta lking on a two-way radio. There is n o t m u c h dif ference between our m e t h o d of communica t ion and your two-way radios.

We rarely come down to Ear th to talk to you. We simply

How The Realms Work 41

sir in o u r h o m e a n d c o m m u n i c a t e via o u r e x p a n d e d s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d . O u r t h o u g h t s are extraordinari ly powerful. Like a two-way radio, we t r ansmi t and receive.

Some people on Ear th have a God-given power of a two-way radio in t hem as well, so they can receive our messages in the same way and we can very easily gather what you say or t h i n k . S o m e p e o p l e on E a r t h are lucky t o have t h i s power, bu t some are no t . Always remember tha t it is best fo r b o t h you and us when we communica t e via th is two-way radio o f our mind . Ask f o r help f r o m one who has this g i f t and you will see what a d i f ference it can make in your life.

05-05 -1981

H O W THE REALMS WORK

Together Realms I , 2 and 3 are known as hell and Rea lms 5, 6 and 7 as heaven. R e a l m 4 is an in between Realm. It is nei ther heaven nor hell. It is

the one f r o m which h u m a n souls s tar t .

T h e u l t imate aim is t o reach Realm 7- You have to work very ha rd t o do th i s . W h a t makes the d i f f e r e n c e is t he inner ins t inc t t o rise higher. T h e n you never do th ings tha t b r ing you down and you reach your goal very soon. T h e r e are a few lucky souls who have done this . It is entirely in your hands.

Each of the 7 Realms is governed by a H i g h G o o d Soul. By governed we mean he is the head of that Realm.

In higher Realms, no one c o m m i t s sins or ha rms anyone.


Just ice is always served by our own subconsc ious m i n d so there is no need for a police force or h igh-ranking off icers . However, we do need permiss ion to do certain th ings and if we need some advice or gu idance we go t o t he H i g h G o o d Soul of ou r Realm.

Some t imes even the H i g h G o o d Soul of our Realm m u s t ask p e r m i s s i o n or g u i d a n c e or m u s t seek advice f o r us f r o m H i s Highest G o o d Soul — the head of Realm 7. who is also the head of all the Realms, like an Emperor .

Realms I, 2 and 3 are each governed by one H i g h G o o d Soul; it is the same with Realms 4, 5, 6 and 7- T h e leader of Realm 7, H i s H ighes t G o o d Soul, however, is the ruler o f all.

T h e y are very humble and k ind-hear ted that they will never make you feel they are s u p e r i o r t o you . T h e y will even laugh with you, joke with you and behave as if you are o n the same level as t h e m . T h e i r l ight is so l u m i n o u s and their sh immer ing cloak is so w o n d e r f u l that , immediate ly you know they are pure, t rue and high good souls.

We cannot go down to the lower Realms. If we have to, we need p r o t e c t i o n as the a t m o s p h e r e is bad, ou r eyes need to get accus tomed to the darkness and the bad vibra t ions and evil inf luences could a f fec t us by making us depressed a n d u n e a s y . S o we have t o t ake c e r t a i n p r e c a u t i o n s , especially to go to Realms I , 2 and 3. Mostly, when we go down t o Rea lms I or 2 we wear a cloak t ha t makes us invisible t o the negative souls in those Realms.

We need pe rmis s ion and p r o t e c t i o n to go to the h igher Realms as well, as their l ight is t oo br ight fo r us, a t m o s -

How The Realms Work 43

phere t o o f ine and v ibra t ions t oo s t rong fo r us. You can only go up a Realm higher than the Realm you are on. N o one can go higher t han one Realm for a visit ( thank G o d we were on Realm 6; in 1 9 8 5 we reached Realm 7)- You can, however, go down to the lowest Realm to advise, guide and improve a soul tha t has called for help. We need extra p r o t e c t i o n and so we m u s t be invisible t o all except the one who has called us, o therwise those awful souls migh t ha rm or at tack us. T h e y are very nasty and they somet imes capture higher souls and keep t h e m as pr i soners and resor t t o men ta l t o r t u r e as they c a n n o t do any th ing physically, f o r we do n o t have phys ica l bod ies . If we b e c o m e the i r p r i soners many H i g h G o o d Souls m u s t come and free us, so it is best t o be invisible t o them. Otherwise , it is best n o t t o visit such places.

T h e r e are many g o o d souls who spend m o s t o f their t ime in Realms I , 2 and 3 to guide, advise and improve o thers . I t is very rare t h a t R e a l m 1 s o u l s call f o r h e l p . Even t h o u g h t he H i g h G o o d Sou l s want t o he lp the souls o f Realm I , these souls are so los t and gone so far on the w r o n g p a t h t h a t t h e y are i ncu rab l e . I f t hey are he lped wi thou t their genuine realisat ion and repentance, they will c o m m i t all those sins again. T h e y spend h u n d r e d s of years on Realm I . But the souls on Realms 2 and 3 are o f t e n helped by good souls, who go there to br ing t h e m up.

If a soul realises his mistakes, repents sincerely and asks fo r help, many good souls will rush to his aid at once. In t h i s way, m a n y s o u l s f r o m R e a l m s 2 a n d 3 have h a d chances to rise, bu t souls f r o m Realm 1 have li t t le chance of r ising. For t h e m it mos t ly takes h u n d r e d s of years t o rise.


For the souls of Realms 5, 6 and 7 it is also in their own hands to rise or stay where they are. They can stay in the spir i t wor ld where progress is slow and steady. A l t h o u g h p r o g r e s s is e x t r e m e l y slow, it is g u a r a n t e e d t h a t t h e y canno t go down. It is entirely the i r f ree will t o do what they want to do. N o force is applied t o anyone. Everyone is f ree t o do only what they want . But th is m u s t be wi th in the soul ' s capacity, o therwise their own subconsc ious m i n d will automatical ly s top them.

06-05 -1981

YOUR SOUL NATURE IS YOUR TRUE SELF

You will have to live longer , m u c h longer , in t h e spir i t world, your t rue home, than on Ear th , which is you r t e m p o r a r y h o m e or like a school . Before

y o u c o m m i t s i n s p l ease t h i n k a b o u t y o u r f u t u r e as e v e r y o n e has t o leave E a r t h o n e day. T h e n y o u r subconsc ious mind will take you t o the r ight Rea lm and you have t o r ise f r o m the re . So never go aga ins t y o u r subconsc ious mind or conscience.

W h e n your soul leaves your physical body it r ises. It is m u c h l ighter than your physical body and all your pains, aches and de fo rmi t i e s disappear along wi th your physical body, if you are f i t fo r Realms 5, 6 and 7- T h e be t te r your soul, the l ighter and more co lou r fu l your spiri t body. It is m u c h l ighter than you could ever imagine. You can even travel hund reds o f miles in a few minutes .

Bad souls ' bodies are heavier and ful l of deformi t ies . O n the Ear th plane an evil soul may be good to look at, bu t when he comes to the sp i r i t wor ld , h is spi r i t b o d y will

The Silver Cord 45

t u r n in to one ful l of de formi t i es .

O n the contrary, a g o o d soul's body on Earth may be full o f deformities, but when he comes to the spirit world his spirit body will be perfect.

You jus t have to look at a soul in the spiri t wor ld and you will know whether he is good , bad or evil. Vibra t ions tell us eve ry th ing . O n E a r t h , however , you c a n n o t j u d g e a pe r son by looking at them. Here , in the spi r i t world, we have n o d i f f icu l ty in recogniz ing people 's vir tues.

THE SILVER CORD

W e k n o w t h a t m a n y t i m e s t h i n g s are h a r d f o r you t o believe. For instance, we spir i t souls and you Ear th souls do m e e t c o n s t a n t l y a n d a l m o s t every day. You will ask how? W h e n you are in deep sleep, people on Ear th leave their body and travel up to certain he ights t o meet their depar ted loved ones. O n l y a magnet ic cord known as the Silver Cord joins you t o your body. T h i s cord will b r ing you back to your body if you are woken up suddenly. T h i s happens only if your sleep is deep and dreamless. You have no memory of this, b u t we can assure you tha t you meet your depar ted loved ones a lmost everyday.

Let us make one th ing clear, as it is m o s t impor t an t . You can only meet loved ones who love you as well. I f your love is one-s ided this will n o t occur. Your loved ones s h o u l d love you back. Suppose a depar ted soul says he loves you when he is on Ear th , b u t on arriving in the spir i t world, f inds he cannot love- you, he will never come to meet you, as he n o longer wants any connec t ion with you. Only near and dear ones who love each o ther can meet — whether they


be m o t h e r and son, husband and wife, fa ther and daughter , f a t h e r and son , or even j u s t f r i e n d s . But there m u s t be m u t u a l love between them.

R e m e m b e r tha t you do mee t loved ones . S o never grieve for your departed loved ones, as your grief affects them. It makes t h e m depressed and miserable.

07-05 -1981

WHEN YOU ARE ASLEER YOU ARE HEALED AND GUIDED

The spir i t world is far f r o m you and the Ea r th . It spans a round the Ear th , b u t miles and miles above you . T h e lowes t R e a l m is c loses t t o t h e E a r t h ,

above it is the 2nd Realm and so on.

You may meet your dear ones fo r a few minu tes or fo r a few h o u r s — it depends on y o u r sleep, which s h o u l d be deep and dreamless . M o s t l y everyone has a dear o n e t o visit — even if he or she is n o t known to you in th is life. O n c e again, the love should be m u t u a l and n o t one-s ided.

I t is th is l ink tha t keeps you going, n o ma t t e r what you suf fe r . You have n o m e m o r y o f tha t visit , b u t i ts e f f ec t makes you face your p rob l ems and gives you courage to overcome your misery.

Have you not iced that a f te r a good sound sleep you feel calm and less miserable t h a n before? Well, the reason is this — you meet your loved ones and they calm you down and p rov ide gu idance t h r o u g h your s u b c o n s c i o u s mind , b u t y o u r physical m i n d d o e s n o t know a n y t h i n g a b o u t t h i s . You are c a l m e d d o w n , b u t i t is u p t o y o u r

Life O n Different Realms 47

s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d w h e t h e r it can fo r ce g u i d a n c e u p o n your physical m i n d or no t .

Every person on Ear th needs good, sound sleep, even for a l i t t le while, which makes you visit us and allows us to help calm you down and gu ide you. W h e n your subconsc ious m i n d f a i l s t o e n f o r c e g u i d a n c e a n d adv ice i n t o y o u r physical mind we have to try hard to impress your physical m i n d , and m a k e y o u u n d e r s t a n d w h a t y o u s h o u l d o r s h o u l d n ' t do. M o s t o f t he t ime, however, you r phys ica l m ind rejects our advice and guidance, t h ink ing it is just a pass ing t h o u g h t tha t may be wrong. M o s t o f the t ime you fail t o unde r s t and our guidance and you o f t e n do what you shou ldn ' t do. T h i s is the wors t par t of your life on Ear th , which o f t e n takes you to lower Realms because you ignore our guidance. You th ink , " W h o is going to know abou t it — as long as I can be success fu l and rich on Ear th , it is h a p p i n e s s t o m e . " Bu t have you t h o u g h t o f w h a t will happen af te r a few years o f happiness? You are on Ear th for only a few years, b u t you are in the spir i t world the rest of the t ime. For a few years o f temporary happiness on Earth, do you want t o be on the lower Realms in the spirit world for hundreds o f years? T h i s shou ld help you unde r s t and why you shou ld lead a good life on Ear th .

08-05 -1981

LIFE O N DIFFERENT REALMS

We are very h a p p y here in t h e s p i r i t wor ld . In Realms 5, 6 and 7 we never harm each other. We laugh, joke, tease each o the r and are always in

high spiri ts; we are never miserable or sad, except when our loved ones on Ear th are sad.


T h e sou l s in Rea lm 4 a r e s o m e t i m e s happy, s o m e t i m e s sad, and somet imes they feel some jealousy towards each other, bu t still, they cannot harm each o ther much.

We have a spir i t body so no one can kill us or t o r t u r e us physically, bu t mental ly it is possible and souls in Realms I , 2 and 3 are experts in this .

T h e souls of Realm 4 somet imes foo l each other, lie and try t o make t h o s e w h o are d is l iked very u n h a p p y . T h e y have a l i t t le good and a l i t t le bad in them.

We d o n ' t need a police force or mil i tary to p ro tec t us, b u t in Realms I , 2 and 3 you have to pro tec t yourse l f or you will be t o r t u r e d for centur ies — unless you truly repent and call fo r help.

Even on Realm 4 you have t o p ro t ec t yourself , as someone may h o u n d you mentally. O n the Realms 5, 6 and 7 n o p r o t e c t i o n is r equ i red , as n o o n e w o u l d even t h i n k of harassing anyone.

O u r main laws on Realms 5, 6 and 7 are these: help each other, make each o ther happy, do any work tha t you like, and help your loved ones on Ear th .

We live so harmonious ly on these Realms that when souls come here f r o m Ear th they feel complete ly free, w i t h o u t fear, sadness, bodi ly aches and pains. Love is all a round . Above all, we live in an extremely beau t i fu l place. So isn' t it wor thwhi le to obey G o d Almigh ty ' s laws so tha t you can come to higher Realms? So people o f Earth, do try hard to fol low G o d ' s laws; be de te rmined never to go wrong and we are sure G o d will bless you all!

The Lower Realms Are Full 49

09-05 -1981

THE LOWER REALMS ARE FULL

As we m e n t i o n e d be fo re , you choose y o u r m o t h e r . But why shou ld you be born repeatedly, living ou t so many l i fe t imes? You, on Ear th , know that you

are reborn again and again to gain experience, but the main reason is to improve spiritually and rise to higher Realms. You are reborn to reach a higher level. But what do you do? Ins tead of r is ing high as G o d wants you to, most o f you go down. Evil people rule your world. T h i s is the reason the Ear th is going f r o m bad t o worse.

Evil souls never want good to have the upper hand so they try very hard to suppress good and to br ing o u t the evil in everyone. Th i s is your world now.

So when you leave y o u r w o r l d and c o m e t o t he sp i r i t world, those who are bad and evil are taken to the lower Realms by their subconsc ious mind. T h e lower Realms are a b s o l u t e l y f u l l . T h e u p p e r o r h i g h e r R e a l m s are very scarce ly p o p u l a t e d . A c e n t u r y ago it was q u i t e t h e oppos i t e . Many g o o d souls have fallen to lower levels as negat ive v ib ra t ions and in f luences are t o o widespread in your world.

People w h o th ink they are succes s fu l on E a r t h are very happy that , by hook or by crook, they are rich and f amous . They don ' t mind going to any extreme for money, sex and s ta tus . Only when they re turn to the spiri t world do they realise the t r u th abou t what category they be long to, and how wrong they were on Ear th . N o one advised them, no one guided them, and then it is too late for them.


S o m e ex t remely evil sou l s d o n ' t m i n d g o i n g t o even t h e l o w e s t R e a l m , as t he i r h e a r t s are as d a r k as t h e d a r k e s t R e a l m . B u t t h o s e w h o h a v e b e c o m e b a d t h r o u g h t h e i n f l u e n c e o f evil s u f f e r t h e m o s t . W e p i t y t h e m a n d we w a n t t h e m t o read th i s b o o k b e f o r e it is too late.

10-05-1981

WHY SOME PEOPLE DIE Y O U N G

We take reb i r th t o go higher, a n d m o s t p e o p l e o n E a r t h go d o w n b e c a u s e o f t he w i d e s p r e a d evil i n f luence in y o u r wor ld . M a n y g o o d sou l s over

here have t o t h i nk h u n d r e d s o f t imes b e f o r e t ak ing r eb i r t h in y o u r wor ld , as n o one likes t o go down , except t he real evil sou l s — the devils.

M a n y g o o d souls are r ebo rn in y o u r wor ld t o d o g o o d , t o f i g h t evi l a n d t o s p r e a d h a r m o n y a n d g o o d n e s s , b u t u n f o r t u n a t e l y t h e evil i n f l u e n c e is so s t r o n g t h a t t h e i r s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d s reques t G o d Almigh ty t o b r i n g t h e m back h o m e immedia te ly . T h e y h a t e t o go d o w n t o lower Rea lms a n d the i r s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d s d o n o t al low t h e m t o d o w r o n g — ext reme w r o n g — so they d o n ' t u n d e r s t a n d where t o t u r n in a wor ld so i n f l uenced by evil. T h a t is why g o o d sou l s are u n h a p p y a n d mise rab le . S o w i t h o u t their consc ious knowledge, their subconsc ious minds appeal to G o d A l m i g h t y to call t h e m back t o their real, spiri tual h o m e .

T h i s is t h e reason people o n E a r t h have the saying, " T h o s e w h o die y o u n g are G o d ' s f a v o u r i t e s , " o r " G o d calls t h e y o u n g ones w h o m H e loves the m o s t . "

Why Some People Die Young 51

G o o d s o u l s w h o c a n n o t g o w r o n g d u e t o t h e i r s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d s a n d c a n n o t f o r c e g o o d in y o u r evil wor ld d o n o t know wha t t o do. T h e y cons t an t l y ask G o d , "Is th i s your jus t ice?" But the s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d k n o w s what is wrong — it k n o w s tha t g o o d souls c a n n o t cope in th i s evil wor ld of y o u r s a n d t h a t ' s why m a n y g o o d sou l s r e t u r n h o m e s o o n e r t h a n they s h o u l d . O n l y a few g o o d sou ls live t o be 9 0 o r so and u n f o r t u n a t e l y , they s u f f e r a lo t .

Evil souls don't like to leave your world so they stick to their physical b o d y and t o the Earth like leeches . I t is

t r u e t h a t the i r s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d knows very well where

t h e y wi l l l a n d o n c e t h e y d i e in y o u r w o r l d , as t h e

s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d k n o w s everything.

I t is very s t range t h a t t he s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d t r ies h a r d t o c o n t r o l and s t o p t h e m when they d o wrong, b u t they d o n ' t w a n t t o l i s t en t o t h e i r s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d s , as they are ent i re ly b l i n d e d by evil fo rces . S u c h p e o p l e never w a n t t o leave E a r t h as they fear they will l and in lower Rea lms — a n d o f c o u r s e , t h e i r s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d s k n o w t h e c o n d i t i o n s there very well.

S o m e g o o d sou l s t ry t o s t i ck t o E a r t h as they feel they m u s t p r o t e c t s o m e d e a r s o u l , o r t h e y m a y be g i v e n a m i s s i o n t o spread g o o d n e s s , so n o m a t t e r how m u c h they s u f f e r they still s t ick t o the i r physical bod ies and t o Ear th . T h e r e are t h o s e few w h o s u f f e r very m u c h yet s t i ck t o G o d ' s ways. T h e y t ry t o f i g h t evil, b u t they get nowhere as evil has spread t o o heavily o n Ea r th .

T h i s b o o k will give g o o d sou ls s o m e in s igh t b e f o r e they s h o u t o u t t o G o d , " Is t h i s y o u r jus t i ce , O G o d ? " O u r

52 The Laws O f The Spirit World

book reaches ou t to good souls who can be saved f r o m evil inf luences with the hope tha t it will s top them f r o m going down. We are sure that very few bad or evil souls will read t h i s b o o k and they will m o s t p r o b a b l y t h i n k w h a t is wr i t ten here is nonsense .

M a n y don ' t believe in Reincarnation, so to them let us say tha t every soul is reborn hundreds of t imes, or somet imes over a t h o u s a n d t imes to pu r i fy itself, bu t u n f o r t u n a t e l y many souls go down ins tead . T h e r e is n o t a s ingle soul that would have lived only 10 or even 100 lives, bu t over many hundreds of lives you all come down to Ear th .

It is wise to live your life such tha t it will take you higher, no t lower. So, dear readers, lead your life in such a way that you will make G o d Almighty happy. D o n ' t th ink that if you pray for hours G o d Almighty will be very pleased. By going to churches and temples every day or by giving to charit ies in t housands you take fo r granted tha t G o d will be p leased and H e will we l come you to heaven. N o , it won ' t work if your motive is t o bribe G o d Almighty. H e can never be br ibed , b u t if you are very sincere and have g iven y o u r t i m e or m o n e y t o c h a r i t i e s w i t h g e n u i n e kindness , if you worsh ip G o d Almighty for a l i t t le while wi th n o o t h e r mo t ive t h a n t r u e love of G o d , o f cou r se G o d Almighty will be extremely happy and keen to make your place in heaven. So dear readers, we urge you to lead a s imple , hones t , k ind and se l f l e s s l i fe . T h i s is m o r e i m p o r t a n t t h a n h o u r s of p rayers w i t h o u t c o n c e n t r a t i o n and giving thousands in charit ies to fool people and gain a place in heaven, or just to show others what a p ious and holy person you are.

G o o d Souls Are Misled By Negative Souls 53

11-05-1981

G O O D SOULS ARE MISLED BY NEGATIVE SOULS

Many g o o d sou l s have gone on the wrong pa th , inf luenced by evil and your world 's evil ways, so it is about t ime people on Ear th u n d e r s t o o d and

believed in what is wrong and what is r ight .

We, in the spiri t world, know what you are going t h rough in your world. We know tha t evil has inf luenced the world so m u c h t h a t you f i n d it very d i f f i c u l t t o go on t h e s t r a i g h t pa th . Sti l l , t he re are many w h o know they will su f fe r if they stick to the Godly G o o d Path, b u t they still stay on the r ight pa th . T h i s is a great credit t o them.

T h e r e are also some good souls who want t o walk on the Godly G o o d Path, b u t because they fear tha t bad and evil sou l s m i g h t take revenge or harass and h u r t t h e m they stray f r o m the r igh t p a t h . T h e s e souls m u s t know tha t what they migh t su f fe r — the revenge or hu r t f r o m an evil man on Ear th — will be n o t h i n g compared to what they will face in the lower Realms. T h e y mus t also know that it will take hundreds of years and many more lives on Ear th to come back to the "level they lef t when they were in the spiri t world, before rebi r th .

If they only realised what awaits them, we are sure they would no t fear an evil man ' s revenge or harassment . It is m o s t necessary f o r t h e m to k n o w th is . N o , dear g o o d souls, don't go lower, be sure that your few years of su f fe r ing at the h a n d s of such evil p e r s o n s will be m u c h , m u c h be t ter than hundreds of years in the lower Realms.

We urge evil or bad souls to read and reread what we have

54 The Laws Of T h e Spirit World

w r i t t e n a b o u t the lower Rea lms . I t is n o joke t o live in such a s tate , even f o r a few days — how then, cou ld you live the re f o r h u n d r e d s o f years? If you still want t o c o n t i n u e o n t he pa th o f evil, you are welcome to — it is y o u r own fol ly — b u t please d o n ' t take o t h e r s down wi th you . T h a t is even w o r s e as it will take you t o t he lowes t o f t h e low Rea lms . It is very wrong t o make o the r s s u f f e r because o f y o u r s e l f i s h m o t i v e s . Evi l a n d bad s o u l s s h o u l d t ry t o improve now and repen t genuinely, o therwise t he d o o r s t o t h e lowest Rea lm will o p e n wide f o r t h e m .

A f a m o u s p e r s o n in your wor ld will n o t be looked u p o n as h igher in the spi r i t wor ld . Here , a beggar f r o m y o u r wor ld cou ld be h igher than a k ing or a very f a m o u s man . Fame o n Earth has absolutely no value in the spirit world.

W e are pos i t ive tha t n o o n e in the i r r igh t m i n d w o u l d be f o o l i s h e n o u g h to e n j o y f a m e o n E a r t h f o r a few years , only t o s u f f e r h u n d r e d s o f years in the hel l ish da rknes s o f t h e h o r r i b l e lower Rea lms . You m u s t t ry a n d take o t h e r s o u l s t o a h i g h e r level i n s t e a d o f t r y i n g t o b r i n g t h e m d o w n t o the lower Rea lms . I f you b r ing t h e m lower, it is you who will s u f f e r the m o s t . T h e soul you have b r o u g h t d o w n will s u f f e r t oo , b u t m u c h less t h a n you. It is u p to you t o heed our advice and gu idance or ignore it.

12-05-1 981

CONTROL YOUR MIND

Yo u r s e n s e s o n E a r t h have , in m a n y ways , d e t e r i o r a t e d because of your physical body. T h e physical body h inde r s a lot in spir i tual i ty , as it is a

wall b e t w e e n y o u r s o u l a n d t h e s p i r i t w o r l d . It is t h e

Control Your Mind 55

biggest nuisance, and creates many problems for your soul; you c a n n o t be f r ee f r o m jea lousy , h a t r e d , d i s h o n e s t y , hypocrisy, heartbreaks, revenge, or the sickness, aches, and pains of your body. T h e physical body is the pr ison, and your soul is the prisoner. T h i s pr ison is so secure that it is d i f f i c u l t f o r a p e r s o n on E a r t h to be f ree f r o m all the negat ive feel ings, except if you are on a very h igh level because your subconsc ious mind is much more open than that o f ordinary people. If you have a genuine desire to be on a higher level you can cont ro l your physical m ind and prevent it f r o m going astray. If you have good will-power you can control bad fee l ings and you will n o t c o m m i t sins.

It is no t easy in the beginning but , once you s tar t walking on the Godly G o o d Path, it will come automat ica l ly and you will never go wrong. First , dear readers, you m u s t try to con t ro l your bad feelings as m u c h as possible. O n c e you are successful in this, it will become very easy and you will hate t o do wrong. S o m e t i m e s , you may be overcome by bad f e e l i n g s , b u t y o u wil l at o n c e u n d e r s t a n d and immediate ly check yourself . So you just have to try very hard in the beg inn ing and keep your bad fee l ings unde r control .

As we are wi thou t a physical body in the spir i t world, we can c o n t r o l ou r m i n d s in the very bes t way. O n h igher Realms every soul is free f r o m such bad feelings, and we have no sicknesses, aches, or pams . But if you go to the lower Rea lms , you will f i n d h a t r e d , j ea lousy , t o r t u r e , fee l ings of revenge — a place t e eming wi th bad feel ings . I he souls on these Realms harm each other in such a way that somet imes it is beyond our imaginat ion. The re are no l im i t s to the i r evil and ill will . T h e y take p l ea su re in

56 The Laws O f T h e Spirit World

h a r m i n g o t h e r s , e spec ia l ly t h o s e w h o are weaker. T h e weaker souls go t h rough hell on lower Realms. So imagine living there for hundreds of years. T h i n k very hard before you act.

13-05-1981

OUR FEELINGS IN THE SPIRIT WORLD

We have all the similar feelings as you do on Ear th — love, a f f e c t i o n and k i n d n e s s — b u t we love those dear t o us m o r e t h o r o u g h l y and deeply,

whether they are in the spir i t world or your world.

As we don ' t have to cope with emot ions like guil t , hate and jealousy, our love is pure and t rue. We love our dear ones selflessly, wi thou t want ing anyth ing in return, fo r no o ther reason than for the sake of love itself.

Sex is ou t of ques t ion fo r us, so you see, ou r love is not physical bu t entirely spir i tual and we have no desire for sex or any o ther reward. So whomever we love, we love truly, deeply, genuinely and very strongly.

We can easily forgive people on Ear th than you can as we have no selfish feelings wi th in us — we cannot hate anyone — it is ou t of ques t ion on these higher Realms.

We feel no jealousy here, even if we mee t s o m e o n e far super ior to us. Instead of being jealous, we admire those super io r souls and try to become like them. We shed all our bad feelings when we leave our physical bodies, bu t all the good feel ings come back home, to the sp i r i t wor ld , with us.

Jimmy's Story 57

T h e souls in the lower Realms are s tuck with all of the bad f ee l ings they had on E a r t h , even when they shed the i r phys ica l b o d i e s . S o m e t i m e s they b e c o m e more h a t e f u l , vengeful and jealous, b laming G o d because they are in the lowest, darkest Realms.

JIMMY'S STORY: O N EARTH, PEOPLE ARE NOT WHAT

THEY SEEM

We would like to tell you a t rue s tory about our f r iend, J immy Uncle (we have changed his name out of respec t ) . H e was an excellent speaker and

very charming d u r i n g his t ime on Ear th . H e showed the world that he was a good soul, who did no t harm anyone. H e showed us all t ha t he always helped many people by giving them jobs, c lothing, food , and plenty of money. H e prayed regularly fo r hou r s and his wife and children were jus t like h im . H e c o n s t a n t l y p ra i sed h is wife , w h o was beaut i fu l , bu t unwise. H i s children got t h r o u g h school by mere 'par ro t ing ' . H e had high hopes fo r t h e m and o f t e n praised their intell igence.

Like father , like son , they say. H i s ch i ld ren fo l lowed in their f a the r ' s f o o t s t e p s , and the people on Ea r th praised t h e m all. T h ey were very r i ch and f a m o u s , a n d very popular, so no one would ever have t h o u g h t they would go anywhere bu t s t ra ight to heaven. We knew t h e m very well, and when J immy Uncle died we were still alive on Ear th . We prayed for his soul and consoled his wife and children, t e l l i ng t h e m t h a t he m u s t have i m m e d i a t e l y g o n e t o heaven.

W h a t fools we were! O n Ear th one canno t judge a soul


correctly. A while af ter we re turned to the spiri t world, we remembered J immy Uncle, so we began searching for him on our Realm (in 1981 , we were on Realm 6) . We cou ldn ' t f ind him, so we t h o u g h t tha t a good soul like h im would be on Realm 7, the highest Realm. Since we had wanted to s u r p r i s e h i m , we h a d n ' t ca l l ed o u t t o h im w i t h o u r t h o u g h t s at f irst , bu t when we couldn ' t f ind h im on Realm 6 we projec ted our t h o u g h t s to Realm 7 and called ou t to him, "Jimmy Uncle, we are here in the spirit world, come and meet us on Realm 6." W e did no t receive a response.

R a t o o said, "Vispi, he m u s t have gone beyond 7 as he was a real good soul." I added, " M u s t be. We will ask our H i g h G o o d Soul ."

As we were newcomers to the sp i r i t world, it had never occurred to us to look for h im on the lower Realms. We went t o the H i g h G o o d Sou l and inqui red abou t J immy U n c l e . H i s H i g h G o o d S o u l s m i l e d and sa id , " H e is ne i the r here on Realm 6 nor on Realm 7- W h e n you go down to the lower Realms, try to f ind him there."

We were s tunned and said, " T h a t is impossible, Sir, he was a very g o o d sou l , m u c h b e t t e r t h a n us . " H e r e p l i e d , smilingly, "Yes, yes, I hr.ve heard that , bu t still go and look for h im on the lower Realms when I send you there to do some work."

We fel t bad and wanted to tell H i s H i g h G o o d Soul all abou t J immy Uncle and the good deeds he had done on Ear th , b u t we kept qu ie t because H i s H i g h G o o d Sou l knows be t te r than us.

Af ter some time, H i s H i g h G o o d Soul called us and said,

Jimmy's Story 59

"I am giving you two this o p p o r t u n i t y to f ind ou t about your f r iend, J immy Uncle . I am giving you some work to do, so go down to the lower Realms, do your work and then try to f ind h im." We were happy to go to work on the lower Realms. A f t e r f i n i s h i n g our work on Realm 3, we called ou t to J immy Uncle , bu t there was no response. We were happy, so we came back to our own Realm and told H i s H i g h G o o d Soul .

H i s H i g h G o o d Soul laughed and said, "Vispi and Ratoo , I want you to f ind h im so tha t you can learn s o m e t h i n g t h a t will be t r e m e n d o u s l y g o o d f o r y o u . S o I give pe rmiss ion and p r o t e c t i o n to you bo th . G o to Realm 2, t ind him, talk to him, and ask h im why he is there."

We were very surpr i sed and scared, as we had never been sent lower than Realm 3 for work. H i s H i g h G o o d Soul assured us that we would be pro tec ted and sent us down.

T h e p ro tec t ion was excellent and no one could see or harm us. W e wen t s e a r c h i n g f o r J i m m y U n c l e in t h a t da rk , horr ible place. It was a shock to f ind h im there in his s ta te — s t u n n e d and miserable . We became visible only to h im and he was surpr ised to see us. H e felt very ashamed that we had f o u n d ou t what a bad soul he was. We could no t s t o p o u r s e l v e s f r o m a s k i n g , " W h a t d id you do t h a t b r o u g h t you here, J immy Uncle?" And he poured ou t his story. It was a terrible story, and it was so s tar t l ing that a man like J immy Uncle — so popular, nice, and good on the ou ts ide — was so terr ible and mean within.


14-05-1981

JIMMY'S STORY CONTINUED: YOU CANNOT FOOL G O D ALMIGHTY

Jimmy Uncle 's s tory was so terrible, it was unbelievable. We could no t believe it because we had always idealized J i m m y Unc le . H e was always d o n a t i n g t o char i t i e s ,

he lping the poor, and had been a loving and f r iendly man. In J immy Uncle 's own words , here is his story:

"Vispi and Ra too , my dear f r i ends , you t h o u g h t I was a beau t i fu l soul; you believed what I showed the world, and I believed it too . I believed tha t all of my horr ib le sins had been pa rdoned by God , as I was doing all of t hose good th ings just to reach heaven a f te r I died on Ear th . I gave money t o char i t i es and did g o o d deeds t h i n k i n g I w o u l d n ' t be p u n i s h e d f o r my sins, b u t I go t what was due t o me. I f oo l ed myself and the Ea r th world, b u t no one can foo l G o d . G o d can never be fooled .

" T o s tar t with, I began my life as the son of a very gentle, loving lady, who d idn ' t even have any bad t h o u g h t s . M y fa ther was a crook; he harassed my mo the r and forced her to act wrongly. H e was a very self ish man, and was even cruel to us. H e forced us all — my mother , b ro thers , sisters and myself — to act wrongly. I watched my m o t h e r cry in agony so many t imes , t e l l ing us , ' I t is wrong ; it is all wrong; we are sinning. '

" M y f a t h e r joked a b o u t i t and called her crazy. Af t e r a while, we, his children, were so impressed by our crooked l a the r that my bro thers , sisters, and even I began to see our m o t h e r as such — crazy and s tupid. H e saw to it tha t

Jimmy's Story 61

we would no t respect our good, kind mother , and our love for her vanished.

"My m o t h e r was absolute ly miserable seeing her chi ldren fol lowing in their f a the r ' s foo t s teps . O n e day, my m o t h e r said, 'Jimmy, I want you to s t o p do ing what your fa ther tells you to because I believe it is wrong. As you are my e l d e s t ch i ld , I w a n t y o u r c o - o p e r a t i o n t o save y o u r b ro thers and sisters. '

"I laughed at her, and said, 'Why don ' t you just j u m p f r o m the cliff, since you canno t to lera te us all?' We lived in a cottage, near a deep valley, and f r o m the window, I showed her a steep descent in to the valley, and added, ' N o t h i n g is f i t fo r you bu t th is death . O u r fa ther is an intel l igent man; you are n o t f i t to be his wife. Drown yourself in the river!'

"She did just that .

" T h e next morn ing , we were called by the pol ice and we f o u n d her body lying by the riverside near our home. I was shocked, b u t s t i l l t h o u g h t o f her as a s t u p i d and crazy woman. I considered her weak because she did no t have the s t r e n g t h t o s t o p h e r s e l f f r o m c o m m i t t i n g a s in like suicide. O u r fa ther was now very happy because he would no t have to su f fe r any more interference f r o m my mother .

" H e s t a r t e d t r a i n i n g us to b e c o m e t h e w o r s t t ype o f crooks; he was such a thief , bu t we never knew abou t it unt i l our m o t h e r ' s dea th for we were so impressed by him. We t h o u g h t tha t all the nice t h ings he b r o u g h t us had been given t o h i m by p e o p l e he had h e l p e d . H e had brainwashed us so m u c h that we believed h im absolutely and never ques t ioned him.


" H e t ra ined us to con peop le and make t h e m pa r t wi th their valuables. H e showed us how to fool them with sweet words, an innocent look, and a p ious manner. To the world, we were all d u t i f u l , g o o d , k ind and hones t , b u t on the inside we were jus t like the devil our fa ther was.

"Having taught us all these horr ible th ings — even how to kill w i t h o u t leaving beh ind clues — he ret ired, te l l ing us since he was the head he had a r ight to all the booty.

" H e showed us boys how to approach old, widowed, or lonely ladies, win their love, make love to them and then take whatever they had, leaving t h e m to a life o f despair and poverty. H e said with pr ide tha t he had done this to many women and had never been caught by the police. In fact , n o one had ever even p o i n t e d a f inger at h im. We t h o u g h t he was so great, intel l igent and brave to have done such th ings that we m u s t fo l low his example."

15-05-1981

JIMMY'S STORY CONTINUED: GOD 'S JUSTICE ALWAYS CATCHES UP

For a few years, we all did whatever our fa ther told us to. We worsh ipped our evil father. H e took us d e e p d o w n t o t h e d a r k e s t hell . We were real lv

happy, living in admira t ion of him. H i s brainwashing did no t let us th ink s t ra ight and we never realised at tha t t ime what devils we were.

"After a few happy years, our fa ther began to suf fe r f r o m a fever. D o c t o r s said they c o u l d n o t d i a g n o s e w h a t was wrong with him, so one of them told us to have his b lood

Jimmy's Story 63

analysed. They f o u n d sugar in it, so we were to ld to pu t h i m on a s t r i c t d i e t . H e was very p a r t i c u l a r a b o u t his health, so he did what the doc to r s to ld h im. Af t e r a few m o n t h s he felt a l i t t le better, and so he went ou t alone one day, bu t met with an accident. Both his legs and one hand had to be ampu ta t ed . The re was no o ther alternative.

"God ' s just ice had begun but , like fools , we blamed G o d for harassing our beloved father. Af te r some t ime, doc to rs detected cancer in his lungs, j u s t as before we blamed God , b u t went on wi th o u r ho r r ib l e work . M y s i s te rs looked a f t e r o u r ailing fa ther . T h e pa in was unbea rab l e and he became very weak, yet he would th rash my sisters with a long whip because he cou ldn ' t bear the pain. O u r fa ther abused us all, b laming us for his suf fe r ing .

" H e shou ted tha t we had neglected h im and tha t we were very selfish. O u r pr ies t heard about our f a the r ' s illness, his u n b e a r a b l e pa in a n d came t o o u r h o u s e . As usua l , my fa ther welcomed him, asking, 'Why am I su f fe r ing so much when I have never h u r t a soul, have done only good deeds?' T h e priest never knew how evil my fa ther was, so he prayed and asked G o d Almighty to help cure my father. Af te r that day, he w o u l d c o m e t o o u r h o u s e every e v e n i n g at 5 o ' c l o c k , so we all p r e p a r e d f o r h i s v i s i t a n d b e c a m e vir tuous, good souls jus t before 5 o 'clock.

" O n e day, the p r i e s t happened to come earlier, when he en tered the co t t age he heard my fa the r us ing absolu te ly r o t t e n l a n g u a g e t o my s i s t e r s , b l a m i n g t h e m f o r his s u f f e r i n g . H e even m e n t i o n e d how a dy ing o ld w o m a n cursed him so that he would suf fer horr ibly and he in tu rn cursed her, and many o thers who had cursed him.


" T h e priest was shocked — he tu rned and left w i thou t even a n n o u n c i n g himself . T h e pr ies t was an in te l l igent , p ious m a n — he d e d u c e d t h a t my f a t h e r was evil and t h a t he m i g h t have co r rup ted us, as well."

16-05-1981 JIMMY'S STORY CONTINUED: G O D IS ALWAYS WATCHING

The p r i e s t was a really i n t e l l i gen t and s t r a i g h t -fo rward man. H e spoke to a pol ice o f f i c e r and asked h i m t o f i n d o u t e v e r y t h i n g a b o u t o u r

family. By and by, the police f o u n d ou t a lmost everything — they go t all the i n fo rma t ion , bu t un fo r tuna te ly they had no proof .

" T h e y did no t know what to do. Meanwhile , my f a the r ' s c o n d i t i o n was w o r s e n i n g . H e now fe l t u n b e a r a b l e pa in t h r o u g h o u t his body and his diabetes had worsened . H e also suf fe red skin e rupt ions , which broke all over his body. H i s t e m p e r grew w o r s e , a n d t h e s i g h t o f h i m was unbearable . H e began th rowing whatever he could lay his hands on, abusing and curs ing us.

" T h e p r i e s t knew all a b o u t th i s as he was w a t c h i n g us all closely w i t h o u t o u r knowledge . O n e day, he came by when all of us were home, as our f a the r ' s c o n d i t i o n was very grave. We were all in his room, so he came s t ra ight in and said quietly, 'Look here, you will all see a miracle, ' and he added, looking at my father, 'Calm down and watch this miracle. '

" H e p icked up all t he o b j e c t s f r o m a r o u n d t h e r o o m , objec ts that could be th rown by our father, and ordered us

Jimmy's Story 65

to take them to ano ther room. We took everything to the o t h e r r o o m , t h i n k i n g t h a t t h e p r i e s t w o u l d s o m e h o w miraculously cure our father.

" H e made sure the re was n o t h i n g a r o u n d tha t cou ld be used against us, and he then made us sit a round our father. As we were all unde r the impress ion tha t o u r fa ther was going to be cured by some miracle, we never t h o u g h t that t he p r i e s t w o u l d p e r f o r m an e x t r a o r d i n a r y mi r ac l e by f o o l i n g us all — we, w h o had f o o l e d several p e o p l e f o r many years.

"We sat a round our fa ther on his bed and the priest s t ood at the door. H e began his prayer, loud and d is t inc t . Then , he requested G o d to help h im help us all. Af t e r that , he paused and began tel l ing my fa the r ' s evil and cruel story. At f i r s t my fa ther shou ted , cursed h im and used horr ible language. We t r ied to s t o p him, bu t we cou ldn ' t . At th is po in t , we saw a few pol icemen appear beh ind the pr ies t , guns in their hands .

' "Don ' t blame G o d Almighty, you evil people. T h i s is the r ight p u n i s h m e n t f o r you, you cruel man . You are ge t t ing y o u r dues , ' sa id t h e p r i e s t . H e c o n t i n u e d , ' O n l y G o d k n o w s how m u c h m o r e you will s u f f e r in hell f o r your hor r ib le sins. You c a n n o t f oo l G o d Almighty . You have f o o l e d us all very well, even your own ch i ld ren . You've made them as evil as you are. It is you who ru ined your wife 's life and forced her to commi t suicide. You wanted her o u t o f t h e way so she c o u l d n o t i n f l u e n c e y o u r children to be good and f igh t you. You took the t rouble to make sure we would have no proof , b u t you f o r g o t tha t G o d Almighty does n o t need proof . T h i s is H i s just ice. Listen children — s t o p all your evil ways and repent before

6 6 T h e L a w s O f T h e Sp i r i t W o r l d

it is t oo late. Always r emember that G o d Almigh ty does n o t need proof . H e can never be foo led and no one will escape his justice, so t u r n back while there is st i l l t ime. Dear children, tu rn back f r o m the evil pa th your fa ther has s h o w n y o u and r e t u r n t o G o d ' s g o o d p a t h . R e p e n t sincerely before it is t oo late.'

" T h e n he s h u t t h e d o o r a n d w e n t away. W e were all s t u n n e d , i n c l u d i n g o u r fa ther . A f t e r an h o u r or so o u r fa ther came out of shock and began to cry like a baby. H e said, 'Yes, God , you have punished me properly. I deserve th is p u n i s h m e n t . I am sorry, G o d ; forgive me. I am happy tha t my evil life will soon end and that I will no longer be able to harm others . God , kill me soon. '

" H e became unconsc ious af ter that , we were shocked and speechless at this t u r n of events. O u r fa ther never regained consciousness . Two days later, he passed away.

" O u r react ion was s t range — rather than accept ing G o d ' s justice, we blamed H i m . We began to hate each o ther and became suspicious of each other. My younges t b ro the r left h o m e w i t h o u t t ak ing any th ing . Af t e r tha t , I l e f t , t ak ing wi th me all the money and jewellery t ha t my fa the r had made me keep in a secret place because I was his eldest , favour i te child. I don ' t know what became of the rest of my b ro the r s and sisters.

"I changed my name and came to Bombay with a great deal o f m o n e y and jewellery. I d id n o t leave a pa isa 8 f o r my b r o t h e r s and s i s t e r s ; I t o o k e v e r y t h i n g . S o I c ame to Bombay a rich man, and was respec ted by all o f you. I marr ied a beauty, bu t 1 purpose ly chose a brainless beauty

8. A paisa is an Indian coin . It is I / 1 0 0 t h o t an Indian rupee .

['he Ear th Is A School 67

so tha t I could work my ways wi thout any hindrance. I did no t improve though the priest had urged me to.

"I worked s i lent ly and n o t very o f t e n , in case s o m e o n e would f ind o u t a b o u t me. M y family never knew what I was doing. In Bombay, I was a very respectable, rich and s t ra ight forward man, b u t as soon as I lef t Bombay for my hor r ib l e bus ine s s I c h a n g e d pe r sona l i t i e s . N o o n e even dreamed that the rich, respectable, hones t and kind J immy was this same man.

" T h a t is my story. N o w you know why I am in this dark, miserab le place. I gave t o many char i t i es an d d id many good deeds, th ink ing my sins would be washed away. I was sure tha t I would go to heaven, bu t no one can fool G o d , so here I am."

17-05-1981

THE EARTH IS A SCHOOL

We in the spir i t world know that people on Ear th c a n n o t live as h a r m o n i o u s l y as we d o in t h e spiri t world. You have to live wi th good and evil

souls, so there canno t be any harmony; we do unders tand . So you might say, let 's live with our own type and ignore bad souls.

T h a t is no t what G o d Almighty wants. H e wants you to help o thers who are fac ing d i f f icu l t ies . H e wan ts you t o

fight evil and improve the Ear th world . H e wan ts you to reach ou t to fal len souls who were once g o o d and on a higher level bu t have fallen due to the negative inf luences on Ear th . Make t h e m u n d e r s t a n d tha t they shou ld n o t


leave the good path, and should stick to the r ight one.

G o d Almighty wants you to act on H i s behalf and restore your Ear th to a good, loving place. H e does n o t want you to ignore evil or bad souls and sit idly in the company of g o o d sou l s , w h i l i n g away y o u r p r e c i o u s t i m e . W e say precious because your life on Ear th is very shor t . Souls live longer in the spir i t world.

Remember to never waste your t ime. You are sent t o Ear th to take on certain work, t raining, to gain experience, and to pay o f f karma, so f i n i sh what you have c o m e t o do on Ear th before your t ime is up. Otherwise , you will have to be reborn again for the same pu rpose — and waste a l i fe t ime — or con t inue your cu r ren t life in a sickly physical body fu l l of aches and pains fo r much longer than your karma requires . So don t waste p rec ious t ime, f in ish your work quickly and maybe you can re turn before your t ime is up (you will never know when your t ime is up , only your subconsc ious mind will know) .

G o d Almighty wants you to improve the bad and recently fallen souls and t o selflessly help the needy and those who are facing di f f icul t ies on Ear th . These are the ma in reasons you are on Ear th . So p e r f o r m your duties, and you will no t regret it later.

THE PURPOSE OF REBIRTH

Many souls on higher levels are reborn on Ear th for three reasons:

1. To pro tec t and help their loved ones.

2. To f inish the karma left over f r o m previous lives.

The Story Of A Good Soul Who Was Blinded By An Evil Man 69

3. To do their spi r i tual mission.

Bad souls are sent t o E a r t h to pay o f f the i r karma. T h e idea is t o go t h r o u g h this p u n i s h m e n t bravely and with a smi l e , on ly t h e n wil l you i m p r o v e a n d r i s e t o h i g h e r Realms. Souls are sent back for a chance to change their evil ways, to repent , improve and to rise higher, even if it is no t that much.

T h e s e are the ma in r easons why you are on E a r t h . T h e mos t important reason is to purify your soul and rise to a higher level.

T h e Ear th is a t r a in ing ins t i tu te where bad souls should become good, good souls shou ld become very good, and evil souls should improve by changing their evil ways and a d o p t i n g good, God ly ways. But nowadays on Ear th bad souls are becoming worse, good souls are t u rn ing bad, and evil is b e i n g s p r e a d ex tens ive ly . We s p i r i t b e i n g s fee l terr ible about this.

1 8 - 0 5 - 1 9 8 1

THE STORY OF A G O O D SOUL W H O WAS BLINDED BY AN EVIL M A N

In t he s p i r i t w o r l d we a l so w o r k as g u a r d i a n s t o n e w c o m e r s , o r s o m e t i m e s H i s H i g h e s t G o o d S o u l sends us to the lower Realms if there is an urgent call

f r o m a sou l w h o g e n u i n e l y r e p e n t s a n d w a n t s t o r ise h igher . We gu ide t h a t s o u l on how t o t ake h i s or her p u n i s h m e n t in the best possible way and to improve and rise higher. There are many o ther helpers like us and every day each helper comes across such s tones .


In our work, we do meet many sad souls on lower Realms, who are su rpr i sed at how they landed in the dark lower Rea lms . S o m e t i m e s we have a hard t ime t ry ing t o make t h e m under s t and th ings .

W e wi 11 tell you o n e such s tory . W e were s e n t by H i s H i g h e s t G o o d Soul t o a lower Realm, as a very urgen t call had come t h r o u g h . W e f o u n d a lady in a t ru ly miserable s t a t e , so we said, "We came to answer y o u r cal l ." She looked up at us and said, "Is it possible for anyone to help me?"

"Yes, madam, we are here to help you."

She said, " N o , no, no one can help me. T h e r e is n o use. G o away."

"Madam, please coopera te with us, and you will feel much bet ter . We will try our u t m o s t to help you ," we t r ied to assure her.

S ince she cou ld n o t s t a n d the dark, h o r r i b l e place any longe r , she had s h o u t e d , " G o d , p lease h e l p m e , " b u t instead of God, we had been sent so she was d i sappoin ted .

"I will coopera te wi th you," she said, "I will do whatever you tell me, as long as you take me away f r o m this horr ible place with all those terr ible souls trying to harass me."

We said, "You look like a good soul, so what made you sin so m u c h for you to land in this dark Realm?"

"Yes, you are r ight . I was a good soul who, unfor tuna te ly , fell in love with an evil soul, and that b rough t me here."


She began her s tory and requested us n o t t o hate her or leave her thereaf te r hear ing it.

"We can never hate you, and will try to help you. T h a t is the only reason we are here."

"I was 19, and living happily with my paren ts and bro ther in a vi l lage. I h a d f i n i s h e d s c h o o l , a n d d r e a m e d of b e c o m i n g a d o c t o r , so I b e g g e d and p l e a d e d w i t h my parents to send me t o a city university. U n f o r t u n a t e l y for me, I won my a r g u m e n t at last . I went t o the city and entered college, fu l l o f hope , laughter and en thus i a sm. I was a beau t i fu l girl, t h o u g h shy. Many boys cou r t ed me, bu t I never encouraged any of them. I f inally fell in love with a very h a n d s o m e bully. At f i rs t , he t r ied to avoid me so, like a fool , I became even more a t t rac ted to h im and chased him even more . I was madly in love with h im and always t r ied to be near h im.

"1 knew he was a bully, and even saw h im bul lying some girls in to wri t ing his no te s and do ing his work for h im. I was jealous o f t h e m and to ld h im t h a t I w o u l d love to write his no tes and do all his work. I became his slave. Like a fool, I willingly j u m p e d in to hell. H e jus t had to say a word and 1 would do his work. I lost my own judgmen t . Even now, I w o n d e r h o w I c o u l d let i t h a p p e n . I d id whatever he to ld me to do. I peddled d rugs fo r h im and even b rough t h im girls t o enjoy. I wonder what made me act like such a robo t — just one c o m m a n d f r o m him and o f f I went to do his errands, anyth ing that I fel t made h im happy.

"Even a f t e r I rea l ised he was evil and t h a t I was go ing down the wrong road, I c o n t i n u e d to be his slave. I lef t


col lege to work at a b a n k as a clerk. M y p a r e n t s were fu r ious ; they begged and pleaded with me to leave this boy, and con t inue my studies , or t o re turn to our village with them. N o t h i n g s topped me and I con t inued my slavery to the devil.

"It was enough for me even if he took me in his a rms and made love to me once in a while in re turn f o r do ing his b idding . I still wonder why I was so crazy. I was absolutely crazy a b o u t h im, k n o w i n g tha t he was an evil boy — he peddled drugs and raped girls — but I could n o t and would n o t s t o p obeying his c o m m a n d s . Like a foo l , I d id n o t realise that he was ru in ing my life.

" O n e day, he told me to be f r i end a very rich girl who was n o t g o o d - l o o k i n g at all. H e had d o n e th i s m a n y t imes before . I would be f r i end a girl, and then he wou ld come i n t o her life, make love to her, take her money and leave her. I be f r i ended th is girl in n o t ime. Soon, I i n t roduced h i m as a f r i end o f my family, someone very respectable , rich, and be longing to high society in our village. All of this happened as it normal ly did, except that one day, af ter a very brief f r iendship , the two of them got marr ied . I was shocked, bu t still greatly inf luenced by him, so I remained his slave and did anyth ing he told me to.

"I w o n d e r why I was so m e s m e r i z e d by h i m . W a s I h y p n o t i z e d ? W h y d i d I d o w h a t e v e r he t o l d me to , knowing he was evil, knowing that I was do ing wrong? I fel t miserable when he marr ied that girl. She was extremely rich and her father, a widower, was even richer than her. H e then o rde red me to b e f r i e n d her f a the r and cap tu re his a f fec t ions , which I did. H i s next order was for me t o marry h im. As I was b e a u t i f u l , the widower fell f o r me and I


marr i ed him, even t h o u g h I d id no t want to . T h a t devil p lanned everything so well tha t he was never f o u n d out .

" S o o n , he o r d e r e d m e t o kill my r ich , o l d h u s b a n d . I refused, and he said he would pu t me in jail by fu rn i sh ing p r o o f t o t h e po l i ce t h a t I had p e d d l e d d r u g s . I c r ied , pleaded and begged h im to leave me alone, as killing was beyond me. But n o t h i n g af fec ted his s tone-co ld heart , and he showed me p h o t o g r a p h s and p roof tha t would land me in jail. I then realised what a foo l I had been to obey his orders, how s tup id I 'd been to love a devil like h im hop ing tha t one day he would love me and marry me.

" In t he end, he g o t me t o kill my o ld h u s b a n d , and I became a rich widow. H a l f of his es ta te was in my name and the o the r half in his d a u g h t e r ' s . I w o n d e r e d what I could do, as he kept dragging me th rough hell. Killing was b e y o n d me a n d I c o u l d n o t s leep n o r ea t a f t e r my husband ' s death . I was prepar ing to r u n away somewhere he c o u l d n ' t f i n d m e , t a k i n g s o m e m o n e y f r o m my husband ' s estate, and leaving m o s t of it f o r his daughter . But before I f inal ized my plans he ordered me to kill his wife. I was s tunned .

"I cried again and p leaded with h im tha t th is was going too far. I couldn ' t take it anymore and begged h im to leave me alone, bu t n o t h i n g so f t ened his heart . T h i s whole time, he had planned nasty th ings in such a way that if caught all the evidence p o i n t e d to me as the gui l ty one. H e was safe.

"So he picked up the p h o n e to call the police, saying he could also prove tha t I had killed my husband . The re was no escape. I realised tha t 1 had loved h im so blindly and


done whatever he had to ld me to. I realised how deeply I was t rapped and what a great fool I had been. Now, there was no escape. I would have to confess to the police that I had killed my husband. It was much be t te r than killing my s tepdaughter . I asked h im no t to call the police and agreed to kill her. Secretly, I made up my mind to go s t ra ight to the police in the m o r n i n g and confess everything. H e said, 'Ok, kill her t o m o r r o w according to my plan. ' I was very upset , th ink ing hard abou t what to tell the police, and I d id n o t reply, so he asked me, ' W h a t are you t h i n k i n g about? You shou ldn ' t try to use your brains, even if you have any. You mus t do exactly what I tell you to do. ' Then , he lef t .

" T h a t night , he killed his wife and somehow proved to the police that I had killed her and my husband too , because he s u s p e c t e d t h a t I was n o longe r his b l i n d slave. H e g u e s s e d I d i s a g r e e d w i t h h i m and m a y b e 1 w o u l d d o s o m e t h i n g that went against his plans, so he involved me in such a way that the evidence f o u n d me responsible for the murder .

" Ins tead of my going to the police, they came to my door early the next m o r n i n g and arrested me. At the t ime of the trial, they took me f r o m the pr i son to the cour t and I got the oppor tun i ty to run up to the sixth f loor and c o m m i t suicide.

" N o w you k n o w why I am here. A f t e r l i s t e n i n g to my story, is it possible for you to help me? Please, fo r G o d ' s sake, don ' t hate me."

We said, " N o , we d o n ' t h a t e you, b u t tel l us, d o you genuinely repent?"

Your Subconscious Mind Can Become Dormant 75

T h a t ques t ion was uncalled for as we knew very well tha t she did, bu t we could no t just take her t o a higher Realm. We were sent there to help her repent , bu t we saw tha t she was genuinely repent ing .

She said, "Yes, o f course, bu t is it t oo late? Can you help me?

We showed her the way th rough which she could make her way to Realm 4. b u t the process, of course, would be very slow. N o w , g radua l ly , she is m o v i n g h i g h e r u n d e r o u r guidance.

19-05-1981

YOUR SUBCONSCIOUS MIND CAN BECOME DORMANT

We spiri t beings come across many s t range stories. We would like to tell you many such s tones , b u t volumes of books would be fi l led wi th them, so

we have chosen a few tha t i l lustrate the type of people tha t live in your world. You should be aware tha t you have to be careful no t to be foo led by such people, n o r take par t in their evil plans. Also, make sure you never have bl ind fai th in anyone on Ear th . It is fo r these reasons tha t we want you to read some of these t rue stories.

You should also be aware that if you t h ink you can fool G o d Almighty, by be ing nice on the o u t s i d e and ghastly f r o m the inside, you are mistaken. Remember that G o d is just t o all. so i sn ' t it s t range tha t peop le sti l l c o n t i n u e with their evil ways?


W e o f t e n wonder : W h y doesn ' t a soul ' s consc ience s t o p him? We see many evil peop l e do ing t r e m e n d o u s l y evil t h i n g s , c o n v i n c i n g t h e w o r l d t h a t t hey are a b s o l u t e l y innocen t , and tha t n o t h i n g a f fec t s the i r conscience . You m u s t wonder how this happens . We would like to explain.

Your conscience, or subconsc ious mind , is f ree t o gu ide y o u w h e n you are i n n o c e n t c h i l d r e n . As y o u b e g i n engaging in bad behaviour due to negative influences, or are trained by s o m e o n e evil, your s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d hardens — it quietens down, sleeps and becomes dormant.

Your subconsc ious m i n d canno t and will n o t pe rmi t you to do bad things, bu t you (your conscious or physical mind ) refuse to follow or l isten to your subconsc ious m i n d and you con t inue with your evil ways. Your subconsc ious mind c a n n o t to le ra te this , so it sleeps and does n o t i n t e r f e re wi th your bad deeds or habi ts .

Suppose you are on a h igher Realm, such as 6 or 7, your subconsc ious mind will never let you go very wrong. As soon as you go beyond a l imit it lets you know and if you do n o t heed it (i.e. you d o n ' t i m p r o v e ) , the s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d appeals to G o d Almighty for pe rmiss ion fo r you to r e tu rn h o m e to the spir i t world. Souls on Realm 6 or 7 never fal l t o Rea lms I , 2 or 3. T h i s means they can do wrong up to a l imit , b u t they can never go beyond tha t l i m i t . S o u l s b o r n o n R e a l m s 6 or 7 have a l e r t subconsc ious minds which never lets them go down f u r t h e r than Realm 4 or 5 respectively (a soul b o r n on Realm 6 can only fall to Realm 4 and a Realm 7 soul can only fall t o Realm 5). But for those who are born on Realm 5 or below, it is very, very risky. They may fall as low as Realm I in only one l i fe t ime on -Ea r th .

Your Subconscious Mind Can Become Dormant 77

So it is extremely dangerous for t hem n o t t o l isten to their s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d and let it fal l as leep. At f i r s t , you r s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d will t ry very, very ha rd t o s t o p you f r o m doing wrong, b u t af ter a po in t it becomes disgusted and goes to sleep un t i l you are t h r o u g h wi th your evil life.

T h e next t ime someone does someth ing wrong, there is no need to wonder , " D o e s n ' t he or she have a consc ience?" You will know the answer; his or her subconsc ious mind is asleep or d o r m a n t . Let us repeat : t h o s e o n Realm 5 or below have t h i s p r o b l e m — the p r o b l e m is such t h a t it migh t even ru in your life for hund reds of years, and you may have to unde rgo extreme suf fer ing .

I sn ' t it b e t t e r t o never go agains t y o u r conscience? You may say, "Two or three t imes is ok," b u t we are sure tha t t h o s e two or t h r e e t i m e s will lead you t o six or e igh t t imes, and then it will be t oo late. We are very part icular and we want you to unde r s t and these th ings so tha t you will be b r o u g h t up even if you have gone down.

If your subconsc ious mind is d o r m a n t at present and you are d o i n g w r o n g deeds , we are su re you are i n t e l l i gen t e n o u g h t o r ecogn i ze r i g h t f r o m wrong . Stop following the wrong path. Ask G o d A lmigh ty t o he lp you awaken your d o r m a n t s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d t h r o u g h c o n c e n t r a t i o n and medi ta t ion . 9

Follow this every day, but only from sunrise to sunset. D o not do this after sunset . Pray to G o d f o r two minu tes , and then request G o d Almighty to help you awaken your do rman t subconsc ious mind.

See Pg. 1 9 7 " H o w to o p e n vour s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d . "


"Oh, dear G o d Almighty , lead me to your g o o d ways. Make me do the right things. H e l p me throw away any wrong desires or feel ings I have. Give me your wisdom; s h o w me your l i g h t e d path . H e l p m e awaken my subconscious mind so that it never lets me do wrong. Oh G o d Almighty, please help me!"

A f t e r you say t h i s , keep y o u r m i n d entirely blank. N o t h o u g h t s whatsoever m u s t enter your mind . It shou ld be entirely blank fo r abou t a m i n u t e only (if you blank your m i n d l o n g e r t h a n a m i n u t e you can be h a r m e d by a negative astral s o u l ) . T h i s will do you a wor ld o f good. Af t e r your concen t ra t ion , thank G o d and begin your day 's work.

You can be sure th is will help you greatly. T h i s will no t br ing you money or worldly success, bu t it will help you stay calm, peaceful , relaxed and happy. M o s t impor tant ly , it will develop your subconsc ious mind so you can rise to a higher spir i tual level.

20-05-1981

AWAKEN YOUR SUBCONSCIOUS MIND

The s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d d r e a d s s e e i n g t h e s o u l follow a bad pa th and it becomes so miserable that it goes to sleep and is unable to s top the soul at

all . N o w a d a y s , very few p e o p l e have an a w a k e n e d s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d in y o u r w o r l d as m a n y p e o p l e ' s subconsc ious minds are d o r m a n t and refuse to awaken.

We have shown you the way to awaken your subconsc ious mind. You were d isobedient and let it fall in to a slumber,

Awaken Your Subconscious Mind 79

bu t now it is t ime fo r you to awaken it. It will take some time, bu t fol low our ins t ruc t ions sincerely. Your subcons-cious mind m u s t awaken and guide you. Please talk to it, beg it and request it t o f u n c t i o n again.

It is a t r e m e n d o u s l y big task to make the s u b c o n s c i o u s mind work again, b u t you mus t . You have done wrong by avoiding, ignor ing and shu t t i ng it off . Begin working on it immediately so tha t it will s top you f r o m fal l ing fur ther , and will instead br ing you up to a higher level.

S o m e say m e d i t a t i o n , s o m e say c o n c e n t r a t i o n , b u t you m u s t s imp ly r e n d e r y o u r m i n d absolutely blank, f o r o n e m i n u t e only. In the beg inn ing th is will be very hard f o r some to do, b u t once you get used to it, it is very easy. Just stop thinking, and if t h o u g h t s try t o p e n e t r a t e your m i n d ignore them, un t i l they s t o p natural ly. You will hear many sounds , even ones t ha t are far away. You will hear t h e m more and more, b u t try n o t t o let any t h o u g h t s enter your mind . Your mind shou ld be absolutely blank; push away all t hough t s . T h i s will help you greatly in your progress .

O n c e you leave y o u r wor ld and physical b o d y it is very hard and slow to rise t o a higher level in the spir i t world, bu t on Ear th you can progress much sooner. You can t u r n away f r o m y o u r evil ways and can b e c o m e g o o d w i t h i n minu tes . O f course, you have to go t h r o u g h your karma, bu t it will be mi lder and easier as G o d will help you f ind the s t rength and courage to face it well.

In the sp i r i t wor ld , however, your p rog res s is very, very slow, b u t certain. T h e r e is, however , n o e s c a p i n g t h e pun i shmen t s for every sin you have c o m m i t t e d .


So th ink hard before it is t oo late. Before you leave your world and physical body, you have many o p p o r t u n i t i e s t o g o f r o m bad t o g o o d a n d you can be s u r e t h a t y o u r p u n i s h m e n t in the spir i t world will be m u c h easier if you make good use of those oppor tun i t i e s . Ins tead of f ind ing yourself on Realms I , 2 or 3, you will at least reach Realm 4, so th ink hard and you will realise it is much be t te r to improve immediately.

21-05-1981

SATISH'S STORY: YOU MUST HAVE COURAGE TO IMPROVE

There are many cases in which souls are extremely weak and are afra id to change their rou t ine . They are afra id t o t u r n good, th ink ing the i r colleagues

will r idicule and blackmail them, or that good people will never welcome t h e m and will ignore and insul t t hem, or they believe that their life is hopeless.

H e r e is a t rue s tory abou t a soul we will call Sat ish . T h i s s tory will show you how wrong you can be. Sa t i sh was a g o o d sou l , b u t he f a c e d m a n y bad i n f l u e n c e s in h i s c h i l d h o o d . H i s m o t h e r d ied in her early t h i r t i e s , when Sat i sh was only five years old. H i s fa ther t r ied to raise h im alone, bu t as he could no t , he remarried, c la iming it was only for the sake of his son, which was absolutely un t rue .

T h e s t e p m o t h e r never liked Sat ish. She ha ted h im since the very f i rs t day she saw him, bu t she never showed her hat red for Satish to her husband . W h e n she had her own c h i l d r e n , she c o m p l e t e l y n e g l e c t e d S a t i s h a n d very convenient ly p u t h im in a low class and cheap b o a r d i n g

Satish's Story 81

s c h o o l , s ay ing he was u n m a n a g e a b l e as wel l as a b a d influence on her chi ldren.

T h e boarding school was horr ible and Sat i sh fell in to bad company and adop ted their bad habi ts and manners . By the t i m e he l e f t s c h o o l , S a t i s h ' s f a t h e r h a d d i ed and h is s t e p m o t h e r l e f t t o w n w i t h o u t a f o r w a r d i n g address . H e was lef t a lone wi th n o money and n o o n e to look a f t e r him, so he depended on his vagabond f r i ends f r o m school.

Along with two of his f r iends , he became fr iendly with rich young boys and girls, p re tending that he be longed to a rich family. H e became a pa r t of their lives and then swindled, b lackmai led and h a r a s s e d t h e m . S a t i s h and his f r i e n d s moved f r o m town to town, city to city, taking advantage of rich boys and girls.

O n e day, when he was on a train with his f r iends , Sat ish saw a girl who was alone. F rom her attire, she seemed to be rich, so they t r ied to be f r i end her. She was shy and t imid, so she avoided them, which made t h e m go af te r her even more . W h e n she g o t o f f at a s t a t ion , they fo l lowed her home. She was n o t rich, bu t they con t inued to pursue her. Somehow, Sa t i sh was succes s fu l in b e f r i e n d i n g her and they fell in love.

She was a very h o n e s t and k i n d - h e a r t e d gir l — jus t the oppos i te of Sat i sh — and he fell blindly in love. H e could no t see any way to marry her, as he could no t follow the s t ra ight pa th because he had had no t ra in ing whatsoever. H e dared no t tell her that he was a vagabond and a crook, as he believed she t h o u g h t h im to be a rich boy belonging to h i g h soc ie ty . H e f e a r e d his t w o c o l l e a g u e s w o u l d r idicule him if he t r i ed to fol low the s t r a igh t pa th . H e


t h o u g h t they m i g h t te l l her, as well, o r even t ry t o blackmail him.

H e r inf luence made h im want to break away f r o m his two f r iends , and made h im keen to change his ways. H e wanted to walk on the s t ra ight pa th f r o m then on, bu t he was very upse t as he could n o t see a way ou t of his p red icamen t . H i s love for her was t o o s t rong for h im to foo l her, and if he t o ld her the t r u t h she would never accept h im as her husband , as she was a very hones t girl.

Sat ish wondered how he could rid himself of evil, leave his t w o c o l l e a g u e s , e a r n an h o n e s t l iv ing , a n d b e c o m e a gen t l eman . T h e cowardly Sa t i sh was deeply in love with the girl, bu t even so s t r o n g a love did n o t give h im the courage to change his ways. H e was sure tha t if she came to know the t r u t h she would hate him. H e now repented l e a d i n g a bad l i fe , b u t he had n o c o u r a g e t o c h a n g e . T h i n k i n g he wou ld never be able to make her happy, or fo l low the s t ra ight pa th , Sat ish lef t w i thou t tel l ing the girl anything. H e lost a very good oppor tun i ty ; his life would have changed entirely, he w o u l d have b e c o m e g o o d and reached a higher level.

S a t i s h ' s c o w a r d i c e r u i n e d h is l i fe . I f he h a d g a t h e r e d enough courage to speak frankly and hones t ly to the girl he would have f o u n d ou t tha t she already knew all abou t h im th rough his colleagues, who had been keen to separate them. T h e y had already to ld her everything, b u t she had made up her mind to marry Satish and improve him. She just wanted to be sure tha t Sat ish truly loved her, bu t he lef t her wi thou t even saying a word. W h a t a big mistake he made!

Soordas' Story 83

You should be brave enough to face your problems and change. You s h o u l d never let go o f an o p p o r t u n i t y to turn f r o m bad t o g o o d . O n c e y o u lo se s u c h an oppor tun i ty , it is a lmos t imposs ible in th i s evil world to get a n o t h e r chance like tha t . In th i s case, Sa t i sh wou ld have been helped by this girl if only he had had enough courage to tell her how deeply and t ruly he loved her.

22-05-1981

SOORDAS' STORY: A SOUL RISKS ALL TO BE WITH

HIS LOVED ONE

Here is a n o t h e r t r u e s t o r y ( w i t h t h e n a m e s c h a n g e d ) t o show you w h a t a sou l can do t o reach a h igher level, b u t in th is case caused h im

t o fa l l , a n d h o w h i s l oved o n e f r o m t h e s p i r i t w o r l d requested G o d t o help him.

Soordas was on Realm 3, as his previous life was bad. H i s loved one, N i l o o was on Realm 5, so Soordas reques ted his leader, H i s H i g h G o o d Soul of Rea lm 3, t o ask G o d to send h im to Ea r th again, to be bo rn t o an evil mother , so he could improve h imsel f and his m o t h e r and reach Realm 5. H e was keen and willing to live a hard life of su f fe r ing and p u n i s h m e n t , as long as he could jo in his loved one, N i l o o on Realm 5.

Soordas was born to a wicked woman. She was so wicked t h a t p e o p l e o n E a r t h ca l led her a w i t c h . S h e c u r s e d S o o r d a s as soon as he en tered the E a r t h wor ld . He, an il legitimate child, was n o t h i n g bu t a h indrance to her.


H e r e , we w o u l d like t o tel l you t h a t l i t t le babies, unti l they begin to talk properly, are truly c o n n e c t e d to the spirit world and are in constant touch wi th their loved ones in the spirit world. U n t i l they t u r n one, babies can choose t o come back t o the spi r i t wor ld . For a year the soul can observe his or her parents and the s i tua t ion , and can choose to come back t o the spir i t wor ld if they want to.

So Soordas was reques ted by his loved ones in the spir i t world to re turn h o m e before a year passed, as his mo the r was a terrible woman. Soordas , however, s t o o d his g round , as he loved N i l o o (his loved one in the spi r i t wor ld) t oo much and was very keen on jo ining her forever.

Soordas ' mo the r was extremely wicked. She t a u g h t her son t o use f i l thy l anguage and to curse everyone . N o g o o d words came f r o m her m o u t h , or f r o m Soordas ' . Soordas came to Ear th to progress quickly so tha t he could reach Realm 5 sooner than by the slower progress in the spir i t world. So he chose this absolutely evil m o t h e r in the hope of improving her and helping his own soul rise t o Realm 5 in o n e E a r t h l i f e t i m e . H e had t h u s t r a i n e d his s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d t o be very f i r m a n d never let h i m d o w n . Every s o u l can d o th i s , b u t t h e r e is g r e a t r i sk involved because one ' s subconsc ious mind may n o t be able to hand le t oo m u c h evil. It may get d i s g u s t e d wi th evil ways and go to sleep. If this happens it 's a great disaster. W h a t a risk — his soul was keen to reach Realm 5, bu t if h i s s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d b e c a m e d o r m a n t he w o u l d fal l s t ra ight t o Realm 2, or even I .

A year a f t e r y o u r b i r t h , the s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d can no longer reveal why you were b o r n on Ea r th and why you

Soordas' Story 85

c h o s e such an evil m o t h e r . So it was m o r e likely t h a t Soordas would fall lower, instead of r is ing higher, bu t he t o o k th is r isk anyway, bel ieving tha t he had t r a ined his subconsc ious m i n d to s top h im f r o m do ing any wrong.

H i s mo the r was so wicked that it was d i f f i cu l t t o f ind even one good qual i ty a b o u t her. By the t ime Soordas began to speak, he had f o r g o t t e n his miss ion and became just like his mother . H e never used loving words , took pleasure in harass ing and h a r m i n g o thers , t rea ted money as his G o d and loved to t o r t u r e those weaker than h im.

N i l o o t r ied hard t o s t o p h im via his subconsc ious mind , bu t it was comple te ly d o r m a n t . N i l o o had expected this, which is why she had urged Soordas n o t t o be bo rn as tha t evil woman's son.

N i l o o t r ied t o ' impres s ' souls on E a r t h — her dear ones who were still on Ear th , as well as Soordas ' dear ones f r o m a previous life — to in ter fere and improve Soordas . It was t r emendous ly ha rd work, b u t a f t e r q u i t e a while she was success fu l in i m p r e s s i n g one o f t h e m to go to Soordas . T h i s soul, w h o m we call M o h a n d a s , was in Bombay and S o o r d a s was in B a n g a l o r e , so it was p r a c t i c a l l y an i m p o s s i b l e t a s k , b u t as N i l o o was d e s p e r a t e t o save S o o r d a s , she w o r k e d h a r d on M o h a n d a s ' s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d and succeeded in b r ing ing h im t o Bangalore, wi th nei ther M o h a n d a s ' or Soordas ' consc ious knowledge. T h i s took years. T h e y became fr iends, and as M o h a n d a s was a g o o d soul , N i l o o was sure he w o u l d i m p r o v e S o o r d a s . H o w w r o n g she was! I n s t e a d o f i m p r o v i n g S o o r d a s , Mohandas began t o fall.


23-05 -1981

SOORDAS' STORY CONTINUED: NI LOO'S LOVE FOR SOORDAS IS TESTED

Niloo lost all hope and she felt very gui l ty because she was respons ib le fo r b r ing ing M o h a n d a s and S o o r d a s toge the r , and now M o h a n d a s , w h o had

been a good soul, t u r n e d bad. She had made h im fall to a lower level. She fe l t miserable as she cou ld n o t f i n d any way to save t h e m b o t h . T h e r e was no a l te rna t ive bu t t o make a request t o G o d Almighty. She prayed to H i m to s?ve them bo th .

Miserable, N i l o o wondered what to do. She was on Realm 5, which was n o t a very high Realm, bu t she was a good soul on her way to Realm 6 and she did n o t want t o fall to lower levels. Dishear tened , she went to her Rea lm's leader and requested h im to show her a way o u t of th is d i f f icu l t p rob lem.

She said, "I love S o o r d a s so much and I sent M o h a n d a s d o w n th is evil p a t h . Please, Your H i g h G o o d Soul , save b o t h of them."

H i s H i g h G o o d Sou l said, " N i l o o , you have d o n e great wrong by sending M o h a n d a s to Soordas and making him evil, too. You m u s t be punished ."

"Yes," said Ni loo , "Your H i g h G o o d Soul, do pun i sh me. I hate t o go down to the lower Realms, bu t Sir, I will go to the Realm where S o o r d a s and M o h a n d a s be long. Please, jus t save them and br ing them up to a high level. I will bear all of their p u n i s h m e n t s . "

Soordas' Story 87

She hated to go down, even to Realm 4, b u t her selfless and t rue love fo r Soordas made her willing to go as low as Realm 2. And if Soo rdas and M o h a n d a s did n o t s t o p now, they could even reach Realm I.

H i s H i g h G o o d Soul said, "I agree wi th this; will you go to Realm 2 immediate ly?"

"Yes, Master, I am willing to go immediate ly and take my p u n i s h m e n t as well as the i r s , b u t please save t h e m and br ing them back home, at least to Realm 4. if n o t 5."

H i s H i g h G o o d Soul was very impressed by her selfless, t r u e and s t r o n g love, and knew very well t h a t she was genuinely willing to undergo their p u n i s h m e n t s . Still, H e w a n t e d to t e s t her. W h a t w o u l d she d o a f t e r e n t e r i n g Realm 2? W o u l d she change her mind? H e ordered her t o go to Realm 2 and she went w i thou t any hes i ta t ion .

" D o you still wish to save Soordas and M o h a n d a s by being a c i t izen of Rea lm 2 fo r several h u n d r e d years, N i l o o ? " His H i g h G o o d Soul asked her, a f ter a few days.

N i l o o replied w i t h o u t hes i ta t ion , "Yes, Your H i g h G o o d Soul , yes." H e was very happy to f i n d N i l o o to be so selfless and true, even s t rong enough to sacrif ice her own happiness fo r her beloved Soordas , and for M o h a n d a s as well.

N i l o o , c o m e back t o Rea lm 5- D e a r ch i ld , I will save Soordas and M o h a n d a s . It will take several m o n t h s , bu t meanwhile, p romise me you will do n o t h i n g abou t Soordas or Mohandas , no ma t t e r what happens to them. I promise to save them f r o m the horr ible lower Realms."


N i l o o had no w o r d s t o express her g r a t i t u d e . She was o v e r j o y e d and s h o u t e d , "Yes, Your H i g h G o o d Sou l , I p romise to do whatever you tell me to."

"Only pray for them, N i loo , and request G o d Almighty to help me save t hem."

N i l o o agreed at once, as she had fu l l f a i th in H i s H i g h G o o d Soul.

T h i s is a t rue story. On ly the names and cities have been changed. You would be surpr ised to know how the rulers o f the Realms and H i s H i g h e s t G o o d Soul work to save any soul who needs t o be saved. It is a terr ibly hard task for them, bu t they do p e r f o r m such miracles as they have g r e a t p o w e r s . A l so , S o o r d a s h a d t a k e n a b ig r i sk t o improve and come to a h igher level, because he was a good soul . H e had fallen lower in his previous l ife because of s o m e evil f r i ends , so he had taken th i s r isk, which had un fo r tuna t e ly b r o u g h t h im even f u r t h e r down.

24-05 -1981

SOORDAS' STORY CONTINUED: HIS HIGH G O O D SOUL COMES

D O W N TO EARTH

His H i g h G o o d Sou l asked N i l o o to calm down and p ray t o G o d A l m i g h t y t o h e l p h i m save Soordas and M o h a n d a s . Af t e r several days, H i s

H i g h G o o d Soul d i sgu ised h imsel f as a holy fakir 1 0 and descended to Ear th .

10. A h o h fakir is a m e n d i c a n t or holv man.

Soordas' Story 89

In the meant ime, Soordas and M o h a n d a s were robbing and harass ing many peop le on Ear th . O n tha t par t icu lar day, when H i s H i g h G o o d Soul descended on Ear th , they had just pulled o f f a successful robbery tha t had fe tched t h e m thousands of rupees .

D r u n k on alcohol , and in toxica ted by success, they were driving back h o m e at n ight , ful l o f pr ide . T h e y were going very fast , when H i s H i g h G o o d Soul passed be fo re their car. T h i s made Soordas swerve the car, and he crashed in to a pole. Soo rdas and M o h a n d a s were s tuck in the i r seats, unconscious , and were taken to a hosp i ta l nearby.

W h e n they regained consciousness they f o u n d themselves in hosp i ta l beds , w i th ter r ib le pain . S o o r d a s f o u n d b o t h his legs miss ing and was very upset . M o h a n d a s had lost a leg a n d o n e a r m . T h e y asked h o w t h e a c c i d e n t had happened and were to ld tha t they had been d runk . D u e to the impact, the d o o r s had f lown wide open and the sack of money had rolled o u t o f the car and down the side of the road in to a thick bush , fo r the needy t o f ind .

Soordas and M o h a n d a s blamed and cursed each other fo r their missing l imbs. T h e y lay side-by-side on two beds and they f o u g h t verbally wi th each other , so d o c t o r s had to s e p a r a t e t h e m a n d p u t M o h a n d a s in a n o t h e r ward . Mohandas , now alone, began to th ink abou t the past and real ised t h a t h e ' d h a d t h i s acc iden t a n d l o s t h i s l imbs because he had fol lowed the wrong pa th . " N o w I have to suf fer my whole life," he t hough t .

T h i s shock reopened his subconsc ious mind . N o w it was awake and it t o l d h i m t h a t th i s was G o d ' s jus t ice . H e cursed Soordas t o have in f luenced h i m to go down th is


evil pa th and was de te rmined to change fo r the be t te r there and then.

A k ind - look ing y o u n g nurse named P o o n a m came to his bed and gave h im an in jec t ion . M o h a n d a s reques ted that she b r ing h im the H o l y G i t a , " as he wan ted to take an oa th to never go wrong again.

She b r o u g h t it t o h im and he took the oa th . M o h a n d a s and Poonam became f r iends and he confessed to her what a terr ible life he had led fo r a few m o n t h s . H e explained that th is was God ' s jus t ice and told her, "Poonam, I have taken an oa th to never stray again and always fol low G o d ' s path ."

G o d helped him, and Poonam fell in love with Mohandas . Mohandas f o u g h t against his love for her, as he was now disabled. Moreover, Poonam knew his story, so he was sure she would never marry him.

A day be fo re he was d i scha rged f r o m hosp i t a l , P o o n a m asked him, " M o h a n , where will you go now?"

"I have no place to go, Poonam."

"I live a lone in my h o u s e , and I can l o o k a f t e r you , M o h a n . "

"Poonam, I am a disabled man. H o w can I allow myself to be a burden to you?"

"Mohan , I love you very much. Let's get marr ied and I will be very happy to have you as my husband ."

M o h a n d a s expla ined to her that he, too , loved her very m u c h , b u t c o u l d n o t bear t o be a b u r d e n on her. She

I I . A sacrcd book o t the H i n d u s .

Soordas' Story 91

insis ted tha t her life would be fu l l if he wou ld marry her and they would b o t h be able to manage very easily, as she was a nurse. Af te r some time, M o h a n d a s agreed and they announced their engagement .

T h e next day, as s o o n as M o h a n d a s was discharged, they went s t ra ight t o a t emple and go t marr ied . T h a t was the end of M o h a n d a s ' story, as he and P o o n a m led a very good life. They had three chi ldren and M o h a n d a s , with the aid of his a r t i f i c i a l l i m b s was able t o w o r k and lived very happily wi th in G o d s laws.

25-05-1981

SOORDAS' STORY CONTINUED: SOORDAS FALLS EVEN LOWER

Let us c o n t i n u e wi th Soordas ' s tory. H e was in the hospi ta l f o r a long time, f r o m where he could no t harm, rob or harass anyone, or he would n o t be well

looked a f te r . H e was, however, p l a n n i n g how he w o u l d ha rm , f o o l a n d ha ra s s o t h e r s a f t e r he was re leased . In shor t , he became worse than before . H e cursed everyone, even G o d and M o h a n d a s . H e was ful l o f hat red — he even hated his own mother .

In t h i s s ta te , he was d i s cha rged f r o m t h e h o s p i t a l . H e called his m o t h e r and went home with her. H e very sweetly requested her t o help h im in his evil ways, as he had no legs and could n o t walk. H i s mo the r , be ing evil herself , agreed mos t willingly.

S o o r d a s w a n t e d t o kill t w o b i r d s w i t h o n e s t o n e . H e planned to rob a rich widower and make h im a pauper. H e


planned it in such a way tha t he could also take revenge on his own mother , as he ha ted her as well. T h e robbery was a success. H i s m o t h e r harassed tha t m a n and b r o u g h t the loo t home.

W h e n his m o t h e r was fas t asleep at n i g h t , S o o r d a s le f t h o m e o n h is w h e e l c h a i r w i t h a bag f u l l o f money . H e p lan ted a few clues tha t would po in t to his mother . H e left h o m e and, as it was n ight , waited in his wheelchair on the lonely road.

H e saw a car driving by a f te r midn igh t and signalled it t o s top . Phill ips, a 2 0 year old young man was dr iving the car. "Please give me a l if t , I am a disabled man. I have no legs and I received a p h o n e call tha t my mo the r had an accident and was taken t o the hospi ta l . I m u s t take her c lothes and medicines. W o n ' t you help a legless man like me?"

Poor Phill ips, he fel t sorry fo r Soordas so ins tead of going home, he tu rned his car a round and proceeded towards the hospi ta l . Soordas t o o k o u t his gun, po in t ed it at him, and directed h im to take the highway.

Phil l ips was no t an intel l igent boy. H e was new to the city, he had jus t s t a r t e d a new job t ha t had b r o u g h t h i m t o Bangalore a few days earlier. Soordas very cunningly f o u n d this o u t and was sure the boy would be a good slave for h im.

Jus t before leaving Bangalore, Soordas called the police and told them he had seen a woman rob a rich man. H e told t h e m he had fol lowed her, gave them her address and told t h e m to hurry be fo re she lef t the city. T h e pol ice asked h i m h is name , b u t he d i s c o n n e c t e d , so they n a t u r a l l y

Soordas' Story 93

r u s h e d t o S o o r d a s ' m o t h e r ' s h o m e . S h o w i n g a sea rch warrant , they ru shed in and f o u n d some clues tha t made t h e m arrest S o o r d a s ' mothe r . T h e pol ice t o r t u r e d her t o f ind ou t where she had p u t the money.

S o o r d a s had taken t he money, and h is m o t h e r t r i ed t o c o n v i n c e t h e p o l i c e o f t h i s , b u t u n f o r t u n a t e l y h e r r e p u t a t i o n w e n t a g a i n s t he r a n d s h e was j a i l ed a n d sentenced to hard labour for a few years.

S o o r d a s used Ph i l l ip s and b ra inwashed h im, te l l ing h im tha t he had the power o f black magic and could t u rn h im in to an animal if he d id no t obey. Soordas showed him a couple of c o m m o n magic tr icks tha t made Phil l ips believe t h a t S o o r d a s real ly h a d t h i s power . H e was i l l i t e r a t e , having s tud ied in a village school, and a f te r work ing as a d r ive r in h i s o w n vi l lage f o r s o m e t i m e , he h a d b e e n of fe red this job as a driver in Bangalore.

Ph i l l ip s was c o m p l e t e l y u n d e r S o o r d a s ' c o n t r o l and by changing cars, s tea l ing a car on the way, and leaving the p r e v i o u s l y s t o l e n car b e h i n d , t h e y r e a c h e d L a h o r e . Somehow they had managed to cross the border and leave India with S o o r d a s ' skill. Now, S o o r d a s fel t safe; he was rich and had even f o u n d a slave for himself .

26-05-1981

SOORDAS' STORY CONTINUED: A WEAK SOUL FINDS COURAGE

Niloo and her f r i ends in the spir i t world were tense because Soordas had fallen deeper in to evil ways. But they had ful l fai th in H i s H i g h G o o d Soul so


they knew very well that somehow Soordas would soon be saved f rom this evil. H i s H igh Good Soul unde r s tood that N i l o o and her f r iends were upset , so to ease them he called N i l o o and explained, "Ni loo, I know you have ful l faith in me and you would never th ink that I wou ldn ' t keep my word, bu t seeing Soordas s l ipping f u r t h e r in to evil, you m u s t be upset. I unders tand you well, my dear, so I want to explain. T h a t r ich man who had been robbed , was a s inful man and needed to learn a lesson. H e has realised now, as he has b e c o m e a pauper . S o o r d a s ' m o t h e r was extremely evil and she mus t be s topped too, so she is in jail now. Tha t boy, Phillips, is a coward, a spineless fellow and he m u s t l ea rn t o face his p r o b l e m s c o u r a g e o u s l y instead of being a slave — he is a good soul but he mus t be b rough t to his senses. So now you know that no one suffers any injustices. G o d has myster ious ways of giving justice to all."

"Yes, Your H i g h G o o d S o u l , " sa id N i l o o , " N o w , I unders tand . T h a n k you for explaining this to me. I have full fai th in you and our G o d Almighty, and I now realise H i s myster ious ways of giving justice."

Ph i l l ips had b e c o m e S o o r d a s ' slave. S o o r d a s became a millionaire and was very proud of his success.

O n e day, Phillips was s i t t ing on a rock some distance f rom Soordas ' new home, wonder ing sadly why G o d did no t he lp h im, why he was f o r c e d to do t h i n g s t h a t his conscience refused to do. H e was very upset so he shouted ou t , " O h God , please help me. I can' t to le ra te Soordas anymore." After a few minutes , His H igh G o o d Soul came to "him in a holy fakir ' s disguise and said, "My good boy, kindly give something to this poor man. I am very hungry."

Soordas' Story 95

Phillips felt deeply fo r this starving fakir in rags, his hand naturally went t o his pocket, bu t then he remembered tha t S o o r d a s neve r le t h i m have even a s i n g l e pa i sa — h i s pockets were empty. H e only had f o o d and c lothing f r o m Soordas .

W i t h tears in his eyes, Phill ips said, "O ld man, I am very sorry bu t I have n o t h i n g to give you as I am the absolute slave of a very evil man ."

"Slave, my boy?"

"Yes, old man , a slave — you may n o t believe it, bu t i t ' s t rue ."

" W o n ' t you tell me your story? I m i g h t be able to he lp you," H i s H i g h G o o d Soul said.

"I don ' t th ink you will be able to help me, old man, bu t I will tell you my s tory, as I want t o u n b u r d e n my hear t . Will you l is ten to my sad and unbelievable s tory?"

"Certainly, certainly, you tell me your s tory and unburden yourself ."

So Ph i l l ips t o l d h i m every th ing and added , "I have n o courage to defy h im."

' You should n o t be so cowardly and spineless. You m u s t f ight evil and G o d will be very happy."

"Oh fakir, you don ' t know Soordas . H e has the power to do black magic. You don ' t unders tand , I saw some of his evil powers with my own eyes. H e can easily t u rn me in to a dog or cat. N o , fakir, no, I cannot defy h im."


H i s H i g h G o o d Soul said, "Phill ips, I have power too, bu t i t 's good power. Wil l you pu t your fa i th in me? I 'd never let Soordas t u r n you in to a dog or cat. I can assure you S o o r d a s c a n n o t t u r n y o u i n t o an a n i m a l . See, I will p e r f o r m the same tr icks tha t he did and show you how it is done. T h e n will you believe me?"

"Yes, show me how they are done."

H i s H i g h G o o d Soul showed him how Soordas had fooled h im and Phil l ips was so excited that he wanted to run away r igh t then , b u t H i s H i g h G o o d Sou l s t o p p e d h i m and explained, "Phi l l ips , you m u s t help me improve Soordas . As I saved you f r o m your misery, it is your du ty to help me."

" O h fakir, you are s t r ange . W h y do you want t o b o t h e r abou t Soordas? Let h im go to hell. W h a t have we to do with him? Let me r u n away please, and you also go away f r o m such an evil place."

H i s H i g h G o o d S o u l said, " N o , Ph i l l ips , I am here t o p e r f o r m my d u t y a n d y o u m u s t a l so d o y o u r d u t y , o therwise God won ' t be happy. D o you wish to make our G o d Almighty unhappy, Phill ips?"

" N o , defini tely no t . I called G o d and H e sent you to help me, so I m u s t do what you tell me to. But please, I request you to let me leave Soordas as soon as possible ."

"Phil l ips, only one more day and you will be free. You have to do what I tell you and then you can go. Take only three hundred rupees, take the car and go to the city. Leave the car just before you enter the city and try to f ind a job for yourself . I th ink three hundred rupees will be enough for

Soordas' Story 97

your board ing and lodging unt i l you get a job and manage o n y o u r o w n pay. D o n ' t t ake m o r e m o n e y , P h i l l i p s . Soordas ' money is evil and cursed. Besides, it is not yours and th ree h u n d r e d is t h e pay you s h o u l d have received f r o m S o o r d a s f o r y o u r work . So p r o m i s e me you won ' t take more f r o m Soordas ' cupboard ."

"I promise, oh fakir; you are a w o n d e r f u l man. T h a n k G o d we came across each o the r — you saved me f r o m misery and now I unde r s t and G o d ' s mys te r ious ways. I even promise you, fakir, t ha t I will never fol low the wrong pa th , no r be a coward like I was."

H i s H i g h G o o d Soul was very happy to f ind tha t Phil l ips had changed f o r t he be t te r . H e exp la ined wha t Ph i l l ips should do the next day, then lef t h im and Ear th for some t ime.

27-05-1981

SOORDAS' STORY CONTINUED: PRIDE HAS A FALL

For the f i r s t t ime, Phill ips fel t he was a h u m a n and n o t a vegetable. N o w he was de t e rmined n o t to be a slave to any evil person, or to stray o n t o the wrong

pa th .

T h e next day, as per H i s H i g h G o o d Soul ' s ins t ruc t ions , Phi l l ips drove S o o r d a s to a very r e m o t e place, qu i t e far f r o m his house, tel l ing h im that he had i n f o r m a t i o n abou t a cave in the jungle filled with treasure. As usual, Soordas had been overjoyed and had ordered Phi l l ips to take h im there immediately.


After miles of dir t roads there was only a narrow walking pa th , so Phi l l ips s t o p p e d the car, carried Soordas on his back and walked f o r a b o u t o n e and a ha l f mi les . T h e y f o u n d a cave a n d S o o r d a s was very a n x i o u s t o see t he t reasure . But Ph i l l ips said, " T h i s cave is t o o nar row for you to go inside. Master , you sit on th is rock, let me go in f i rs t to see whether there is actually any t reasure inside." Phil l ips p u t Soordas down and went in.

As he 'd been ins t ruc ted , Phill ips f o u n d an exit t h rough the back of the cave and went to his car via a shor te r route . H e drove to Soordas ' house in the car, opened his cupboard by force, took three hundred rupees and drove to the city in the s to len car. A few days later, he f o u n d a job and led a s t ra ight , good life.

Af te r Phil l ips en tered the cave, qui te some t ime had passed b u t S o o r d a s was t o o exc i ted t o n o t i c e — he was busy d r e a m i n g a b o u t b e c o m i n g a m u l t i m i l l i o n a i r e . T h e n he realised that Phi l l ips had been gone for m o r e than an hour, so he began s h o u t i n g and cursing, calling ou t t o Phillips.

N o t h i n g happened — it seemed Phi l l ips had disappeared. So Soordas had to crawl over rough and jagged rocks to f ind Phillips. H e went in a little, with curses on his lips, anger in his m i n d and ha t red in his hea r t . S u d d e n l y he f o u n d himself ou t . H e was so surpr ised tha t he felt as if s o m e o n e h a d g iven h i m a t e r r i b l e b low. H i s m i n d registered that Phi l l ips had fooled him, b u t it was beyond his capaci ty t o believe t ha t Phi l l ips had any courage or intelligence to foo l him, Soordas, the Dada !12 Soordas was absolute ly sure tha t Phi l l ips would be his l i fe long slave.

12. A "Dada in co l loqu ia l H i n d i is a local r u f f i a n , a s t r e e t - s m a r t t ough ic .

Soordas' Story 99

H e had been so p r o u d tha t no one had been able to deceive h im unt i l now. H e was an expert at mak ing fools of others , so how had t h i s happened? S o o r d a s had been posi t ively sure that Phi l l ips would never dare o p p o s e him. T h i s was a great blow. H e was so s tunned tha t he even fo rgo t t o curse and shout .

Was it poss ible tha t Phil l ips had vanished and lef t Soordas a lone in t h a t d a r k , h o r r i b l e cave? N i g h t was n e a r i n g . S o o r d a s t h o u g h t i t b e t t e r t o s i t in t h e cave t h a n go outs ide in to the jungle. H e was te r r i f ied and realised tha t there would be wild animals in the jungle, and he had no way t o go h o m e — he was mi les a n d mi les away. W h a t would he d o w i t h o u t f o o d and water? W h a t if fe roc ious animals entered the cave? H o w would he p ro tec t himself? W o u l d he see t h e s u n aga in t o m o r r o w ? W h a t w o u l d h a p p e n t o h i m in a few hours? H e w o u l d be dead! H e t rembled wi th the real izat ion tha t he was as cowardly and spineless as Phi l l ips . H e realised now what Phi l l ips m u s t have gone t h r o u g h .

"If I die, I will go s t ra ight to hell."

H e sat c loser t o t h e wall o f t he cave, a n d acc identa l ly placed his h a n d on a snake s l i ther ing f r o m one s tone t o another . " O h my G o d , how will I e n d u r e th i s t o r t u r e ? " Fortunately, the snake slid away, b u t Soordas realised how his vict ims m u s t have felt when he t o r t u r e d them.

So, with great e f fo r t , he crawled again to the middle of the cave and sa t t h e r e w o n d e r i n g w h a t t o d o . T h e r e were snakes all a r o u n d h i m . If he s t ayed i n s ide t he cave he migh t be b i t t e n by snakes. If he wen t o u t , he m i g h t be mauled to dea th by wild animals.


28-05-1981

SOORDAS' STORY CONTINUED: THE RE-AWAKENING OF THE

SUBCONSCIOUS M I N D

Oh G o d , make Phil l ips ' subconsc ious mind br ing h i m back t o me. Please G o d ! " c r ied S o o r d a s . But he realised at once — had his subconsc ious

mind ever been successful in br inging h im o n t o the r ight path?

" W h y did I never let my subconsc ious mind win over my evil? W h y did I always shu t o f f my subconsc ious m i n d and con t inue do ing evil things? W h y was I so evil? O h , I said 'was' . Does tha t mean I have changed?"

O n e by o n e , he saw h i m s e l f h a r a s s i n g m a n y p e o p l e , r o b b i n g t h e m , t o r t u r i n g t h e m , r a p i n g g i r l s , and even p u t t i n g his own m o t h e r in t rouble.

" O h G o d , n o w I real ise wha t they all m u s t have g o n e th rough . T h e y went t h r o u g h hell because of my vengeful nature, my evil self ish motives, my greed and my "pleasure. U n t i l now it never occurred to me — it never entered my mind! I was always so sure tha t no one would ever be able to harm or harass me. I, the king of evil. I was so sure that n o o n e c o u l d f o o l me, and w h a t d o y o u know, t h i s spineless fool, a b o r n coward, fooled me and b r o u g h t me to my senses! T h i s is G o d ' s Justice, n o d o u b t . I deserve this ."

For the f i rs t t ime in his life, he t h o u g h t o f G o d . So for the f i rs t t ime, he prayed t o G o d and said, "Please, my dear

Soordas' Story 101

G o d , save me and I p r o m i s e you I will lead a good and G o d - f e a r i n g l ife. I even p romise t o f i n d as many of my v i c t i m s as p o s s i b l e , h e l p t h e m , a n d give back t h e i r be long ings t h a t are s t i l l wi th me. I will t ry my bes t t o make t h e m happy . I k n o w I am a sk ing t o o m u c h a f t e r leading such a terr ible life, bu t dear G o d give me this one chance. O n l y o n e chance so tha t I won ' t go to hell, n o r suffer hell on Ea r th among these snakes and wild animals. O h God , th is is my f i r s t prayer t o you. T h i s is my f i r s t realization, the f inal change f r o m evil t o good . Please help me, save me, and p u t me on your r i g h t p a t h . O h G o d , bless me with your wisdom and make me lead a good life. Please, God , save me this t ime and I will never go wrong again."

Then , he began crying like a baby. W h e n he calmed down, he realised how genu ine his t h o u g h t s and feel ings were. Was it poss ib le t h a t G o d would he lp h im, an evil soul? Besides, who wou ld come to help h i m in th is dense jungle? By sunrise, would he be able to survive this wild jungle fu l l of snakes and fe roc ious animals? It d id n o t seem possible to Soordas .

"But G o d is wel l -known for p e r f o r m i n g miracles! O h G o d , p e r f o r m a miracle — please save me and I p romi se I will never go wrong."

At that m o m e n t , he heard animal howls coming closer and closer to the cave. H e knew the end was near. W i t h great e f f o r t , in s p i t e o f h i s b r u i s e s a n d d e e p w o u n d s , he managed to crawl t o a very deep, dark corner in the cave. He was sure many snakes would be there, b u t he preferred to die f r o m a snake bite rather than be t o r n apart by wild animals. As he inched himself in to tha t corner tor safety, a


snake went r i gh t across his chest .

" O h my G o d , save m e and I will never go wrong . " T h i s cry came f r o m b o t t o m o f his hear t .

H e r e m e m b e r e d h o w so many o f h is v i c t i m s had begged h i m in ju s t th i s way, b u t he, the c rue les t m a n , had laughed a n d t o r t u r e d t h e m even more . H a d he ever s h o w n a t iny b i t o f k i n d n e s s t o any o f his vict ims? N o , never, so how w o u l d G o d show k i n d n e s s t o him?

H e began cry ing again and was convinced t h a t there was n o c h a n c e a t all o f h i s su rv iva l . "I wi l l n e v e r see a n o t h e r m o r n i n g . O h G o d , kill me now. S t o p m y hear t now. I know I will go t o hell b u t I d o n ' t want t o be t o r n apa r t by wild an imals o r b i t t e n all over by snakes. O h G o d , please kill m e now." A n o t h e r snake s l i thered across his body, and he s h o u t e d , " O h G o d , have p i ty o n me, p lease d o n ' t t o r t u r e m e a n y m o r e . " H i s newly a w a k e n e d s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d asked, "Have y o u ever s h o w n pi ty t o y o u r v ic t ims?"

"Yes, you are r igh t , I never had any pity. I u n d e r s t a n d now, b u t i t s e e m s t o o la te . N o w , I m u s t s u f f e r . W h y s h o u l d G o d show p i ty o r be k i n d t o me?" H e genuine ly r epen t ed now, and wished t o improve , b u t he c o u l d n o t see a way o u t . H e knew survival was hopeless .

H i s s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d t o l d h i m o n c e m o r e , " H a v e y o u ever s t o p p e d h a r m i n g o thers? S o why s h o u l d G o d p e r f o r m a mi rac l e a n d save you? H a v e you ever t h o u g h t o f G o d before , when you t h o u g h t you were h a p p y and successful? T h e n why are y o u t h i n k i n g o f G o d now? W h y are you p lead ing wi th h i m t o he lp you now?"

Soordas' Story 103

29-05-1981

SOORDAS' STORY CONTINUED: HIS HIGH G O O D SOUL APPEARS

Soordas now saw everything clearly, and he was sure it was t o o late. H e was sure t ha t in a few h o u r s he would be in hell.

"God ' s just ice is always present . I realised it t o o late. G o d is always jus t . M a y b e jus t ice comes later t h a n it should , b u t just ice does def in i te ly exist. N o w I have to su f fe r all of my p u n i s h m e n t s — there is no way ou t . "

H i s subconsc ious m i n d began again, "You wanted G o d to p e r f o r m a miracle; well, here is a miracle — you shall now improve." H e d id n o t unde r s t and the meaning o f this, bu t he c o n t i n u e d t o t h i n k , "I sowed evil. N o w I m u s t reap punishment. O h G o d , show me the r ight way to take my p u n i s h m e n t — show me the way to pu r i fy my soul. Never let me go on the wrong pa th again. O h G o d , show me light in the darkness and I will never be b l ind to G o d ' s ways. O h God , save my soul f r o m evil. I don ' t care if my physical body is t o r tu red , b u t save my soul ."

T h e n i g h t p a s s e d t h i s way a n d at d a w n S o o r d a s saw streaks of l ight en te r ing the dark cave. H e was extremely surpr ised.

"Oh God , i t 's a miracle. Yes, it 's a miracle. G o d , You saved me!"

H e was overjoyed. It was beyond him to unde r s t and how he was saved.


"Soordas , ' ' h is s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d began again, "Even a po i sonous snake and fierce jungle animals have pity on a legless, helpless man, b u t an evil m a n like you never had any pity for innocent , helpless, good people ." H e was very ashamed of h imse l f and took an oa th to always be good and never go on the wrong path.

"Still, there is very little chance for me to survive in this dense jungle. N o one will pass t h rough here, so how will I get ou t of th is lonely place) O h G o d , You saved me f r o m all the wild animals, so please now save me f r o m this place so that I can lead a g o o d life and repen t f o r all my evil deeds. O h G o d , please help me again. I know I am asking tor t oo much, b u t have pity on my soul ."

H e crawled o u t o f the cave with much e f fo r t , sat on a rock, and prayed sincerely to God . Af te r a few hours , Soordas saw a holy fak i r p a s s i n g by, l i m p i n g and t i r ed . H e was overjoyed and s h o u t e d to him, "Please help me!"

T h e holy fakir (our H i g h G o o d Soul ) came near h im and asked, "My man, are you evil or good? I never help evil people, so speak up : are you evil or good'?"

Soordas was on the verge of saying tha t he was good, bu t he did no t as his subconsc ious mind was now working. H e s topped immediate ly and instead said, "My dear fakir, sit he re and l i s t e n t o my s to ry . T h e n , if y o u t h i n k y o u r conscience will pe rmi t you to help me, help me. Otherwise , go your way and may G o d bless you!"

H i s H i g h G o o d Soul sat on a rock and said, "Ok, carry on. I am all ears."

Soordas' Story 105

Soordas to ld h im the entire story, the t ru th , and n o t h i n g bu t the t r u t h . H i s H i g h G o o d Soul was very impressed, bu t still t es ted him. "You want to be saved so that you can cont inue your evil ways."

" N o fakir, I will never go wrong now. I learned my lesson the hard way and I am pos i t ive t h a t G o d saved me last n ight t o give me a chance to lead a good life. So now tha t G o d has given me this chance, in re turn , I m u s t lead such a life tha t H e will be p r o u d of me."

These words impressed H i s H i g h G o o d Soul and he even saw tha t S o o r d a s ' aura and v i b r a t i o n s had changed . H e said, " O k , S o o r d a s , I will h e l p y o u . " F i r s t , he h e l p e d S o o r d a s by g iv ing h i m f o o d and water . T h e n , he t o o k Soordas home , le f t h im there, and r e tu rned to the spi r i t world, his work done.

S o o r d a s is s t i l l on E a r t h , w i th a r t i f i c i a l legs, l ead ing a kind, good and self less life. H i s m o t h e r was released, as the police could n o t prove those clues were not planted by someone else. T h e y gave her the benef i t o f the doubt , and she was a c q u i t t e d . S o o r d a s heard th is , and asked her t o stay with h im. Over t ime, he improved his own mothe r , too.

N o w , m o t h e r a n d s o n are l e a d i n g a h o n e s t , k i n d a n d selfless life. But Soordas does not know how N i l o o and His H i g h G o o d Soul helped him. W h e n he re turns to the spiri t world, he will know all.

N i loo is over joyed now and thanked H i s H i g h G o o d Soul f r o m the b o t t o m of her hear t . In such a manner , many, many spir i t souls have helped people on Ear th . You call it


a miracle, and tha t is what it is.

30-05-1981

THE SUBCONSCIOUS MIND IS THE REAL YOU

We heard this ques t i on very o f t e n when we were on Ear th ; " W h y don ' t we know any th ing about our previous lives on Ear th , or abou t the spir i t

world? W h y has G o d made us forget? ' '

Your s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d k n o w s each a n d every t h i n g . Whatever happens t o you (your soul) is registered in your subconsc ious m i n d f r o m the very beg inn ing . U n f o r t u n a -tely, you r physical m i n d canno t take it all, and in m o s t cases it cons tan t ly remains at war with your subconsc ious mind . On ly a few souls, who are on a very h igh level, can make their subconsc ious m i n d cont ro l their physical mind . T h e s e souls have E S P ( E x t r a S e n s o r y P e r c e p t i o n ) and some even r emember the i r previous lives on Ear th . They also somet imes remember the spir i t world, the i r real home, bu t th is is very rare.

You would probably like to know why your subconsc ious mind does n o t let you remember. As we said, it is d i f f icu l t f o r y o u r phys i ca l m i n d t o h a n d l e it all . Bes ides , y o u r subconsc ious m i n d does n o t want you t o k n o w because you have come to Ea r th for experience, tes ts , t ra in ing and to pay o f f karma. If you knew everything, it would be too much for you to cope with, and there would be no fun in l i fe . You w o u l d g o through l i fe like a machine . If you knew your karma, your l i f e o n Earth w o u l d be m o n o t o n o u s .

The Subconscious Mind Is The Real You 107

Your s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d knows eve ry th ing and it never makes any mistakes. It registers everything. For souls on a higher level, the i r subconsc ious m i n d on Ea r th is a l i t t le m o r e p o w e r f u l t h a n o r d i n a r y sou l s o n E a r t h . We say a l i t t le because even in the spi r i t wor ld , o u r subconsc ious mind does n o t fully operate, t h o u g h it is m u c h more open than those o f people on Ear th . Only after Realm 7 does your subconsc ious mind operate in a higher capacity in the spirit world.

Some y o g i s H and holy m e n on E a r t h have the power t o medi ta te for long per iods . The i r subconsc ious mind opens more and m o r e and they can con t ro l the i r physical m i n d t h r o u g h the i r s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d . T h e y are not slaves t o the i r c o n s c i o u s m i n d , as m o s t o f you are. D o not be a slave to your consc ious mind. Your consc ious m i n d will lead you f r o m bad t o worse if you do n o t con t ro l it.

Your conscious mind dies with your physical body when you leave Earth. Your consc ious m i n d is very anxious to make you a slave and lead you as it wishes, bu t you m u s t use your wil l-power and never let it win.

You are a soul jo ined fo r eterni ty wi th your subconsc ious m i n d , so h o w can y o u let y o u r weak a n d u n t r a i n e d c o n s c i o u s m i n d be y o u r mas te r? Are you such a weak, spineless creature t ha t you are n o t able to con t ro l it?

From now on, remember this: your subconscious mind is the real Y O U . So never let your consc ious mind be your master. Be your own master.

15. A yogi is o n e w h o has mas t e r ed the var ious f o r m s o f yoga.


31-05-1981

WHY PAST-LIFE MEMORY IS NOT REVEALED

People o n E a r t h fo rge t all t he i r che r i shed m e m o r i e s of t he sp i r i t wor ld and earlier lives. In ou r p rev ious lives we were b o r n o n E a r t h several t imes , in o rde r

t o ga in expe r i ence , t o t r a i n ou r se lves a n d t o p u r i f y o u r s o u l , so t h a t we c o u l d g o h i g h e r a n d h i g h e r . I f we r e m e m b e r e d all o f o u r p r e v i o u s lives o n E a r t h w o u l d it he lp us gain m o r e knowledge? M a n y w o u l d say yes, b u t we say no . H e r e ' s why: if you r e m e m b e r e d y o u r p rev ious lives, w o u l d you make t he same mistakes? Never .

So by co r r ec t i ng your mistakes , solving y o u r p rob lems , and f a c i n g y o u r t r o u b l e s , y o u p u r i f y y o u r s o u l . W i t h o u t mis takes , p r o b l e m s a n d pa in y o u w o u l d never be able t o u n d e r s t a n d t h e d i f f e r e n c e be tween g o o d a n d bad . I f y o u can ' t u n d e r s t a n d th i s , t h e n w h a t ' s t h e use o f l ife? W i t h y o u r m e m o r i e s o f t h e s p i r i t w o r l d a n d p r e v i o u s l ives in tac t , y o u w o u l d live l i fe like a mach ine . Your r e sponse t o y o u r tes t , t r a i n i n g a n d karma w o u l d n o t be natural. Your choices w o u l d be p r o g r a m m e d — they w o u l d n o t be a resul t o f your inner s ta te o f being.

O n E a r t h everyone yearns fo r happ iness , b u t d o they know w h a t rea l h a p p i n e s s is? N o . P e o p l e o n E a r t h t h i n k h a p p i n e s s m e a n s a lo t o f money , c o m f o r t , l uxur i e s , f u n and fame . W e are sor ry t o say t h a t these t h i n g s d o n ' t b r ing real h a p p i n e s s . R e a l h a p p i n e s s c o m e s f r o m t r u e love , na tu re ' s beauty, g e n u i n e l augh te r and smi les (not fo rced , as many p e o p l e d o ) , he lp ing o t h e r s selflessly, and p u r i f y i n g your soul t o achieve a h igher level.

Why Past-life Memory Is Not Revealed 109

You will p u r i f y your sou l and achieve a h igher level by m a k i n g m i s t a k e s , and r e a l i z i n g y o u r m i s t a k e s . I t a l so d e p e n d s o n h o w you co r rec t y o u r mi s t akes , solve y o u r p rob lems , and face your d i f f i cu l t i e s . All o f these t h i n g s depend on you — whether you correct your mistakes, solve your problems, and face your t roub les in a good, s t ra ight , and Godly way, or in a bad or evil way.

For example, if you make a mis take and realise you have done wrong, you m u s t r igh t tha t wrong . You are sent t o E a r t h t o gain experience, t r a in your se l f and pu r i fy your soul. T h i s will take you to a h igher level, so you m u s t face problems, t roubles , and injus t ices in life.

Here , in the spir i t world, we do remember everything. O u r memor ies are n o t erased like yours , so our progress is very slow. You are bo rn on Ear th fo r rapid progress, bu t m o s t of you are fall ing lower.

You may wonder why you don ' t remember your real h o m e in the sp i r i t wor ld . If you remembered the spirit world you g o o d people would hate t o live on Earth. But bad and evil souls have unfortunately forgotten what Realms I, 2 and 3 are like.

M a n y t i m e s in s p i t e of b e i n g i n n o c e n t , w h e n you are p r o n o u n c e d guilty, you tend to lose fa i th in God .

At such t imes you may have t h o u g h t , "Is it t rue, is there a God? If so, why does H e never show Himse l f? W h y has H e let me down so many t imes? W h e n I need H i m the mos t , H e is nowhere to be f o u n d . W h y is there no justice? If G o d is so good , k ind and jus t , why does H e let evil people come on top? W h y do evil people succeed and good


people suffer? W h y ? "

H a v e y o u ever a sked t h e s e q u e s t i o n s ? H e r e are s o m e answers:

1. Is G o d really there?

Yes, o f c o u r s e G o d is there . O t h e r w i s e , w h o made you? W h o m a d e y o u r E a r t h ? W h o m a d e t r ees , f lowers, f r u i t s , seas, rivers and m o u n t a i n s ? W h o , by some mys te r ious way, gives just ice t o evil souls? W h o has given you loving feel ings? W h o has been k ind enough t o keep you close to your loved ones? W h o could do all o f these th ings if there was no God?

2. You were i n n o c e n t and still you were proven guilty. Where was G o d at tha t time?

The re are many answers to this. O n e of t h e m m u s t be r ight fo r you.

(a) Are y o u su re you have never h a r m e d or h u r t anyone? Maybe you are being p u n i s h e d for that .

(b) Maybe you made someone miserable or you had been s i n fu l in your previous life, so th is is the result of tha t .

(c) You na tura l ly want t o go h igher and higher, so t h i n k h a r d , wil l you ever be ab le t o d o so w i t h o u t facing problems?

(d) If you t h ink you are a very p ious and good soul, have y o u ever ana lysed y o u r s e l f ? F i n d o u t w h e t h e r every th ing you have d o n e was self less and r ight , w i t h o u t hypocrisy or dishonesty, and wi thou t any self ish motives. Have you ever done

Why Past-Life Memory Is Not Revealed 111

a g o o d deed with a self ish motive, even with the t h o u g h t tha t you would go to heaven, you would be f amous , or all your sins would be forgiven if y o u d i d t h i s deed? S u c h g o o d deeds are n o t g o o d deeds. You are foo l ing only the world and yourself . People on Ear th foo l themselves all the t ime, and even try to foo l G o d (which can never h a p p e n ) . So do you th ink you are sinning? O f course you are.

(e) M o n e y is very precious to m o s t people on Ear th . A n y t h i n g in excess is n o t good . You also know tha t money is the roo t cause o f all evil. M o n e y b l inds your vision, deafens your ears t o the pleas o f the poor, and hardens your heart . You forge t k indness , loyalty, love (we mean t rue love), and your du t ies towards your family and others .

( f ) H a v e y o u ever m i s j u d g e d or m i s l e d s o m e o n e , which may have b r o u g h t th is on?

(g) H a v e y o u ever w a n t e d t o be very f a m o u s o r popu la r and, in tha t desire and ambi t ion , ha rmed or mis led someone?

(h) Have you, if n o t direct ly t h e n indirectly, made someone su f fe r fo r your own self ish motives?

(i) H a v e y o u e n c o u r a g e d or b e e n n ice t o an evil p e r s o n ? I f you are n i c e t o evil p e o p l e y o u encourage t h e m to be evil, which p u t s you in the same category.

Have you realised tha t God Almighty is never un jus t and that H e would never be un jus t t o anyone? If you are really innocen t H e will prove you innocent , whether you have


proof or not, provided you are on the Godly G o o d Path. It may no t be immedia te — it may take m o n t h s , years, or even decades — b u t H e will.

Analyse yourself. Ask these ques t ions and we are sure you will f i n d o n e o f t h e m is r i g h t f o r y o u . Ask t he s a m e ques t ions whenever you go t h r o u g h any d i f f i cu l t i e s or if any prob lems crop up.

We would like you t o unde r s t and this: you are on Ear th , a n d E a r t h is y o u r s o u l ' s t r a i n i n g i n s t i t u t e t o ga in experience. It is the s t epp ing s tone to h igher Realms, t o your eternal happ iness . I t is also your chance to pay o f f y o u r k a r m a m o r e easily, d o g o o d d e e d s , h e l p o t h e r s self lessly and he lp y o u r loved ones . T h e n what can you expect — s m o o t h sailing? A bed of roses w i t h o u t thorns? W h a t can you expec t f r o m your evil w o r l d — g o o d n e s s overflowing?

You have to face your p rob lems bravely and wi th a smile.

You have to f i gh t evil.

You have to purify your soul.

T h i s is why you are on Ear th r ight now. Always remember th is and be brave, courageous , and wise. Today, you may feel G o d is u n j u s t , b u t one day you will realise tha t what G o d Almigh ty d id was absolu te ly r igh t . I t was the bes t th ing fo r you and your loved ones. T h e r e canno t be any mistake in this .

Spirit Guides 113

03-06 -1981

SPIRIT GUIDES

We are all h u m a n s — you o n t he E a r t h p lane and us in t h e sp i r i t wor ld , b u t o u r n a t u r e s are d i f f e r e n t . R e m e m b e r , you are o n E a r t h t o p u r i f y your soul .

So t h row away ha te a n d a d o p t love.

T h r o w away jea lousy and a d o p t u n d e r s t a n d i n g .

T h r o w away h a r d h e a r t e d n e s s and a d o p t k indness .

T h r o w away c rookednes s and a d o p t w i s d o m .

T h r o w away se l f i shness and a d o p t se l f lessness .

T h i s is h o w y o u h e l p y o u r s e l f t o p u r i f y y o u r s o u l a n d

reach a h ighe r level.

R e b i r t h o n E a r t h is a gamble . You m u s t have seen t h a t in S o o r d a s ' s to ry . However , it is i m p o r t a n t t h a t y o u p u r i f y your soul a n d reach a h igher level. For th i s G o d A lmigh ty has given y o u double p r o t e c t i o n f r o m evil i n f luences so t h a t you' do, n o t fal l spir i tual ly . O n e is y o u r own p o w e r f u l a n d m o s t w o n d e r f u l s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d , wh ich will always t ry t o s t o p you un les s you have dec ided not t o l i s ten t o it, and it has b e c o m e d o r m a n t . T h e s e c o n d is y o u r sp i r i t gu ide , w h o m s o m e will call a gua rd ian angel . All souls on Earth have sp ir i t g u i d e s w h o w a t c h o u t f o r t h e m f r o m t h e spirit world. T h e s e gu ides show y o u where you have g o n e wrong.

Your s p i r i t g u i d e k n o w s e v e r y t h i n g a b o u t y o u a n d t r i e s


hard t o impress u p o n y o u to walk o n t he r i g h t p a t h . Before your s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d becomes d o r m a n t it calls o u t t o y o u r sp i r i t g u i d e saying, "I am o f n o use now, so please take over y o u r extra du t i e s . "

Your gu ide will have an extremely h a r d t i m e t ry ing t o make you fo l low the r i gh t p a t h t h r o u g h y o u r physical m i n d . T h e gu ide has t o p u s h t he l imi t s and fo r ce y o u r physical m i n d t o work as he o r she wishes. At such t imes , s o m e peop le o n E a r t h even fai l t o l i s t en t h r o u g h t h e phys ica l m i n d . You reject t he gu idance given t o you and g o o n h a r m i n g o the r s .

You may t h i n k y o u are h a r m i n g o t h e r s a n d s o m e o f y o u

t a k e p l e a s u r e in t h i s , b u t in rea l i ty y o u are h a r m i n g yourse l f hundreds o f t imes more t h a n y o u have h a r m e d

anyone else.

Swallow your p r i d e and q u e s t i o n y o u r s e l f whe the r success in h a r m i n g o t h e r s o r the p leasure you der ive by h a r m i n g t h e m will ever give y o u e ternal happ ines s . Wi l l it ever take y o u t o a h i g h e r level? For t e m p o r a r y h a p p i n e s s d u r i n g a few E a r t h years, d o you want t o sacr i f ice y o u r t rue , e ternal happ ines s and live in hell f o r t h o u s a n d s o f years. I sn ' t t h a t s tup id?

04-06-1981

TWIN SOULS

Spi r i t be ings are very anx ious t o b r i n g the i r dear ones t o a h ighe r level. T h e y try ha rd t o encourage loved ones never t o go wrong, so t h a t they won ' t suffer .

Every sou l has a twin . I t is very d i f f i c u l t if o n e twin is o n

Twin Souls 115

a higher level and the o ther on a lower one. T h e one who is on a higher level has to wait fo r its twin to rise to its level. For tha t reason, the one who is on a h igher level in the spirit world has to encourage the one on Ear th , who is on a lower level. It is a very hard task to br ing an Ear th twin to a h igher level. All twins want t o be together , whe ther their o ther half is a good or bad soul .

T h e pe r son on Ea r th who has let his subconsc ious m i n d b e c o m e d o r m a n t and w h o r e f u s e s t o f o l l o w his o r her guide 's p ro jec ted impress ion is a real p rob lem for us spir i t beings. It is a t r emendous ly d i f f i cu l t task fo r one twin t o make the o the r fol low the r ight pa th .

Very few twins are on the same level, so the twin on the higher level has to wait — no t 2 or 3, no r 2 0 or 30, n o t even 2 0 0 or 3 0 0 years, b u t in s o m e cases 5 0 0 or 6 0 0 years. O n c e a soul reaches Realms I , 2 or 3, it will take h u n d r e d s o f E a r t h years t o rise h igher . S o m e even take thousands o f years.

T h e des i re o f the twin who is wa i t i ng f o r the o t h e r t o come u p is so s t r o n g and g e n u i n e t h a t he or she takes b i r t h on E a r t h t o he lp the o t h e r twin . S o m e t i m e s they succeed, b u t m o s t o f the t ime they fall t o a lower level as well. T h i s is how the spir i t world and the Ear th world go on.

We cannot s t o p ourselves f r o m repeat ing this fact: if Ear th people were intel l igent enough to realise what is good and bad for them, or would try to get messages f r o m the spir i t world, it would be so easy for t h e m to unde r s t and things . But mos t people on Ear th do no t believe in life af ter dea th or in t he sp i r i t wor ld , and if s o m e d o believe it, it is


beyond them to unde r s t and how we can send messages, or how people on E a r t h can receive t h e m . T h e r e are a few fools in your world who even say, " D o n ' t talk to depar ted s o u l s . You are j u s t h a r a s s i n g t h e m by s t o p p i n g t h e i r progress ."

P lease d o n ' t m i s u n d e r s t a n d us , b u t we c a n n o t s t o p o u r s e l v e s f r o m t e l l i n g t h o s e f o o l s : i f y o u were real ly i n t e l l i g e n t a n d l e a r n e d you w o u l d n o t t h i n k t h i s way. Besides, those who want to s top spir i t communica t ions are so s in fu l and c o r r u p t tha t they are a f ra id the wor ld will learn the t r u t h and they would n o t be able to foo l o thers and con t inue o n their evil pa th . S o m e people th ink they know what is r i g h t and try to make o t h e r s believe t h a t those who c o m m u n i c a t e with the spir i t world are bogus or mad.

If people on Ea r th would cooperate wi th us, it would be so easy for us to send them messages and help them. Instead, they brag a b o u t it all being nonsense and h u m b u g , how it harms more than it helps, and so on. So we have to work very hard at p ro jec t ing our though t s , and we have to run af ter these people fo r years to br ing t h e m o n t o the r ight pa th . Even a f t e r such hard work some souls have a one-track mind. T h e y will no t l isten to us and will con t inue on the wrong pa th .

Af te r an evil soul on Ear th makes his or her subconsc ious m i n d d o r m a n t , a f t e r his or her guide fails t o br ing tha t soul o n t o the r igh t pa th , who is l e f t t o improve such a sou l b u t i ts twin? Br inging a fal len twin on Ea r th to a h igher level and t ry ing to improve h i m or her is a very d i f f i cu l t job f o r the twin in the spi r i t world . So do the needful , improve yourself and rise to a higher level quickly.

Good Or Evil Is Your Choice 117

D o n ' t t h ink of the f u n and happ iness of a few years on Earth; th ink of eternal happiness .

05-06-1981

G O O D OR EVIL IS YOUR CHOICE

You m u s t have read books , heard se rmons , or been t a u g h t in schoo l and by y o u r o lder relatives and f r i ends abou t what is r ight , what is wrong, and how

to i m p r o v e you r se l f . But s o m e o f you d o n ' t b o t h e r t o listen or read. S o m e souls will say, " W h y shou ldn ' t I do this? I t gives me pleasure to harass someone . I feel very happy when I foo l someone, and it is a joy to harm or rob someone."

We ask those souls, "Don ' t you feel happy when you help s o m e o n e ? D o n ' t y o u fee l at p e a c e w h e n y o u f o r g i v e someone who has harmed you? D o n ' t you rejoice when you make s o m e o n e h a p p y ? " If t hese t h i n g s d o n ' t make you happy, bu t t hose awful bad th ings do, we feel very sorry tor you, we pi ty you.

Every p e r s o n has g o o d and evil in h im, b u t i t is entirely your choice whe the r t o be good or bad. T h a t is the main poin t . It is def ini te ly a great th ing to con t ro l the bad and br ing ou t the good in yourself.

If you feel happy when you ha rm o thers , derive pleasure f r o m fool ing o thers , or become elated by harassing others , isn't this the r ight t ime to ask G o d Almighty for H i s help, guidance and blessings for your improvement?


06-06 -1981

SPIRIT COMMUNICATIONS HELP COMFORT LOVED ONES O N EARTH

We are very keen o n c o m m u n i c a t i n g wi th o u r loved ones o n Ear th , so we c o n t i n u o u s l y reques t G o d A l m i g h t y t o give us t h e o p p o r t u n i t y . O n t h e

whole, peop le o n E a r t h are so p r e o c c u p i e d w i th the i r o w n w o r k , f u n , a n d m o n e y - m a k i n g , t h a t t h e y d o n ' t care f o r the i r d e p a r t e d loved ones .

However , s o m e — like o u r m o t h e r a n d f a t h e r — are keen t o c o m m u n i c a t e w i t h t h e i r d e p a r t e d l o v e d o n e s . W e were ove r joyed w h e n o u r M o m a n d D a d w a n t e d t o hear f r o m us . T h e y t o o f e l t h a p p y t h a t t h e y w e r e ab le t o c o m m u n i c a t e wi th us. Sp i r i t be ings wish there were m o r e people like o u r M o m and D a d ! W e were able t o calm t h e m d o w n and g u i d e t h e m regard ing w h o was mak ing foo l s o f t h e m , w h o w e r e t h e i r rea l ly g o o d f r i e n d s , a n d w h o m s h o u l d they t r u s t and ask f o r help . O u r M o m and D a d are q u i t e a lone in y o u r wor ld , except f o r a few relat ives and g o o d f r i e n d s w h o have he lped t h e m . W e t h a n k t h e m and bless t h e m .

T h e r e are m a n y s p i r i t s o u l s w h o are e x t r e m e l y keen o n c o m m u n i c a t i n g wi th the i r loved ones . Many , like us, wan t t o h e l p t h e i r l o v e d o n e s o n E a r t h f ee l c a l m , as t h e i r u n h a p p i n e s s a n d m i s e r y o n E a r t h is p r o j e c t e d o n t o us , m a k i n g us feel depressed and sad, t o o .

We d o u n d e r s t a n d how you feel when your loved ones have d e p a r t e d f r o m y o u r w o r l d , as y o u c a n n o t see, hear, o r t o u c h us, b u t we r eques t you t o be ca lm and not mourn for

Spirit Communications Help Comfort Loved Ones On Earth 119

us, as we are happier here than we were there. We are more alive than we were on Earth and we can still see you, hear you, touch you, hug you, and even kiss you.

If you and your depar ted loved ones are very close, only t h e n d o we s t r o n g l y fee l y o u r s a d n e s s . T h e love a n d closeness o f a m o t h e r or fa ther and their children, or o f a sister and brother , or even of good f r i ends who love each o t h e r deeply, a f f e c t s us . Howeve r , n o m a t t e r wha t t h e r e l a t i o n s h i p o n E a r t h was, if t h e r e is n o g e n u i n e a n d mutua l love, we do n o t have a connec t ion with tha t soul once we have come to the spir i t world.

O u r M o m and D a d somet imes fel t so lost and miserable wi thou t us tha t it would have been very d i f f icu l t fo r us to ca lm t h e m d o w n a n d chee r t h e m u p w i t h o u t s p i r i t c o m m u n i c a t i o n s . W e w o u l d exp la in t o t h e m t h a t t h e y should con t ro l their feelings as they also sadden us, and we are closer t o t h e m than when we were on Ear th . T h i s spir i t c o m m u n i c a t i o n m a k e s us all ( M o m , D a d , V i s p i a n d Ra too ) share in each o the r ' s happiness and miseries and, m o s t impor tan t ly , lets t h e m know we are near t h e m and love t h e m t r emendous ly . I t is a m u c h easier task f o r us because of th is spir i t communica t ion .

So we reques t the people on Ear th to communica t e safely with t he sp i r i t wor ld f o r y o u r own g o o d , as well as t o provide us wi th an easier way to p e r f o r m our dut ies . W i t h the help o f spir i t communica t ion , it is much easier fo r us to guide you and s top you f r o m going deep in to darkness . It is our du ty to guide you and it is therefore advisable to communica te with us. I f you have such a gif t , do develop it. Every soul has some k ind of g i f t f r o m G o d Almighty, bu t for some it takes a long t ime and a lot of hard work to


develop it, and fo r some it comes automatical ly.

Never suppress your inst incts . Never th ink people will call you crazy or weird if they f ind ou t you have this g i f t . It is a God-given g i f t and you should be gra te fu l fo r it.

There was a girl, w h o m we shall call N ina , who had such a g i f t bu t her m o t h e r brainwashed her, saying, "It is evil to communica te with a spiri t , never do this again or the evil s p i r i t wil l p o s s e s s y o u r b o d y a n d r u i n y o u . You wil l become a devil and will bu rn in the fires o f hell."

N i n a was so f r i g h t e n e d by her m o t h e r ' s w a r n i n g t h a t she even hes i ta ted to u t te r the words "spi r i t communica -t ion". She lost a great oppor tun i ty , a wonde r fu l gif t , and fai th in herself.

A f t e r many years, when she was t o l d t he f ac t s and her husband gave her books that explained her g i f t , it was t o o late. N o mat te r how m u c h she tr ied to regain it and forget what her m o t h e r had said, she could not , as her fear went very deep. She regret ted having l is tened to her mother , and she f o u n d it imposs ible to regain her conf idence .

Jus t like N i n a ' s story, there are many such cases, so we r e q u e s t t h e p e o p l e o n E a r t h t o neve r adv ise a n y o n e wi thou t the p roper knowledge and facts . Li t t le knowledge is a dangerous th ing . And for the pe r son l is tening to the advice — make sure the source has t rue spir i tual knowledge.

Most Souls Have Been To Lower Realms 121

0 7 - 0 6 - 1 9 8 1

MOST SOULS HAVE BEEN TO LOWER REALMS

We are all reborn on Ear th to pu r i fy our soul and r i se t o a h i g h e r level, b u t o u r des i r e is n o t always fu l f i l l ed and o f t e n we move downwards

instead of rising. So mos t o f us have experienced Realms 2 t o 6. O n l y a few have exper i enced Rea lm I , as it is extremely d i f f i cu l t t o come ou t f r o m Realm I .

Every soul has taken rebirth nearly 1 0 0 to 2 0 0 0 times on Earth and gained all different kinds o f experiences. Every soul m u s t go t h r o u g h d i f fe ren t p rob lems and s i tua t ions .

We m u s t a l so let you k n o w t h a t s p i r i t b e i n g s are n o t allowed to tell people on Ear th all ou r secrets; we can only tell you a few t h i n g s . I f we t o l d you y o u r f u t u r e , you would be prepared beforehand, and your rebir th would be of no use.

0 8 - 0 6 - 1 9 8 1

MISCONCEPTIONS ABOUT SPIRIT COMMUNICAT IONS

If you th ink your depar ted loved ones will be hindered in their progress , you are comple te ly wrong. W i t h o u t spiri t communica t ions , it somet imes takes spirit souls

days, m o n t h s , years, or even decades to enforce t h o u g h t s on you t o b r i n g you o n t o the r i gh t p a t h . But t h r o u g h spirit commun ica t i ons we can make you unders tand within .i lew hours tha t which may otherwise take years. So with regards t o h i n d e r i n g a d e p a r t e d sou l ' s p rogress , on the contrary, their progress would be much more rapid.


As we said before, one twin on a higher level waits fo r the o ther t o rise and has to work hard to s top the twin f r o m fal l ing any lower. When the higher twin tries to project thoughts to the other one on Earth, the Earth twin may not even bother to heed those thoughts for years. But t h r o u g h s p i r i t c o m m u n i c a t i o n s it is easy a n d r a p i d . T h e r e f o r e , our progress is m u c h more rapid with, ra ther than wi thou t , spiri t communica t ion .

People th ink sp i r i t c o m m u n i c a t i o n h inders the d e p a r t e d s o u l ' s p r o g r e s s and t h a t is why m o s t d o n ' t w a n t t o communica t e with their dear depar ted souls. Is tha t t rue, or is it that their guilty conscience stops them from communicating?

Real holy souls and sages have the power to communica t e wi th depa r t ed souls and sp i r i t people. If c o m m u n i c a t i o n h inde r s a sp i r i t be ing 's p rogress , would such h igh souls have this power?

S o m e p e o p l e may say, "Be c a r e f u l o r evil s p i r i t s will possess your body and you will be ru ined and will go to hell." Here are some answers for them:

Are you evil? Evil a t t racts ev:l. If you are evil then yes, you s h o u l d f e a r s p i r i t c o m m u n i c a t i o n s as evil d e f i n i t e l y a t t r a c t s evil, and if you a t t r a c t evil s p i r i t s , t h e y may possess your physical mind. But if you are a good soul and you are communica t ing with a good depar ted soul, there is no ha rm in it at all.

W h y S o m e P e o p l e F e a r Spi r i t C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 123

Never attempt automatic writing on your own. It is extremely dangerous to practice automatic writing on your own without a protective link14 and without following proper instructions. Only an experienced and already-linked person can join your link. This will ensure that no negative interference can harm you.

Evil a t t rac ts evil and good a t t rac t s good. G o o d spir i t s will defini tely pro tec t you, and in cont inua l spiri t c o m m u n i c a -t ion wi th a good soul, (where your link is no t broken) you are absolutely safe.

In the same way you would close your f r o n t door to evil people and n o t allow t h e m in to your home , you shou ld close your mind to evil spi r i t s and no t let t hem enter your mind .

09 -06 -1981

WHY SOME PEOPLE FEAR SPIRIT COMMUNICATIONS

Go n e are t he days when s u p e r s t i t i o n s ru l ed o u r lives. G o n e are the days when people t h o u g h t only mad people spoke to Spi r i t s . G o n e are the days

when it could no t be proved tha t the one who claims to have sp i r i t c o m m u n i c a t i o n s is genu ine . N o w o n E a r t h , many scientists, psychiatr is ts , and para-psychologis ts who

14. P r o t c c n o n prov ided hv h igher sp i r i t be ings t h r o u g h prayers and pos i t ive

energy, tor sate c o m m u n i c a t i o n be tween Ear th souls and sp i r i t be ings .


are do ing extensive research on spiri t commun ica t i ons are able to prove that their work is genuine.

T h e r e are many strange phenomena for which no scientif ic explanat ions can be found , and one has to believe in ESP, para-psychology and psychic phenomena .

S o m e fools even d o u b t the existence of the spir i t world or whe the r it is t r u e t ha t we are souls . S o m e ex t raord inary f o o l s even ask such a s t u p i d q u e s t i o n as, "Are you sure there is a G o d ? "

S o m e people are very anxious to learn more abou t spi r i t c o m m u n i c a t i o n s , and want t o go deeper and deeper i n to such mat te r s . For some it is a compuls ion to know, so they try hard to f ind ou t all abou t the spir i t world, abou t death, b i r th , previous lives, and so on. People on Ear th are always looking fo r solid p roo f for everything. The i r l imi ted minds c a n n o t take t h i n g s in w i t h o u t p r o o f , and it is a l m o s t imposs ible to establish proof , as only a few have this G o d -given power, t hough o thers are happy to imita te t h e m and earn a f o r t u n e by foo l ing innocen t people. T h i s has made it h a r d f o r m a n y t o d i s t i n g u i s h g e n u i n e p e o p l e f r o m f r a u d s .

S o m e th ink it is evil or bad to delve in to the supernatura l , bu t it is sheer ignorance to th ink like this. Some fear that their gui l t and sins will be discovered by spiri t beings, so they discourage others . Evil people do no t like these ideas, n o r d o they take any i n t e r e s t in t h e m . S o m e are brainwashed by their parents , pr iests , or teachers so they actually curb their inst inct and refuse to take any risks.

Why You Choose To Be Born O n Rarth 125

WHY YOU CHOOSE TO BE BORN O N EARTH

It is strange, bu t true, tha t m o s t of you did no t want to be b o r n in your world, as you were very happy here in the spir i t world (we are ta lking about souls on higher levels). It was on ly your i m p a t i e n c e t o c l imb h ighe r and y o u r wil l ingness to take a risk, or your desire to help a loved one who was falling spir i tual ly on Ear th , that caused you to take rebir th on Ear th . But m o s t of you (your soul and subconsc ious m i n d ) wish you were never bo rn on Ear th . Some t imes you feel this consciously and wonder why you are feeling like this, b u t you have no recollect ion of your spi r i t world home. You wonde r for some t ime, and then you fo rge t a b o u t it. S o m e of you get th is fee l ing f r o m your soul and s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d so s t rong ly t ha t your physical m ind has to l is ten to it.

You can gain t ra in ing and experience in the sp i r i t world, bu t it takes t h o u s a n d s o f years to reach higher levels, so instead, you try to reach the higher levels in a few hundred years, which is the reason you were born on Ear th — to get quicker results. However, the risk is that you may even go lower and it may take longer t o achieve your goal.

Souls from the lower Realms are happy to be reborn on Earth, as this gives them a chance to progress more rapidly. It is advisable fo r t hem to be reborn as it is a great advantage for them if they succeed in keeping on the r ight path . T h e suf fe r ing in Realms I, 2 and 3 is so severe that it is be t t e r fo r t hem to risk reb i r th on Ear th . For good souls who have fallen to lower levels due to evil and bad influences, Earth is paradise.

Some good souls who have fallen lower reques t G o d to

126 T h e Laws Of T h e Spirit World

punish them severely b u t in a very shor t t ime. If they are f r o m Realm I or 2 they are bo rn as beasts of bu rden on E a r t h , w o r k i n g ha rd and s o m e t i m e s be ing t o r t u r e d by humans . They pay o f f their karma quicker, bu t they m u s t have the gu t s to bear the s u f f e r i n g as m o s t of t h e m are t o r tu r ed , whipped and starved. T h e y m u s t toi l all day in the f ields or carry immense burdens .

T h e s e sou l s feel t h i s p u n i s h m e n t is m u c h b e t t e r t h a n s taying h u n d r e d s o f years in Realms I or 2. So you can jus t imagine how horr ible Realms I and 2 m u s t be. T h e y gladly and willingly take this p u n i s h m e n t to escape staying in those Realms.

Rea lm 3 is horr ible , as well. T h e souls in Rea lm 3 take c h a n c e s like S o o r d a s d id , b u t all c a n n o t be saved like Soordas , and such souls may land in Realms I or 2 instead of moving higher.

Realm 4 is bearable — it is a lmos t like Ear th . Still, t o those souls who have fallen f r o m higher Realms, it is ter r ib le . Every soul wants to reach the highest Realm as quickly as poss ib le , so they try to take r eb i r th to gain exper ience, su f f e r their p u n i s h m e n t in a shor te r t ime and pur i fy their soul . T h e s e are the reasons fo r which you are r ebo rn on Ear th .

WHY YOU DREAD DEATH

After you are born on Ear th , you enjoy your life so m u c h tha t you dread death . S o m e people do n o t even want t o leave Ear th when they are s tuck with old, aching bodies . W h y is this?

Suicide Is A Sin 127

T h i s is because in their hear t of: hear ts they know where they will land once they die in your world. T h e y are afraid to die because they are sure they will be in the dark, lower Realms, so they try t o ho ld on to their life. But when your physical body refuses to func t i on , the soul m u s t leave tha t decaying, temporary, physical home. W h e t h e r you like it or no t , you have to die on Ear th .

T h e r e are s o m e p e o p l e o n E a r t h w h o have been bra inwashed in to t h i n k i n g tha t dea th is a hor r ib le th ing . T h e y are even a f r a i d o f t h e w o r d ' D e a t h ' . I t is nea r imposs ib le to rid t h e m of th is fear, and they s t ruggle to live longer on Ear th . W h e n such good souls depar t f r o m your world and arrive in the spir i t world on higher planes, they are so surpr ised to see such beauty, ha rmony and love on Realms 5, 6 and 7 tha t they regret their fears.

SUICIDE IS A SIN

You should no t fear death . At the same t ime, you should n o t even t h i n k o f d e a t h b e f o r e y o u r t i m e . O n l y G o d should decide when you should come to the spir i t world. Committing suicide is spiritually wrong. God gives us t he chance to be r e b o r n on E a r t h , and by c o m m i t t i n g suicide you are go ing agains t H i m . Suicide is a sin. By c o m m i t t i n g suicide you will fall to lower Realms, which we are su re you w o u l d never w a n t . You m u s t never t ry c o m m i t t i n g suicide because by do ing so you only get a t e m p o r a r y re lease f r o m y o u r p h y s i c a l b o d y a n d y o u permanent ly damage your soul.


11-06-1981

THE HIGH G O O D SOULS

There is only one G o d — our G o d Almighty. But our dearest G o d has plenty of souls t o help H i m make every sou l p u r e , h o n e s t , loving , u n d e r s t a n d i n g ,

obl iging, good and wise. T h e s e helpers were jus t h u m a n s like us all, and went t h r o u g h what people on E a r t h and s p i r i t b e i n g s are g o i n g t h r o u g h . T h e y r e i n c a r n a t e d h u n d r e d s o f t imes, and a f te r going up and down again and again, finally reached this level. These helpers are called His High Good Souls, and at the very t o p is His Highest Good Soul.

O n higher Realms we see t h e m of ten , bu t on Realms 4 and lower they can rarely be seen, as they p re fe r t o r ema in invisible because it makes their work easier. T h e y achieve m u c h success in their work to improve bad or evil souls, making them unders tand what is r ight and wrong, and also in s t ruc t ing them on how to pay o f f their karma in a less h o r r i b l e and q u i c k e r way, o r h o w t o reach t h e h i g h e r Realms sooner.

Whenever they are near us we feel very happy and cheerful . If we need any help, they help us at once. As soon as any soul, even f r o m Realm I, calls fo r help, these H i g h G o o d S o u l s are t h e r e in m i n u t e s . Even on E a r t h , if a s o u l genuinely and sincerely calls fo r help, help is given at once. It d o e s n ' t m a t t e r w h e t h e r t ha t sou l is on Rea lm I , on E a r t h or on a h igher level. Genuine calls for help will always be answered.

You inay have o f t e n heard s tor ies abou t souls on Ear th who called for help f r o m G o d and a miracle happened. You

The High G o o d Souls 129

may have even called for help in a very tense s i tua t ion and received help in some very odd way, which you would call a miracle.

Even your loved ones in the spir i t world can and do save you many times. You can be sure that your loved ones in the spir i t world care fo r you a great deal. Always remember t h a t real t r u e love never dies , n o t even a f t e r d e a t h on Ear th . Love is greater than death. Love is eternal. Death is just a transition f r o m o n e wor ld to ano the r , f r o m one body to another, f r o m Ear th to heaven or hell.

Death is not something big at all, but love is extraordinarily great.

Now, le t ' s talk a l i t t l e b i t m o r e a b o u t G o d A l m i g h t y 's helpers. We call them H i g h G o o d Souls, and you call them angels. We m u s t po in t ou t that angels do not have wings, however as they move real fast , their robes look like wings. Just as they are able to take human form, they are able to create wings to impress non believers. So, Ea r th souls see wings and believe tha t an angel gave them the message and helped them.

H i g h G o o d Souls are very humble , considerate and under -s tanding. They even relax certain of G o d Almighty 's laws in certain cases, by f i r s t making a request t o H i s H i g h e s t G o o d Soul, who asks O u r G o d Almighty. T h i s pe rmiss ion m urgent s i tua t ions comes wi th in seconds or minu tes . If it is no t urgent it takes a few hou r s or, at the mos t , a few days.

W h enever we want s o m e t h i n g that is no t permissible , we appeal t o the head o f o u r Rea lm. H e will hear us o u t


c a r e f u l l y and ask s o m e q u e s t i o n s , and if he f ee l s o u r request is genuine, and will not ha rm anyone, he will p u t a r eques t t o our H i g h e s t G o o d Sou l t o seek p e r m i s s i o n f r o m O u r G o d Almighty.

T h i s is the d i f f e rence be tween the Ea r th wor ld and the sp i r i t wor ld . T h e ru l e r s o f o u r Rea lms are so h u m b l e , unde r s t and ing and considera te tha t we can always feel free to talk to them. T h e y are so hones t , kind and loving tha t we never fear them. T h e y are so selfless that we fully t ru s t t hem. T h e y lovingly and kindly make us u n d e r s t a n d tha t certain th ings are wrong, and why they are wrong.

T h e y never reject ou r reques t s in a rude manner . If they th ink it is wrong they will explain this to us and help us unde r s t and why it is n o t possible. They are very reasonable and k ind-hear ted . We fully t ru s t and respect them, obeying t h e m happi ly because we know they will never let us go wrong.

T h e s e are G o d A l m i g h t y ' s h e l p e r s — o u r H i g h G o o d Souls , and your angels.

12-06-1981

WHAT IS A G O O D DEED?

Good deeds are those that are done with an absolutely selfless motive. I f there is even a tiny bit of selfishness in it, it cannot be called a good

deed; it would be a self ish deed.

G o o d deeds that are p e r f o r m e d selflessly are a real b o o n to your p rogress . T h e y will carry you h igher m o r e rapidly

What Is A G o o d Deed? 131

than any th ing else. U n f o r t u n a t e l y , beh ind all the i r good deeds, peop le on E a r t h a l m o s t always t h ink t h a t it will take them to a higher level and their sins will be forgiven.

We m u s t warn you t h a t t h i s t h o u g h t b r i n g s you lower ra ther than takes you to a h igher level. On ly those g o o d deeds that are done natural ly and ou t of k indness , w i thou t any t h o u g h t o f y o u r g o i n g h igher , can be c o n s i d e r e d se l f l e s s g o o d d e e d s . A f t e r p e r f o r m i n g t h e g o o d deed , immediately forget abou t it. D o n ' t th ink of it at all. If you are able to do that , no self ish t h o u g h t will pene t ra te your mind . A selfish a f t e r t h o u g h t always p u t s you on the wrong track. So if you have done a good deed automatically and just for kindness' sake, forget about it immediately.

G o o d deeds done ent i re ly f o r the sake of forg iveness in order t o wipe ou t your karma, w i thou t genuine repentance, then are no t selfless, good deeds. They will never take you to a higher level; you can be sure of that .

Befo re d o i n g a g o o d deed , be sure y o u r m o t i v e is n o t selfish at all. If you succeed in that , you m u s t also succeed in fo rge t t i ng abou t it entirely. Success in th is is in your own hands.

For example, if you do someth ing for the sake of a loved one, you don ' t care to broadcast it or th ink twice abou t it. You do it ou t of love fo r tha t beloved soul . You love to care for them, to see to their c o m f o r t s and you even like to make sacrifices for t hem. There fo re , whatever you do for your beloved, take joy in it, then forget it as t h o u g h it was a natural deed, an expression of t rue a f fec t ion — unless, o f course, your love is no t t rue.


In one second, your good deed can turn in to a self ish one — so before you have t ime to t h m k more, just forge t about it. So remember, one t iny bit of a selfish t h o u g h t will wipe o f f your good deed.

13-06-1981

REVENGE

Revenge is a very bad th ing . Ea r th peop le d o n o t know what revenge actually means. Revenge comes t o a p e r s o n ' s m i n d if he or she is j e a l o u s o f

another . For example, say Peter is jealous of Katie as she is a popular , nice, sweet pe r son . So Peter wants t o run her down, so he s tar ts spreading r u m o u r s about Katie, or even tries t o harm her by t u rn ing her loved ones against her, or harassing and harming her in o ther ways. T h i s is entirely wrong. T h i s act will b r ing Peter t o a very low level. Now, suppose Katie saw how wrongly Peter behaved and how he has ha rmed her. Seeing how wrongly Peter behaved, in her defence if Katie tries t o show Peter s t rue colours t o the w o r l d , t h e n t h a t is n o t w r o n g . Kat ie s h o u l d s h o w the world how bad Peter is, so that other people will not he fooled by him, will be a ler t , and w o n ' t b e c o m e v i c t ims o f P e t e r ' s revenge. Showing the world the facts about Peter 's meanness will b r ing Katie t o a h igher level. But her hear t m u s t be g o o d and her i n t e n t i o n s p u r e . T h i s is n o t c o n s i d e r e d revenge, as many would call it, as your motive is to save others

from suffering what you suffered. N o one else will b e c o m e P e t e r ' s v ic t im, and t h a t is a g o o d deed. P lease do n o t expose evil at the expense of harming your loved ones or y o u r s e l f . So you see, p e o p l e on E a r t h o f t e n d o n o t unde r s t and the di f ference between good and bad.

Suresh's Story 133

SURESH'S STORY

O n e day, Suresh was in t roduced to ], a very young widow. She was of loose character and began f l i r t ing with Suresh, who was married and had three children. J made Suresh so crazy a b o u t her tha t he had an affa i r wi th her and even p r o m i s e d her an a p a r t m e n t . J was hav ing a f f a i r s w i t h o thers as well, bu t Suresh never knew abou t tha t and fell so madly in love that he became like a slave to her. J kept ge t t ing money and jewellery f r o m Suresh. Suresh ' s fa ther f o u n d ou t that Suresh was wast ing his money on a woman, talked to Suresh very strongly, and b r o u g h t h im back to his senses, as he knew tha t Suresh was a good soul b u t had a weakness lor women. Suresh u n d e r s t o o d how wrong he was and he broke o f f all re la t ions with J. ) was a very mean and vengefu l woman . So she wan ted to take revenge on Suresh and his family. As 1 said before , she had several lovers, and she soon became pregnan t by one of them. J took a pregnancy test f r o m a well-known hospi ta l and got a paper s t a t ing she was, indeed, p regnan t . She t ook th is paper to Suresh 's house and to ld his parents and wife that Suresh had foo led her saying he would marry her, had an a f fa i r wi th her, and now she was p r e g n a n t . She showed them the paper f r o m the hospi ta l along wi th some o the r p a p e r s t h a t p r o v e d t h a t S u r e s h had t r i e d t o f i n d an a p a r t m e n t in her name . S u r e s h s m o t h e r knew n o t h i n g abou t this . As she had a weak heart , Suresh ' s fa ther had never t o ld her a n y t h i n g a b o u t it. Su resh ' s wife did n o t know either.

Suresh 's mo the r had the shock of her life, and tha t same n igh t she passed away. S u r e s h ' s wife c o u l d n ' t bear the shock either, and soon a f t e r her m o t h e r - m - l a w ' s funera l ,


she left Suresh, taking their children with her.

Suresh and his fa ther were overwhelmed, and f o u n d it very d i f f i cu l t to cont ro l themselves. They wanted to kill J, who h a d r u i n e d t h e i r l ives and was s t i l l d e m a n d i n g an apa r tmen t and money f r o m Suresh, so they began to plan her murder . They were good souls, bu t this disgrace and los s of t he i r loved o n e s m a d e t h e m t h i n k o f revenge. Fo r tuna te ly f o r t h e m a very p ious good f r i e n d of the i r s came by to give his condolences . Suresh and his fa ther to ld h im their story, and said they wanted to kill her.

T h e i r f r i e n d said, "Look , my dear f r i ends , I u n d e r s t a n d w h a t y o u w e n t t h r o u g h a n d w h a t y o u are s t i l l g o i n g th rough , bu t l isten to th is old man and save your souls. It is not in your hands to kill her. It is entirely and absolutely in G o d ' s hands, so please don ' t go against G o d Almighty. Ge t rid of those evil ideas f r o m your good minds ; they will ha rm you more than her. Both of you will fall so low that you w o n ' t be able t o see y o u r dear m o t h e r in heaven. Please s top this awful way of th inking. Instead, you can do s o m e t h i n g that will please G o d Almighty. You can refuse to pay her any money. She is an evil woman, so you can expose her by telling everyone who she is. You can br ing o u t all her wickedness . G o d will be p leased by th i s as o thers won ' t be fooled by her anymore, and there may also be a chance of her improving."

T h i s good advice and guidance saved Suresh and his fa ther f r o m becoming s infu l souls.

You Cannot Treat Everyone In T h e Same Manner 135

1 4 - 0 6 - 1 9 8 1

YOU C A N N O T TREAT EVERYONE IN THE SAME MANNER

If a good soul sees someone doing wrong, he will tell that person right away, or tactfully let him know where he is wrong and be glad tha t he has improved tha t

person. In this case the motive is purely to help the soul. Bad souls will also try to show where ano ther pe r son is wrong, bu t will take pr ide in how they made h im realise where he was wrong, and then ridicule him. T h i s is a f o r m of revenge. A g o o d s o u l fee ls h a p p y t h i n k i n g he has improved someone.

If you are on a higher level your subconscious mind will guide you, but if you are on a lower level it is d i f f icu l t for you to make good judgments . In the case of good deeds, a good deed done to a good soul will help the soul improve; however, the same good deed done to a bad soul will do the reverse — it will make the bad soul view the good deed as a sign of weakness and he will take advantage of the s i tuat ion.

For example, suppose Bomi comes to your house for a visit and, when you go ou t of the room to serve dr inks or to get something to eat, he steals money f rom your house. W h e n vou re-enter the room, you notice what has happened, so you give h im s o m e m o r e money, saying, " I n s t e a d of stealing it, you should have asked me. I would have given it to you." He will feel horrible and say, "Sorry, I will never steal again, and I am sure he will stick to that as he is a good soul who was tempted , or mavbe he had a great need. But the same t rea tment t o some bad souls would encourage


t hem and they would laugh and still try to foo l o thers and you several more t imes , which will send you t o a lower level. So a good deed done to one person would be good fo r h im as well as f o r you, bu t done to a n o t h e r may be entirely bad for b o t h of you.

It is the same with forgiveness. If you forgive a good soul he will try his best to improve. H i s subconsc ious mind will make h im realise where he went wrong. But if you forgive a bad soul wi thou t telling h im where he went wrong, he will laugh at you, call you a fool , and go on with his bad ways. S ince you e n c o u r a g e d h im, you will also fal l lower. So every man on Ear th is no t the same.

You cannot treat everyone in the same manner.

15-06-1981

FACE YOUR PROBLEMS NOW, BRAVELY AND WITH A SMILE

In your wor ld , it is abso lu te ly i m p o s s i b l e t o get all happiness and c o m f o r t . You have to bear d i f f icul t ies , p r o b l e m s , m i se r i e s and s icknesses b e c a u s e w i t h o u t

such p rob lems , you canno t live on Ear th . W h a t is m o s t impor t an t , of course, is how you face your problems. You must face them bravely and with a smile, and never try to run away from them. M a n y m o r e p r o b l e m s will always c r o p up , so it is b e s t t o lace all y o u r p r o b l e m s courageously and happily. If you are a good soul, or one who genuinely and sincerely wants to be good, you can be sure that God is with you t h r o u g h o u t the way. Trus t H im, pray t o H i m , ask f o r H i s g u i d a n c e , and y o u r s ince re prayers will never go unanswered.

Never Encourage Negativity In Others 137

NEVER ENCOURAGE NEGATIVITY IN OTHERS

If you have no guts t o f i gh t evil, it is best t o avoid evil and bad people. Stay away f r o m them, as evil people and their i n f l u e n c e will always h a r m you. Your v i b r a t i o n s will be damaged and you will def ini te ly fall to a lower level. People on Ear th will say, " H o w can we avoid evil, as bad people are all a round us?" We do unders tand tha t there are many bad souls on Ear th and you can of course talk to t h e m and live next door to them, b u t never be f r iendly with them. A small conversat ion, a n o d and a smile, and then get away f r o m them. But do no t be a hypocri te . Be he lp fu l to them when the need arises, b u t never encourage t h e m in do ing evil th ings . If you are no t f r iendly with them, they will also stay away f r o m you in m o s t cases. Keep them at a distance, as it is no t possible fo r an ordinary good soul t o improve such bad people . D o he lp g o o d souls , however, or ones who sincerely want t o improve. There are few good souls who have the s t r e n g t h t o improve evil souls and n o t go wrong themselves. It is d i f f icu l t to improve bad souls, as even good souls are in f luenced by bad and evil.

16-06-1981

VIEW THINGS FROM A SPIRITUAL ANGLE

Cr o o k e d , evil p e o p l e can never t h i n k or w o r k s t r a i g h t . G o o d s o u l s are never able t o give improper advice and knowingly p u t the i r fellow

m a n on t h e w r o n g p a t h . Is it a s in t o r e j o i c e in t he pun i shmen t of an evil person? Let us see:

I. II you are glad the evil person learnt a lesson, was s topped f r o m ha rming others , and was given a chance


t o improve — and tha t there is a possibi l i ty of t h e m improving — who wouldn ' t be happy? T h i s is natural .

2. If your happiness is vindictive — that is a sin.

So there are always two sides. It entirely depends on how you view things, what are your reactions, and what is your in t en t ion or motive.

17-06-1981

D O NOT LET HOROSCOPES INFLUENCE YOU

One th ing we would like to clarify is with regards to h o r o s c o p e s . W h e n you read y o u r weekly or daily p red ic t ions in the newspapers , it will have

an ef fec t on your mind . Your t h o u g h t s are very power fu l and are affected by what you read, thus ensur ing the flow o f e v e n t s as pe r t h e h o r o s c o p e . So you m a y say t h e horoscope was r ight .

T h i s is n o t h i n g b u t bra inwashing for weak-minded people. If you w a n t t o make s o m e t h i n g h a p p e n , y o u r p o s i t i v e t h o u g h t s will d e f i n i t e l y h e l p in m o s t cases . Your subconsc ious mind will know that the horoscope is wrong b u t y o u r phys i ca l m i n d m a y t h i n k it is r i g h t . Your subconsc ious m i n d knows the t r u t h . If the h o r o s c o p e is wrong, your subconsc ious m i n d may no t coopera te with you, so do no t be d i sappoin ted . T h i n k of everything that h a p p e n s as G o d ' s wish , and t h a n k G o d A l m i g h t y f o r properly guiding you. Use your own free will, so do no t be fo oled by as t ro logers and p red ic t ions . It all d e p e n d s on you and your choices.

Power Can Be Used For Good Or Bad 139

POWER CAN BE USED FOR G O O D OR BAD - PROJECTING AND RECEIVING POWERS

Your world, the sp i r i t wor ld and the en t i r e universe all have certain powers. T h i s power is s t ronger at some places and less so at o thers , b u t it is always there. In the spir i t wor ld , we d o n ' t have to genera te it as o u r m i n d is ou r powerhouse. We easily grasp this power ourselves. But on Earth, you have n o t u n d e r s t o o d how to harness it yourself, so you depend on electricity, which is a lower f o r m of this power.

Some human beings can receive our messages because they have receiving powers. S o m e have pro jec t ing powers . Some have a great deal of power while o thers have less, and some are lucky enough to have a balance of b o t h receiving and p ro j ec t i ng powers . Bo th these powers , if used correct ly, will do you and the people a round you a world of good, as g o o d s o u l s are n e a r e r t o G o d A l m i g h t y a n d t h e i r subconsc ious mind also guides them — they use this power f o r good. But t h e s a m e p o w e r in bad p e o p l e is very dangerous, as they can use it fo r evil.

The power is the same, but to use it for good or bad is in the individual's hands. It is even dangerous fo r weak-m i n d e d p e o p l e , as t h e y b e c o m e p o m p o u s a n d m a n i -pulative. Th i s br ings them to lower Realms, where negative souls make that pe r son go even more wrong. We advise the good souls who have this power to pray and concentra te , and willingly give your m i n d to a good spir i t soul (a dear loved one) who will be able to guide you and help you lead a very good lite on Ear th . Like a t t racts like — bad a t t rac ts bad and good a t t rac ts good . Even bad souls who have this power have a very good o p p o r t u n i t y of improving.


Remember, it is very dangerous for an evil man to use this power. Nega t ive souls are wai t ing to lead peop le to the lowest of Realms. So, weak-minded , g o o d souls , please d o n ' t try to develop th is power. Remember , once a bad sp i r i t gets con t ro l o f your m i n d it is really d i f f i c u l t t o drive it ou t .

18-06-1981

TO GET HELP FROM SPIRIT SOULS, ALWAYS BE C O O L AND CALM

Always keep cool, calm and relaxed. Stay tens ion- f ree so that spir i t souls can guide you. You m u s t learn to pu t fa i th in G o d Almighty — G o d is great.

D o n o t believe a s t ro loge r s , or o t h e r such ind iv idua l s — learn to p u t complete fa i th in G o d Almighty. Your genuine and sincere fai th in G o d Almighty will work miracles. H e is A L M I G H T Y , so no one can go against H i m .

If you su f fe r and prob lems crop up, treat it as your karma, tes t and t ra ining, face it courageous ly and happily. Your sincere prayers will help you a great deal. Keep your mind occupied and don ' t ha rm anyone and you can be sure you will get he lp and gu idance s t r a igh t f r o m G o d Almigh ty t h rough spiri t souls.

Your sincere prayers and your genuine fa i th in G o d will pull you th rough any problems. As you are on Ear th , there are b o u n d to be problems, bu t you mus t face them, so face them with a courageous smile. Your fai th in G o d and your prayers will defini tely be of great use to us as well, as it makes it easier fo r us to reach you, guide you, and help you.

Marriage 141

19-06-1981

MARRIAGE

There are no marr iages in the spiri t world, bu t we do try to m e n d broken marriages on Ear th because of the chi ldren, and also because a couple will need

each o the r in their o ld age. On Earth, wise men created marriages to safeguard children because they saw tha t people were no t being responsible and taking care o f their chi ldren. T h e r e f o r e , they made marr iage c o m p u l s o r y fo r bege t t i ng chi ldren, because b o t h pa ren t s can b r ing up a child bet ter than jus t one.

It is wise for two people to stay together, help each other, and guide their chi ldren to be be t te r ci t izens. In their old age, the couple can also look a f t e r each other , give each o ther company and face the world 's p rob lems together . So m a r r i a g e s are not d e s t i n e d . W e are a f r a i d t o say th i s , however, as many people on Ear th will now say, "Marriages are n o t m a d e by G o d , so why get m a r r i e d a n d c rea te p r o b l e m s ? Let us be f r e e . " I advise y o u t o t h i n k ha rd before publ i sh ing this in our book. We like to help reuni te those with broken marr iages so they may live happily, as t h a t is b e s t f o r t h e m , b u t s o m e t i m e s o n e p a r t n e r is entirely evil abusing the o ther par tner and /o r their children physical ly and menta l ly . It b e c o m e s i m p o s s i b l e f o r the o ther to live with her or him, in which case we do pray for G o d to do what is best fo r all concerned.

It is best for husband and wife to love each other, and live m ha rmony and happ ines s as a un i t ed fami ly wi th their children, so that they can face problems in a much bet ter way. Harmony and happiness at home are most necessary


for every human being on Earth. The re has to be give and take and tolerat ion in all marriages.

15-01-1984

DEVELOP YOUR POWER IN THE RIGHT MANNER

In the spiri t world as well as on Ear th there is electric power, which you c a n n o t see. T h i s power he lps you greatly on Ear th , and it also helps you receive messages

t h r o u g h the phone, radio, or TV. T h e h u m a n brain, is just like the phone, radio, or TV. Some people on Ear th have d e v e l o p e d rece iv ing power , s o m e have d e v e l o p e d o n l y p ro jec t ing power, and some have developed a good balance o f b o t h . W h o e v e r has m o r e p r o j e c t i n g p o w e r c a n n o t receive o u r sp i r i t messages , as they have less receiving power in them. M o s t people on Ear th have psychic powers, b u t t o deve lop t h e m is in y o u r h a n d s , and it is m o s t i m p o r t a n t t o cons ide r how you develop t h e m . T h e same power can be used in b o t h ways — for evil or good — so it is in your own hands to ru in yourself, or rise and be happy.

Somet imes , we are no t pe rmi t t ed to tell you someth ing , or answer a certain ques t ion , so please never try to force us by repeatedly asking tha t ques t ion .

Everyone sins on Ear th . The re cannot be anyone who has n o t s inned , bu t the i r levels d i f fe r . S o m e sin very l i t t le , some more so, and some in the extreme. So if you sin even a little, you have to pay t h rough karma and we cannot s top tha t . You m u s t u n d e r s t a n d th is t ho rough ly — we canno t s t o p your p u n i s h m e n t . S o m e t i m e s we have to r e fu se to help cer tain people, and this is the main reason. We are m o s t will ing to help t hose who are good, i nnocen t , and

Prayers Should Always Be Short And Sincere 143

suf fe r ing due to the evil people on Ear th , so if we refuse to help or guide you, try and f ind ou t what sins you have c o m m i t t e d and repent sincerely for them, so tha t we can guide you in the fu tu r e .

O n l y negat ive sou l s are keen to make you miserab le by misleading you and gu id ing you wrongly, b u t g o o d a t t rac ts good, and evil a t t rac ts evil, so try hard to be good and G o d will definitely help you.

25 -01 -1984

PRAYERS SHOULD ALWAYS BE SHORT AND SINCERE

You m u s t have a b s o l u t e c o n c e n t r a t i o n . In y o u r world, long prayers never let you concent ra te , nor can you be complete ly sincere in them. W h e n you

read p r a y e r s f r o m a b o o k w i t h o u t a b s o l u t e d e v o t i o n , concent ra t ion and sincerity, it is just like reading a novel.

Try to pray every day in the same place, as you will build strong and pure vibrations in that place. Of course, it is O K to pray in any place, bu t if you choose jus t one place the good vibra t ions will reflect back to you and this will help you greatly.

All places are G o d ' s places, so you can say shor t prayers even while travelling. You mus t have fa i th . Even if you pick up a s tone f r o m a road, wash it, keep it on a table, and worsh ip it sincerely, your prayers create g o o d v ibra t ions and those v ibra t ions will be absorbed by the s tone. Your sincere daily prayers create good v ib ra t ions a r o u n d tha t s tone and place, and th is vibrates back to you, b r ing ing


you peace of mind and wisdom, and even pu r i fy ing your soul . Jus t have comple t e fa i th in G o d and be absolu te ly sincere, and your prayers will work wonders .

26 -01 -1984

PRIDE ALWAYS MAKES YOU FALL SPIRITUALLY

Always be h u m b l e . N e v e r t h i n k s o m e o n e will be s t r anded w i t h o u t your help. G o d is there to help those who need help. You are a mere h u m a n being.

If you become f a m o u s and you allow pride to set in, then p r ide will one day make you fall. So never be p r o u d . If p r ide fills your m i n d you canno t th ink s t ra ight , you will make many mistakes and fall spiritually. I f your head is in the air, it will be filled with nothing but air. You will have n o w i s d o m . You can be s u r e t h a t n o o n e is h e l p l e s s w i t h o u t you . O n l y you will be h e l p l e s s w i t h o u t G o d Almighty.

W h o e v e r tht«-ks someone will be helpless w i t h o u t h im is the greatest fool . If G o d gave you someth ing to be p r o u d of, b e humble none the less ; o therwise , you will def in i te ly fall. N o t h i n g happens before its t ime — so jus t wait and relax — your tens ion won ' t help it happen before its t ime. Ra the r , it will h a r m you. So do relax and pray. G o d is great.

O n Ear th , you have to live wi th bad and evil sou ls and keep your own soul pure , s t r o n g and good . It is a very d i f f i cu l t task, b u t G o d stays with good souls and looks af ter them if they want H i s pro tec t ion . Show concern and affec t ion for o thers and have the sincere desire to always

You Cannot Escape Paying For Your Sins 145

stay good, in spi te of su f f e r ing on Ear th .

28 -01 -1984

YOU CANNOT ESCAPE PAYING FOR YOUR SINS

Whatever you sow, you will reap. G o d ' s just ice is absolutely per fec t . It may no t come immediately, b u t eventual ly , you will have to pay f o r your

sins.

G o d always gives h in t s to good souls who go wrong, who sin somehow or the o ther . H e shows you where you are going wrong, bu t people on Ear th don ' t even realise this, so ins t ead of s t o p p i n g and t ry ing t o improve , they go deeper and deeper in to evil. I f they fail in their evil ways, they d o n ' t realise t ha t G o d does n o t want t h e m to sin. Rather, they go deeper in to sin, th inking, "I will show how intell igent I am." We pi ty such souls. T h e y go so deep in to evil tha t they are on the pa th of ' no re turn ' , and they will land in hell.

PART II

Q & A

The desk in Khorshed Bhavnagri's Bombay home where she communicated with her sons

AUTOMATIC WRITING <g§>

"Little knowledge is a dangerous thing."

"We are more alive in the spirit world than you are on Earth. We can see you, hear you, touch you and feel you."

"Real true love never dies, not even after your death on Earth. Love is eternal."

Never attempt automatic writing on your own. It is extremely dangerous to start automatic writing on your own without a protective link, and without following proper instructions. Only an experienced and already-linked person can connect your link. This will ensure that no negative inter-ference, such as an astral soul or unknown negative energy, will harm you.

When we communicate with the dead, are we not

disturbing their souls?

To say that we are dead is wrong. We are m o r e alive than '•'ou are on Ear th . Your earthly life is just one more s top in an in f in i t e journey. H o w can c o m m u n i c a t i o n end where there is t rue love? It is communica t ion between souls and


s o u l s never die . T h e r e f o r e , you need t o c h a n g e y o u r u n d e r s t a n d i n g of d e a t h . W h a t d ies is y o u r ego, your physical body — what remains is your soul, which is more alive, more vibrant, more loving than the pe r son the soul is in communica t ion with on Earth. We, spir i t souls have no bodily aches or pains. Having discarded b o t h our human and astral bodies, we are completely free. G o d has given us the choice to shape our own lives here in the spir i t world, jus t as on Ear th . We can choose work tha t we like, pray, rejoice, gain i n f o r m a t i o n and spiri tual knowledge when we like. We are no t b o u n d by the physicality of your world, and we are led c o m p l e t e l y by the s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d , wh ich is o u r t r u e , s p i r i t u a l m i n d . So , w h e n you c o m m u n i c a t e wi th us, you are no t " d i s t u r b i n g the dead" because we are more alive than you are.

Nowadays young people are more open minded , so they are m o r e r ecep t ive t o s p i r i t c o m m u n i c a t i o n s u n l i k e t h e i r parents who are brainwashed, and have fixed ideas due to cons tan t condi t ion ing .

What is automatic writing?

Automat ic wri t ing is the process th rough which spir i t souls communica t e with h u m a n beings on Ear th . All it requires is a pen, paper and a na tu ra l f lame. To p u t it simply, the sp i r i t soul with w h o m you are c o m m u n i c a t i n g will move the pen while you hold it l ightly on the page, and slowly, over time, words and later sentences will f o rm . We do no t wish to disclose details about automat ic wr i t ing because it is n o t a p r a c t i c e t h a t can be t aken l igh t ly . A negative interference, such as an astral soul or unknown negative energy, can harm you during automatic writing. It can

Automatic Writing 175

Different Stages of Automatic Writing

Stage 1

Stage 2


Stage 5 - Telepathic Telepathic communication received by Khorshed Bhavnagri in her own

handwriting. Here spirit souls impress the thought directly into the mind of the Earth soul. This is known as Telepathy.

tongue). Communication received in Guiarati (Khorshed Bhavnaqri's mother

Stage 4


only be done when you have a protective link between you and t h e s o u l in t h e s p i r i t w o r l d w i t h w h o m y o u wish t o communica t e . O n l y an experienced p e r s o n who is already linked can join your link. Therefore , when there is a request fo r au tomat ic wri t ing, the f i rs t s tep is t o gain permiss ion f r o m the sp i r i t wor ld ; only if p e r m i s s i o n is g r a n t e d can de ta i l ed i n s t r u c t i o n s be given, wh ich m u s t be f o l l o w e d completely. If done correctly under proper guidance, th i s is the safest f o r m of c o m m u n i c a t i o n wi th sp i r i t sou l s because a protec t ive link is f o r m e d between you and the spir i t soul with whom you will communica te . T h i s link is pro tec ted by h i g h e r s p i r i t s o u l s , so n o low- leve l o r a s t r a l s o u l can interfere and mislead you. Here in the spi r i t world we are no t pe rmi t t ed to f o r m a link with negative souls .

Automat ic wri t ing is a g i f t f r o m G o d Almighty to souls on Ear th , t h r o u g h which they can keep in t o u c h wi th their loved ones. O n l y spir i t souls on higher spi r i tual levels and p e o p l e on E a r t h w h o are on t he r i g h t p a t h are given permiss ion to c o m m u n i c a t e . T h e m o s t i m p o r t a n t advan-tage o f learning a u t o m a t i c wr i t ing is t ha t you can be in t o u c h wi th y o u r d e p a r t e d loved o n e s and receive the i r guidance, which is a source of great c o m f o r t t o people on Ear th . However, the main p u r p o s e o f a u t o m a t i c wri t ing, u n d e r t he g u i d a n c e o f s p i r i t sou l s , is t o h e l p you t o improve spiritually and eventua l ly h e l p o t h e r s as well. Whi le you write, your subconsc ious m i n d is activated and you receive p r o t e c t i o n (so negat ive energy c a n n o t ha rm vou) and are healed. Eventually, if you are on the r ight path, you will be able to help others . You will be able to receive messages for o the r people and help those in need of spiri tual knowledge and guidance. Unfor tuna te ly , many people today are misus ing this g i f t . As soon as they start


au tomat ic wri t ing, they give messages to o the r s that may come f r o m their own physical m ind and may be completely wrong. Some people use this g i f t to feed their own ego, to gain power, success, and fame, or to con t ro l o thers . If this is done, the spir i t soul will s top c o m m u n i c a t i n g with the soul on Ear th . Two th ings may happen as a resul t of this: one, the person on Ear th will con t inue to wri te messages on his o w n f r o m h i s p h y s i c a l m i n d , w h i c h will be comple te ly wrong ; two, a negat ive as t ra l sou l will send messages to the soul on Ear th and will complete ly mislead that soul.

Would it be correct to say that automatic writing

is a spiritual practice?

Yes, that is exactly what it is. G o d wan ts spi r i t souls t o help h u m a n souls . It is ou r duty to guide you. Souls on Ear th have been brainwashed in to believing tha t au tomat ic w r i t i n g is a n e g a t i v e p r a c t i c e and t h a t it h i n d e r s o u r progress . Sp i r i tua l g rowth is the u l t ima t e aim. A l though h u m a n b e i n g s f i r s t t a lk t o t h e i r d e c e a s e d loved o n e s because of shock or grief, eventually you realise that these loved ones now serve as spir i tual guardians and pro tec tors .

<£!§> Why don't all souls who have passed away

communicate with their loved ones? Don't all souls

want to ease the pain and suffering of their loved ones

on Earth?

S o m e souls on E a r t h are g i f t ed m e d i u m s who have the ability to receive messages f r o m the spir i t world. Some are b o r n wi th th i s g i f t — it is a g i f t they have earned over


l i fe t imes , and it is the i r sp i r i tua l m i s s i o n . Also, n o t all souls on Ear th believe in an af ter l i fe or in G o d . People say they do, bu t they do n o t live the i r lives accordingly, so they have fai led in the i r tes t and as a resu l t the i r loved ones are no t allowed to communica te wi th them. The first t h ing spirit souls need is faith. If you look fo r proof , you will never f i n d it. You may say that you are human and you need proof, but the truth is that you want proof — you don't need it. In your heart, you know G o d exists and people who go to the spir i t world are still alive. Only logic prevents you f r o m accept ing it. If we gave you p roo f there w o u l d be n o t e s t . A f t e r l o s i n g t h e i r loved ones , s o m e people become very b i t te r and angry and they blame God . Instead of seeking H i s help dur ing the t o u g h times, they tu rn away f r o m H i m . It is only natural t o feel pain, bu t try n o t t o become b i t t e r and angry. Even t h o u g h it is very d i f f i c u l t , u se t h a t p a i n to h e l p o t h e r s . D o n o t be c o n s u m e d by t ha t pa in and blame G o d . C o m m u n i c a t i o n can only occur if the re is t r u e love be tween t he h u m a n being and the spir i t being. The i r souls long to be in touch with each other. Initially, the spir i t be ing wants to provide c o m f o r t to the Ea r th soul , b u t eventually the aim is fo r b o t h souls t o p rogress spiri tually. However , if the Ear th soul has fallen to a very low Realm then commun ica t i on is not permi t ted , because the Ear th soul ' s subconsc ious mind is on the verge of going to sleep.

If you choose to be s t rong and are open, we are allowed to reach you in order to restore your fa i th . Please unders tand that there is a spi r i tual law at work here. T h e law is neutral — it is not biased. If you are on the r ight path, spiri t souls do their best to reach you. Even t h o u g h you are in pain, you mus t still be receptive. There are so many spiri t souls


t rying to reach o u t t o their loved ones on Ear th in order to c o m f o r t them, b u t it is o f t e n no t possible simply because people on Ear th do n o t believe in an af ter l i fe . T h e i r minds are no t open to the possibi l i ty and the ques t ion of comm-unica t ion therefore does no t arise. We are prepared to take many steps toward you, b u t the f i rs t s tep, that o t fai th, of having an open mind , has to come f r o m you. T h a t is the spir i tual law.

What are the benefits of automatic writing?

1. G o o d spiri t souls and people on Ear th are given this g i f t fo r spir i tual progress and selfless service.

2. Automat ic wr i t ing is a spiri tual practice wherein spiri t souls provide guidance to Ear th souls . However this gu idance may jus t be a h in t , so one s h o u l d n o t be dependent on it totally.

3. Spir i t souls help the Ear th souls t o go t h r o u g h their tests, t ra ining and karma bravely and smilingly. They also help the Ea r th soul to f ind his or her spir i tual miss ion.

4- Spiri t souls convey the t rue laws of G o d Almighty to Ear th souls.

5. D u r i n g t he p rocess o f a u t o m a t i c wr i t i ng the sp i r i t soul provides healing to the Ear th soul.

6. It also opens the subconsc ious mind more and more.

THE SPIRIT WORLD

<m

"Earth is our school; our real home is the spirit world."

"Only genuine calls for help are answered."

How, exactly, does one define a spirit being?

We can explain this in relat ion to who you are. T h e f i rs t t h ing tha t you need t o u n d e r s t a n d is t h a t you are n o t human' . You are a spir i t being in h u m a n form. T h a t is the

case wi th everyone on Ea r th . You do n o t have only one body, you have three:

1. T h e h u m a n body. 2. T h e astral body. h T h e spiri t body.

W h e n you die, you go f r o m human to astral then to spiri t fo rm. T h a t is t he n a t u r a l p rogress ion . A f t e r dea th your earthly body and your physical mind die. T h e earthly body is much heavier than your astral and spir i t body. W h e n you have shed y o u r e a r t h l y b o d y and p h y s i c a l m i n d , you become an astral being. An astral being will look like the Hu man being did on Ear th at the t ime of death. An astral body is a replica of the human body, b u t is much lighter. From an astral being, the soul and subconsc ious mind will


t r a n s f o r m i n t o a sp i r i t be ing . T h e sp i r i t b o d y is m u c h l ighter than the earthly and astral body. It is as l ight as a feather . T h e sp i r i t be ing on a high sp i r i t ua l level looks much younger than he did on Ear th . Also, his appearance will reflect how evolved the soul is. T h e more advanced a soul, the br ighter and younger the spir i t f o rm .

Do heaven and hell exist?

In o u r c o m m u n i c a t i o n s , we have used the t e rms 'heaven' and 'hell ' , b u t p lease u n d e r s t a n d the t r u t h b e h i n d this . G o d only created a law tha t in the spir i t world, a negative s o u l c a n n o t s t ay in t h e s a m e p lace as a g o o d s o u l . Therefore , when h u m a n s f i rs t used their free will t o move away f r o m the l igh t , a negat ive place was b o r n of the i r collective vibration. In o t h e r words , the seven Rea lms have been made in to what they are by the souls who exist in these Realms. O n l y the seven Realms exist . Heaven and hell are simply the ref lect ion of a soul 's t h o u g h t s , words, and deeds — n o t h i n g more, no th ing less. I f you are on the r i gh t pa th , you s h o u l d n o t be scared. The truth is not meant to instill fear; it is meant to awaken you. Just as there are seven Rea lms , there are seven universes . W h e n you begin your sp i r i tua l journey, you begin in t he f i r s t un ive r se , w i t h t h e goa l o f r e ach ing t h e s e v e n t h . Each u n i v e r s e has d i f f e r e n t d i m e n s i o n s . E a r t h is t h r e e -dimensional and is the th i rd universe.

Why does Cod allow good and bad souls to exist

together on Earth?

It is the miss ion of all good souls to f igh t negativity by

The Spirit World 159

doing what is spir i tual ly r ight . If negativity did no t exist, how could you be tes ted spiritually? G o o d souls are given the o p p o r t u n i t y to help negative souls change and follow the Godly G o o d Path. W h e n negative souls see an act of kindness or a selfless good deed, they migh t be inspired to walk on the r ight pa th .

Is there any hope for these souls?

O f course there is. But only if there is a genuine desire t o improve. In the spir i t world, if spir i t souls hear a genuine call fo r help f r o m the lower Realms they do help. T h a t is the f i rs t s tep tha t a low soul mus t take in order t o change — the motive and desire to improve m u s t be genuine. So do no t despair if you are in the lower Realms of the spir i t world. You will n o t be fo rced to stay there ti l l e terni ty. T h e r e is no s u c h t h i n g as e te rna l d a m n a t i o n . T h e r e is always an o p p o r t u n i t y to grow, to choose goodness and to rise spiritually.

Why don't we remember the spirit world on

Earth?

It humans were to experience the l ightness tha t spir i t souls possess for even a second, you would n o t be able to exist in your phys ica l bod ie s . If you were t o r e m e m b e r every detail of your existence in the spiri t world, you would no t want to survive on Ear th for even a second. T h a t is why you have no consc ious memory of the spi r i t world. It is also your test t o still believe in G o d and in an af ter l i fe in spi te of no visible p roof . T h e sp i r i t wor ld is a place of t ru th . Ear th is a place of test ing.


<H§> If the spirit world is our real home, why don't we

recognise it when we die?

A f t e r d e a t h , t h e b o d y d ies . H o w e v e r , t h e k n o w l e d g e , memory and experiences that a person collects on Ear th do n o t d ie . T h e s e are r e t a i n e d by y o u r s o u l . A l so , y o u r q u a l i t i e s , o r Soul Characteristics, s tay w i t h you . T h e s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d , wh ich is c o n n e c t e d t o y o u r sou l , reveals the m e m o r y and i n f o r m a t i o n o f the sp i r i t wor ld slowly, s tep by step. But if you are s t u b b o r n by na ture or too at tached to the earthly world, then it will be d i f f icu l t fo r you to process what the subconsc ious mind is telling you. As you r ise sp i r i tua l ly your s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d is more open and you will easily recognise the spir i t world as your real home.

How are soul characteristics acquired?

Sou l charac ter i s t ics are qual i t ies you have acqui red over many lives, based on the manner in which you have trained y o u r own sp i r i t . Your sou l will have b o t h pos i t i ve and negative character is t ics . For instance, the posi t ive aspects of your spir i t may be tha t you are selfless, pos i t ive and brave. T h e negat ive aspects , t h o u g h they arise f r o m the physical mind , have been wi th you fo r t o o long and are therefore part o f your Self. So you may be p roud , s t ubborn and t oo analytical. T h e negative quali t ies tha t you possess on Ear th remain with you in the spiri t world, a l though no t as strongly. But r emember tha t you are n o t pe r fec t . You still have flaws, even as a spiri t soul. You will con t inue to grow, even in the sp i r i t wor ld . However, if you are on a high Realm, it means you have worked on these quali t ies in


y o u r e a r t h l y l i f e , a n d t h e f r a c t i o n o f n e g a t i v i t y t h a t remains can be shed easily. Spir i t souls on higher Realms learn th ings o f a m u c h higher nature .

Suppose a person dies and knows he is going to the

lowest Realm, why would he or she go?

A g o o d sou l will au toma t i ca l ly go t o his or her Rea lm since good souls know the peace tha t awaits them. A low soul, however, can choose not to go to the lower Realms. T h i s soul can remain in their astral f o r m — as what you refer to as ghos t s — t o escape the lower Realms. T h e law of free will prevails even in the astral world . You migh t ask, "Where is jus t ice in tha t?" Please u n d e r s t a n d tha t these negat ive s o u l s can never r ise s p i r i t u a l l y or repay the i r karma unt i l they face the t ru th . At some po in t , they have to bear the consequences of their act ions and go to the spir i t world. Also, the more t ime they spend in astral fo rm, the more negative karma they are bui lding, so just ice is always being done.

When we die, do our loved ones come to receive

us?

If you die a f t e r an i l lness , y o u r d e p a r t e d f r i e n d s a n d re la t ives will be p r e s e n t t o w e l c o m e you t o t h e sp i r i t world. T h i s is because they know your due date (date of dea th ) , and are aware o f the fact t h a t you are go ing t o leave Ear th . However, if vour death is sudden — as in our case, when it was no t our due date, b u t rather an accident — spirit souls may take a while to welcome you. If you are a good soul, be sure that they will be there to greet you.


You will be alone only for a few seconds, n o more . If you are a negative soul, do n o t expect a good soul t o welcome you, no t even your own deceased loved ones will be there to greet you. But negative souls will come to take you to the place you deserve.

You mentioned that as soon as you reached the

spirit world, you were taken to the Hall of Rest. Can

you tell us more about this placeP

I f t h e d e a t h o f a p e r s o n o n E a r t h is u n e x p e c t e d and sudden that soul is taken to the Hall of Rest. Since these souls are t raumat ized , they are given healing rays to calm them down. These rays are simply the rays of the sun, b u t are much purer in the spir i t world. Af te r we died, we were extremely worried abou t our M o m and D a d as they had no one to look af ter t h e m and we wondered how they would survive, so we needed to be given healing rays to calm us down.

Similar ly, if t r a u m a t i z e d or anx ious sou l s are n o t calm they will n o t come to t e rms with the fact tha t they are no longer on Ear th . If they remain t raumat ized , they will be unable to process the i n f o r m a t i o n that needs to be given to them about the spir i t world. They will be unable to accept, recognize and f u n c t i o n in their new su r round ings . So the Hall of Rest is where your spiri t is healed and recharged. By the t ime souls emerge f r o m the Hal l of Rest , they are revital ized and have a sub l ime sense o f wel l -being. Each Realm has its own Hall of Rest. But the Hal l of Rest does n o t exist f r o m Realm I to Realm 4 Stage 4- The re fo re , only those souls who are on Realm 4 Stage 5 and above


will be taken to the Hal l of Rest . T h e y canno t stay longer than necessary in the Hal l of Rest.

What happens to souls once they have adjusted to

the spirit world?

Once souls have ad jus ted to the spir i t world, they need to learn abou t the i r new su r round ings . Sou l s who have jus t arrived in the spir i t world have many ques t ions . T h e r e are special spir i t souls who have been t ra ined to assist these souls, b u t there is also a place where these souls can go to access i n f o r m a t i o n : the Ha l l of Learning. T h e Ha l l o f Learning conta ins knowledge abou t G o d ' s laws, about the na tu re o f t he universe , and a b o u t every s ingle aspect o f God ' s creation. However, the i n f o r m a t i o n is only revealed according to a sou l ' s abili ty t o u n d e r s t a n d . T h e Hal l o f Learning is open to each and every good soul in the spir i t world. Jus t as every Realm above Realm 4 Stage 4 has a Hal l of Rest , so it is with the Hal l o f Learning. Extremely evolved spir i t be ings visit these halls t o teach and inspire spi r i t sou ls by spread ing G o d ' s love and wisdom. T h e s e ha l l s are b l e s s e d w i t h ene rgy t h a t e n a b l e s you t o u n d e r s t a n d sp i r i tua l t r u t h s bet ter . You can learn how to fu r the r open your subconsc ious mind , enhance a skill you m i g h t have, seek counse l on how t o solve p rob l ems and learn how t o b e t t e r fo l low y o u r sp i r i t ua l m i s s i o n . T h e possibi l i t ies are endless and it is indeed a place of great learning, as many souls come and share their experiences and e x c h a n g e i n f o r m a t i o n a b o u t o t h e r p l a n e t s a n d d imens ions . Initially, the m o s t i m p o r t a n t f u n c t i o n of the Ha l l o f L e a r n i n g is t h a t it c r ea t e s w i t h i n you a g rea t spiri tual awakening. O n c e souls access knowledge f r o m the Hall of Learning, they realise how o r t h o d o x earthly views


are. T h e Hall o f Learning is like a library ful l of spir i tual t r u t h s .

Are there angels in the spirit world?

Yes, Ange ls are g o o d sou l s who gu ide , he lp and b r i n g messages f r o m G o d Almighty . S o m e t i m e s they come in h u m a n f o r m and s o m e t i m e s they are invisible. T h e y are good souls f r o m Realm 5 Stage 7 and above. Angels f r o m Realm 7 Stage 5 and above can come down to Ear th in any f o r m t o he lp sou l s in case o f emergenc ies , a f t e r t ak ing permiss ion f r o m H i s H i g h e s t G o o d Soul . Angels have the ability and power to p e r f o r m miracles. Souls f r o m Realms 5 and 6 help E a r t h Sou l s too , b u t only f r o m the sp i r i t world. They do n o t come down to Ear th .

Angels do no t have wings, bu t they wear robes, and as they fly very f a s t t h e i r r o b e s give t he a p p e a r a n c e of wings . Howeve r , t h e r e are t i m e s when ange l s a s s u m e v a r i o u s shapes and fo rms , and they somet imes appear t o h u m a n s in f o r m s that have wings because that is how you envision them. Wings are used to symbolically represent angels, t o let people know tha t there is a spiri t world and tha t angels are l ook ing a f t e r t h e m . S o m e souls on E a r t h have seen angels. Each soul is given a robe accord ing to individual requi rements and the robes are made of mater ials tha t have t r emendous power to absorb energy. T h e robes of souls on h i g h e r R e a l m s have m o r e p o w e r t o a b s o r b a n d r e t a i n energy than do the robes o f souls on lower levels. T h e higher you go, the be t te r the vibrat ions, and the br ighter t h e robe ge t s , so t h e robes a b s o r b and s t o r e p o s i t i v e energy. O n the o t h e r hand , d i f f e r e n t robes are requ i red when good spir i t souls go to lower Realms. T h e s e robes


are made of d i f f e ren t materials that do n o t absorb energy, bu t rather reflect it. T h e lower the Realm a soul needs to visi t , t h e g r e a t e r t he r e f l e c t i n g p o w e r o f t h e robe . By reflecting negative energy, the robes keep the vibrat ions o f good souls f r o m being altered. These robes have d i f fe ren t colours, some of which do no t exist on Ear th .

03) Are angels different from Spirit Guides?

Yes, t he t w o are d i f f e r e n t . Every s o u l o n E a r t h has a guardian in the spir i t world who guides the earthly soul. T h i s guardian is known as your Spirit Guide. It is his or her miss ion to guide you on the r ight pa th . As soon as you take b i r th , a sou l in the spir i t wor ld is ass igned as your Sp i r i t G u i d e f r o m b i r t h to dea th . T h i s is d o n e by t he H i g h G o o d Soul of that Realm. You will never know who your Spir i t G u i d e is. Your Spir i t Gd ide will stay with you your entire life. However, when you go wrong your Spir i t Guide will n o t be able to reach you. W h e n a h u m a n being commi ts sins his subconsc ious mind s tar ts t o shut down, and t h e r e wi l l e v e n t u a l l y c o m e a p o i n t when t h e subconsc ious m i n d becomes comple te ly d o r m a n t . W h e n this happens your Spir i t Gu ide will n o longer be able to send you healing, p ro t ec t ion and guidance, as these th ings are accessed by h u m a n s t h r o u g h the subconsc ious mind , which is your main l ink to the sp i r i t wor ld . W h e n your subconscious mind shu t s down, your Spir i t Gu ide has to work extra hard by ' impress ing ' you t h r o u g h your physical mind. T h i s could happen in the f o r m of a physical sign, a person on Ear th giving you the correct guidance, or a wake up call . H o w e v e r , if you s t i l l d o n o t change , t he re is n o t h i n g your S p i r i t G u i d e can do . T h e r e f o r e , G o d has given every h u m a n being double p ro t ec t i on f r o m negative


inf luences. T h e f i r s t is your powerfu l subconsc ious mind; the second is your Spir i t Guide.

It is your Spir i t Gu ide ' s duty to watch, guide and pro tec t you t h r o u g h o u t your life and to enable you to fulf i l l your earthly miss ion. W h e n you need advice, you m u s t pray to G o d genuinely and ask fo r help. Your Spir i t Gu ide will do his or her best to give you the guidance you need, as they are specially t ra ined to guide souls on Ear th . T h i s is their main work in the sp i r i t world, and t h r o u g h this process they t o o learn and c o n t i n u e to evolve. In very d i f f i c u l t s i tuat ions , the Sp i r i t Gu ide will consu l t o the r wise souls and seek counsel . T h i s i n fo rma t ion is being given to you because many people feel lonely on Ear th . T h e y feel they have no one to t u r n to for advice. But if you develop your s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d you can pray to G o d and ask your Sp i r i t G u i d e f o r help. You will be su rp r i s ed at how the g u i d a n c e will c o m e t o you and, m o r e i m p o r t a n t l y , the s t r e n g t h t h a t will c o m e to you to face y o u r p r o b l e m s courageously.

£an an earthly soul's twin in the spirit world

work as a Spirit Guide?

Yes, bu t in very rare cases.

What is a twin soul and is it the same as a soul

mate?

Every soul in th is universe ( the th i rd universe) is actually only one half o f a soul. W h e n a soul begins its journey on Realm 4 s tage 5, it is spl i t in to two: a male soul and a


f e m a l e s o u l . T h i s o r i g i n a l m a l e a n d f e m a l e s o u l m u s t eventually r e u n i t e o n Rea lm 7 S tage 9 t o f o r m the whole sou l o n c e aga in . T h e s e sou l s are k n o w n as Twin Souls. T h i s takes place a f t e r n u m e r o u s l i f e t imes , a f t e r b o t h souls have f in i shed the i r individual t r a in ing o n Ea r th , s o m e t i m e s as male and s o m e t i m e s as female, a n d have pa id o f f the i r karma. O n l y t h e n can two souls u n i t e t o f o r m a whole o n Realm 7 S tage 9 . W h e n you reach R e a l m 7 Stage 9, jus t be fo re you merge , y o u b e c o m e the or ig ina l male soul and female soul , and you t h e n move o n t o t he next universe.

However , y o u r twin sou l is very d i f f e r e n t f r o m what y o u o n E a r t h refer t o as a sou l mate . W h e n you use the t e r m Soul Mate, you use it f o r s o m e o n e you feel very close to, b u t t h a t p e r s o n m i g h t n o t be y o u r twin sou l ; he o r she may be a Group Soul wi th w h o m you have had many p a s t -life c o n n e c t i o n s . G o d created a ce r ta in n u m b e r o f sou ls at the same time. T h e s e sou ls re incarna te t o g e t h e r on E a r t h in the s a m e g r o u p , l i f e a f t e r l ife, b e c a u s e o f t h e i r love f o r each other , so t h a t they can he lp each o t h e r rise sp i r i tua l ly a n d lead a b e t t e r l i fe . T h e s e s o u l s are k n o w n as g r o u p sou l s . S o m e t i m e s , w h e n you fee l c lose t o a p e r s o n y o u have never m e t , it c o u l d be b e c a u s e t h a t p e r s o n is y o u r g r o u p s o u l . Y o u r g r o u p s o u l s c o u l d be y o u r p a r e n t s , chi ldren, n e i g h b o u r s , or f r i ends . A p e r s o n can have only one twin soul , b u t many sou l m a t e s o r g r o u p souls .

W h e n you m e e t y o u r twin soul , it is a very special b o n d . If b o t h sou l s are o n a g o o d level, they can he lp each o t h e r rise sp i r i tua l ly o n E a r t h , and they can deve lop real t r u s t and f r i e n d s h i p because the i r sp i r i t s r ecogn ize each other . It is beyond physica l i tv — it is a b o u t t w o sp i r i t s mee t i ng and r e c o g n i z i n g t he f ac t t h a t they are o n e a n d t he same. In some cases, if one or b o t h of t he sou l s are o n a low level,


the re la t ionship migh t no t be good at all. Twin souls can be at d i f fe ren t s tages o f development .

Usually, one soul reincarnates on Ear th and the o ther stays in the spiri t world to guide that person on Ear th . T h e only way you will know if a pe r son is your twin soul is t h r o u g h a u t o m a t i c w r i t i n g , a n d t h i s is r evea led o n very ra re occasions — only when necessary. For example, if your twin s o u l is k n o w n t o y o u , a n d t h a t t w i n s o u l is f a l l i n g spiritually, you will be to ld to tact ful ly help tha t soul.

T h e main reason G o d split each soul i n to two is t o teach y o u c o e x i s t e n c e . You are r e s p o n s i b l e f o r each o t h e r ' s progress. Uni t ed , twin souls can achieve a great deal, b u t if one of t h e m fa l ters , t hen b o t h su f fe r spir i tual ly. T h i s is because once you reach Rea lm 7 S t age 9, you have t o merge with your twin soul and become a whole soul. Only then will you be allowed t o progress to the next universe ( f o u r t h universe) . If you are on Realm 7 Stage 9, bu t your twin soul is spir i tual ly low, you will have to wait fo r your twin soul to reach Realm 7 Stage 9, even if it takes many l i f e t i m e s . T h i s m a y s e e m h a r s h a n d u n f a i r , b u t i t is ac tua l ly t o safeguard y o u r sp i r i t ua l p r o g r e s s . N o m a t t e r what , you have s o m e o n e who will pray f o r you and try their level best t o make you rise spiritually. This teaches you responsibility, coexistence and selflessness.

Are you both known as Vispi and Ratoo in the

spirit world? Or do you have spirit names?

Every s o u l is g iven a spec ia l n a m e b e f o r e t h e s o u l is d ivided i n to two. T h i s is known as a Soul Name. Twin souls share their soul name — just as the soul is split in to


two, so is the name, which remains the same t h r o u g h o u t your existence. In the spir i t world, you are known by the name you were last k n o w n by on E a r t h . Your deeds are recorded in your Akashic Records unde r your soul name. You will never know your soul name on Ear th ; you will know your soul name only when you go back to the spir i t world.

What are Akashic Records?

T h e Akashic Records are a l so k n o w n as t h e H a l l of Memories or the Hal l of Journals. Each Realm has its own hall where t h e r e is a j o u r n a l f o r t h e lives led by every individual sou l on Ea r th . Each and every deed, good or bad, is recorded under your soul name. T h e Records can be f o u n d on the Realm to which the soul belongs. W h e n the soul progresses or falls, and moves t o a h igher or lower Realm, the Records follow. T h e Akashic Records conta in the memor ies of all the lives you have led on Ear th . W h e n s o u l s on E a r t h are in a deep , d r e a m l e s s s leep , t h e i r subconscious minds make entries in the Akashic Records . W h e n t he s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d o f an e a r t h l y s o u l goes d o r m a n t t h e S p i r i t G u i d e o f t h a t p e r s o n c o n t i n u e s t o upda te the Akashic Records . N o sou l can read s o m e o n e else's Records , except in rare c i r cums tances when it will help in the soul ' s spir i tual progress and a f te r permiss ion is granted by the H i g h G o o d Soul o f tha t Realm. W h e n a soul graduates to the next universe, the Records travel as well.

What kind of work do spirit souls do?

First of all, let us explain tha t sp i r i t sou ls do n o t have


want s and des i res . W e exper ience n o hunger , t h i r s t , or fatigue, and our sole aim is service. However, we do need nour i shmen t , jus t as the body does on Ear th . For the soul, s u n l i g h t is p o w e r f u l l y n o u r i s h i n g . T h e r e are also many b e a u t i f u l f r u i t s , the f lavours of which are un imaginable . Souls do no t need f o o d to survive, b u t the juicy nectar of f r u i t s p r o v i d e s us w i t h p o s i t i v e energy . W e are in a c o n s t a n t s t a te o f wel l -being. We are in pe r f ec t sp i r i tua l health, and we stay this way by pur i fy ing our spir i t bodies wi th prayer and water. Wa te r has a hea l ing quali ty, and whenever we need to recharge, we take a d ip in a lake and come ou t re juvenated with a great deal o f posi t ive energy, as the water completely cleanses our vibrat ions. W h e n we c o m e o u t o f t h e water , we are c o m p l e t e l y d ry a n d energized.

As f o r o u r work , we d i scuss o u r t a l e n t s wi th the H i g h G o o d Soul o f o u r Rea lm and then choose work in tha t given area. H e r e are a few examples o f the kind of work spiri t souls do:

1. Share sp i r i tua l knowledge with people on Ear th and help t h e m unde r s t and God ' s laws.

2. C o m m u n i c a t e with souls on Ear th t h rough processes such as au tomat i c writ ing.

3. Work as Spir i t Guides .

4- W o r k wi th sou l s who have jus t c o m e t o the sp i r i t world to help them unders tand where they are if they are t r aumat ized or disoriented.

5. G u i d e s o u l s on E a r t h and i m p r e s s i m p o r t a n t


m e s s a g e s u p o n t h e m t h r o u g h t h e i r s u b c o n s c i o u s mind. For instance, a spiri t soul m igh t help a scientist discover a cure he is t rying to f i n d for a disease by sending h im answers t h rough his subconsc ious mind.

6. Answer genuine calls for help f r o m Ear th . Spir i t souls are specially t ra ined in this, and souls who have just a r r i ved in t h e s p i r i t w o r l d t r a i n u n d e r t h e m o r e experienced souls in this matter .

7. Work in the Hal l of Rest and wi th the upkeep of the Akashic Records .

8. Pray for h u m a n s who are suicidal and help them walk on the r ight pa th .

9. Find ways to p ro tec t loved ones on Ear th .

10. Pray fo r loved ones on Ear th . Prayer requires genuine love, concern, concen t ra t ion and e f fo r t on our part .

11. Ge t t ra ined in how to handle negative souls on low Realms.

12. Gain more wisdom f r o m the Hal l of Learning. W i t h their expanded subconsc ious mind , spir i t souls retain a lot o f i n f o r m a t i o n and p u t it i n to act ion.

13- Guide those who wish to reincarnate.

14- P e r f o r m mirac les fo r souls on E a r t h who have los t their way. These small miracles help lost souls regain their fa i th .

15. C o m e d o w n to Ea r th to c o m f o r t a dying soul and,


t h r o u g h p r a y e r and p o s i t i v e t h o u g h t , make t he t r a n s i t i o n t o t h e s p i r i t w o r l d as c o m f o r t a b l e as possible.

16. Look af te r spir i t children.

17- Learn and discover new ways of healing.

18. Part icipate in the creation of art, dance, opera, music, songs, spor t s , architecture, science etc.

19. W o r k wi th the an imal k i n g d o m o n E a r t h and he lp with the animal spiri t world.

20 . H e l p in the upkeep of the gardens in the spir i t world.

21. Catch up and reflect on the t rue h is tory of the Ear th and o ther planets .

N o m a t t e r wha t work sp i r i t sou l s choose , we have the same aim: service. O n Ear th , people look at the i r jobs as work, bu t we genuinely love what we do and we view it as an o p p o r t u n i t y to give back to the Creator . T h i s br ings us t rue joy and fu l f i l lmen t . T h e r e is n o ego, n o compet i t ion , n o jealousy, n o a r g u m e n t s , no c r i t i c i sm, and n o one is super ior or inferior. We respect each o the r and work as a team for the benef i t o f humani ty .

Why is reincarnation necessaryP Why can't we

rise spiritually in the spirit world itself?

You come to Ear th t ime and again for the growth of your soul. T h e same spir i t being comes to Ear th hundreds and even thousands of t imes to progress spiritually. T h i s soul


may be in the male or female fo rm, depend ing on what it chooses and what it requires fo r i ts g rowth , and it may inca rna t e o n E a r t h in d i f f e r e n t c o u n t r i e s , in d i f f e r e n t rel igions. T h i s is wha t Reincarnation means — the same spirit being born on Ear th life a f te r life. T h i s is no t the f i rs t t ime you have come to Earth; th is is one of the many incarnat ions .

In m o s t cases, the progress o f souls in Realms 5, 6 and 7 in the spir i t world is slow because the vibra t ions are good, so it is n o t hard to do the r ight th ing , unlike on Ear th , where evil is ascendent so a good soul goes higher faster with even the smallest good deed. Also, on Earth, due to negat ive v i b r a t i o n s and t he l i m i t a t i o n s o f t he physical mind, a soul ' s j u d g m e n t can go wrong, and so his test is t h a t m u c h h a r d e r . O n E a r t h , y o u n e e d t o use y o u r subconsc ious m i n d much more than the physical mind in order t o progress spiritually, bu t the risk tha t a good soul takes when re incarnat ing on Ear th is tha t he may fall lower spiritually. If he stays in the spir i t world his progress will be much slower, b u t he will never fall. I t is up to each soul t o use his own free will to decide if he wants t o stay in the spirit world and progress steadily, or come down to Earth, take t h e r i sk , a n d p r o g r e s s f a s t e r . T h e cycle o f r e inca rna t i on ends only when you have c o m p l e t e d y o u r earthly miss ion, paid o f f your karma, and reached Realm 7 S t age 9- You have t h u s t r u l y transcended t h e e a r t h l y experience — tha t is, when you have learned to th ink and live like a spir i t being on Ear th . We are n o t talking abou t perfec t ion . N o h u m a n being can be per fec t . We are talking a b o u t d o i n g y o u r be s t , t r a i n i n g y o u r s p i r i t in such a manner that it is ready fo r the next universe. You will no t unders tand this completely on Ear th ; you will only know


where you s tand when you go to the spir i t world.

All souls m u s t fol low a specific procedure , known as The Process of Rebirth, in order to be reborn on Ear th .

1. You m u s t app ly t o t he H i g h G o o d S o u l o f y o u r Realm fo r rebi r th .

2. You m u s t p rov ide reasons f o r wan t ing reb i r th . T h e main reason is o f t e n to repay karma, comple te your miss ion, and rise spiritually. If a soul has t o o much karma to repay, it is n o t poss ib le t o repay it in the s p i r i t w o r l d , so he m u s t r e i n c a r n a t e o n E a r t h . S o m e t i m e s , even a sou l w i t h o u t m u c h ka rma will w a n t t o be r e b o r n b e c a u s e a loved o n e o n E a r t h is f o l l owing t he wrong p a t h and t he sou l wan t s t o help.

3. You m u s t choose a mother . A soul w h o is n o t on a good spir i tual level may be bo rn to a m o t h e r who is spiri tually high so that the soul improves. Somet imes , a g o o d s o u l may be b o r n t o a nega t ive m o t h e r in order t o improve the mother ; it can also be a way for t ha t sou l t o repay karma and u n d e r g o t e s t i n g and training. In many cases, however, because it is such a great risk, the soul falls spiritually. Somet imes , souls choose a m o t h e r in order to be close to the father, so, in effect , they are choosing the father.

4- You m u s t speci fy what sor t o f t r a in ing and t e s t ing you wish to take. For example, you choose people and experiences t ha t will enable you to develop posi t ive quali t ies required for your mission, which is your t rue calling on Ear th . If you want to be tes ted for pr ide


you will get lessons that will con t inuous ly break your pride and teach you humili ty.

5. You m u s t select a Walk-In. If the s i tua t ion on Ear th gets harder than you can handle and you are on the r ight pa th , t hen a good soul f r o m the sp i r i t world, known as a Walk-In , will occupy your body for tha t period, as the s i tua t ion requires. T h i s rarely happens, and only in case of emergencies when the s i tua t ion is beyond the capabili t ies o f the soul on Ear th . T h a t is, it is n o t y o u r t e s t , t r a i n i n g or k a r m a . T h e s u b -c o n s c i o u s m i n d cal ls o u t f o r h e l p w i t h o u t t h e consc ious knowledge of the soul on Ear th .

6. You decide your date of b i r th and your date of death. Your date of death is also known as your due date.

All souls f r o m Realms I to 7 have a chance to go th rough this process of rebir th . However, the souls of Realm I have the op t ion of s taying in the lower Realms or coming back to Ear th as a beast of bu rden wi th fu l l m e m o r y of their previous l ife 's s ins and their existence on Realm I . Some souls f r o m Realm I choose this because they want to pay o f f the i r karma very quickly. T h e y are al lowed t o re ta in memory o f Rea lm I and the i r p rev ious l ife so tha t they unders tand why they have been reborn as beasts o f bu rden and why they are suf fe r ing . T h i s m e m o r y gives t h e m the s t reng th to endure the pain they s u f f e r on Ear th in th i s very t o u g h i n c a r n a t i o n . T h e i r k a r m a is n o t w iped o f f entirely; if their karma is extremely severe these souls may need hundreds o f re incarnat ions to repay it.

Th i s whole process may sound challenging, bu t you do n o t make all of these choices on your own. You sit wi th the


H i g h G o o d S o u l o f y o u r Rea lm a long w i t h t h ree wise souls f r o m that same Realm and tell t h e m what you wish to do. T h e y will guide you in your choices. For instance, if you are t o o eager t o rise spiri tually and are in a hurry to repay your karma, you m i g h t choose a p a t h tha t is t o o d i f f icu l t fo r you, a pa th that you migh t n o t be capable of handl ing. T h e H i g h G o o d Soul and the three wise souls would advise you against tha t and would o f f e r alternatives. However, if you still wish to be reborn, it is your free will and you will n o t be s topped . Even a f t e r you register fo r rebir th you can still choose no t to be b o r n on Ear th . For example, say you have chosen a mother , b u t she goes wrong spiri tually and you n o longer wish to come to her, you can cancel your r eg i s t r a t i on . Perhaps you or ig inal ly selected t h i s p e r s o n b e c a u s e she was s p i r i t u a l l y h i g h a n d you wanted s o m e o n e to give you knowledge and lead you to the r ight pa th , b u t if the mothe r has s trayed on the wrong pa th and faltered, it no longer makes sense for you to be b o r n to her.

In what way are Earth children in touch with the

spirit world?

A child in the m o t h e r ' s w o m b is very m u c h in t ouch with the spir i t world. D u r i n g tha t t ime, if the child feels tha t the s i t ua t i on m i g h t h a m p e r his sp i r i tua l g rowth , he can re turn to the spir i t world and another soul may occupy the baby 's body. Jus t because the child no longer needs the m o t h e r t h a t d o e s n o t m e a n t h e m o t h e r will have a s t i l lborn baby. If tha t is no t her karma, ano ther soul will occupy the child 's body. It is impor t an t to unde r s t and that a ch i l d in t h e w o m b is very r e c e p t i v e b e c a u s e t h e subconsc ious m i n d is open . T h a t chi ld is still in t o u c h


with the spir i t world and is observing the paren ts ' act ions. Be pos i t ive and c o n t e n t , and al low n o t h i n g negat ive t o c o m e t o t he ch i ld . W h e n y o u go t h r o u g h sor row, f o r example, your child absorbs tha t energy. T h e child is very, very sensi t ive t o the m o t h e r ' s t h o u g h t s and feel ings . If you are c o n s t a n t l y negat ive and on t he wrong pa th , the child, being a good soul, may re tu rn to the spir i t world and another one, one that migh t be spir i tually lower, may take its place. If no soul comes the child will be s t i l lborn. T h e child remains in t ouch with the spir i t world af ter it is born, unt i l it s ta r t s t o speak. Af te r that , the subconsc ious m i n d n o l o n g e r a l lows t he p h y s i c a l m i n d t o have any memories o f the spir i t world.

After we start speaking, are all ties with the spirit

world cut off?

N o t at all. In your deep, dreamless sleep, you visit a place that is between Ear th and the spir i t world. Your soul rises f r o m your body and travels upward to meet spir i t souls. In your sleep, your loved ones in the spir i t world are talking to you t h r o u g h t he s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d and giving you guidance. T h e y are in cons tan t touch wi th you. W h e n your soul rises t o meet t h e m it is still connec ted to the physical b o d y by t h e Silver Cord, a ray o f l i g h t t h a t is y o u r connec t ion between your spir i t and your body. W h e n you die this connec t ion is severed. You can meet your dear ones t o r a few m i n u t e s o r s o m e t i m e s f o r h o u r s , b u t t h i s d e p e n d s o n y o u r s leep , w h i c h s h o u l d be d e e p a n d d reamles s . T h e love be tween t h o s e w h o m e e t m u s t be mutua l and n o t one-s ided . Rest assured tha t if you have loved ones in the spir i t world you are mee t ing them on a regular basis. These loved ones are no t only dear depar ted


souls f r o m this l i fet ime; they may be people who were very close to you in previous l i fe t imes and are now t ry ing to help you f r o m the spir i t world.

T h e silver co rd is compr i s ed o f many rays o f l ight tha t merge t oge the r t o f o r m one long ray. T h e silver cord is a t t ached to the body at the t op of the head, so tha t the soul can enter and leave th rough the s o f t par t o f the head (in babies, there is always a so f t spo t on the head, where the silver co rd is a t t a c h e d ) . In your sleep, there will be m a n y t i m e s w h e n you s u d d e n l y wake u p w i t h a jerk, a s t rong t h u d in your chest and you get the feeling tha t you were fa l l ing and have jus t landed. T h i s occurs when the sou l r e t u r n s t o t he phys ica l body a f t e r it has t ravel led naturally and me t i ts loved ones. W h e n the silver cord is broken, you die. Your angels in the sp i r i t wor ld p r o t e c t tha t silver cord wi th a great deal of br i l l iant whi te l ight, which bu i lds a p ro tec t ive aura so t ha t negat iv i ty canno t reach it. W h e n you pract ice unnatural ways o f med i t a t i on and astral t ravel ing (when you leave y o u r body on your own) , you are r isking your life because your silver cord is vulnerable and negative souls can try to prevent you f r o m re -en te r ing y o u r body by c u t t i n g the silver cord . Ast ra l t ravel l ing is when a pe r son u n n a t u r a l l y and consc ious ly leaves the body. T h e r e is a risk involved in this, because if the silver cord is cut you may die before your t ime, before you have fu l f i l led your miss ion on Ear th .

Does each person have a fixed amount of time on

Earth?

Just as you choose the day on which you will be born, you also choose the da te of your death , also known as your


Due Date. However , every h u m a n b e i n g has t h ree d u e dates, which can be t h o u g h t of as exit po in t s . T h e f i r s t two due dates may pass o f f wi th some sor t of illness or a c c i d e n t f r o m w h i c h y o u are saved . H o w e v e r , if y o u r subconsc ious m i n d feels you are on the wrong pa th and there is very l i t t le chance of going back o n t o the r ight one, you usually choose to leave Ear th on one of the f i rs t two due dates. T h e th i rd due date is somewha t final. However, just before the final due date, a h u m a n being can bargain for "bor rowed t ime" f r o m ano the r h u m a n being. T h i s is d o n e w i t h o u t t h a t p e r s o n ' s c o n s c i o u s k n o w l e d g e . T h e s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d ba rga ins w i t h a f r i e n d , relat ive, o r s t r a n g e r ' s s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d and takes over his or her r e m a i n i n g t i m e o n E a r t h . Fo r t h i s , y o u r e q u i r e t h e permiss ion of the H i g h G o o d Soul o f your Realm. T h i s is very rare and is done only in the case o f special spir i tual mi s s ions . T h i s h a p p e n e d in o u r own fami ly many years ago, when we were still alive.

There was a t ime when our dad was to be operated u p o n and he kept tel l ing everyone tha t he fel t his t ime was up. H e would say, " T h i s is the last t ime I am meet ing you all." Well, it was his th i rd due date. H e was admi t t ed in to the hosp i t a l a day b e f o r e the ope ra t i on , and in the evening, M o m ' s cousins , Goo la and Mani , came to visit h im. T h e y had a nice t ime, cha t t ing and laughing, and then they went home. T h e next day, when he was on the opera t ing table, we received a p h o n e call to i n f o r m us tha t Goola had died suddenly. We never t h o u g h t of th is at the t ime, bu t now that we are in the spiri t world we know tha t Goola did n o t have much to live for, and our D a d had our family and his spiri tual miss ion to live lor. Goola had a spiri tual miss ion too — all souls do — bu t she had no t t ra ined her spirit well


e n o u g h o n E a r t h t o c o m p l e t e t h i s m i s s i o n , so h e r subconsc ious m i n d fel t it was be t te r fo r her t o go to the spiri t world, t ra in her spiri t more, and then reincarnate on Ear th . She fel t she could con t r ibu te more by being in the spiri t world. Both their subconsc ious m i n d s bargained, and D a d ' s s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d b o r r o w e d G o o l a ' s r e m a i n i n g l i fe t ime on Ear th . T h i s may seem s t range to you, bu t it is t rue. T h i s will never happen if you try it consciously, so don ' t bo the r t rying to borrow someone ' s l i fet ime.

Arranging such bor rowed t ime depends entirely on whether there is a genuine need for you to live. You may need to f in i sh your mis s ion , p r o t e c t your dear ones, or improve m u c h more to go t o a higher Realm. M o s t important ly , the one who lends his or her l i fe t ime m u s t have f in ished his or her miss ion and have n o t h i n g more to live for, or may n o t have t r a i n e d t h e i r s p i r i t well e n o u g h t o f u l f i l l t h e i r spir i tual miss ion . Special permiss ion has to be sough t in the spiri t world fo r this kind of bargaining.

What happens to children when they die?

Chi ldren who die on Ear th go back to the spiri t world as children, and then grow up in the spi r i t world. T h e y are looked af ter by Sp i r i t M o t h e r s unt i l they are mature spir i t souls again. T h i s takes very l i t t le t ime . Fairly g r o w n - u p ones go to the i r respect ive Rea lms on the i r own. S o m e a d u l t s w h o die on E a r t h and c o m e t o t he sp i r i t wor ld r e fu se to believe t h a t they are dead . R a t o o works w i t h these souls. In the same way, children need spir i t mo the r s t o exp la in t h e e n v i r o n m e n t t hey are in. In a s h o r t while, these souls grow up and assume their natural spiri t fo rm.


What happens to animals when they die?

Animals have their own spiri t world. Jus t as human souls go to d i f f e ren t Realms, so do animals, b u t they have only three Realms: low, mid and high. S o m e animals are allowed to exist in t he h u m a n sp i r i t wor ld if they were pe ts o n Earth, bu t th is is very rare. Both the animal and the h u m a n mus t be on good levels, and the connec t ion m u s t be very s trong. Pure love m u s t exist between the two.

Are spirit souls happy all the time?

We are in a s t a t e o f c o n t e n t m e n t , b u t when we see t he negative p a t h h u m a n beings have taken it makes us sad. Even spir i t souls feel sad, bu t only when people go wrong spiritually, or when our loved ones are crying fo r just ice on Earth, su f f e r ing at the hands of negative souls. Otherwise , we are happy and posi t ive. Also, we t ru ly know tha t G o d exists and tha t we are progress ing in o rder t o finally reach Him, and this gives us t r emendous joy.

Have all spirit souls met God?

No, only some souls on high Realms have met God, bu t all souls k n o w t h a t G o d exists because we are in the sp i r i t world, and we can see the beauty and intell igence of H i s Crea t ion . O u r s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d s know tha t H e exists and that H e cares for us.

THE SOUL AND THE SUBCONSCIOUS MIND

"Reincarnation on Earth is a risk. Therefore, God has given you double protection from evil: your subconscious mind and your spirit guide."

"Never suppress your instinct. Never fear people calling you mad or weird. Instinct is a Cod-given gift."

"Be the master of your physical mind — not a slave."

"The only reason for spiritual improvement should be genuine desire from within oneself i.e. from your subconscious mind.

So do not change to show the world, but make the change because it means the world to you."

Are the subconscious mind and the soul the same?

There are t oo many earthly de f in i t ions and misconcep t ions about the subconsc ious mind so we would like you all to let go o f y o u r p r e c o n c e i v e d n o t i o n s . T h i n k o f the s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d as y o u r consc i ence . I t can also be called your H i g h e r Mind , Higher Self or Inner Voice (The feel ing tha t you r subconsc ious m i n d gives you is called 'Instinct' '>.

The Soul And The Subconscious Mind 183

You are a spir i t being who is on Ear th in a physical body. You were created by G o d as a spir i t be ing f i rs t , n o t as a human being. You were created as a soul, and that soul has a subconsc ious mind . T h e soul is your eternal spir i t body. Just as you have a physical body on Ear th , your spir i t body is called the soul and is immor ta l . T h e subconsc ious m i n d is y o u r t r ue , s p i r i t u a l m i n d . J u s t as t h e phys ica l m i n d guides the body, the subconsc ious m i n d guides the soul . T h e soul and the subconsc ious m i n d are joined toge the r for eternity.

<ft§> What is the function of the subconscious mind?

T h e subconsc ious mind is b o t h your guarding l ight as well as your guiding l ight . It serves as a spi r i tual radar. It warns you when you are abou t to make a choice tha t is spir i tual ly wrong; t n e r e f o r e , it g u a r d s your sou l . But the sp i r i t ua l p a t h is n o t on ly a b o u t r e s i s t i n g t e m p t a t i o n . I t is n o t e n o u g h t o s t o p you r se l f f r o m d o i n g w r o n g . M o r e t h a n any th ing , the p a t h to G o d involves d o i n g what is sp i r i -tually r ight . So, a f te r guard ing your soul by prevent ing it f r o m t a k i n g t h e w r o n g ac t ions , t he s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d guides you towards what is morally r ight .

Is the subconscious mind the same as our

conscious mind?

T h e s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d and t he c o n s c i o u s or phys ica l mind are two d i f fe ren t th ings . A pe r son can have a highly deve loped i n t e l l e c t u a l phys ica l m i n d , b u t may have an u n d e r d e v e l o p e d s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d . A c q u i r i n g wor ld ly knowledge can sharpen your physical mind , bu t will n o t


d e v e l o p y o u r s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d . Even sp ir i tua l knowledge alone will not help your subconscious mind to evolve . I t is o n l y w h e n you p u t t h a t k n o w l e d g e i n t o practice tha t the subconsc ious mind grows. Therefore , the key to spir i tual g rowth is pure action. T h e more open your subconsc ious mind , the more guidance and p ro tec t ion you will receive f r o m the spir i t world. Your subconsc ious mind m u s t con t ro l your physical mind. Never let your physical m ind make you its slave. Your subconsc ious m i n d is your l ink t o t h e s p i r i t w o r l d t h r o u g h w h i c h you receive p ro tec t ion and guidance f r o m spir i t souls.

If everyone on Earth has a subconscious mind,

why do people follow the wrong path?

There will be t imes when you will have a clash of op in ion between your physical m ind and your subconsc ious mind . T h i s is because the physical m i n d is ra t ional — it may want to pursue a pa th or act ion tha t is logical — bu t the sub-conscious m i n d m i g h t be against it. It may seem as t h o u g h the two minds are at war. T h i s is a good thing. If there is n o war be tween t he physical and s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d s it means your s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d is n o t work ing and your physical m i n d is cont ro l l ing you fully. N o h u m a n being on E a r t h can be led comple te ly by his s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d . T h i s is because the average h u m a n be ing ' s subconsc ious m i n d is o p e n very l i t t l e ( l % t o 2 % ) . H o w e v e r , t h e subconsc ious mind is so power fu l tha t even t h o u g h only a f rac t ion of it is open it still manages to warn your physical mind, which is 100% open.


If the two minds are constantly at war, how can

we be at peace?

You can s t r i ve f o r peace by a c k n o w l e d g i n g t he b a t t l e between the physical m ind and the subconsc ious mind and e n s u r i n g , t h r o u g h p rayer and p o s i t i v e ac t i on , t h a t t he s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d wins . T h e p h y s i c a l m i n d is very anxious to make you its slave and lead you down the pa th of spir i tual decline by providing jus t i f i ca t ions for all your wrong ac t ions . Peace of m i n d c o m e s when you learn to listen to the subconsc ious mind and take the r ight act ion.

If the physical mind works against the

subconscious mind, why do we have it?

T h e physical m ind can become negative and work against the subconsc ious mind if it is no t t ra ined well, bu t if used well the phys ica l m i n d can be a w o n d e r f u l a s s i s t a n t t o t h e s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d . W h e n the in t e l l ec t o f the phys ica l m i n d is in a l i g n m e n t w i t h t h e g u i d a n c e of t h e s u b -consc ious mind , the c o m b i n a t i o n is very power fu l . So if you use the physical m i n d well, it is a g i f t . T h e physical mind is also a tes t . G o d wants you to use your free will and choose the guidance of your subconsc ious mind. T h a t is every h u m a n b e i n g ' s t e s t . You m u s t c o n t r o l your physical mind; d o n o t let it c o n t r o l you . T h e r e a s o n p e o p l e o n E a r t h go s p i r i t u a l l y w r o n g is because t h e i r subconsc ious m i n d has become d o r m a n t . In o ther words, the subconsc ious mind has shu t down. T h e subconsc ious mind cannot and will no t permi t a person to do someth ing spiritually wrong. But people listen more to their physical, logical minds , r e fus ing to pay a t t en t ion t o the voice of the


subconsc ious mind . They re fuse to fol low its guidance and c o n t i n u e the i r evil or bad ways. T h e subconsc ious m i n d c a n n o t t o l e r a t e t h i s , so i t q u i e t s d o w n , s l eeps , a n d eventually becomes completely d o r m a n t and then it can no longer warn you when you take wrong actions. T h i s can be extremely dangerous .

A p e r s o n s c o n s c i e n c e w a r n s h i m on ly w h e n t h e subconsc ious m i n d is open . H e r e is a s imple example o f how it happens : when you h u r t someone , or even t h i n k negatively abou t someone, your subconsc ious m i n d warns you, and you feel guilty. T h i s means your s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d is working . You shou ld n o t let tha t gui l t c o n s u m e you. T h a t guil t has a specific purpose . It should make you want t o rect ify the wrong you have done. You shou ld learn the l e s son and never repea t your mis take . O n c e t h i s is done , the gui l t goes away. T h i s is the r ight approach t o dealing with guil t .

I f you s u p p r e s s your gu i l t and ignore it r igh t f r o m the beg inn ing , even t h o u g h you know you have d o n e s o m e -th ing wrong, you are telling your subconsc ious mind to be q u i e t ; you are r e j e c t i n g i t s advice . W h e n you d o t h i s repeatedly, the subconsc ious m i n d becomes d o r m a n t . So there will c o m e a p o i n t when, if you c o m m i t a sin, t he s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d will n o l onge r warn you . T h e gu i l t does n o t appear and you m i g h t even f o o l you r se l f i n t o th ink ing tha t because you do n o t feel guilty you have n o t done wrong. In t ru th , however, you have shut down your spir i tual radar.

However, keep in mind tha t gui l t does no t always come f r o m the subconsc ious m i n d . T h e r e are people w h o feel guilty about th ings they should not be feeling guil ty about .


T h e r e will be t imes when your physical mind will make you feel gu i l ty even t h o u g h you have d o n e every th ing r igh t . You will feel as t h o u g h you have done someth ing wrong, or that you are n o t doing enough . T h i s is p r o g r a m m e d guil t t h a t is i m p o s e d o n y o u by y o u r s e l f , by o t h e r s o r by negativity. Gu i l t tha t comes f r o m the physical m i n d is no t heal thy fo r your growth. You shou ld have the w i sdom to know the d i f fe rence between the gui l t t ha t is a resul t o f guidance f r o m the subconsc ious m i n d and the gui l t t ha t comes f r o m the physical m ind . T h e fo rmer is a sign. T h e lat ter is a trick, which exists because of wrong th ink ing or beliefs, and it prevents you f r o m growing. So when you are c o n f u s e d abou t guilt, analyse yourse l f and talk to someone you t ru s t . D o no t talk to people who will please you and tell you what you want t o hear. Talk to people who will tell you the t ru th , the ones who have t rue knowledge.

Does the subconscious mind develop as human

beings grow older?

N o t necessarily. It all depends on how much you fol low its guidance. It is like a muscle . T h e more you exercise it, the h e a l t h i e r a n d s t r o n g e r i t b e c o m e s . In f a c t , a c h i l d ' s subconsc ious mind is power fu l (provided the child is on a good spir i tual level) because the child has just come f r o m the s p i r i t w o r l d t o E a r t h . Bu t if t h e ch i l d rece ives i m p r o p e r t r a i n i n g and is a l l owed t o go w r o n g , t h e s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d q u i e t e n s d o w n and b e c o m e s weaker and weaker.


You have said that all Earth souls meet their loved

ones from the spirit world when they are asleep. How<

exactly, does this happen?

W h e n y o u r s leep is deep and d r e a m l e s s , y o u r phys ica l m i n d is s h u t d o w n and on ly y o u r s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d ope ra t e s . Your sou l , gu ided by t he s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d , leaves your earthly body and travels to a place in between Ear th and the sp i r i t world, where your loved ones mee t you. T h e y calm you down and gu ide y o u r s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d , b u t t h e m o m e n t you wake u p you f o r g e t t h i s because the physical m ind was shu t down dur ing sleep and was no t al lowed to register any th ing . T h e fo l lowing is a feeling all h u m a n s can ident i fy with: somet imes you wake up f r o m your s leep wi th a s u d d e n jo l t or t h u d in your c h e s t . T h i s is t h e s o u l w h i c h is g u i d e d by t h e subconsc ious m i n d re-enter ing your physical body.

Does a person's subconscious mind know when he

or she is going to die?

Yes, your s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d k n o w s all you r th ree d u e dates. However, you could die be fo re your t ime, tha t is, b e f o r e y o u r d u e da te , like in t h e case o f an a c c i d e n t , murde r etc. However, there is ano the r spi r i tual law made for your own pro tec t ion . G o o d souls f r o m Realms 7 or 6 do no t want t o go to hell, so G o d has made a law tha t souls who were bo rn on Realm 7 will be taken away f r o m Ear th and will no t be able to fall f u r t h e r than Realm 5-Likewise, if you were b o r n on R e a l m 6 you w o u l d be allowed to fall to Realm 4 only. If vou c o n t i n u e to sin, your subconsc ious mind seeks pe rmis s ion to go back to


the spi r i t wor ld . However, t hose on Realms 5 and lower have n o s u c h p r o t e c t i o n . I f t h e y c o n t i n u e to s in , t h e subconsc ious m i n d s imply s h u t s down . T h e y can fall t o the lowest of Realms (Realm I ) . Th i s is why we say that life on Earth is a risk, but it is a risk that souls take in order to progress spiritually.

If the subconsc ious mind shu t s down and the pe r son dies, he or she may choose to remain in astral f o rm . N o t only will they n o t want t o go to their Realm, b u t they will also no t want to leave Ear th . T h e lower you fall spiritually, the less you will want t o leave Ear th . Evil souls stick to their physical bodies like leeches. T h e s e souls know where they will land when they die, and are afra id to leave the physical world, so they choose to remain in the as t ra l wor ld . In some cases, when h u m a n beings die, they are n o t aware o f the fact tha t they are dead. T h e pe r son is n o t a spir i t be ing yet; he is in astral f o rm .

<£fl> Do only negative souls go into astral form?

N o . At death, all h u m a n beings go in to astral fo rm, then shed the i r astral bodies and t r a n s f o r m in to spir i t beings . So when a pe r son dies, the natura l t r ans i t ion is as fol lows:

H u m a n Beings —> Astral Beings —> Spir i t Beings

(eH) DO souls from higher Realms want to remain in

astral form? i

N o , sou l s w h o are f r o m a h igher Rea lm do no t usual ly want to remain in astral fo rm. They want to become spiri t beings as soon as possible . A pe r son ' s loved ones in the


spi r i t wor ld are aware tha t a p e r s o n is go ing to die o n Earth, so these spir i t souls are prepared for that person ' s arrival. S o m e o f the loved ones leave the spir i t world and come d o w n t o E a r t h t o f e t c h t h e h u m a n be ing w h o is abou t to die ( th is will no t happen if the death is sudden, such as in the case of an accident or a murder , which are never p a r t o f G o d ' s P l a n ) . T h e s e s p i r i t b e i n g s t h e n accompany the p e r s o n to the Rea lm to which he or she belongs. T h e soul natural ly goes to the Realm he belongs to. T h e s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d of t he p e r s o n who has d ied will ins t ruc t his own soul to travel t o a Realm wor thy of his ac t ions on Ear th . It is up to the soul to listen; force canno t be used. O n l y if the soul l i s tens and goes t o the proper Realm does it become a spir i t being again.

If the soul re fuses to go to the spir i t world, it remains in astral fo rm, because even when you die, G o d allows you to exercise free will. O n Earth, astral souls who are visible are referred to as ghos t s . Astral Souls are lost souls who have rejected the advice o f the i r s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d and have refused to become spir i t beings; by do ing this they bui ld negative karma. You canno t see astral souls , bu t they can see you. However, these astral souls c anno t see the spi r i t w o r l d ; o n c e t h e y have r e j e c t e d t h e advice o f t h e s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d and have d e c i d e d n o t t o go to t he spiri t world, it canno t be made visible to them. T h a t is the law. W h e n they make the d e c i s i o n t o go to t h e s p i r i t world, it will be revealed to them. T h i s is also a test .

When bad souls die, spirit souls from lower

Realms come to fetch the ones who have died. What is

the purpose of thisP


W h e n an evil soul is abou t to die on Ear th , g roup souls, if they are f r o m lower levels, c ' m e to f e t ch h im. However , because these souls are spir i tually low, they have to be kept u n d e r s t r i c t s u p e r v i s i o n w h e n they d o t h i s job . T h e s e souls have to seek permiss ion f r o m the H i g h G o o d Soul of their Realm if they wish to fe tch a low soul f r o m Ear th to b r ing h i m to the sp i r i t wor ld . T h e H i g h G o o d S o u l selects an ass is tant fo r th is job — one f r o m between Realm 4 Stage 5 and Realm 5 Stage 5 — who will s t and guard to make sure the negative souls go back t o their respect ive Realms. T h i s is done as a test : these souls have been given a du ty to p e r f o r m and by p e r f o r m i n g this du ty they migh t be showing some inc l ina t ion towards change. T h u s , they are being t ra ined and tes ted every s tep of the way.

When we are born, does the same natural

progression apply ? Do we start off as spirit beings, then

become astral beings, and finally human beings?

N o . W h e n a sp i r i t be ing takes reb i r th on Ear th , he does n o t go t h r o u g h t h e a s t r a l p h a s e . H i s s o u l a n d subconsc ious mind s imply occupy the physical body of a h u m a n being on Ear th , so the t r ans i t i on is directly f r o m spir i t being t o h u m a n being.

Why do souls choose to stay in astral form?

1. T h e y are t oo a t tached to the physical world.

2. T h e y w a n t t o p r o t e c t a l oved o n e o n E a r t h a n d wrongly believe t ha t by o c c u p y i n g the same physical space, they can help.


3. T h e subconsc ious mind tells t h e m they will have to go to a low spir i tual Realm and they refuse to do so because they do n o t want t o suf fe r . T h e y can make this choice because they have free will. However, when a soul chooses t o stay in astral f o r m , he con t inues to fal l a n d b u i l d nega t ive ka rma b e c a u s e he is g o i n g agains t t he advice of his s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d and is b r e a k i n g a s p i r i t u a l law. H e is n o t f o l l o w i n g t h e n a t u r a l p r o g r e s s i o n f r o m h u m a n t o as t ra l t o sp i r i t being.

4 . If they are negative souls, they will want t o stay back in a s t r a l f o r m and h a r m h u m a n b e i n g s o n E a r t h . O n c e again, t he as t ra l sou l will fall sp i r i tua l ly and bui ld negative karma.

5. O n Ear th , they had certain addic t ions , such as d rugs or alcohol, and they want to experience that sensat ion over a n d over aga in by a t t a c h i n g t h e m s e l v e s t o h u m a n s who are addicts .

(US) How can you make your physical mind cooperate

with the subconscious mind?

You need to know the nature of the physical mind. Jus t as the subconsc ious mind is your spir i tual , posi t ive mind , the physical m ind , by na ture , is e a r t h b o u n d and negative. If n o t checked, it will let you d o w n . It will t r ick you . It creates i l l u s ions . For example, when you c o m m i t a sin, your s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d warns you t h a t you have d o n e s o m e t h i n g wrong . Jus t as you are a b o u t t o rec t i fy t ha t mis take and learn the lesson, your physical m ind b r ings into act ion its greatest weapon: ego. Ego makes you just i fy


your wrong act ions, t r icking you in to believing tha t what you did was n o t wrong, b u t necessary. It will p u t fo rward a b r i l l i an t logical a r g u m e n t and you will be swayed. T h e voice o f your subconsc ious mind will rise and speak out , bu t you will silence it because the physical m ind l ias given you reasons . It has t o ld you t ha t you are r igh t t h r o u g h logic.

We do not mean that logic is bad, but logic and truth are not the same thing. Unfo r tuna te ly , people use logic to run away f r o m the t r u t h . T h e physical m i n d gives you logic; the subconsc ious mind gives you t r u t h . For example, the physical m i n d will make you jus t i fy t emp ta t i on . It will give you valid reasons to make you believe tha t t e m p t a t i o n is a n e e d i n s t e a d o f a w a n t . I t wi l l c o n v i n c e y o u t h a t t e m p t a t i o n is n o t spi r i tua l ly wrong , ins tead of expos ing t e m p t a t i o n fo r what it t ruly is — a desire tha t leads you down the wrong path .

Another weapon tha t the physical m i n d possesses is d o u b t . It will p lant the seed of d o u b t wi th in you that challenges your fa i th and wisdom. T h e subconsc ious mind is the seat o f t r u t h a n d is t h e r e f o r e a l l - k n o w i n g ; i t h e l p s y o u t r a n s c e n d d o u b t , b u t only if you allow it t o s teer y o u r soul. I f you n u r t u r e the seed of d o u b t , you slowly weaken your connec t ion to the spiri t world, fo r d o u b t essentially leads to one ques t ion : do I believe in God? Listen to the subconsc ious mind for it is your master, your connec t ion to your good self and your G o d self. T h e physical m i n d has weaknesses and your aim in th is life is to t r anscend those weaknesses by developing the subconsc ious mind .

T h e m o s t ha rmfu l aspect of the physical mind is that it is Habi t - forming and comfor t ab le with its bad habits . It will

194 T h e Laws Of T h e Spirit World

say, "I like being p roud , so why change?" T h e subconsc ious mind is never set in its ways — it keeps growing. You can fool your fellow men and you can fool yourself, but you can never fool the God-given subconscious mind. It is the subconsc ious mind that cons tan t ly updates a person 's Akashic Records . H u m a n beings believe tha t G o d punishes t h e m . T h e t r u t h is t ha t the i r own s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d s pun i sh t h e m when they go on the wrong pa th because the subconsc ious m i n d knows the na tu re o f their soul . Your memory of the spir i t world and your pas t lives has simply been blocked f r o m your physical mind . Your subconsc ious m i n d r e m e m b e r s the sp i r i t wor ld , and it knows de ta i l s abou t each and every life you have lived on Earth, b u t th is i n f o r m a t i o n canno t be revealed t o your physical m i n d for the fo l lowing reasons:

1. If you r e m e m b e r t he s ins o f y o u r p a s t l i fe , t h o s e m e m o r i e s wil l h a u n t y o u a n d p r e v e n t y o u f r o m growing. For example, if you h u r t someone badly in a pas t life, the guil t migh t be t oo m u c h for you to cope with in th is life and you would be unable to forgive yourself . G o d wants all souls t o have a clean slate t o s tar t with.

2. Your phys ica l m i n d is l imi ted ; it is n o t capable o f u n d e r s t a n d i n g many t h i n g s t h a t t h e s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d knows.

3. If you r emember details o f the spir i t world and the joy and peace you felt (if you were on a good Rea lm) , you would n o t be able to survive on Ear th for even a second. Your longing for the spir i t world would be so intense that you would be miserable on Ear th .

4- Your l ife on Ear th is a test . If you were aware of the


karma, t e s t i n g and t r a i n i n g you are to go t h r o u g h , y o u r j o u r n e y on E a r t h w o u l d have n o m e a n i n g . Moreover, if everything was revealed to you, it would n o l o n g e r be a t e s t . You are o n E a r t h t o ga in experience and t ra in your spir i t , t o pu r i fy your soul t o r ise h ighe r and higher . If you r e m e m b e r e d your previous lives, you would n o t make the same mistakes again. You w o u l d n o t repea t your mis takes because you wou ld be pre-warned, so there could be n o real g r o w t h . Your l i fe w o u l d be technica l , you r cho ices robot ic , and you would live like a machine.

T h e r e are a few Ea r th souls w h o have a more developed s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d t h a n o t h e r s . S o m e t i m e s , these sou l s are allowed to remember their previous lives on Ear th , and they may also have memor ies o f the spir i t world, b u t th is is very rare. I t is allowed to happen fo r a specific reason, t o give m o r e f a i t h t o p e o p l e a n d t o h e l p s p r e a d G o d ' s knowledge.

If a person's subconscious mind is not open, how

can the person change?

Let us take the s tory of Soordas as an example. In his case, because o f his evil ac t ions , h is s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d had gone to sleep. H e needed a physical jolt, which came in the f o r m of a car accident, t o wake h im up. T h a t accident set o f f a chain o f events tha t eventually led h im to a cave in which, when faced wi th death , he u n d e r s t o o d and finally real ised the w r o n g deeds he had d o n e . In his case, t h i s p a i n f u l jol t was requi red because his subconsc ious m i n d Had b e c o m e c o m p l e t e l y d o r m a n t . Bu t if a p e r s o n ' s s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d is even s l ight ly open , the soul m u s t


seize the chance to talk to it and confess the wrong they have done, in order t o avoid a physical blow. W h e n we use t he w o r d ' c o n f e s s ' we mean a genu ine de sire t o change . O n l y when H i s H i g h G o o d Sou l was sure tha t S o o r d a s wanted to change f r o m within — tha t he genuinely repented — was he lp sent . H e confessed his wrongdo ings and wanted to change, bu t he confessed to himself in a dark cave in the middle o f a jungle, su r rounded by wild animals. It wasn ' t a place of worsh ip and there was no one to hear h im confess — except for his own subconsc ious mind . O n Ear th there is a wrong n o t i o n tha t if you confess t o a priest , your sins will be forgiven. T h i s is absolutely false. T h e priest has no power t o fo rg ive you . T h e p r i e s t is, a f t e r all, a h u m a n being himself . I f the priest has spir i tual knowledge, he can surely guide you, b u t please unde r s t and that when you are ' c o n f e s s i n g ' , it m e a n s you are a d m i t t i n g to y o u r o w n s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d t h a t you have d o n e w r o n g a n d are asking fo r help to change.

Even the word ' r epen tance ' is grossly m i s u n d e r s t o o d on E a r t h . R e p e n t a n c e does n o t only mean be ing so r ry f o r one ' s act ions; it means truly changing and rec t i fy ing the wrong you have done, and never repeat ing mistakes. T h e choice to improve as a h u m a n being can come only f r o m w i t h i n a s o u l . N o o n e can f o r c e t h a t s o u l t o r i se sp i r i tua l ly , even t h o u g h it is f o r t h a t sou l ' s own g o o d . This is the law of free will. Also, G o d ' s helpers have the power to know if tha t soul t ruly wants t o improve. T h a t is, f r o m t h e s p i r i t w o r l d , s p i r i t s o u l s can d e t e r m i n e t h e weakness or s t r eng th of a soul ' s resolve to change. T h e key to sp i r i tua l p rogress is a genu ine desire t o change; only then can the subconsc ious mind guide a soul toward the l ight.


How does one open the subconscious mind?

T h e m o s t i m p o r t a n t t h i n g f o r a h u m a n be ing t o do in order to progress spir i tually is to open the subconscious mind. H e r e are a few t h i n g s you can do t o o p e n y o u r subconsc ious mind :

1. Pray.

Ask G o d t o he lp you t o o p e n y o u r s u b c o n s c i o u s mind :

"Oh, dear God Almighty, lead me to your good ways. Make me do the right things. Help me throw away any wrong desires or feelings I have. Give me your wisdom; show me your l ighted path. He lp me awaken my subconscious mind so that it never lets me do wrong. O h God Almighty, please help me!"

2. Blank your mind (refer to " H o w to Blank your M i n d " on pg. 1 9 8 ) .

You shou ld have no t h o u g h t s whatsoever. Your m i n d s h o u l d be a b s o l u t e l y b l ank . I f any t h o u g h t s e n t e r y o u r m i n d , let t h e m p a s s o n t h e i r o w n — d o n o t s t rugg le to get rid o f t h e m or indulge t h e m . Blank y o u r m i n d f o r n o m o r e t h a n 2 m i n u t e s in p laces where the v ib ra t ions are pos i t ive . Intui t ively, t ry to feel if the place has posi t ive or negative vibrat ions. In places where the vibra t ions are negative, do no t blank your m i n d fo r more than a minu te . Blank your mind only between sunrise and sunset .

3- Talk to your subconsc ious mind .

By ta lk ing to your s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d you acknow-ledge i ts presence. T h e n , su r render t o it comple te ly


and ask it t o guide you.

4- Listen to the advice your subconsc ious mind gives you.

To l isten means to convert guidance in to act ion. Each t i m e you f o l l o w the advice o f y o u r s u b c o n s c i o u s mind , you are empower ing it. Each t ime you ignore its advice and do no t listen, you are weakening it.

5. C o n t r o l your physical mind . Tell it you are its master, n o t its slave.

O n Ear th , your physical m i n d is 100% open, b u t the s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d is o p e n on ly 1% to 2% in an average h u m a n be ing . I f you are a very g o o d soul , your subconsc ious mind will open to a m a x i m u m of 7% t o 9% on Ear th . Therefore , even t h o u g h a f r ac t ion o f y o u r s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d is o p e n , it can easi ly overpower the physical m i n d if you choose. Even when a soul reaches Realm 7 Stage 9, the subconsc ious m i n d is open only 20%. You will con t inue to evolve in the next universe, and your subconsc ious mind will only be ful ly open (100%) in the final stage of the seventh universe and you will t h e n finally be able to understand God and live in H i s presence.

Below are in s t ruc t ions on H o w to Blank Your Mind:

It is crucial tha t you blank your mind only after sunrise and before sunset because when the sun sets, the v ib ra t ions on E a r t h change and become m o r e negat ive. If you fo l l ow these s imple steps, you will be more at peace.

I . In your own words, ask G o d to pro tec t you and help


you open your subconsc ious mind .

2. Pray any shor t and sincere prayer of your choice.

3. Blank your mind . In o rde r t o blank your mind , the best t h ing to do is t o l is ten to d i s t an t s o u n d s . D o no t analyse anything. If a t h o u g h t comes, it is okay; it will go away on its own. D o n o t try to force it away. Remain calm.

4- Blank your mind for abou t 2 minu tes in places where t h e v i b r a t i o n is p o s i t i v e . In p l aces whe re t h e v ibra t ions are negative, do n o t blank your m i n d f o r more than a minu te . T h i s is fo r your own pro tec t ion .

5. T h a n k G o d Almighty. E n d wi th a sho r t and sincere prayer.

6. T h e r e shou ld be a th ree -hour gap between t imes when you are blanking your mind .

7- Neve r face S o u t h when you b lank your m i n d . I t is best t o face N o r t h .

8. D o n o t blank your m i n d when su r rounded by people, as you may unknowing ly o p e n yourse l f t o negat ive vibrat ions .

9. Make sure you have a na tura l f lame, such as a candle, tealight, diya etc. nearby. Light p ro tec t s you when you blank your mind.

You will surely get the guidance to make the r ight choice and the s t r eng th to do the r ight t h ing and conver t your t h o u g h t s in to positive, spir i tual act ion.


Below is one f ina l look at the d i f f e r e n c e s be tween the subconsc ious mind and the physical mind. U n d e r s t a n d the nature of these two minds so that you know which mind to l isten to and which mind to train.

Subconscious Mind Physical Mind

Also known as Conscience, Higher Mind, Higher Self

Also known as Conscious Mind

Spiritual Physical

The inner, conscientious mind

The outer, superficial mind

Infinite in its understanding Limited in its understanding

Eternal Temporary

Truthful and firm May not be truthful, and may be ficklc

Selfless Mostly selfish

Always calm Can be anxious and unstable

Does not seek proof of God's existence

Needs proof and will always doubt God's existence

Perseveres until the right action is taken

Gives up, looks for the easy way out and tries to justify wrong thoughts and actions

Connected to the spirit world

Earthbound

Provides inner strength Makes you weak

Helps to overcome temptation

Gives in to temptation

Feels, senses, does not depend on the physical world

Depends entirely on the physical world

FREE WILL

m

"You are the creator of your own consequences."

"True freedom means you are free to do the right thing."

"You are on Earth to use free will to overcome temptation and negativity."

"Cod has given you free will and the freedom to choose, so a sensible soul will use his freedom to choose good rather than bad and will

continue to advance spiritually."

"Don't go on the wrong path for just a few years of temporary happiness on Earth, for this will make you go through hundreds of

years of suffering in the lower Realms of the spirit world."

What does free will mean in relation to our life

on Earth?

T he tact that you have free will means you are in cont ro l y o u r m i n d , body , a n d s p i r i t , a n d m u s t bear t h e

consequences o f your ac t ions . T h e E a r t h is a school , a place you come to f r o m the spiri t world in order to repay your karma, undergo tes t ing and training, and ful f i l l your spiritual miss ion. H o w you go t h r o u g h this is entirely up t o you. You can face your challenges bravely with a smile, ° r you can complain and indulge in self-pity. You can make


s t r o n g mora l choices and thereby n o u r i s h your soul , or give in t o t e m p t a t i o n and feed the ego and weaken the s p i r i t in t h e p r o c e s s . T h e c h o i c e s you make lead you t o w a r d G o d or away f r o m H i m . N u r t u r e the sp i r i t or watch it wither: you are free to do as you wish. You either pass your tes ts or fail them. You are the creator o f your own consequences . Only you can de te rmine the progress of your soul by the choices you make on Ear th and in the spir i t world.

Free will comes in to effect in the spir i t world itself, f r o m the t ime a sou l decides to be r e b o r n on Ea r th . Li fe on Ear th is a risk, bu t it is a risk you have chosen. We do no t want t o scare any of you, bu t we urge souls on Ear th to be aware. T h e m o r e you a l low y o u r s e l f t o be r u l e d by negativity, the harder it is fo r you to walk on the spir i tual path . Negat iv i ty exists on Ear th so that you can resist it. T h a t is how you build spir i tual muscle. W h e n you fail t o exercise your spiri t , you work f r o m the physical m i n d and make weak mora l choices. O n e weak m o m e n t cou ld have c o n s e q u e n c e s t ha t may last a l i f e t ime . O n e s t ep in the wrong d i r ec t i on could make it very d i f f i c u l t f o r you to r e t u r n to the r igh t pa th . It is very easy to go o f f - t r a c k when faced wi th t e m p t a t i o n . T h e r e are some souls who have c o m m i t t e d the mos t horr i f ic acts in the name of G o d a n d r e l i g i o n . T h e r e are s o u l s w h o have h a r m e d , a n d con t inue to harm, their own family. T h e r e are souls who t o r t u r e ch i ldren and old people . T h e s e souls are on the lowest o f Realms, and it is d i f f i cu l t fo r t h e m to rise spiri-tually fo r two ma jo r reasons. Firs t , due to their ac t ions , the i r s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d has b e c o m e d o r m a n t . Second , b e c a u s e they are on t he l o w e s t o f R e a l m s , t hey are su r rounded by souls of a similar na ture — on Ear th as well as in the spir i t world. These souls do no t want to improve,

Free Will 2 0 3

nor do they want o the r s t o change because they want t o s t r eng then the i r n u m b e r s . Negat ive ly in f luenc ing o thers , by force or by manipula t ion , they s top the spir i tual growth of those a round them — thus , breaking the law of free will. O n E a r t h , such evil sou l s have c o m p l e t e d i s r e g a r d f o r G o d ' s laws because they do n o t believe in H i m , or they have wrong n o t i o n s a b o u t sp i r i tua l i ty . But they need t o unde r s t and tha t no mat te r what, when a human being dies his subconsc ious mind awakens enough to take h im to the place he deserves to go. T h a t is G o d ' s jus t ice and it is inf ini te .

If all souls are created by God, how can some

souls be evil?

To live means to grow spiritually, to move forward towards God . T h e word 'evil' is the reverse of 'live'. Evil refers t o r e g r e s s i o n ; it s i g n i f i e s a s o u l ' s n e g a t i v e j o u r n e y , i t s m o v e m e n t away f r o m G o d , caused by negative t h o u g h t s , words and deeds . T h e sou l is e t e rna l and can never be des t royed , b u t it can be darkened . It can acqui re darker shades when you make immoral choices and when you fail your tes ts on Ear th . W h a t are you, if n o t a sum of your t h o u g h t s , words , and deeds? H o w can you separate your a c t i o n s f r o m y o u r sou l? T h e s o u l is s t r e n g t h e n e d o r weakened because of your ac t ions , so you canno t separa te one f r o m the other.

W h e n people wander o f f o n t o the wrong path, they jus t i fy their act ions, or they say they gave in to t e m p t a t i o n du r ing a m o m e n t o f weaknes s . T h e y may say, "You c a n n o t unders tand what I am going th rough . " But c i rcumstances cannot be used as an excuse for immoral act ions. You m u s t accept responsibi l i ty for all your act ions. You live in the


presen t and canno t separa te yourself f r o m your p r e sen t act ions. If at this m o m e n t you are on the wrong path , you canno t look at the past and tell yourself that you were a good h u m a n being at that t ime. You live in the present and shal l be j u d g e d acco rd ing ly by your own s u b c o n s c i o u s mind . You were the act then, you are the act now, and who you are is the result of what you th ink, say and do.

It is said that it is Godly to help everyone. I t is good to help your fellow men, but you cannot help all your fellow men, as some are totally negative. You may think it is not for you to decide who is negative and who is no t , t o do tha t is being judgmenta l . D o no t be judgmenta l , b u t use your judgment .

T h e d i f f e r e n c e is s i m p l e . W h e n you ana lyse w h e t h e r ano ther h u m a n being is good or no t , it is no t a j u d g m e n t made ou t of superior i ty to p u t t hem down, bu t ra ther ou t of awareness — a spir i tual ins t inc t that G o d has given you for the p ro tec t ion of your own spir i t as well as the spir i ts of t hose a r o u n d you. By he lp ing negative souls , you are providing them with sus tenance so that they can con t inue their wrong act ions. You are encouraging them. By do ing so, you fall spiri tually since you are failing to take a mora l s tand . T h e only t ime you shou ld help a negative sou l is when he has repented for his deeds and genuinely wants t o i m p r o v e . T h e n , it is y o u r d u t y t o b r i n g h i m o u t o f negative inf luences and help h im progress to a higher level. Good judgment is about truth; being judgmental is about the ego. T h e choices you make on Ear th bui ld the f o u n d a t i o n s of your home in the spiri t world. O n Ear th , vou can either choose to be a slave to the physical m i n d or a s tuden t of the subconsc ious mind . T h e gif t of free will is ours . We mus t use it wisely.

KARMA

<g§)

" What you sow, you reap."

"Karma is not punishment — it is learning. It is a law that is not intended to blindly punish but to teach you where you went wrong,

and to make you understand your mistake from a soul level."

"Sorry has no meaning."

"God's justice is perfect — no one can escape it."

"If you cannot see others' happiness, you cannot be happy yourself."

What is karma?

Karma is based on the pr inciple tha t : what you sow, you reap. It can be explained in t e rms of cause and effect . T h e cause r e f e r s t o y o u r a c t i o n s and t he effect r e f e r s t o t he consequences of those act ions. There fore , karma is a debt you owe or a b less ing you shal l receive. T h e r e are t w o types o f karma: negat ive and pos i t ive . N e g a t i v e or bad karma refers t o the consequences you have to face due to negative act ions. Positive or good karma refers to spir i tual f less ings tha t will come your way due to posit ive act ions

selfless good deeds.

( ] o d has made laws by which H i s universe is governed, and u is the duty of all H i s creat ions to fol low those laws. It is


their duty, b u t they cannot be forced in to doing any th ing — th is is the na tu re of free will. So whatever choice you make is up to you, bu t even if you choose not t o fo l low G o d ' s laws you will always operate under them. N o soul is beyond spir i tual law.

How does karma work? Can positive and

negative karma cancel each other out?

T h e two do no t cancel each o the r out , so you will have to pay f o r y o u r m i s d e e d s , a n d y o u will receive s p i r i t u a l b less ings f o r t he g o o d deeds . G o o d and bad ka rma are comple te ly separate f r o m each other . A pe r son can bu i ld karma with his or her t h o u g h t s as well. Karma is a resul t no t only o f action, bu t of t h o u g h t and words as well. All three go hand in hand.

How does negative karma come to a person?

It can come to you as mental , physical, or emot iona l pain, in t h e f o r m o f p r o b l e m s w i t h h e a l t h , fami ly , m o n e y , legali t ies, and so on. I l lness can be s o m e t h i n g you have chosen to go t h rough in order to pay of f your karmic debt . T h i s is the idea behind negative karma — you are us ing this ear thly l ife t o pay o f f a debt . T h i s debt was created n o t only in past lives bu t in your current life as well. D o no t be unde r the impress ion that you are only paying for the wrong deeds you have done in a previous life. You could have come to Ear th with li t t le karma, a small karmic debt , b u t if you are on the w r o n g p a t h now, you are a d d i n g nega t ive ka rma as you c o n t i n u e t o live your l i fe . T h e u n d e r s t a n d i n g of karma is actually very usefu l to h u m a n

Karma 207

beings because there are t imes when pain comes your way, ind you d o n o t know why. T h i s pa in is s o m e t h i n g you have c h o s e n b e c a u s e it is neces sa ry f o r y o u r s p i r i t u a l g rowth . Knowing this, you will be able to go t h r o u g h it more graceful ly. Never lose an o p p o r t u n i t y to u n d o the wrong deeds you have done. It is a blessing to resolve past issues in this life on Ear th itself, ra ther than procras t ina te because o f your pr ide. You m u s t resolve the karma wi th each par t icular person in this l i fe t ime only; you can pay o f f karma m u c h easily and more quickly in this manner than if you wait t o pay it o f f in ano the r life. If you don ' t u n d o the wrong you have done now, your negative karma increases because G o d has given you an o p p o r t u n i t y , wh ich you chose to reject.

Many people believe negative karma can be wiped

off by donating to charities. Is this true?

N o . You have to pay f o r t he w r o n g you have d o n e n o mat te r how much you give in charity. You can never wipe o f f karma in this manner . T h e r e are many people who have the incorrect n o t i o n tha t if they give thousands to charity they will go to heaven. If ycu have that mot ive when you do a g o o d deed, you can fo rge t a b o u t seeing heaven. In your world, justice d ispensed by even the wisest o f judges may n o t always be correct , bu t G o d ' s laws are per fec t and the just ice you receive as a result of those laws is perfect . T h i s just ice comes to you in the f o r m of karma. If you try to h ide s o m e t h i n g f r o m y o u r f e l low man , it may s tay h idden , b u t you c a n n o t h ide a n y t h i n g f r o m G o d . Every t h o u g h t , w o r d , and a c t i o n is r e c o r d e d in t h e Akash ic Records by your subconsc ious mind. W h e t h e r you believe it or not , this is t rue.


One of the earliest things you said was, "Go

through all your troubles bravely and with a smile,"

but when people are in pain, how is this possible?

It is very i m p o r t a n t t o go t h r o u g h your t roubles bravely and with a smile because your karma has to be paid o f f and you m u s t n o t r esen t i t . I f you c o m p l a i n and g r u m b l e , indulge in self pity and depression, make your pain a very big deal t hus making life d i f f i cu l t fo r your loved ones and the people who are trying to help you, you are no t repaying your karma at all; you may even be adding negative karma. Or, if you are repaying it, the payment is happen ing at a very slow rate and your pain may feel never-ending. T h i s is how you are conver t ing your pa in i n to su f f e r ing . But if you face your p r o b l e m s bravely, you are d e m o n s t r a t i n g courage and s t reng then ing your spiri t . You are aware o f the n a t u r e o f the p r o b l e m s and you are dea l ing w i t h t h e m f r o m a higher, spir i tual perspective. So smile t h r o u g h your p r o b l e m s , be posi t ive , and hand le your pa in wi th grace. G r a c e s i m p l y m e a n s t h a t you m a i n t a i n d i g n i t y , have comple te fa i th in G o d and H i s justice, and have a sense of humour , t o o — wi thou t losing sight o f the impor tance o f the s i tua t ion . Be light in a grave s i tua t ion . W h e n you do this, spir i t souls are able to help you th rough your karma. W h e n you display courage and grace, you are showing G o d that you are able to handle the p rob lems that come your way in a sp i r i tua l manner , w i t h o u t b l aming anyone and w i t h o u t b e i n g r e s e n t f u l o r nega t ive . You are o p e r a t i n g f r o m your subconsc ious m m d and spiri t souls are able to pray for you so that you have the s t reng th to handle your p r o b l e m s . Sp i r i t souls c a n n o t take away your p r o b l e m s , but with added prayer and p ro tec t ion f r o m the spiri t world

Karma 209

you receive more strength t o make it t h rough your p rob lems and you can pay o f f your karma easily and quickly. T h i s does no t mean that your karma lessens; it means you get the s t rength and wisdom to deal with it be t te r and more quickly.

But there are times when human beings go

through unimaginable pain. It might seem harsh to

think at that time: "This is my karma. I deserve this."

Yes, we u n d e r s t a n d what you are saying. But we are n o t asking you to condemn yourself . We are simply asking you to be aware o f sp i r i tua l laws — th ings happen to h u m a n be ings because o f the choices they make. T h i s does n o t mean the bad th ings t h a t happen t o you are your f au l t . They happen because there is a lack of awareness. You were n o t aware at the t ime tha t you did someth ing wrong. Or, if you were aware, you did n o t have the s t r eng th t o do the r i gh t t h i n g . However , t he re are s i t u a t i o n s w h e n h u m a n beings go t h rough incredible hardsh ips even t h o u g h it may not be t he i r ka rma. T h i s h a p p e n s when a n o t h e r h u m a n being wrongly uses his free will t o cause ha rm to someone else. U n f o r t u n a t e l y , t h i s is t h e r isk h u m a n b e i n g s take when they take rebir th on Ear th . T h e only so lu t ion is to be s t rong, and no t to resent G o d . Pray to G o d to save you and to help you heal.

Somet imes , people fear no t only the negative karma, bu t also the good th ings tha t happen in their lives. T h e y feel tha t at any m o m e n t it will all disappear. G o i n g t h r o u g h v o u r bad k a r m a brave ly is i m p o r t a n t , b u t it is a l so i m p o r t a n t to accept good karma wi th grace. It is indeed


surpr i s ing how many h u m a n beings do no t know how to accept the good th ings that come their way.

F i r s t o f all, always thank God for all the good that happens in your life. T h i s is very, very i m p o r t a n t . On Earth , people beg G o d to help them in t imes of distress, bu t du r ing good times, when all is well, they convenient ly fo rge t G o d . If you remember G o d du r ing p a i n f u l t imes, r e m e m b e r H i m d u r i n g g o o d t imes as well. Re jo ice wi th H i m . A f t e r all, we are H i s chi ldren. H e does feel happy w h e n we p r o g r e s s s p i r i t u a l l y or w h e n we f u l f i l l our m i s s i o n . H e wan ts t o give us as many b less ings and as m u c h joy as we can handle.

S e c o n d l y , t h a n k t h o s e w h o have h e l p e d y o u in y o u r j ou rney — your family, f r i e n d s and anyone else w h o has he lped you — even your angels in the sp i r i t wor ld . I t is i m p o r t a n t to acknowledge them. W i t h o u t your knowledge, your angels have saved you f r o m harm so many t imes and have p rov ided you wi th t h a t extra p u s h when you m o s t needed it, so be sure to mental ly thank them and ask G o d to bless them. Ear th souls can indeed ask G o d Almighty to bless their loved ones in the spir i t world, and even their Spir i t Gu ides and o ther angels.

Thirdly, guil t is ano ther fac tor tha t comes in to play when dea l ing w i t h g o o d karma. O n E a r t h , h u m a n be ings are made to feel gui l ty f o r all the wrong reasons. T h e r e are some who derive pleasure f r o m making o thers feel guilty. D o n o t give in to such people, no mat te r how close they are to you. These people will always compare their journey w i t h y o u r s and will make you fee l bad ly a b o u t t h e b less ings tha t exist in your life. U n d e r s t a n d very clearly t ha t if you are on the r i g h t p a t h and s o m e t h i n g g o o d

Karma 211

comes your way, it is only because you deserve it . W h y shou ld you feel guilty? If someone else does n o t have the same bless ings as you do , the re may be a reason f o r it. M a y b e they are at a d i f f e r e n t s t a g e in t h e i r s p i r i t u a l journey, where they are paying o f f a lot of karma or are undergo ing severe tes t ing and training. By all means, help t h e m ou t and s u p p o r t them, but do not give in to their feelings of self-pity, and do not question the blessings of your own journey. T h e r e are some souls who are on the wrong pa th and have to pay for the wrong deeds they have d o n e . O n c e they are o n t he r i g h t pa th , t he i r lives will change too . You do no t know what they have chosen in the spir i t world. Enjoy the good that comes your way and be gra te fu l fo r it.

T h e way to be g ra t e fu l f o r the good f o r t u n e tha t comes your way is to share it wi th ano ther good soul. Again, there is no need to reveal exactly what is happening in your life; there is no need to m e n t i o n every detail. In fact, you m u s t be silent about the good, and no t speak about it t o o much except t o a t rus ted few or you will a t t ract negative energy. But if you are h a p p y because o f s o m e t h i n g g o o d t h a t h a p p e n s t o you, share t h a t fee l ing . Make s o m e o n e else happy. And if you are in a pos i t ion of s t rength , use it to help o the r good souls . T h a t is the very reason you have been p u t in t h a t p o s i t i o n in the f i r s t place. E n j o y t he s p i r i t u a l b l e s s i n g s t h a t c o m e y o u r way a n d use t h o s e blessings to help o the r good souls.

What are the things that create negative karma?

I . H u r t i n g yourself. For example, when you do no t look a f t e r your hea l th . Bad h a b i t s like d r u g s , s m o k i n g ,


d r i n k i n g , over ea t ing , lack of g o o d n u t r i t i o n a n d exercise and mos t i m p o r t a n t — negative th ink ing and act ions, t ruly destroy your soul.

H u r t i n g others . H a r m i n g someone else physically, or c a u s i n g e m o t i o n a l pa in , b u i l d s n e g a t i v e k a r m a . Emot iona l pain is just as bad as physical pain.

N o t d e a l i n g well w i t h e x i s t i n g p r o b l e m s by n o t accept ing and facing the t r u th in the s i tua t ion .

To l e r a t i ng the wrong behav iou r s o f negat ive sou l s . You m u s t try to explain to t h e m where they are going wrong. If they do no t l is ten that is their choice, b u t do no t allow them to take advantage of you. D o not encourage evil. D o no t be nice to an evil pe r son . If you are nice to an evil pe rson , you are encourag ing h im and to encourage an evil soul means you are in t h e s a m e s i n f u l ca tegory . T h e r e f o r e , deve lop y o u r s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d f a s t e r so t h a t you can eas i ly recognize an evil person.

Avoiding responsibi l i ty . For example, when you r u n away f r o m your dut ies towards your parents, children, loved ones etc.

Encourag ing o thers to do wrong and leading t h e m on the wrong pa th e.g. d rug peddlers .

S p o i l i n g your ch i ld ren . You bu i ld ka rma t h i s way because it is your d u t y to t r a in t h e m well. Pa ren t s shou ld also be open to what their children have to say, as the subconscious mind of a child can be open, and the child will operate f r o m inst inct . But be sure that the child is not manipu la t ing you for his or her own

Karma 213

selfish purposes .

8. Failing to recognize and ful f i l l your spir i tual miss ion on Ear th .

9- C o m m i t t i n g s u i c i d e . You b u i l d a g r e a t deal o f negative karma and you fall one whole Realm because y o u are n o t a l l o w i n g y o u r s o u l t o c o m p l e t e i t s journey. You p u t an end to the very life and s i tua t ions thatjyow had chosen. Your due dates are chosen by you in accordance wi th G o d ' s laws. It is G o d w h o has given you life, and it is no t up to you to take it.

10. N o t t ak ing ac t ion . S o m e t i m e s , peop le d o n o t take responsibi l i ty or they lack courage to do what is r ight . T h e y are making the wrong choice because they are being specta tors instead of using their free will to do what is r ight .

11. Wan t ing to have ' fun ' . Young people believe tha t when they are young they need to "experience l ife" and they use that as an excuse fo r do ing th ings that are wrong. It is important to enjoy your earthly journey, but not at the cost of your soul.

Always remember that you fall more and build more karma if y o u make w r o n g c h o i c e s a f t e r g a i n i n g s p i r i t u a l knowledge than if you have no knowledge at all.

How does a person pay off their karma on Earth?

H ere are a few guidelines on How to Pay O f f Karma:

I. Accept the problem. Whatever the obstacle, make sure you don ' t run away f r o m it.


2. H a v e a s ince re a n d g e n u i n e des i r e t o c h a n g e t h e s i tua t ion and deal with it well.

3. U n d e r s t a n d that th is is what you have chosen in the spir i t world for your own growth or it is a result o f a choice you have made in your present life. Tes t ing and t ra in ing are o p p o r t u n i t i e s fo r g rowth tha t will help you i m p r o v e . W h e n y o u u n d e r s t a n d why t h i n g s happen your resistance to t h e m is lower and you are no longer negative abou t your problems.

4- Try to th ink of every obstacle as a test . If you fail, the test will keep coming back to you and it will con t inue to become harder and harder.

5. Be posit ive and have fa i th in God . Pray. Ask G o d to give you s t rength and wisdom.

6. Try no t t o add more karma. Act wisely. Remember tha t even the smallest sin has to be accounted for. Jus t as the smallest d rop in the ocean helps f o r m the whole, so it is with karma. T h e smallest action, good or bad, has consequences.

7. D o n o t compare journeys . Never q u e s t i o n why you are experiencing pain and someone else is no t . T h a t , itself, is a wrong t h o u g h t and will prevent you f r o m growing.

8. C o n t r o l t h e p h y s i c a l m i n d and l i s t e n t o t h e subconsc ious mind . It stays calm du r ing a calamity and will guide you.

9- N e v e r b lame o t h e r s f o r the t h i n g s t ha t h a p p e n in your life. You m u s t take responsibi l i ty fo r your life. You can change anyt ime you want to. M o s t people are weak because they choose to be.

Karma 215

10. Even when you are in t rouble or experiencing pain, try to help someone else t h rough small acts of kindness . T h i s change of focus will help you. Make sure your motive is pure. W h e n you help others , G o d gives you the s t rength to go t h r o u g h your own p rob lems more easily and you also get blessings f r o m the people you help.

11. Take rion. D o your best and leave the rest t o G o d . exisL

the Orally vsting' and 'training' the same as karma?

f T h e y are no t the same as karma bu t are l inked to karma. W h e n you were in t he sp i r i t wor ld , you chose t o come down to Ear th in order t o do the fol lowing: 1. Repay karma. 2. U n d e r g o tes t ing and t ra ining.

3. Fulfill your spir i tual miss ion — your t rue pu rpose for being on Ear th .

4- Protect your loved ones.

T h e s e f o u r t h i n g s , col lect ively , make up y o u r p a t h on Ear th .

N o t all p roblems tha t come your way are karmic. D i f f i cu l t s i tua t ions come your way as tes ts or t ra ining so that you can b e c o m e aware o f y o u r weaknesses or nega t ive sou l characteris t ics and cult ivate posit ive soul characterist ics. If karma is a deb t you owe or a bless ing you shall receive, t r a i n i n g is y o u r preparation. It is what you c h o o s e to go th rough so that you are prepared to pass a par t icular test. W i t h the help of H i g h G o o d Souls in the spir i t world you


select t he types o f t r a i n i n g t h a t you wish to c o m p l e t e du r ing your earthly life. You also choose what you wish to be t e s t e d on , t h a t is, t he spec i f i c sou l c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s . However , t he n a t u r e o f t h e t e s t s , t he i r m a g n i t u d e and t iming are no t decided by you, bu t automatical ly provided by your subconsc ious mind . For example, when you go to university, you select the courses you would like to learn; however, at the end of the course, you do n o t select the 7 c ar exact ques t ions on your exam papers. The re be many such tes ts at d i f fe ren t po in t s in your life, ar ey will be given to you unt i l you pass t hem extremely Jf y ° T r a i n i n g makes y o u r sp i r i t s t r o n g and he lps you r e a l i s e ' c e r t a i n t r u t h s ; t r a in ing helps your soul acquire certain qua l i t i es t ha t are essen t ia l fo r you t o pass t e s t s and f u l f i l l you r miss ion . Tra in ing comes in a series of situations wi th which you have to cope and tha t will help you learn and grow. Training comes in many f o r m s according to what you have chosen based on the requ i rements of your own soul. You will then be tes ted to see if you have learned those t r u t h s or lessons and if they have become par t of your being.

Tests exist to de termine whether you have learned spir i tual lessons.

W h e n you have learned a lesson well, the tes t does n o t appear again. You have gone t h r o u g h a cer ta in s i t u a t i o n and have moved beyond it, which means you have u n d e r -s tood the higher pu rpose of" the struggle.

Let us say tha t you are p r o u d abou t your success. You will come across s i tua t ions in which you will experience fai lure ( y o u r t r a i n i n g ) . If you u n d e r s t a n d t he n a t u r e o f t h i s failure, tha t it is presented to you to teach you humili ty, and you do become humble , you have learned the lesson

Karma 217

and therefore passed the test . You have replaced a negative s o u l c h a r a c t e r i s t i c ( p r i d e ) w i t h a p o s i t i v e s o u l characteris t ic (humi l i ty ) . O n c e this change is genuine, you have t r u l y pa s sed y o u r t e s t . T h i s is how y o u r s o u l is t r a i n e d . As you r ise h i g h e r sp i r i tua l ly , y o u r t e s t s and t ra ining become of a higher nature, and you receive added help f r o m the spiri t world.

Tests also exist to help de te rmine your moral s t r eng th . D o you choose the easy way o u t regardless of the fact that it may be morally wrong, or do you choose what is r ight even t h o u g h it is the more d i f f i c u l t path? Karma, t e s t ing and t ra in ing are linked, bu t they are no t the same th ing . T h e b o t t o m line is th is : whatever s i t u a t i o n c o m e s your way handle it wi th courage and a smile, bu t always be aware. Tests come to you when you least expect them.

A spiritual test is a surprise test. T h i s is the only way you will know if you have t ruly learned spir i tual lessons. To be spir i tually aware, opera te f r o m the subconsc ious mind so you n a t u r a l l y do w h a t is r i g h t . I f you w o r k f r o m t h e physical m ind when a sp i r i tua l tes t comes your way, you are using the wrong muscle (i.e. the physical m i n d ) , so you may no t do well or you may fail completely. W h e n a test comes your way, you may become paralysed wi th fear, or b e c o m e ang ry a n d f r u s t r a t e d , a n d t h e m o m e n t t h a t h a p p e n s , you have g o t t e n o f f t o a w r o n g s t a r t by d i s c o n n e c t i n g f r o m the s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d . You have activated the wrong muscle — the physical mind. Your s tar t is everything — once you have activated the wrong muscle, vou will keep using it. Eventually, when you have failed the test, vou will realise what vou have done. W h e n you fail a test , it comes back to you b u t it is always harder . T h e lesson you need to learn will remain the same, b u t the test


will come in a d i f fe ren t f o r m . T h i s is how a spi r i tual test is a surpr ise test . Un t i l you have learned the lesson, similar p rob l ems will keep coming your way again and again till you overcome it.

A n o t h e r law is t h a t t h e h i g h e r you go sp i r i t ua l ly , t he harder your tests become, jus t as when you go to a higher grade in school , your exams become harder. If you have s p i r i t u a l k n o w l e d g e and you s t i l l r u n away f r o m y o u r p r o b l e m s , you fal l f a s t e r . W h a t e v e r y o u r r e a s o n f o r r u n n i n g away, be it fear , ego, o r s o m e t h i n g else , t h e sp i r i t ua l law is t ha t if you have knowledge , you have a g r e a t e r r e s p o n s i b i l i t y t o a c c e p t k a r m a well , u n d e r g o t ra ining, and pass your spir i tual tests.

T h e r e are so m a n y i n d i v i d u a l s on E a r t h w h o have wonde r fu l knowledge, bu t who are on low Realms. T h i s is because in spi te of having knowledge, they do n o t make use o f it f o r their b e t t e r m e n t . N o t h i n g can save t h e m if t h e y are on t h e w r o n g p a t h , even if t h e y s h a r e t h e i r knowledge with o thers . There fore , spir i tual knowledge can actual ly cause you to fal l even lower. D o i n g s o m e t h i n g w r o n g a f t e r a c q u i r i n g k n o w l e d g e s h o w s a c o m p l e t e disregard for the spir i tual laws, and your karmic deb t will increase . T h e d o w n f a l l o f t w o ind iv idua l s w h o c o m m i t wrong deeds of similar magn i tude can differ ; the one who has more knowledge goes lower spiritually and bui lds more negative karma.

Can you give us a few examples of spiritual

tests?

I . Fear. Your fears will be tes ted because you need to

Karma 219

learn courage.

2. Power. You are placed in a pos i t ion of power to see if you can use it fo r the greater good.

3. M o n e y . S o m e t i m e s you are given a g r e a t deal o f money to see if tha t changes you as a person , or you are no t given m u c h money to see if you can still be con ten t .

4- G i f t . You are given a g i f t , a talent, t o see how you use it — for l ight or darkness .

5. Forgiveness . S o m e o n e c lose t o you may cause you pa in . I n s t e a d o f b e i n g nega t ive and r e s e n t i n g t h a t person, can you forgive h im or her by do ing what is r ight , i.e. by changing your inner s ta te and th ink ing positively?

What is the role of the subconscious mind in the

repayment of karma?

Being a good soul, your karma comes to you fas ter because your subconsc ious m i n d is open. T h i s means tha t even if you d o s o m e t h i n g s l ight ly wrong , your karma comes to you instantly, and you can repay that karma fast . However, if y o u r s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d is d o r m a n t , y o u r k a r m a accumulates and you delay paying it. Eventually, however, your karma comes to you no ma t t e r what . D o n o t th ink t h a t evil s o u l s are g e t t i n g o f f s c o t - f r e e ; t h e y are accumula t ing karma tha t they will have to repay.

However, th is same rule does n o t apply wi th regards to one 's t es t ing and t ra ining. A human being can skip his or


her t e s t i n g and t r a i n i n g . If you r s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d is d o r m a n t it will be unab le t o lead you to the t e s t s and t r a in ing requi red fo r your sp i r i tua l g rowth and you will never r ecogn ize your s p i r i t u a l m i s s i o n and p u r p o s e on Ear th . W h e n you are no t on a spir i tual journey, you have used your own free will t o al ter the very p a t h t ha t you chose in the spi r i t wor ld ; you will no longer e n c o u n t e r s i t u a t i o n s and peop l e t h a t you r equ i re f o r y o u r s o u l ' s t r a i n i n g . Ins tead , you will be faced wi th s i t u a t i o n s and people tha t will feed your ego and make you comple te ly Ea r th -bound , fixed in a material is t ic world. You will thus give no impor tance to your spiri t . T h e n u r t u r i n g of your spir i t will be completely ignored and you will be happy in t h i s s t a t e . But t h i s h a p p i n e s s is an i l l u s ion because it c o m e s c o m p l e t e l y f r o m the phys ica l m i n d . By r u n n i n g away f r o m the spi r i tual pa th , some people on Ea r th feel relieved and get a false sense of peace that comes f r o m the physical m ind because they do no t have to go t h r o u g h the s t ruggle of changing and improving. They do n o t want to deal with their p roblems in the r ight manner and they take the easy way out . T h i s false sense of peace is given to you by your own ego because it does no t want to be crushed.

Is this why there seems to be so much injustice on

Earth — low souls have a dormant subconscious mind

and are therefore not being led to their testing and

trainingP

It seems un jus t , bu t remember that these souls are actually building bad karma. They are no t even facing their t ra ining and test ing. All of this is being recorded. It all accumulates and negative souls eventually have to face this t r u th . O n

Karma 221

E a r t h , however, these sou l s are in power a n d seem to be happy. Also, the v ib r a t i on on E a r t h is negat ive r igh t now so t h i s nega t i ve v i b r a t i o n h e l p s nega t i ve s o u l s . U n f o r -tuna te ly , th i s same nega t ive v ib ra t ion a f f e c t s g o o d souls . T h e s e negative souls use the i r f ree will t o h a r m o t h e r s and as a resul t g o o d sou l s go t h r o u g h pa in even t h o u g h it is n o t the i r tes t , t r a in ing o r karma.

For ins tance, m u r d e r is never p a r t o f G o d ' s p lan . I t is n o t s o m e t h i n g you can choose in the spi r i t wor ld in o rde r t o repay karma, or t o u n d e r g o t e s t i ng and t r a in ing . W h e n a p e r s o n m u r d e r s s o m e o n e and it is n o t in se l f -defence , i.e. when tha t m u r d e r is p r e - p l a n n e d or is an act o f revenge, n o m a t t e r w h a t t h e c i r c u m s t a n c e s , t h e m u r d e r e r wil l g o s t r a igh t t o the lowest Rea lm in the spi r i t wor ld and bu i ld u p t r e m e n d o u s negat ive karma. M u r d e r i n g s o m e o n e in th i s l ife does n o t mean s o m e o n e will m u r d e r you or s o m e o n e close t o you in a f u t u r e life. G o d will never allow a s i n f u l act such as m u r d e r t o be pa r t o f a sp i r i tua l p lan as such t h i n g s canno t be c h o s e n in the spi r i t wor ld . T h e low soul g o e s t h r o u g h e x t r e m e t r i a l a n d s u f f e r i n g in i t s n e x t i nca rna t ion o n E a r t h a n d it will take tha t sou l a very long t ime to reach even R e a l m 4-

But what happens to the good souls who have lost

someone and did not deserve to lose that person?

W h e n you are in t he sp i r i t wor ld , you k n o w the type of place E a r t h is; you k n o w the r isks involved, a n d you know t h a t a nega t ive s o u l may use his f ree will t o h a r m you . K n o w i n g t h i s , y o u have s t i l l c h o s e n t o c o m e t o E a r t h b e c a u s e you can r ise m u c h f a s t e r o n E a r t h t h a n m t h e spi r i t wor ld . If you are n o t a r isk-taker, you w o u l d stay in


the spir i t world and your progress would be slow (except in rare cases) . T h i s is why many souls choose n o t t o be reborn , and this is ent irely up to t h e m because f ree will prevails in the spiri t world as well. Free will exists in each and every universe.

S u p p o s e a young man is murdered . It was no t his due date, and his life has been t e rmina ted before his earthly journey is complete . Let 's say tha t th is young man has paren ts who are still alive and it is n o t their karma to go t h r o u g h this kind of pain. It can be the paren t s ' karma to lose the child due to a natural death, such as a physical ai lment, b u t no t due to an unna tura l death.

If the paren ts are good souls, G o d will send his angels t o provide extra healing for t h e m t h r o u g h prayers and a great deal o f s t r e n g t h will be given to them, so tha t they can survive this t rauma. T h e paren ts still have karma t o pay o f f (no h u m a n on Ear th has no karma to pay) and th is pain may be used to wipe ou t their karma, if the parents agree. T h i s a g r e e m e n t is m a d e w i t h o u t t h e i r c o n s c i o u s knowledge — it is made between their subconsc ious m i n d and the H i g h G o o d Soul o f tha t par t icular Realm. T h e y will c o n t i n u e to live wi th extra prayers and p r o t e c t i o n , c o m p l e t e the i r ear th ly journey , and a m a j o r p o r t i o n o f the i r karma will be wiped o f f — if they go t h r o u g h th is journey well.

Ano the r op t ion , in cases o f extreme difficulty, is a Walk-In.

Let 's say that you are a good soul on Ear th and you are in an extreme s i tua t ion that is beyond your capabil i t ies and

Karma 223

u n d e r s t a n d i n g , e.g. you are given a I Oth grade examina t ion

w h e n y o u are o n l y in t h e 5 t h g r a d e , t h e r e f o r e it is

imposs ib l e t o face it. T h e n , a Walk- In , or a g o o d soul f r o m

R e a l m 5 o r h igher , f r o m t h e s p i r i t wor ld , wil l c o m e t o

E a r t h a n d i n h a b i t y o u r b o d y . Y o u r h u m a n s o u l wi l l

t e m p o r a r i l y go t o t h e s p i r i t wor ld , and w h e n t h e t o u g h

t ime passes it will r e t u r n t o your body and send the spi r i t

s o u l back t o t h e s p i r i t w o r l d . O n l y y o u r s u b c o n s c i o u s

m i n d is aware o f th i s . T h e r e is a m u t u a l u n d e r s t a n d i n g

b e t w e e n y o u r s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d a n d t h e W a l k - I n ' s

s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d . W a l k - I n s are rare and they will c o m e

t o E a r t h on ly in c e r t a i n d i f f i c u l t s i t u a t i o n s . As a p r e -

c a u t i o n a r y s t ep , y o u c h o o s e y o u r W a l k - I n in t h e s p i r i t

wor ld be fo re be ing b o r n , j u s t in case t h ings go wrong .

Is a Walk-In the same as being possessed?

N o . Possess ion is n o t t h e same as a Walk- In . Possess ion is aga ins t f ree will. Sp i r i t sou l s never possess peop le o n Ea r th . O n l y a s t r a l s o u l s d o . A s t r a l s o u l s are on ly a t t r a c t e d t o negat ive people , and they inhab i t the b o d y o f t he p e r s o n o n E a r t h . T h i s is sp i r i tua l ly wrong , as they have n o t ga ined p e r m i s s i o n f r o m the s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d o f t he E a r t h soul and it is comple te ly aga ins t f ree will.

What about destiny? Are karma, testing and

training separate from destiny ?

T h o s e w h o believe in destiny lead the i r lives as t h o u g h thev are powerless . T h e y feel t ha t n o m a t t e r wha t they do,

what has t o h a p p e n will h a p p e n " . T h i s is n o t t he r igh t


way of th inking, as f u t u r e c i rcumstances depend on your present act ions. If you are a good soul, you will go t h rough your tes t ing and t ra in ing only if your subconsc ious mind is open. Your karma will come to you and you will be able to repay it quickly. Moreover, you will be led to addi t ional t e s t i n g and t r a i n i n g on ly if you are dea l ing w i t h y o u r p r e sen t t e s t ing and t r a in ing extremely well. T h e r e is no q u e s t i o n of any th ing be ing des t ined; everything depends on your present act ions. Karma, good or bad, comes your way because o f past and p resen t act ions , b u t you have a choice to make negative c i rcumstances pass by dealing with your problems well. Spir i t souls will give you the s t rength . A belief in destiny main ta ins tha t no mat te r what you do your c i r cums tances will n o t change, in which case your s t r u g g l e s w o u l d be p r o l o n g e d and w o u l d s e e m never -ending.

You — not destiny — are the creator of your own consequences. T h e blessings and problems tha t come your way on Ear th are o f your own choosing in the spir i t world because you have done s o m e t h i n g good or bad in this life or a previous one. If you believe in dest iny you believe that t h e c o n s e q u e n c e s are f i x e d a n d y o u r a c t i o n s have no relevance at all.

Hope fu l ly , th is i n f o r m a t i o n abou t karma will explain, to some extent , the pain t ha t h u m a n beings go t h r o u g h in life. Karma is no t t o be looked at with sadness , fear, or anxiety. It is necessary fo r sp i r i tua l g rowth . If you have h u r t s o m e o n e mental ly, physically, emot ional ly , or spi r i -tually, it will come back to you, and so will the blessings for small acts of k indness done with a pure motive.

Sp i r i t ua l b less ings and g i f t s are never of a mater ia l i s t i c

Karma 225

nature . They come to you in the f o r m of a happy family, loyal f r iends, talents, comfo r t s , pets, f ind ing a t rue guru or master (no t a fake one ) , psychic abilities like au to writ ing, ch i l d p r o d i g i e s , b e i n g a g o o d c o m m u n i c a t o r , h a v i n g healing powers, invent ions and discoveries for the service of mank ind , good heal th , p r o t e c t i o n f r o m negat ivi ty fo r yourself and loved ones, guidance and spir i tual knowledge, s t reng th f r o m G o d to handle your problems, oppo r tun i t i e s to pay o f f your karma quickly, and skills tha t will enable you to bet ter fu l f i l l your miss ion and help o the r s as well.

D e b t s have to be pa id . D o n o t p o s t p o n e d e b t s t o your next life by r u n n i n g away f r o m your tes ts , avoiding your respons ib i l i t i e s , or f o l l o w i n g the wrong p a t h . You need medic ine to cure y o u r s icknesses, b u t the med ic ine may s o m e t i m e s be bi t ter . Af t e r t ak ing the medic ine , however, you feel better. Similarly, karmic debts may give you pain, b u t a f t e r dea l i ng w i t h t h e m well you fee l l i g h t e r and s t r o n g e r and have a h i g h e r u n d e r s t a n d i n g . Always remember that you are able to handle whatever comes your way. In the spiri t world, you took the counsel o f the H i g h G o o d Soul of your Realm as well as three wise souls, who helped you choose your pa th according to your capacity. Your test, t ra ining and karma are given to you on the basis of what you can handle. N o t h i n g beyond your capacity will come to you in your l ife. If you feel you c a n n o t handle s o m e t h i n g , t h i n k aga in ; p e r h a p s y o u n e e d t o ana lyse yourself to see where you are going wrong.

YOUR MISSION O N EARTH

m

"We are all born as instruments of God, but the choice to continue to work as His instrument is entirely ours."

"Never be nice to, or encourage, evil people. Fight evil."

What is your mission on Earth?

M a n y p e o p l e feel t h e i r l i f e has n o m e a n i n g , t h a t t h e r e

seems t o be n o t h i n g b u t p r o b l e m s . H o w can t h e s e sou l s

f i n d m e a n i n g in the i r lives?

F i r s t o f all, never fear t he obs tac les t h a t c o m e y o u r way; they exist t o make you s t ronger . Also, d o n o t be u n d e r the i m p r e s s i o n tha t you are o n E a r t h t o suffer . Karma, t e s t i ng and t r a in ing exist t o he lp you change and t o c leanse y o u r soul . But G o d has also given you a chance t o d o s o m e t h i n g w o n d e r f u l on Ea r th : y o u r Spiritual Mission.

Every h u m a n be ing wan t s l i fe t o be m e a n i n g f u l , a n d th i s h a p p e n s w h e n y o u f i n d y o u r p u r p o s e . T h a t p u r p o s e is k n o w n as your miss ion , a p r o m i s e be tween your sou l and G o d , an oa th you took in the sp i r i t wor ld b e f o r e c o m i n g to Ea r th . Each and every soul is on a sp i r i tua l q u e s t . T h a t is the pathjyou have chosen in the spir i t wor ld b e f o r e be ing

Your Mission On Earth 227

r e b o r n . W h e n you c o m e t o Ea r th , you f o r g e t t he very reason you chose to be born ; fo r the progress of your soul.

Each human being has three missions.

1. To improve spiritually.

2. To selflessly serve o thers .

3. To use individual g i f t s and talents fo r the g rowth of o thers .

H u m a n beings are on Ear th to change for the better . You can realise your fu l l po ten t i a l as a spiri t being in a physical body only when you change f r o m wi th in . Self-improve-ment is your f i r s t m i s s ion — to change and walk on the G o d l y G o o d Path n o m a t t e r what the c i r c u m s t a n c e s or o b s t a c l e s in y o u r l i fe . O n E a r t h , t h e r e will always be negative forces. Ea r th is a spir i tual ba t t l eg round , and the only way to prove your mora l s t rength is to choose l ight when da rkness is o v e r w h e l m i n g . F i g h t i n g evil does n o t mean you have to be vocal abou t it, judge people , or go to great lengths to expose them. Exposing evil is important, but not when you endanger yourself or your loved ones. H o w e v e r , you m u s t n o t use t h i s as an excuse t o be cowardly, either. T h e best way to f ight evil is to be brave and simply do what is r ight , every single t ime. T h i s is what it means to be on the Godly G o o d Path. W i t h o u t change, there can be no growth .

WThen you follow the guidance of the subconsc ious mind, c h a n g e b e c o m e s a n a t u r a l p a r t o f y o u r b e i n g and you c h a n g e g race fu l l y , s t e p by s t e p . W h e n you c h a n g e gracefully, you are able to handle your tes ts and training, and you are able t o pay o f f y o u r nega t ive ka rma well


because you are using your subconsc ious mind. Also, you can use y o u r g o o d k a r m a — y o u r s p i r i t u a l g i f t s and b less ings — f o r the grea te r g o o d . T h e s e c o m e y o u r way only when you are on the r igh t pa th . W h e n you change graceful ly, you are do ing your best to b r ing G o d ' s Plan i n to ef fect .

W h e n you fa i l t o f o l l o w t h e g u i d a n c e o f y o u r s u b -c o n s c i o u s m i n d , you are r e s i s t i n g c h a n g e . You r e s i s t change because you give in to the wrong jus t i f ica t ions tha t the physical mind provides — it tells you there is n o t h i n g w r o n g w i t h you and you d o n o t need to c h a n g e . T h e physical m i n d does n o t like change; therefore , if you do no t opera te f r o m the subconsc ious mind, change will no t come natural ly to you. You will no t change gracefully. But since you are n o t a bad soul, and your subconsc ious mind is s t i l l s l i g h t l y o p e n , y o u will ge t a p h y s i c a l b low. S o m e t h i n g will happen in your life, a shock or blow, such as loss o f f inance or health, to make you open your eyes.

T h e sad pa r t a b o u t h u m a n be ings is t ha t they can very easily ignore guidance, joy, and blessings, bu t they cannot ignore pain. So pain comes to you to awaken you. O n c e you are awake, you realise tha t you are on the wrong pa th and tha t you need to change. If you had l is tened to your subconsc ious mind , you would n o t have needed the pain to wake you up. If, even a f te r receiving a physical blow, you refuse to change, the blows will s top coming because your subconsc ious mind will have become dorman t . So do no t assume tha t because everything is f ine in your external life, you are on the r ight pa th . In o ther words, you migh t have changed for the worse.


T h i s happens when you knowingly go on the wrong path . W h e n you change f o r t he worse and go b e y o n d a l imi t your subconsc ious m i n d shu t s down completely, and you realise what you have d o n e only af ter you die, when you go t o t he lowes t o f R e a l m s in t he sp i r i t wor ld . T h i s is a t e r r i f y i n g t h i n g , w h e n sou l s w h o t h i n k they are on the r ight pa th on Ear th go to the spiri t world and are shocked to see where they have landed.

Se l f - improvemen t or change m u s t be unde r t aken fo r the r ight reasons. Somet imes , people do th ings fo r the wrong reasons: they want to be respected by others ; they want to sat isfy their ego by walking the spir i tual path; they acquire knowledge in order t o appear wise and learned; or they do t he r i gh t t h i n g because they wan t a place in heaven or because they fear they will go to hell. T h e s e are n o t the r igh t reasons to change. You shou ld change because you believe in goodness and want to be a be t te r h u m a n being. Choose goodness for the sake o f goodness itself. Ins tead of being spir i tual ly a m b i t i o u s and goa l -o r i en t ed , change because it makes you feel be t te r ; enjoy the journey. T h e des t ina t ion , Realm 7 Stage 9. is no t the focus — the pa th or the change should be the focus .

<£t§) Sometimes, people say, "I want to change but I

am unable to." Are they being genuine when they say

this?

People who say this have good in tent ions , bu t are con fused about why they cannot b r ing about a change f r o m within. There is a simple reason fo r this. True change comes f rom the s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d , b u t t he phys i ca l m i n d has t o


cooperate . W h e n people fail to change, it is because they are no t dedicated to change — the genuine desire does no t exist. T h e y have made a choice to change, b u t it is half-h e a r t e d ; you need t o be w h o l e h e a r t e d l y c o m m i t t e d t o change, for the r ight reasons.

So here is the f i rs t s tep: in order to change and fol low the Godly G o o d Path, you need to have knowledge t ha t will h e l p you d i s t i n g u i s h r i g h t f r o m w r o n g . You n e e d t o ident i fy what you need to change. Therefore , the f i rs t s tep to take is to acquire spir i tual knowledge. Be sure that you t r u s t the source of tha t knowledge. The re is a great deal of wrong knowledge disguised as spir i tual i ty on Ear th today, b u t G o d has given you a subconsc ious mind tha t will lead you to t rue knowledge. If you are seeking an easy way out , if y o u resist change, y o u are n o t a t rue seeker and your physical m ind will lead you to the wrong knowledge. Litt le knowledge is a dangerous th ing . D o what is best for your soul, not your ego.

How will a person recognise a true master?

Few people are f o r t u n a t e enough to have genuine masters in the i r lives, bu t spi r i tual knowledge is readily available. Make knowledge your master, and you will f i n d the right knowledge if you truly seek it. W h e n it comes to f ind ing a master , use your c o m m o n sense. T h e r e are many people who possess knowledge, bu t who are using that knowledge wrong ly . A t r u e m a s t e r will never u se k n o w l e d g e for mater ia l gain. True masters will be se l f less and use the knowledge only for their own spiri tual growth, and that of o the r s . A master will no t spoi l you; he will train your spirit. Many people convince themselves that they have the

Your Mission O n Earth 231

r ight master because they like what that master is of fer ing; the knowledge is easy to digest, it does no t require them to change, and it involves material growth. If you are on a ques t fo r the t r u t h , your c o m m o n sense shou ld tell you tha t the t r u th is no t easy. If you have an ego the t r u t h is a lways h a r d t o a c c e p t , as t h e ego p r e v e n t s y o u f r o m gaining t rue under s t and ing .

A t rue mas te r will never cr ipple you. A t r u e mas t e r will help you discover the mas te r within you. You will no t be dependen t ; you will be se l f - su f f i c i en t . D o n o t r u n f r o m the master who o f fe r s you the t ru th . R u n f r o m the master who feeds your ego. R u n f r o m the mas t e r w h o weakens y o u r sp i r i t and lowers y o u r se l f - e s t eem and s e l f - w o r t h . Use your c o m m o n sense and ins t incts and you will be led to the r ight master or knowledge.

Somet imes , h u m a n beings th ink they will get material is t ic he lp or i n f o r m a t i o n a b o u t o t h e r s if they c o n t a c t sp i r i t sou ls . T h i s is n o t poss ib le , as sp i r i t sou l s w o u l d never reveal i n f o r m a t i o n a b o u t o the r s and would never d iscuss ma te r i a l t h ings , n o r w o u l d they indu lge in p r e d i c t i o n s . Astral souls, however, do. Spi r i t souls are only concerned with spiri tual guidance, so be aware of teachers who o f fe r anyth ing else. Also, do n o t look for p roo f tha t spir i t souls exist, or that G o d exists . I f you look fo r p roo f , you are fail ing your test; if you have fai th, you will receive it when you least expect it.

N ow, we will m o v e o n t o t h e nex t s t e p t o w a r d s e l f -i m p r o v e m e n t . K n o w l e d g e is n o t e n o u g h . K n o w l e d g e is only the first s tep toward posit ive change. T h e next s tep is the acceptance o f f laws.


T h e diagram below shows the cycle of spir i tual knowledge and change.

S P I R I T U A L K N O W L E D G E

I

A C C E P T A N C E O F FLAWS

i

A C T I O N ( C H A N G E )

i

W I S D O M IS A C Q U I R E D

T h e downward arrow shows the flow o l knowledge f r o m the spir i t world to Ear th . T h i s knowledge is God-given; it comes f i rs t f r o m G o d to spir i t souls and then to souls on Ear th . O n Ear th , souls channel this knowledge. T h e y are reincarnated on Ear th to spread light in a dark age, so you have t o r e c o g n i z e t h e s e s o u l s as you wil l g a i n t r u e knowledge f r o m them. If the s tuden t has genuine desire, in o the r words he is ready, t hen the master will appear t o help h i m p r o g r e s s sp i r i t ua l l y . O n c e you ga in t h i s s p i r i t u a l knowledge, you m u s t use it t o u n d e r s t a n d what you are do ing r igh t and where you are going wrong. T h e second s t ep is t h e accep tance o f f laws. All h u m a n be ings have flaws. Analyse those flaws so you can eradicate them, and the only way to eradicate t h e m is by taking act ion.

Action is the th i rd and m o s t impor t an t step. A person may be aware o f c e r t a i n f l aws t h e y p o s s e s s b u t are n o t interested in changing. T h i s signifies non-acceptance. True acceptance of flaws means changing to such an extent that th ose flaws are eradica ted . T h a t is the kind of sp i r i tua l act ion that is needed. In o rder to help others , you need to

Your Mission O n Earth 257

h e l p y o u r s e l f f i r s t . You need ro be in a p o s i t i o n of sp i r i tua l s t r e n g t h to have a pos i t ive e f f e c t on s o m e o n e else. If you want a loved one or a f r iend to be humble and \ ou po in t ou t their flaw in a tac t fu l way, that is fine, bu t if you are a p r o u d p e r s o n , do n o t expect a n y o n e else to change. Lead by example. D o n ' t wait fo r o the r s to change before you do, and remember that no change is possible without humility. Once you have taken action, you wsll comple te the cycle, only to begin again. You will be given more spir i tual knowledge so tha t you may again analyse yoursel t and take more action. T h i s cycle will con t inue over l i fe t imes.

j

At t imes, you migh t feel you are unable t o progress . You want t o change, bu t instead of improving you feel like you are in quicksand. T h i s is because you have some spir i tual knowledge , b u t you have n o t accep ted y o u r f laws. And because you have taken no action, your u n d e r s t a n d i n g of God ' s laws is l imited. Knowledge, by itself, is s imply infor-m a t i o n . W h e n t h a t i n f o r m a t i o n is shared, i t b e c o m e s knowledge. W h e n knowledge is p u t in to pract ice in your daily life, and you have learned your spir i tual lessons, you will acquire w i s d o m . O n l y then will you be given more knowledge by sp i r i t sou l s , which can be c o n v e r t e d i n to wisdom th rough experience. T h i s is how you live for the p r o g r e s s o f t he s o u l . T h e s e t h r e e s t e p s — k n o w l e d g e , a c c e p t a n c e and a c t i o n wil l h e l p you f u l f i l l y o u r f i r s t miss ion, that of se l f - improvement .

Your second miss ion is tha t of Selfless Service.

Service is the kev to c o n t e n t m e n t , but m your material is t ic world people will no t unde r s t and this. True c o n t e n t m e n t comes t rom selfless service. The re are many souls on Lar th who are ^ood people. They harm no one, lead simple, quiet


lives wi th the i r f ami l i e s and fu l f i l l t he i r d u t i e s . T h e s e souls are much bet ter than souls who harm themselves and o t h e r s and add t o d a r k n e s s , b u t t h e s e g o o d s o u l s are unaware of their t rue potent ia l .

By simply fulfilling your duties, you do not progress spiritually.

Unfor tuna te ly , the world is in such a negative s tate that a man who simply fu l f i l l s his dut ies and causes no ha rm is cons ide red G o d ' s man . Such a man is n o t even halfway there. You m u s t reach ou t and help o thers — walk the pa th o f selfless service. You are on Ear th as an i n s t r u m e n t of G o d , to serve o thers silently. D o the work w i t h o u t waiting for recognition. A light worker is a silent worker. An i n s t r u m e n t o f G o d s i m p l y d o e s w h a t is r i g h t . He overcomes darkness by way of his good deeds, and he does n o t speak of his g o o d deeds ; he does n o t even analyse t h e m because t ha t wou ld lead to pr ide . R e m e m b e r t ha t G o d ' s angels are watching over you and they are watching your act ions. If you know this, unde r s t and tha t your soul will never yearn for recogni t ion. Only your ego will want it. T h e m o m e n t you speak abou t a good deed you have done, or even t h ink a b o u t it t o o much , i ts value is los t . T h e pe r son who needed to be helped has no d o u b t been helped, b u t you have f a i l ed t o p r o g r e s s because you have n o t u n d e r s t o o d the t rue meaning of selfless service. 'Self less ' m e a n s to t h i n k less a b o u t wha t the self has d o n e f o r o thers . T h a t is the meaning of t rue devot ion to G o d . You serve God by serving others .


What is devotion?

O n Ear th , devo t ion t o G o d is c o n n e c t e d to r i tua ls and c e r e m o n i e s . S p e n d i n g a g rea t deal o f m o n e y and p e r f o r m i n g e laborate ceremonies and r i tuals is not seva.'1

Your devot ion to G o d is no t based on how m u c h money i

you spend on charity or ceremony. Your devot ion to G o d is based on quiet , selfless service. W h e n you help others , do so w i t h o u t any e x p e c t a t i o n s . T h e m o m e n t you ask yourself what you gain by helping someone, your motive is impure. Forget abou t the deed. Move on. W h e n you do a good deed, you are b o u n d to feel happy. It is only natural to feel good if you have made a d i f fe rence in someone ' s life. But do no t allow tha t feeling to make you proud . Be grateful that you have been used by God as an instrument for His work. You have been blessed because of this. Use that blessing, that feeling of goodness , t o help someone else. If you s imply hold o n t o tha t feel ing and do no t serve more, tha t feel ing goes away very quickly. Service, l ike s p i r i t u a l p r o g r e s s , is a n e v e r - e n d i n g cycle . T h e m o m e n t you feel your work is done and you want to rest, s t o p your se l f . Your w o r k can never be d o n e . T h e r e is always more to do. Recharge, bu t do n o t rest . And when faced wi th p e r s o n a l pa in , t ry to conve r t t h a t pa in i n to service. T h a t is the m o s t selfless th ing you can do.

You can convert your pain in to service by us ing the gi f ts and t a len t s t ha t G o d has given you. T h i s is your t h i r d mission: To Use Gifts and Talents for the Growth of Others. T h e f i rs t two miss ions , those of se l f - improvement and selfless service, are c o m m o n to all people . Everyone Has a th i rd miss ion as well, bu t the na tu re of the th i rd

I V Seva n i e j n s s e l f l e s s s e rv i ce .


miss ion d i f fers . Your th i rd miss ion is connec ted to your g i f t . A gi f t can be a talent you have — for example, singing, dancing, wri t ing, act ing, s p o r t i n g ability, and so on. But your g i f t could also be a special connec t ion to old people, you m i g h t have a b o n d w i t h c h i l d r e n or a n i m a l s , you migh t be a wonde r fu l cook, or you migh t have a g i f t for gardening or carpentry. T h i s gif t is what you are good at, a n d it is e a r n e d over l i f e t i m e s . Remember that every single human being on Earth is gifted. God would never send His child to Earth without His blessing.

J u s t as y o u r n e g a t i v e a c t i o n s c rea te bad k a r m a , y o u r p o s i t i v e a c t i o n s c rea t e g o o d k a r m a . This good karma comes to you in the form of a spiritual gift, a skill tha t will br ing you fu l f i l lmen t and help o thers as well. If you are natura l ly good at some th ing , your soul has acquired tha t g i f t over l i fet imes, b u t your physical m ind is aware of it fo r the f i rs t t ime in this life. You are no t discovering what your g i f t is, you are rediscovering it. Whatever your gif t , you m u s t use it to serve the greater good. M o s t people with talent focus on using it to earn money and fame, which is n o t your u l t i m a t e p u r p o s e . Crea t e s o m e t h i n g t h a t is a posi t ive con t r ibu t ion to humani ty . If you do have the good f o r t u n e of being famous , use that as a p l a t fo rm , to spread spir i tual knowledge. Use your pos i t ion to heal people, to make them happy, to l if t t hem up. You m u s t use your g i f t wisely and do just ice to it by being an i n s t r u m e n t o f God . By all means, reach the pinnacle in your line o f work, bu t d o n o t r e s t r i c t y o u r g i f t by u s i n g it on ly f o r e a r t h ly purposes . Find your higher purpose .

Is there a way for us to know our third mission?


Your t h i r d m i s s i o n will be s o m e t h i n g y o u are n a t u r a l l y drawn towards and f o r which you have a great love. You can live your daily l ife w o r k i n g in an o f f i ce o r a fac tory , b u t n o m a t t e r w h e r e y o u are , u s e y o u r s t r e n g t h s t o m a k e a p o s i t i v e i m p a c t . A p o s i t i v e i m p a c t is a b o u t i n s p i r i n g someone , rais ing his o r her spir i t , and giving h o p e t h r o u g h s m a l l a c t s o f k i n d n e s s . I f y o u are p r o u d , f e a r f u l , o r mater ia l is t ic , your phys ica l m i n d will t ry t o take you away f r o m your mis s ion . I f you do not complete your spiritual mission on Earth, no matter how much you have achieved in the earthly world, your life will be considered a waste, and your journey incomplete.

Why do some people on Earth know their mission

while others do not?

1. You have t o be o n a g o o d sp i r i tua l level t o know your

miss ion . I f you are o n the w r o n g pa th , you are very far

away f r o m the f i r s t m i s s i o n o f s e l f - i m p r o v e m e n t , so

the q u e s t i o n o f service does n o t even arise.

2. Your s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d has t o be o p e n so t h a t you will be able t o r e c o g n i z e y o u r m i s s i o n . I f y o u are ex t remely log ica l a n d i g n o r e y o u r i n s t i n c t , y o u are r u n n i n g away f r o m y o u r t r u e p u r p o s e . T h e physical m i n d can be a h i n d r a n c e w h e n it b e c o m e s t o o analytical.

i . Your mi s s ion will be revealed t o you only if you are ready f o r it. If y o u k n o w a b o u t it t o o soon , it may overwhelm you or make you p roud . You m u s t be ready to accept t he r e s p o n s i b i l i t y of t h a t m i s s i o n and be able t o handle it.


4- Your level of c o m m i t m e n t is vital. H o w dedicated are you to the spir i tual path? If you are cons i s ten t , and s p i r i t u a l i t y is a p r i o r i t y in y o u r l i fe , you will be directed to your t rue purpose . Somet imes , the e f fo r t s that human beings make to unders tand their miss ions are half-hearted, so they do no t improve or make any progress.

You are a channel fo r G o d ' s work on Ear th; if you pol lu te yourself by fol lowing the wrong path, you are reject ing the o p p o r t u n i t y t o p e r f o r m your mi s s ion and you will lose your g i f t . If you are an impure channel, you will n o t be able t o access t he g u i d a n c e f r o m the sp i r i t w o r l d t ha t wou ld lead you to your miss ion and eventually help you accomplish it. Every soul is bo rn for a purpose , bu t that p u r p o s e will be revealed only when you have begun your s p i r i t u a l journey . O n c e you d iscover t h a t p u r p o s e and begin ful f i l l ing your miss ion, you will be t ruly happy and at peace.

You said that channels can pollute themselves.

Can even good channels go wrong?

Yes. For instance, there are many psychics on Ear th who are g i f ted . But if they cont inual ly seek mater ial rewards for the i r work, their own progress is l imi ted. T h e y do good work, bu t since they want wealth, they will n o t progress the way they would if they had been comple te ly selfless. T h e good work is being done regardless, there is no doub t abou t that , the subconsc ious mind recognizes the mission. But once you gain success, tha t success is a test , and you should no t allow it t o take you on the wrong path . G i f t s are tests to see how we use them.


Is duty the same as service?

N o . The re is a d i f ference . Your f i rs t duty is t o look af ter your own health. Your body is your soul ' s garment , given to you by God . It m u s t be taken care of, looked after, and appreciated. It is an indispensable tool fo r the soul, to help you carry ou t and accompl ish your miss ion . An unheal thy body leads to a d i s t u r b e d mind , and vice versa. Th i s , in t u r n , leads to an u n h a p p y and u n e x p l o r e d sou l t ha t is unable to do the work it was reborn to do. Your body is a temple so you m u s t respect it.

C a r i n g f o r s o m e o n e , such as l o o k i n g a f t e r a p a r e n t or grandparent or b r ing ing up your child well, is your duty. It should be p e r f o r m e d wi thou t feeling as if you have made a sacrifice. H u m a n beings have become so self ish tha t when s o m e o n e exper iences an act o f k i n d n e s s , it c o m e s as a surprise. If you are n o t k ind and compass iona te by nature, ask y o u r s e l f w h e r e y o u have g o n e w r o n g . To m i s s an o p p o r t u n i t y to help your family and f r i ends is a promise broken.

A person 's du ty is towards:

1. Chi ldren

2. Parents

3. Spouse

4- O t h e r family member s

5. Fr iends

Remember to do your duty towards people only if they are on t h e r i g h t p a t h . If t hey are s t r a y i n g , g u i d e t h e m ;


however, if they c o n t i n u e to knowingly fo l low the wrong path, you m u s t use your judgment . D o n o t let people take advantage of you. Remember that it is your du ty to help o thers . The re is actually no such th ing as 'help ' . T h e only reason you have f o r m e d the concept of 'help ' is because it is a rare th ing today. Earlier, help was simply duty. The re was n o t h i n g like 'help ' . As parents , children, and fr iends, it is your duty to do what is required. It shou ld be a normal f u n c t i o n , n o t o n e t h a t r e q u i r e s c a r e f u l c o n s i d e r a t i o n . U n f o r t u n a t e l y , y o u need t o exercise c a u t i o n t o d a y as peop l e are u n p r e d i c t a b l e at t imes in b o t h receiving and giving help. But sti l l , it is s o m e t h i n g tha t s h o u l d come natural ly to all h u m a n beings.

Serv ice and he lp are s i m p l y o n e ' s du ty , b u t n o w a d a y s people make the d i s t i n c t i o n because they are comple te ly unaware. H u m a n beings have become selfish. Spir i t beings derive inspira t ion f r o m serving others . T h e i r miss ion is to spread awareness regarding God ' s laws to souls on Ear th in the hope tha t these souls will share th is knowledge with o thers and use it t o change.

Is there any way a person can prepare for his or

her missionP

If you are on the sp i r i t ua l pa th , th is h a p p e n s natural ly . Test ing and t ra ining are what lead you to your miss ion and help prepare you as well. For instance, when you were in the spir i t world you chose a miss ion to provide justice. O n Ear th , you will have to u n d e r g o t e s t ing and t r a in ing to p repare f o r your m i s s i o n , t o help you r ecogn i ze it . So perhaps as a child or as a teenager, you will be exposed and subjected to injust ice to make you realise that so much of


it exists on Ear th . These s i tua t ions come to you as your t raining.

But your test is this : in jus t ice is very hard on the ego; will you resor t to illegal or immora l means in o rde r to gain |ustice? Will you become cor rup t af ter you become a police o f f i cer o r lawyer or j udge? I f y o u l i s t e n t o y o u r subconsc ious mind , you will use this negative experience as a learning p rocess and it will lead you to your miss ion , which is to become an hones t person who provides law and order.

T h e severity of your t e s t s and t r a i n i n g d e p e n d s on the nature of your miss ion , as you require cer tain quali t ies or soul charac te r i s t ics t o fu l f i l l it. All t e s t i n g and t ra in ing involves c r u s h i n g of t he ego, because you c a n n o t t r a in your spiri t if you are ruled by your ego.

The f i rs t s tep to keep in mind when you are going t h rough spir i tual t ra ining is t o realise that it is happen ing for the higher pu rpose o f learning. Unde r s t and what you are being trained for. Analyse the d i f f icu l t s i tua t ion you are in and de termine the weakness tha t makes you negative and o f f -ba l ance . Ask y o u r s e l f w h a t p r e v e n t s y o u f r o m b e i n g posit ive and work ing your way ou t of tha t s i tua t ion . T h a t is your weakness, and that is the area in which your spir i t n e e d s t r a i n i n g . T h a t is t he l e s s o n you n e e d to l ea rn . Therefore, tha t is where you will be tes ted.

T h e r e is one m a j o r area in which each and every h u m a n being on Ear th is t e s ted . This is a test of faith — your greatest test. A test of fa i th refers to your belief in God . Even t h o u g h you c a n n o t see G o d , d o you have t he humil i ty and courage to believe in H i m ? If you fail th is


t e s t , t he re can be n o t r u e s p i r i t u a l j ou rney . T h e r e are h u m a n beings on Ea r th who do n o t believe in G o d , b u t who still do what is r ight . It is much be t te r t o be tha t way than to say you believe in G o d and then ha rm o the r s and yourself in G o d ' s name. But unders tand tha t your failure to believe in G o d means tha t you have failed one very big test — the test of fa i th . Many people say tha t if G o d shows H i m s e l f t o us, or gives us p roo f of H i s existence, we can be l ieve in H i m . But t h i s is a t e s t . T h a t is why y o u r subconsc ious mind does no t reveal memor ies o f the spiri t world to the physical mind .

To p a s s t h e t e s t o f f a i t h , you have t o c h o o s e t h e subconsc ious mind over the physical mind . T h e m o m e n t you o p e n your s u b c o n s c i o u s mind , you will realise tha t G o d exists because the subconsc ious mind knows tha t G o d exis ts ; it is only y o u r phys ica l m i n d t h a t always seeks p r o o f . If you only deve lop the physical m i n d , you may automatical ly fail the test of fai th.

Your weaknesses are your t empta t ions .

Keep in mind tha t your weaknesses will be tes ted . W h e n m o s t people th ink o f t e m p t a t i o n , they t h m k o f physical th ings such as sex, drugs , food , alcohol, money, and so on. T h e r e is no d o u b t t h a t t h o s e are t e m p t a t i o n s , b u t t e m p t a t i o n s exist on ano ther level too: pride, doub t , anger, revenge, and jea lousy , f o r example . Your nega t ive sou l cha rac t e r i s t i c s , a n y t h i n g t h a t takes you away f r o m the G o d l y G o o d Pa th , are y o u r t e m p t a t i o n s , and you will cons tan t ly be t ra ined and tes ted in those areas to make you aware o f your flaws. Cons tan t ly look within yourself , with hones ty and courage, and be brave enough to accept your


flaws. If you do no t know what is wrong, how will you fix it?

Moreover, do n o t th ink of only cont ro l l ing a flaw. Get rid o f it by replacing it wi th someth ing of a higher nature. So, if you have p r i d e , d o n o t only c o n t r o l t h e p r i d e , b u t become humble . Also make sure you acknowledge the good that is within you . Sel f -wor th and self-love, which means love and respect fo r one 's own spiri t , are very impor tan t . U s e y o u r s t r e n g t h s i n s t e a d o f b e i n g u s e d by y o u r weaknes se s . You m u s t u se t h e g o o d w i t h i n you , y o u r posit ive soul characterist ics, to get rid o f the negatives.

SUICIDE

m

"To terminate life is completely against God's law."

"God has given you life; it is not yours to take."

"You have to face your problems. You have to fight evil. You have to purify your soul."

There are so many people, especially young ones,

who are ending their lives on Earth. What happens to

these souls?

W h e n t h e s e s o u l s ar r ive in t he s p i r i t w o r l d they feel extremely dejected because they realise they have made a w r o n g d e c i s i o n . I n s t e a d o f s t a y i n g o n E a r t h and comple t ing their journey, they cut it shor t by t e rmina t ing their lives. Th is is one o f the worst choices you can make on Ear th . To end your own life is the greatest harm you can cause your own soul.

The logic people use is that humans have free will.

Are we not free to end our own lives?

The choice to end vour life is yours, but you will con t inue to ope ra te under G o d ' s laws, and when you break those

Suicide 245

laws, there are consequences . Your body is your temple. It is given to you by G o d so that it can be a healthy vehicle fo r your sp i r i t . W h e n you des t roy t ha t t emple , you are rejecting life, the very essence of creat ion. T h e real damage su ic ide causes is t o your sp i r i t . Spi r i tua l ly , you fall an entire Realm, and you add a great deal o f negative karma to your soul. You will have to come back to Ear th and face the same s i t u a t i o n s wi th doub le the in tens i ty . Your test a n d t r a i n i n g b e c o m e twice as h a r d . W h e n s o m e o n e commi t s suicide, he is breaking his oa th to G o d .

S o m e t i m e s , t h e p a i n h u m a n b e i n g s go t h r o u g h is unbearable. We all come down to Ear th in order to repay karma and unde rgo tes t ing and t ra ining fo r the growth of our soul. Some t imes we have a lot o f karma to pay off, or we have chosen ha rd t e s t s . T h e pa in t h a t we m i g h t go t h rough and the s i tua t ions we might encoun te r will be very intense and trying, bu t we m u s t comple te our journey no m a t t e r what . W h a t h u m a n beings do n o t realise is tha t even t h o u g h they are in unbearab le pa in , t he pa in they m i g h t cause to o t h e r s by c o m m i t t i n g su ic ide is jus t as unbearable. Suicide is also an act o f self ishness.

At the t ime the p e r s o n is in pain, he is n o t t h ink ing of o the r s . T h e pain you go t h r o u g h makes you th ink only a b o u t yourse l f . But wha t a b o u t your loved ones? W h a t about the people you leave behind? You are add ing karma no t only by ha rming your own spiri t , bu t by ha rming the spiri ts of others . S o m e will say they have no one, and feel like taking their lives for that very reason. But perhaps that is their karma, or perhaps they are being tested to see how s t rong they can be in spi te of this loneliness. Self ishness makes y o u r p r o b l e m s a p p e a r m u c h b i g g e r t h a n they actually are.


Loneliness is a huge problem today. Even though

people have families, they still feel lonely. Why is there

50 much loneliness on Earth?

T h e r e are two reasons for this feeling. Firs t of all, you are n o t a complete soul on Ear th . Since you are now aware of the concept of twin souls, you will realise tha t you are only half of a soul, and the loneliness you leel is a longing for your o ther half. However, once you u n d e r s t a n d this , you m u s t make sure tha t you achieve that sense of comple t ion on Ear th , as it is your tes t . I t is absolutely poss ib le to feel c o m p l e t e on E a r t h by f u l f i l l i n g your s p i r i t u a l m i s s i o n . Once you discover your life's true purpose, you will be at peace. Feelings of empt iness arise when your subconsc ious m i n d tells you tha t you are no t ful f i l l ing your miss ion on E a r t h . Second ly , y o u r s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d k n o w s t h a t Ear th is no t your real home. It longs for the spir i t world, fo r the peace o f h igher Realms, and the company of your g roup souls and loved ones. T h i s should n o t be an excuse fo r you to feel d i s con t en t ; t o feel c o n t e n t is one of the greatest tes ts on Ea r th and tha t tes t m u s t n o t be failed. D o no t wait fo r dea th to br ing you peace. To be at peace in the sp i r i t wor ld you m u s t f i r s t learn t o be at peace on Ear th . Loneliness is par t of that bat t le and m u s t be dealt with correctly.

Does that mean we will always feel lonely on

Earth?

N o t at all. It is n o t that you cannot be happy on Ear th and that you will always feel lonely. But loneliness is one of the th ings that can lead to unhappiness and depress ion. If this

Suicide 247

depression cont inues , it can make you suicidal.

Is it true that to take one's own life requires

strength and courage?

T h i s is not t rue . T h e fac t tha t you feel like tak ing your own life means t ha t you need to strengthen your spirit. Have fai th tha t th is s t reng th exists wi th in you, and know tha t G o d will never let you face a s i t u a t i o n you canno t handle. You do have the s t rength , so use it. Ano the r mis-concept ion is that , at t imes, suicide is honourab le . T h e r e is n o ' h o n o u r ' in t a k i n g y o u r o w n l i fe . D o n o t d o a disservice t o your sou l by des t roy ing t he very vehicle it needs to fu l f i l l i ts du t i e s and miss ion on Ear th . To be a person of h o n o u r is to assume responsibi l i ty and do what is spiri tually r ight . So many people who have taken their own lives did it o u t of pressure, in o rder t o give in to the false beliefs of o the r s and society. W h e r e is the h o n o u r in that? Instead, live a spir i tual life and h o n o u r G o d . H i s is the only o p i n i o n t ha t t ru ly ma t t e r s . T h e r e are t imes on Ear th when it is no d o u b t unbearable fo r the soul to stay in its body, b u t t ha t s ignif ies a t ime f o r change. Killing yourself is no t the answer.

But when you hit the lowest point in your life,

what do you do?

W h e n you hit the lowest po in t in your life, G o d is tes t ing your s t rength . All tha t is required of you is one positive step t o signify tha t you have the courage and the will to no t give up. Once you pay o f f your karma and pass the test , your c i rcumstances will change. G o d does send his angels


to help you. T h e r e are special spirit souls who choose to work with humans who are suicidal. These spi r i t souls are specially t ra ined and they work with the p e r s o n ' s Spi r i t Gu ide , and t h r o u g h p r o j e c t i o n and prayer, t ry to enable t he p e r s o n on E a r t h t o h o l d on . T h e y s e n d m e s s a g e s t h r o u g h the s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d to give h im s t r e n g t h to survive. T h e s e special sou ls exist because G o d does n o t want people on Ear th to make the mistake of taking their own lives, as the consequences o f this act are severe. O p e n your eyes, t h ink a b o u t the reasons you have t o live for : y o u r s p i r i t u a l m i s s i o n , service , a n d g r o w t h . Also under s t and that somet imes the reasons for kil l ing yourself are complete ly r id icu lous . For example, y o u n g people are af ra id to face their paren ts because they have failed their exams and so they take their own lives. Nowadays a lot of p a r e n t s are very s t r i c t wi th the i r ch i ld ren and t e r ro r i se t h e m in to do ing wrong th ings . Some chi ldren are abused, raped, blackmailed and ha rmed . At such t imes , if a child has no one to conf ide in, he or she will tend to make rash decis ions like c o m m i t t i n g suicide. Parental guidance is no t abou t being s t r ic t — it is abou t u n d e r s t a n d i n g tha t child and do ing what is best fo r that child 's soul. Some t imes a paren t ' s ignorance, cruel ty and lack of u n d e r s t a n d i n g can lead a child to suicide.

T h e r e are s o m e ch i ld ren who want t o j u m p o u t o f the window because they cannot handle their parents nagging t h e m or t h e i r i n t o l e r a b l e c rue l ty . At s u c h t i m e s it is u n b e a r a b l e f o r t h e s o u l t o s tay in t he body . A lo t o f c h i l d r e n kill t h e m s e l v e s over s o m e t h i n g i n s i g n i f i c a n t . W h e n they go to the sp i r i t world, they u n d e r s t a n d how reckless their ac t ions were and how inconsequent ia l their fears. Such people need to know that fai lure is temporary,

Suicide 249

a mere s t e p p i n g - s t o n e to success . J u s t as you need t o experience sorrow in order to feel happiness , you need to exper ience fa i lu re in o r d e r t o succeed . Fa i lu re is j u s t a learn ing experience. It is the d u t y o f all p a r e n t s t o teach their children love ins tead of fear and give them spir i tual knowledge. O n c e this knowledge is imbibed, the child will open up and speak. Parents forget what is m o s t impor t an t : b e i n g a g o o d h u m a n b e i n g . I n s t e a d , t h e y p u s h t h e i r ch i ld ren in t he w r o n g d i r e c t i o n by t e a c h i n g t h e m t h a t achievements in the physical world are all tha t matter , and so they m i s g u i d e t h e i r ch i l d r en by g iv ing t h e m w r o n g no t ions of success.

How can one help these souls?

S o m e t i m e s , all it t akes t o get s o m e o n e o u t of t h e i r depression is one small act o f kindness tha t restores their fa i th in o the r s and in themselves . If you are aware tha t someone is going t h r o u g h a very hard t ime, t ry to reach ou t to them. You will be blessed if you manage to help s o m e o n e hand l e t he i r pa in . T h e f a t e o f t h o s e nega t ive souls who cause o the r s t o end their lives is unimaginable . A person who drives another person to c o m m i t suicide has committed a sin that is equivalent to murder.

S o m e t i m e s , p e o p l e use su ic ide as a f o r m o f e m o t i o n a l blackmail . In o rde r t o gain someone ' s a t t e n t i o n , prove a point , or take revenge on someone, people a t t e m p t suicide or kill themselves. T h e v do so in order t o make the o ther i person feel guil ty. T h i s makes t h e m fall lower and they 'Accumulate a great deal of karma.

Here are a few th ings to keep in m i n d when negative or


suicidal t h o u g h t s come to you. These t h o u g h t s m u s t be s topped immediate ly because they will eventually take you down the wrong path:

1. W h e n a n e g a t i v e t h o u g h t c o m e s , ge t r id o f t h a t t h o u g h t immedia te ly . D i s t r a c t y o u r m i n d and take pos i t ive ac t ion . T h e more you analyse it, t he more p o w e r y o u give i t . G e t r id o f s u c h t h o u g h t s by divert ing your mind elsewhere. Be physically occupied. It is never t oo late to change.

2. Read. Gain spir i tual knowledge. O n c e you unders tand why certain th ings happen in your life, they become easier t o accept and handle. For example, when you are fami l ia r w i th the concep t o f karma, it becomes easier to go th rough tough t imes.

3. O p e n your subconsc ious mind because tha t is where y o u r real s t r e n g t h l ies . D u r i n g h a r d t i m e s , t he subconsc ious mind provides guidance and s t rength .

4- D o n o t wor ry a b o u t what peop l e say. N e v e r allow them to p u t you down. If what you are do ing is good and right , and you are on the Godly G o o d Path, be f i rm, even if your parents are against you. But be sure that you are truly on the Godly G o o d Path and are no t fool ing yourself or acting ou t of pr ide.

5. If you have m a d e a m i s t a k e , a c k n o w l e d g e it and change, b u t d o n ' t let the gu i l t c o n s u m e you . It is human to make mistakes. T h e i m p o r t a n t th ing is to learn the lesson and no t repeat those mistakes. Also, do no t try to cover up that mistake; otherwise, it will lead to more mistakes. Accept responsibil i ty.

Suicide 251

6. Pray hard, genuine ly and sincerely, and ask G o d to send his angels t o help you. I t is i m p o r t a n t t o ask G o d for guidance and pro tec t ion .

7- Light a na tura l flame 2 4 hours a day. Light absorbs negative energy and clears the vibrat ion a round you.

8. Stay away f r o m negat ive c o m p a n y and peop l e who take you on the wrong path.

9. If you have a p r o b l e m , talk to s o m e o n e you t r u s t . Another person ' s perspective may give you the clarity that is required. If there is no one you can t rus t on Ear th , the m o s t b e a u t i f u l pe r son you can talk to is your own subconsc ious mind, which is l inked to the spiri t world.

10. Remember tha t pa in is temporary . Even g o o d t imes do no t last fo r long. Your problems will pass.

11. Keep your phys ica l m i n d o c c u p i e d . D o s o m e t h i n g c o n s t r u c t i v e because your phys ica l m i n d takes you down the w r o n g p a t h when you are idle. S u r r o u n d yourself with good people.

12. Get some exercise. Be active, go lor walks. Breathe in f resh air; do n o t stay i ndoo r s all the t ime . Yoga is wonder fu l lor the mind , body and spir i t .

I 3. D o no t be a f r a id to seek medica l help . Prayers are very power fu l b u t some t imes you need medical help too, so do no t be ashamed to get it. D o no t consider it a fa i lu re . O n c e the p r o b l e m passes and you are stronger, you can reflect with more wisdom and then


change. However , never become add ic t ed to medica-t ion.

14- Look af ter your health. So many people on Ear th are slowly des t roying their body with alcohol, d rugs and c i g a r e t t e s . Even o v e r e a t i n g is h a r m f u l . T h e s e are f o r m s of suicide because you are slowly kill ing your body , s h o r t e n i n g t h e span o f y o u r o w n l i fe and prevent ing your spi r i t f r o m c o m p l e t i n g i ts journey. W h e n you are under the inf luence of d rugs or alcohol, y o u r j u d g m e n t is i m p a i r e d a n d y o u are at y o u r weakest, you are m o s t susceptible t o negative energy and projec ted negative though t s , and you will act on an impulse that has no t come f r o m you, b u t has been projected to you by negativity. Ano the r th ing tha t you m u s t t ake s e r i o u s l y on E a r t h t o d a y is sexual p r o m i s c u i t y . O n e weak m o m e n t can c a u s e you a l i f e t i m e o f p a i n . H u m a n s give in t o t h e i r des i res i n s t a n t l y , a n d are very care less w h e n it c o m e s to l o o k i n g a f t e r the i r bodies . Sexual p r o m i s c u i t y is a f o r m of s u i c i d e because you are always at r i sk o f cont rac t ing a disease that could end your life and in turn , the lives of o thers . T h i s is not your karma. You choose to act in an i r respons ib le m a n n e r and these consequences are of your own choos ing .

15- Try to reach ou t to someone else and help them even though you are in pain. T h a t is how you s t rengthen yourself, by being compass ionate towards o thers even t h o u g h you may be hu r t i ng . T h e n , G o d will surely help you. But let your motive be selfless.

T h e h u m a n body is to be respected and cher i shed . You have been given a mind , body, and spir i t so that you can

Suicide 253

live your life well and are able to serve o the r s . The re are t imes on Ear th when h u m a n beings su f f e r a lot , especially those who have los t loved ones. Ins tead of b laming G o d and asking, " W h y me?", be brave and look at the br ighter side of life. Suicide is no t the so lu t ion . W h e n you go to the spi r i t wor ld and review your life, you always realise that you could have handled much more , and suicide was no t the answer. Your life belongs to G o d , and no one has the r ight to end it. Suicide is regression fo r the soul.

Besides the g i f t o f l i fe , G o d has given you a b e a u t i f u l subconsc ious m i n d and a Spir i t Guide . H e has also given you a physical m i n d tha t acquires knowledge and can be t rained to work in line with the subconsc ious mind thus helping you to know right f r o m wrong. So m u c h help and so much p ro tec t ion has been given to you that you mus t t ruly believe tha t no ma t t e r what obstacle comes your way you can handle it.

GOD

<m>

"God does not have to prove Himself to us. We have to prove ourselves to Cod."

"If you ask for proof, you will not get it. But if you don't ask for it and you have faith, then you will get proof."

"God does not punish you; your own subconscious mind does."

"You can fool your fellow men, you can fool yourself but you can never fool God Almighty."

"A simple, honest, kind, selfless deed is more important than hours of prayers without concentration, and giving thousands in

charity to fool people and our God Almighty."

One of the earliest messages given was: "There is

no religion in the spirit world. We worship one God

only." Then why are there different religions on Earth?

Even t h o u g h t h e r e are d i f f e r e n t r e l i g i o n s , t h e y all u l t imate ly lead to the same Almighty Being. Your Ea r th goes t h rough cycles — good, bad, good, and then bad again. W h e n there is t o o much negativity on Ear th , G o d sends a very high soul f r o m a higher universe to Ea r th to guide peop le . H e is cal led a P r o p h e t . H e i m p a r t s w i s d o m to people so that they can improve and become good souls.

G o d 255

T h e f o l l o w e r s o f each P r o p h e t are ca l led by d i f f e r e n t names. Unfor tuna te ly , t h rough the centuries , many of the P rophe t s ' t each ings have been twis ted by h u m a n beings. However, there is no religion in the spi r i t world.

Why do human beings find it hard to believe in

God?

Your view of G o d changes over the cou r se o f your life. There are some who have a s t rong belief in G o d when they are young, bu t grow up and lose fa i th in H i m . O n e of the r e a s o n s t h i s h a p p e n s is if you p r a y rea l ly h a r d f o r someth ing and those prayers are no t answered, you assume that G o d did n o t hear you and that H e does n o t exist. But t he t r u t h is t h a t w h e n a p raye r r e m a i n s u n a n s w e r e d , p e r h a p s w h a t you p r a y e d f o r was n o t g o o d f o r y o u r spiri tual growth. You also lose fa i th in G o d when you have been subjected to in jus t ice and you ask yourse l f why G o d does n o t p r o v i d e j u s t i ce . T h a t i n j u s t i c e c o u l d be y o u r karma, test, or t ra ining. Somet imes , when you are in poor health, you pray to get better , b u t there is no change in your health, and you lose fa i th in G o d . W h a t you do no t realise is tha t you could be paying o f f negative karma by going t h rough heal th problems.

There are o the r s who have no fai th in G o d when they are young, bu t , over t ime, a series of experiences helps them d e v e l o p f a i t h . N o m a t t e r w h a t y o u r e x p e r i e n c e s , unders tand tha t the choice to believe or n o t t o believe in G o d is the m o s t i m p o r t a n t one you have. W h e n you are on Ear th , your m e m o r y of the spir i t wor ld is b locked f r o m the physical mind . However, you still have a connec t ion to


the sp i r i t wor ld t h r o u g h your s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d . I t is your subconsc ious m i n d tha t will guide you o n Ear th and will help you believe that G o d exists.

T h e biggest p rob lem today is that h u m a n beings are always l o o k i n g f o r a s c i e n t i f i c e x p l a n a t i o n or p r o o f o f G o d ' s existence. T h e subconsc ious mind is in f in i te . But science is born o u t o f h u m a n intell igence, which is l imi ted. T h e i n t e l l e c t t h a t h u m a n s p o s s e s s is i n c a p a b l e o f u n d e r -s tanding G o d .

G o d does n o t have to prove H i m s e l f t o us. We have to prove ourselves to G o d .

T h a t is why we are on Ear th . We are n o t here t o test God . We are being tes ted to see if we choose the guidance of the subconsc ious m i n d over that o f the physical mind . Some people are extremely analytical and need logical answers for everything. Faith and ins t inc t play li t t le or n o par t in their daily lives. These are people who operate mainly f r o m the physical mind, or the intellect. In cont ras t , there are o thers who do no t need logical answers for everything. They are able to move b e y o n d ra t iona le , b e y o n d t he c o n f i n e s o f e a r t h ly logic , i n t o t h e R e a l m o f t h e s p i r i t . I t is on ly t h r o u g h your s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d t ha t you can experience God . You will never be able to unders tand G o d completely o n E a r t h , b u t y o u can e x p e r i e n c e H i m by c h o o s i n g goodness . Intel l igence is a great gif t , bu t only if it is used in harmony with the g i f t s the subconsc ious mind brings — faith and wisdom.

T h e fac t t ha t you c a n n o t see G o d d o e s n o t mean H e does no t exist. T h e t r u t h does no t cease to be just because it is invisible t o us. O u r tes t on E a r t h is t o believe in

God 257

s o m e t h i n g t ha t we c a n n o t see by l i s t en ing to o u r inner voice.

S o m e t i m e s , h u m a n b e i n g s have a very s t r o n g be l ie f in God . But if s o m e t h i n g very pa in fu l occurs — such as the loss of a child or spouse, or a very s t r o n g injust ice — the person tends to blame G o d and lose fa i th in H i m . Yes, you no d o u b t feel pain, bu t instead o f los ing fa i th because o f that pain, ask G o d to help you go t h r o u g h it. Ear th is a place where there is a great deal of in jus t ice . G o o d people suf fe r and bad people are o f t en the ones in power, the ones who seem happy. T h e r e is a great imbalance on Ear th r ight now, b u t t h a t i m b a l a n c e is o u r t e s t a n d c o n f l i c t , o u r teacher. In spi te o f all the in jus t ices you may witness, do you still have the courage to believe in G o d and have fa i th in H i s justice?

The re will come a day when good will overpower evil. But unt i l then, darkness is a challenge. G o d allows darkness to exis t so t h a t g o o d s o u l s can be t e s t e d a n d t r a i n e d . Eventually, when good will be in abundance on Ear th , it will be easy t o believe in G o d . You will surely feel H i s p resence in a b u n d a n c e at t h a t t i m e . But if you fai l t o believe in G o d now, you will have n o t passed your test .

In y o u r l i fe , you will see m a n y t h i n g s . You m i g h t see c h i l d r e n s u f f e r i n g , i n n o c e n t m e n a n d w o m e n b e c o m e vict ims of war, murdere r s going free and innocent people being jailed. You migh t be exposed to the wors t crimes, the wors t f o r m s o f in jus t ice , and at t ha t p o i n t you will ask yourself: W h e r e is God? If G o d exists, why doesn ' t he do something? W h y doesn ' t G o d s top this?

Well, G o d did no t s tar t this. H u m a n s did. G o d has given


h u m a n beings free will and they use their f ree will t o make negative choices. So r ight now, negativity is increasing and good souls are being tes ted. The i r fa i th is wavering, they are ge t t ing fear fu l and angry, and they are being t emp ted to fol low the wrong path . There will come a point when nature itself will erase negativity. At that t ime, more and more souls will be drawn to spirituality. But do no t wait fo r that m o m e n t . Make a posit ive choice now, so tha t when the m o m e n t comes, you will have passed your test .

It is very easy to move towards the l igh t when it is in abundance , when there is very li t t le t e m p t a t i o n , b u t it is extremely hard t o embrace light when it is scarce on Ear th , when negat ive sou l s are d o i n g all they can to draw you away f r o m it.

T h i n k of yourself as a warrior and Ear th as your spir i tual ba t t l eg round .

D o you give in t o darkness because it is the easiest th ing to do? D o you give in to darkness because it gives you the i l lusion of s t r eng th and power? D o you give in because of tear? O r d o y o u have t h e w i s d o m t o u n d e r s t a n d t h a t darkness is a test , and tha t you m u s t have the courage to f i gh t it and choose G o d , t o choose l ight , even if it is a m u c h harder choice?

T h e strength o f a true seeker depends on the strength o f his subconscious mind. T h a t is why you spend so much t ime in the spiri t world developing it — because you know what kind of place you are going to and fo r what reason. T h i s is why good and evil exist: so that you can move away f r o m evil and choose good.

G o d 259

Negat iv i ty exists so tha t your f ree will can be tes ted. If there was no negativity, there would be no t empta t ion , and there would be no o p p o r t u n i t y to exercise free will.

M a k e t he r i g h t c h o i c e . R e s i s t a n c e c o m e s f i r s t : r e s i s t t empta t ion . Action comes next. God is ou r Creator. H e is a S u p r e m e Being who is wise, j u s t and loving. You can unders tand H i m t h r o u g h goodness . T h e more you try to analyse G o d t he m o r e you are d i s t a n c i n g yourse l f f r o m H i m , and the more you are denying yourse l f the chance to feel the peace tha t H e can bring. G o d is n o t merely an idea or a way of th ink ing . H e exists in f o r m , b u t H e is unseen on Ear th fo r a reason. T h a t is our tes t .

We are all looked a f te r by a compass ionate , wise, and jus t G o d . H e is t ru ly A lmigh ty and H e cares a b o u t all H i s creations and wants us all to fol low the r ight path . We all have a chance t o be b lessed by H i m ; b u t t o have H i s blessing, we m u s t take the f i rs t s tep by choos ing goodness . To know G o d is t o know ourself, discover who we are, and discover H i s goodness within us.

PRAYER

"The most powerful prayer is the prayer for the spiritual growth of another being."

"People pray to show o f f , people pray to prove to others that they are truly pious. Prayers should be short and sweet and they have

to be full of feelings that are positive, genuine and totally selfless."

What is the purpose of prayer?

O n e o f t he m o s t i m p o r t a n t a s p e c t s o f s p i r i t u a l i t y is p raye r . W i t h o u t p raye r , you c a n n o t g row. J u s t as t h e h u m a n body needs food , so the spiri t needs prayer. We all need to pray to G o d so that H e may bless us and give us s t r e n g t h and w i s d o m t o progress spi r i tua l ly on Ea r th as well as in the sp i r i t wor ld . Nega t ive energy on Ea r th is very s t rong and it is ge t t ing harder and harder for good sou l s t o d o t h e r i g h t t h i n g . I t is n o t t h a t g o o d sou l s c anno t d i s t i n g u i s h be tween r ight and wrong . T h e y make the wrong choices because they do n o t have the strength to resist t e m p t a t i o n , which is why it is so i m p o r t a n t to pray. Prayer he lps u s p u t sp i r i t ua l knowledge i n t o ac t ion . It builds spiri tual muscle. O n c e that spiri tual muscle is built, you are s t r o n g e n o u g h to do the r ight t h i n g n o m a t t e r what the t e m p t a t i o n . Eventually, the soul is nour i shed as a direct result of act ion, o f p u t t i n g knowledge in to practice.

Prayer 261

Prayer n o u r i s h e s the soul . Prayer has to be genu ine and sincere, f r o m the hea r t . It is n o t t he act o f p ray ing by i t se l f , b u t r a t h e r t h e cycle o f r ece iv ing s t r e n g t h f r o m prayer and then do ing what is r ight tha t br ings you peace and helps your soul grow.

C o n t r a r y t o wha t p e o p l e on Ea r th t h i n k , p rayer is n o t invisible.

W h e n you pray, your though t s , words , and feelings travel to the spiri t world in the f o r m of a ray o f l ight. We, in the spiri t world, can see mil l ions and mi l l ions of rays of l ight t r ave l l i ng f r o m E a r t h t o w a r d s us . T h e b r i g h t n e s s or s t reng th of each ray of l ight depends on the sincerity and urgency of each prayer.

G o d has chosen g o o d souls in the sp i r i t wor ld to work with H i m and help H i m answer prayers. T h e s e spiri t souls are specially t ra ined wi th respect to answering h u m a n calls for help. To answer a prayer, these souls send posit ive rays of light back to the pe r son on Ear th . T h a t is why the word prayer c o n s i s t s o f t h e w o r d ray. P rayers are, essent ial ly , positive rays o f l ight .

Does God listen to our prayers?

W h e n you pray, G o d is l is tening to your prayer. However, H e is do ing so t h r o u g h H i s angels, w h o in te rcep t these prayers. Some t imes , people pray fo r l ife — fo r their own survival or fo r the survival of their loved ones. If they are good souls , they are given heal ing energies so tha t they have the s t r eng th to recover or to simply endure physical pa in , if t h a t is t h e i r k a r m a . S o m e t i m e s , p e o p l e p ray


because they are con fused . They do n o t know how to help themselves or someone close to them so their prayers are answered in the f o r m of guidance or a message tha t is sent t h r o u g h t h e s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d . A f t e r r e ce iv ing this message, the pe r son will have clarity. Cer ta in calls fo r help are so urgent and even complicated tha t spir i t souls have to consul t the H i g h G o o d Soul of the Realm. But please u n d e r s t a n d t ha t eventually, all sou ls w h o answer prayers have to work wi th G o d ' s guidance and blessings, so yes, He does listen to your prayers — i f they are sincere and genuine.

Why do so many prayers go unanswered? Some

people have genuinely prayed, from the very depth of

their being, and yet their prayers have gone unanswered.

Why is this so?

Your prayer will be answered only if:

I . W h a t you pray for is good for you

T h e r e are many t imes when h u m a n be ings pray fo r s o m e t h i n g they t h i n k is good f o r t h e m . W h e n you th ink of t h ings tha t are good fo r you, you th ink of t h e m f r o m an ea r th ly p o i n t o f view. But t h i n k of t h e m f r o m a sp i r i tua l perspect ive. If what you pray f o r h i n d e r s y o u r s p i r i t u a l g r o w t h in any way, t he prayer will never be answered. So the next t ime you pray for s o m e t h i n g and it is no t answered, unders tand tha t what you prayed for would n o t have been good for your soul. Also, whether a prayer will be answered at the r ight t ime, or no t is no t in your hands — it is in God ' s hands. W h e n you look back at an unanswered prayer, you realise that it was no t the r ight t ime for

Prayer 263

G o d t o g r a n t y o u y o u r w i sh . S o m e t i m e s h u m a n be ings are j u s t n o t ready t o h a n d l e w h a t they are praying fo r so fervently. Ask God to do what is best for you. In t h i s manner , you are m a k i n g sure t ha t whatever h a p p e n s will be fo r your sp i r i tua l g rowth . W h e n y o u ask G o d t o d o w h a t is b e s t , you are handing over your lite to a h igher power that knows everything; it is a prayer of surrender .

2. Your prayer is genuine and sincere

T h i s is very, very i m p o r t a n t . Your prayer has t o be genuine. It canno t be hal f -hear ted or mechanical. T h e s incer i ty and f a i t h in y o u r p r aye r is w h a t gives it power, and t he m a n n e r in which angels r e s p o n d to your prayer depends entirely on the purity and motive of your call f o r help. If your prayer is genuine and still remains unanswered, what you prayed for is n o t good fo r your spir i tual growth.

3. Your prayer m u s t be selfless and non-mater ia l i s t ic

You need f o o d , c l o t h i n g and she l t e r t o survive on Ea r th , b u t it is w r o n g t o ask f o r luxur ies . Luxury creates an imbalance tha t h i n d e r s your g rowth . Ask G o d to provide enough for your c o m f o r t . Also, if you are a p e r s o n w h o prays only f o r mater ia l well-being, y o u r p r a y e r s wi l l n o t be a n s w e r e d . T h e m o s t i m p o r t a n t th ing to remember is tha t you should pray for the spir i tual growth of o thers . T h i s is what makes a prayer selfless.

4. It does no t interfere with your karma

O n e of the main reasons you are on Ear th is to repay


karma. Some t imes people ask themselves why G o d is no t helping t h e m when they are praying so hard, bu t if what you are praying for relates t o your karma you will still have t o go t h r o u g h it. If you d o n o t pray, or if you lose f a i th in G o d when your prayers are n o t answered, t h e n angels c anno t send you l ight and it will be ha rde r f o r you to go t h r o u g h obs tac les on E a r t h . T h e r e are many p e o p l e o n E a r t h w h o s t a r t praying after they have done s o m e t h i n g bad, believing t h a t by p r a y i n g the i r s ins will be w i p e d o u t . Your karma can never be wiped out by praying. Genuine prayer gives you the s t reng th to deal wi th your karma better; prayers do no t wipe the slate clean.

5- You are on the r ight pa th

T h e r e are many souls on Ear th who are on the wrong path . But when they want someth ing , they pray. T h e prayers o f such souls cannot be answered. In fact, the only t h i n g such sou l s who are on t h e w r o n g p a t h should pray for is wisdom, so they may improve. T h i s is the only call spir i t souls will answer for people who are spir i tually low. But if you are on the Godly G o o d Path, you deserve p ro tec t ion and healing, your prayer will be answered.

If you truly believe tha t G o d ' s angels are l i s tening to your p rayers , you will have n o d i f f i cu l ty in p r a y i n g who le -heartedly. Your angels are i n t e r cep t ing your prayers and d o i n g e v e r y t h i n g they can, within God's laws, t o answer them. So again, assure yourse l f tha t s o m e o n e is l i s tening to your call. Have conf idence that they are wise, tha t they can see the c o m p l e t e p ic tu re f r o m the sp i r i t world, and that they will do what is best for you. Above all, know the

Prayer 265

power o f prayer. It is an unbelievable force of l ight and it has the power to change lives. You have to believe tha t with all your heart .

(£$3) Why are human heings so irregular with prayer?

H u m a n s are i r r egu la r wi th prayer main ly because when th ings are g o o d they forge t G o d and feel they do no t need to pray. It is only when th ings go wrong tha t they wake up and r emember G o d . H u m a n beings have a p rob l em with consistency. You want to be on the r igh t p a t h and make spir i tual i ty a pr ior i ty in your life, b u t you are no t regular with respect t o your spir i tual practices. T h e r e is, however, a s imple s o l u t i o n t o th i s . You are inconsistent because you do not understand the value and power of spirituality. If you feel t ha t prayer is t ed ious , t ha t it is a chore and t ime-consuming , you have no t u n d e r s t o o d its value. Prayer means you are speaking to G o d Almighty — so what can be more i m p o r t a n t than that? Jus t knowing this should bring you joy. If you pray with fa i th and you believe that G o d is l i s t en ing to you, you will never be lazy wi th respect t o prayers, and when you know what prayer does for you, you will be natural ly inclined to pray.

How do prayers help us?

Here are the posi t ive ef fec ts of prayer:

I. You will be at peace N o ma t t e r what material wealth you possess, or what your p o s i t i o n or s t a tus may be in an ear thly sense, peace o f mind can be a t ta ined only by being on the G o d l y G o o d Pa th . In th i s ea r th ly wor ld , a h u m a n


being goes th rough ups and downs . However , once prayer is a pa r t of your life, you are act ivat ing your subconsc ious mind, and the subconsc ious mind helps you u n d e r s t a n d t he very n a t u r e of t h o s e u p s and downs. You will no t let a p rob lem crush you, nor will you allow success to br ing pride.

P raye r keeps y o u ca lm, a n d c a l m n e s s is r e q u i r e d du r ing a calamity. If you are calm and posi t ive, and you do the r igh t th ing du r ing t o u g h t imes , you are passing your test; and once the tes t has been passed, the t o u g h t imes pass as well. So you have changed the na tu re o f the external f ac to r s ( t o u g h t imes ) by the s t reng th wi th in (calmness) .

I f you d o n o t stay calm, you are l e t t i ng the t o u g h t imes or negative external forces shake the feeling of peace wi th in . You will be res t less and c o n f u s e d and

, you will n o t have the calmness requi red to pass the spir i tual tes t ; and unt i l you pass your test , the t ough t imes will stay. In fact , the longer you take to pass your test, the harder your test becomes. Tough t imes become toughe r because you have allowed the external forces to d i s t u r b your inner s ta te o f peace.

2. Your v ibra t ions will improve Each prayer has a vibrat ion or energy. W h e n you pray, your p raye r s create pos i t ive energy. T h e s e pos i t ive v i b r a t i o n s have a hea l ing e f f e c t o n you and t h o s e a r o u n d y o u , so y o u are c l e a r i n g u p t h e nega t ive vibra t ions tha t s u r r o u n d you. W h e n negative people are a r o u n d you, the i r energy a f f ec t s you and dra ins you, so be m o r e aware and c a r e f u l o f peop l e wi th nega t ive energy . If you are f e a r f u l , p r o u d , angry, depressed etc. by nature, you are lowering your own

Prayer 267

vibrat ion and weakening your spir i t . Prayer helps you clear the negative energy tha t s u r r o u n d s you so that a posit ive v ibra t ion can be bui l t .

3. Your j u d g m e n t improves W h e n you pray, your own vibra t ions clear up and your negativity is erased. T h e black cloud of negativity tha t su r rounds you is cleared and your higher self becomes active — tha t is, your subconsc ious mind awakens, and you become cool, calm, and clear, and your j udgmen t i m p r o v e s . W h e n y o u r j u d g m e n t i m p r o v e s , y o u r choices are m o r e posi t ive. T h u s , you are in a be t t e r pos i t ion to p e r f o r m selfless good deeds. As a result , you rise spiritually.

4- You receive p ro tec t ion f r o m the spir i t world Prayer is abou t you reaching ou t t o the Creator. You have t o ask f o r G o d ' s g u i d a n c e a n d p r o t e c t i o n . W i t h o u t asking for it, you will no t receive it. Even if s o m e t h i n g is good for you, and you deserve it, spir i t souls c anno t give it to you if you have no t asked — they wou ld be going against your f ree will. So make sure you ask G o d to do what is best. W h e n you ask fo r p ro tec t ion , the healing energies tha t spir i t souls send you, a long wi th the posi t ive v ibra t ions of your own prayer, bui ld a protect ive shield a round you that will guard you f r o m negative forces.

5. You will experience a so lu t ion to illness If y o u p r a y w i t h f a i t h and s i n c e r i t y , you will be surpr ised at its healing power. Medic ine is impor tan t , b u t n o t h i n g in t h i s e a r t h l y w o r l d can m a t c h t h e power o f prayer. If you believe in its power and if you deserve heal ing , it will be given to you. Make sure that your physical mind is calm and clear and learn to


open your s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d more . T h i s will help you receive or access that healing.

You will get the s t rength to p u t your spir i tual knowl-edge in to act ion Having spi r i tua l knowledge is n o t enough . You may know the d i f ference between r ight and wrong, bu t you need the s t r eng th to resist t e m p t a t i o n and make the r igh t choice . T h a t is wha t p rayer does f o r you . I t gives you the s t r e n g t h to m a n i f e s t the will of your subconsc ious mind.

You will bu i ld fa i th You m u s t always keep in m i n d t h a t the f a i t h wi th which you pray is of u t m o s t impor tance . If you pray wi th f a i t h , y o u r p rayer will be p o w e r f u l , and will surely be answered. T h a t answer helps you build more fai th, con t i nu ing the cycle.

You will be pro tec ted f r o m Black Magic T h e reason the vibrat ion on Ear th is so low is because many h u m a n beings are indulging in occult practices such as Black Mag ic ( B M ) or W i t c h c r a f t . T h i s is c o m p l e t e l y a g a i n s t G o d ' s laws as i t g o e s a g a i n s t someone ' s f ree will and is abou t us ing darkness for personal gain, to control , to harm, or to manipulate . Black Magic is an excess of pro jec ted negative energy. You may f i n d it very hard to believe t ha t it exists. Your log ica l m i n d will tel l you t h a t in an age o f technology, no such thing is possible. We would have f o u n d it very hard to believe, too, if we were still on Ear th . But Black Magic is dange rous , and has been prevalent on Ear th for t housands of years. We have to make p e o p l e aware of it so t h a t they can p r o t e c t themselves t h rough prayer and posi t ive th inking . All

Prayer 269

dark practices are completely against G o d ' s laws. Jus t as prayer creates an abundance of l ight, Black Magic c r ea t e s an excess o f nega t ive energy . T h e r e is n o reason t o be f ea r fu l , jus t be aware, and u n d e r s t a n d t h a t p r a y e r is e s s e n t i a l t o p r o t e c t y o u f r o m t h i s nega t ive energy and t h e r e f o r e o n e m u s t always be totally posi t ive and fearless.

How long should one pray for?

You need n o t pray fo r hours and hours . Prayers should be short and sincere. It is a false n o t i o n to t h ink tha t the longer you pray, the holier you are. Pray fo r a shor t t ime, genuinely and regularly, so tha t the choices you make in your day- to-day life are a result o f the s t r eng th tha t you derive f r o m prayer . S o m e p e o p l e like t o pray f o r l o n g per iods o f t ime — tha t is fine, provided it is sincere. Make su re you d o n o t m u t t e r , wh i l e y o u r m i n d w a n d e r s everywhere else. Relax, concentra te , and be happy when you pray. Try n o t t o pray in a fear fu l s tate.

Does one need to be in a place of worship to

pray?

Prayer is n o t abou t r i tual . Places o f worsh ip are bui l t so t ha t p e o p l e can a s semble in g r o u p s and t h r o u g h t h e i r subconscious minds create more posi t ive energy. Moreover, when p e o p l e p ray in g r o u p s , t h e p o w e r o f a p r a y e r increases. But do n o t feel guilty if you canno t visit a place of worship. Praying at h o m e is extremely he lpfu l because vou are c leans ing the v ib ra t ions of the place where you spend m o s t of your t ime. So pray wherever you are, in a


car, at work, at school , anywhere. But when you pray at home, do try to pray in one specific place. Make that place your shr ine , n o t by p lac ing o b j e c t s o f wor sh ip , b u t by exercising your s t r o n g fa i th and pure mot ive . It is your prayer that bui lds your place of worship .

H e r e is s o m e t h i n g u n u s u a l t ha t we w o u l d like to share with you:

W h e n you wake up in the m o r n i n g , it is i m p o r t a n t t h a t you p ray b e f o r e you get o u t o f bed, t h a t is, before your feet touch the ground, so tha t your auric f ield absorbs tha t f i r s t m o r n i n g prayer and keeps it fo r the ent i re day. O n c e your feet t ouch the ground, your p r o t e c t i o n is sucked i n to t he g r o u n d . T h i s is because the Ear th ' s vibrat ions are negative, and before y o u r f e e t t o u c h t h e g r o u n d , y o u r p r aye r b u i l d s a p r o t e c t i v e s h i e l d a r o u n d you — y o u r p r aye r is con ta ined , and t ha t good and p o w e r f u l v ib ra t ion is held in your auric f ield for the day. It is i m p o r t a n t t o start your day in th is manner.

Similarly, when you go to sleep at n ight , pray again for your p ro t ec t i on and for peace o f mind , and your a u r i c f i e l d wi l l r e t a i n t h a t p r a y e r as wel l . T h e n , t h r o u g h o u t the day, say shor t , s incere prayers . Pray slowly; do n o t ru sh t h r o u g h . M e a n every word you say. U n d e r s t a n d what you are saying, wha t you are asking for, wha t you are r e q u e s t i n g G o d to do fo r you. Always keep in mind that prayers are meant to be selfless — the most powerful prayer is a prayer for the spiritual growth of another being.

Here is a shor t , s imple prayer tha t will p ro t ec t you

Prayer 271

and keep y o u ca lm. R e m e m b e r t h a t t h e r e is n o religion in the spi r i t world, so th is is a prayer tha t anyone can say.

T h i s prayer shou ld be said three t imes in succession, thrice a day.

and save us from such evil creatures.

Please take us in Your hands and guide us.

We are Yours, our God, and will be Yours always.

Keep us with You, our Lord, for eternity, so always and forever we will be blessed, guided, and helped by You and only You

Jhank You, God Almighty."

N o w h e r e in the prayer is the word 'I'. T h i s is because it is i m p o r t a n t t o pray for family and f r iends , and for good souls on Ear th .

T h e line "Please take us in Your hands and guide us" means we are us ing our free will t o sur render t o God . We are placing ourselves in G o d ' s hands ou t of ou r own free will, wi th comple te fa i th .

You m i g h t ask y o u r s e l f why t h e w o r d evtl is m e n t i o n e d in s o m e t h i n g as p o s i t i v e as prayer. O n Ear th , negative forces prevent us f r o m being on the s p i r i t u a l p a t h . 'Ev i l ' is t h e o p p o s i t e o f 'Live —

"My Dearest God Almighty,


anyth ing tha t lures us away f r o m the pa th o f growth. W e need t o ask G o d t o p r o t e c t us f r o m nega t ive forces.

Finally, we are asking G o d to keep us with H i m for "E te rn i ty '. We wholehear tedly ask H i m to guide us and look a f te r us in this l i fe t ime and the next, forever.

At the end of th i s prayer, ask G o d t o give you the s t reng th and wisdom to do what is r ight . T h e n , pray f o r y o u r f a m i l y a n d loved o n e s . F ina l ly , e x t e n d yourself — pray fo r good souls who may n o t be family or f r iends , b u t who are s imple people in need of help. But remember the golden rule o f prayer. Ask God to do what is best for that person. O n Ear th , you will n o t unde r s t and a person ' s karma, t es t ing and training, so by asking G o d to do what is best , you are helping t h a t p e r s o n by s e n d i n g p o s i t i v e e n e r g y w i t h o u t i n t e r f e r i n g wi th t ha t pe r son ' s p a t h — tes t , t r a in ing and karma. T h i s is very, very i m p o r t a n t t o keep in m i n d . N o m a t t e r wha t , you will never c o m p l e t e l y unders tand someone else's journey, so ask G o d to do what is best fo r you, your family, your loved ones, and f o r a n y o n e f o r w h o m you say a prayer . W h e n you pray, keep h o p e alive. Expec ta t ion b r ings you down, b u t h o p e keeps you going . Know t h a t G o d will do what is best fo r you. T h a t is why you thank H i m in advance — because you know H e has heard your prayer a n d t h a t H e wil l never let y o u d o w n . Pray c o n s i s t e n t l y , a n d n o t on ly d u r i n g bad t i m e s . Remember to pray to God and thank H i m dur ing the g o o d t i m e s as well . Pray as ha rd as you can, b u t always leave r o o m for God ' s Plan. Ge t ou t of the way and let heaven help you.

POSITIVE THINKING

"Be Positive."

"Like attracts like."

"Control your mind and try to attain peace at all times. Be cool, calm and sleep well."

^ ^ In what way are thoughts powerful?

1 he way you think is crucial t o the deve lopmen t o f your soul. You are the s u m of your t h o u g h t s , words and deeds. 1 h o u g h t s come f i r s t , and words and deeds arise o u t of t h o u g h t — posi t ive or negative th ink ing . T h i s is why it is very i m p o r t a n t t o th ink positively. Eventually, all t h o u g h t s create energy 50 be aware of what energy you are creating.

First, try to unde r s t and why people on Ear th get negative.

Negat ivi ty can be a soul character is t ic or a result o f bad t ra ining in th is life. But mainly, h u m a n beings get negative when they do n o t get what they want .

The f i rs t s tep towards th inking positively is t o accept the fact that there will be problems. T h e ones who seem to be wi thout p rob lems are ei ther hand l ing their p rob lems well or runn ing away f r o m them. Negat ive th ink ing is the main


r e a s o n why m a n y p e o p l e get s t u c k in t h e i r s p i r i t u a l journeys.

Negat iv i ty is a very c o m m o n soul character is t ic . It is an o u t c o m e o f w r o n g u n d e r s t a n d i n g a n d a weak, uncontro l led , un t r a ined mind. Moreover, the negativity in human beings is magni f ied because the Ear th ' s vibrat ions have b e c o m e very nega t ive . I t is u p t o y o u t o t h i n k positively to comba t th is because your t h o u g h t s eventually man i fes t in the f o r m of emot ions . T h i s is why t h o u g h t s are p o w e r f u l . T h e y m a n i f e s t physical ly and emo t iona l l y and they shape your soul.

How will a person know if he or she is being

negative?

T h e fol lowing are the signs of negativity:

I . Fear

Fear ar ises due t o negat ive t h i n k i n g , and a lack o f f a i t h and u n d e r s t a n d i n g . If you have f u l l f a i t h in God , there is no reason to be fear fu l . You are human , and you will face t o u g h s i tua t ions , b u t if you have f a i t h y o u are g iven t he c o u r a g e t o t ack le t h e s e s i tua t ions . T h e f i rs t th ing to do to overcome fear is t o increase your f a i th . T h e r e is a reason fear is so m u c h a p a r t o f h u m a n ex is tence r i g h t now. G o o d souls are a f ra id because the v ib ra t ions on Ear th are nega t ive , a n d t h e s e nega t ive v i b r a t i o n s make you uneasy, as you are s u r r o u n d e d by an energy tha t is d i f f e r e n t f r o m y o u r s . You a l so fear t h a t you will f o l l o w t h e w r o n g p a t h ; y o u r s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d u n d e r s t a n d s th i s fear, b u t your physical m i n d does

Positive Thinking 275

no t — it only knows that it is afraid. However, your subconscious mind is never afraid. It is aware.

If you live in a place where the vibrat ions are posit ive, you will n o t feel fear. Keep your h o m e s imple and c lean . S u n l i g h t and p l a n t s h e l p b u i l d p o s i t i v e v i b r a t i o n s and t h i s will p r e v e n t you f r o m b e i n g f e a r f u l . Fear also comes in t h e f o r m o f p r o t e c t i v e ins t incts , which are required for your own safety. For example , you will obv ious ly be a f r a i d t o p u t y o u r hand in to a fire; this is a survival instinct.

St range as it may seem, there are some people who are actual ly a f r a id o f be ing pos i t ive . Perhaps they have had bad experiences in the past and are afraid of being hopefu l , so they p rog ramme themselves in to believing tha t life is no t good and tha t they don ' t deserve any posi t ivi ty in their lives. T h e y gear themselves up fo r d i s a p p o i n t m e n t . T h e i r j u s t i f i c a t i o n is t ha t they are being realistic, b u t they are no t . A realistic a t t i t ude is t o know tha t there are ups and downs in life, so it is na tura l t o hope for the good t imes. N o mat te r what your past experiences are, hope is essential to human survival. S o m e t i m e s p e o p l e are a f r a i d t o c h a n g e because they feel safe in tha t negative condi t ion .

2. Worry

C o n s t a n t worry only br ings you down. People worry because they have lost fa i th and are t o o a t tached t o o u t c o m e s . R e s u l t s are n o t in y o u r hands , b u t t h e p roces s is. So do your bes t and t h e n s u r r e n d e r t o G o d . C o m p l e t e su r render means knowing tha t G o d will do what is best for you a f te r you have done your best . Sur render the o u t c o m e and be consistent in your


surrender. Fai th in God, your angels, your loved ones, and y o u r s e l f is e s sen t i a l . Fa i th is t he energy t h a t d r ives you f o r w a r d a n d b r i n g s y o u peace . Be ing wi thou t fa i th is like expecting a car t o move forward w i t h o u t f u e l . D o your best and leave the rest to God.

3. D o u b t

W h e n you cons t an t ly d o u b t yourse l f , your sp i r i tua l teacher, and m o s t impor t an t l y , G o d , you are be ing negative. It is okay to ask ques t ions , b u t if you are on the spi r i tual pa th , you m u s t replace d o u b t with fa i th . Trust your guides. I f you keep d o u b t i n g t h e m and asking fo r p r o o f af ter they have given you knowledge and unders tand ing , you are being negative.

T h e r e is a m a n who prays very hard each n ight . At the end of his prayer, he always asks G o d to do what is bes t f o r h i m . But somehow, t h i n g s d o n ' t seem t o work o u t in his life. H e cannot unde r s t and why G o d d o e s n o t a n s w e r h i s p r a y e r s . O n e day, an ange l appears before him. "I have a g i f t fo r you," says the angel. T h e m a n is overjoyed. T h e angel asks the man to open his palms. T h e man does so as t h o u g h he is a b o u t t o accept an o f fe r ing . T h e angel looks at the man ' s pa lms and blows on them. "You're welcome," says t h e ange l . T h e m a n is c o n f u s e d b e c a u s e h i s palms are still empty. "But where's my gi f t?" he asks. " I t has already been given to you , " says the angel . "Your hands were full of d o u b t . I removed all doub t . Some t imes someth ing that is taken away f r o m you is a greater g i f t than someth ing that is given to you. '

Make sure that you t rus t G o d and do no t d o u b t H i m .


W h e n you cons tan t ly d o u b t , your spir i t is weakened because your spir i t survives on fa i th in God .

4- Nagg ing

N a g g i n g is spiri tually wrong. I t is a f o r m of menta l to r ture , a one-way assault of words . It comes ou t o f ego and a lack of u n d e r s t a n d i n g and is an act o f self ishness because you want t o be heard at all cos ts and y o u w a n t y o u r way, n o m a t t e r w h a t . W h e n p a r e n t s nag the i r ch i ld ren it is very h a r m f u l , even t h o u g h the mot ive is to help. W h e n you nag, you are going against G o d given free will. Ins tead of l i s tening to you, the pe r son being nagged will no t l isten at all and will t u r n a deaf ear and may even do exactly the oppos i t e if the nagging con t inues .

5. Cons tan t ly compla in ing and g rumbl ing

A nega t ive p e r s o n d o e s n o t k n o w t h e m e a n i n g o f happiness . If you whine and m o a n your way t h r o u g h life, you a t t r ac t misery. S o m e peop le encourage th i s t rai t in o the r s by showing sympathy. It is essential t o c o u n t your blessings. Accen tua te the posit ive. D o n ' t f ocus on the negative.

6. Taking on more problems than you are required to

Some people want t o show the world how m u c h they are doing, how much they are suf fe r ing . They are only ha rming themselves. A fai lure to ask fo r help means you are being p r o u d and negative. You are on Ear th t o coexist, n o t t o handle everything on your own. T h i s need to prove that you can handle th ings on your own is your ego talking. It is unna tu ra l . N o one expects you to be supe rhuman .


Jealousy

O n e of the th ings tha t robs peop le o f happiness is jealousy. W h e n you constant ly compare your journey wi th s o m e o n e else's, it ho ld s you back. Be c o n t e n t w i t h y o u r g i f t s , and a l so l ea rn t o der ive joy a n d inspi ra t ion f r o m the accompl i shments of others . T h a t is h o w s p i r i t s o u l s live, a n d i t b r i n g s us t r u e happiness . T h a n k G o d for all tha t you have and learn the art of c o n t e n t m e n t .

Blaming o the r s

Always look wi th in yourse l f and you will recognize t he s o u r c e o f y o u r pa in . Pain can be t r i gge red by someone else only if it already exists wi th in you. So get t o the roo t o f the pain. D o n o t focus on the o the r p e r s o n . C o r r e c t the imbalance w i t h i n you, improve yourself f i rs t , and then try to help o the r s change.

Addic t ion to negative t h o u g h t s

Over t ime, people who are cons tan t ly negative become so used to tha t feeling that they canno t do w i thou t it. I f they have no problems , they will create p rob l ems and d rama . In many cases, se l f -p i ty and dep res s ion become habi t s . T h e y s tar t small, b u t are allowed to escalate in to someth ing huge.

Impa t ience

W h e n you learn to develop patience, you will be more at peace. Impat ience pu t s you off-balance. Remember t h a t t h i n g s h a p p e n at the r i gh t t ime : t i m i n g is in G o d ' s h a n d s , and when you are i m p a t i e n t you are


dic ta t ing t e rms to God . You are asking H i m to p u t H i s Plan aside and pu t yours in to mo t ion . Your plan is always l imited. G o d ' s Plan is inf ini te .

In what way does negativity affect us physically}

emotionally} and spiritually?

Negativi ty becomes a habit, a way of living for many people. Even t h o u g h there is n o t h i n g wrong wi th their lives, they are so used to being hopeless, cynical, bitter, and defeated t h a t they are c o n s t a n t l y p u t t i n g o u t t h a t energy. Like a t t r ac t s like. T h e r e f o r e , negat ive peop l e a t t r ac t negat ive people and s i t u a t i o n s towards them, and this p a t t e r n is very h a r m f u l t o the i r souls . G e t r id o f th is p a t t e r n and replace it wi th posit ivity; do no t be afra id of change. T h e fol lowing are the ef fects o f negativity:

1. Your j udgmen t goes wrong

W h e n you are negative, your j u d g m e n t goes wrong. T h i s will a f fec t the choices you make in your day- to -day life and you will fall spir i tually lower.

2. You lose small g i f t s

Life has many small g i f t s wai t ing for you. W h e n you are negative, these g i f t s can be s tar ing you in the face, bu t you will fail to see and accept them. If you are negative, you will be u n a b l e t o l i s t e n t o t h e g u i d a n c e o f t h e s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d t ha t directs you t o t h o s e g i f t s . Ove r time, your energy becomes so dark tha t g i f t s , being of a light nature , cannot come to you. Like a t t rac ts like, so you at t ract p rob lems instead of gi f ts .


3- People sense your imbalance

Like humili ty, posi t ivi ty is a natura l s ta te of being. G o o d p e o p l e will s e n s e a n e g a t i v e v ibe a r o u n d you , fee l uncomfor t ab le , and spend less t ime with you. Since your judgment is clouded, you will fail to unde r s t and why this is h a p p e n i n g and you will b e c o m e negat ive wi th o t h e r s instead of unde r s t and ing that the imbalance is wi thin you.

4- Your heal th is affected

T h o u g h t s are very, very p o w e r f u l . Your t h o u g h t s a n d feelings will always manifes t physically. Negat ive t h o u g h t s and feel ings man i f e s t in the f o r m of illness or injury. If there is b i t t e r n e s s and anger wi th in , it will m a n i f e s t in your body. Your inabili ty to forgive yourse l f or someone else leads to a breakdown of the body. Forgiveness br ings abou t heal ing; it is good fo r you and essent ia l fo r your growth.

5. You fail your tes t

A very basic tes t given to m o s t people is whether they can remain posi t ive in a t ough s i tua t ion . T h a t s i tua t ion may n o t be t he i r ka rma , b u t it is a t e s t o r t r a i n i n g f o r t he spir i t . If they react negatively and go t h r o u g h the whole process compla in ing and feeling sorry fo r themselves, the s i tua t ion is repeated again and again unt i l the lesson has been lea rned . T h e p rocess of l ea rn ing t o be pos i t ive in tough t imes is the test — not the s i tua t ion .

H o w you go t h r o u g h t he p r o c e s s is i m p o r t a n t . Fo r example, n o one likes to be sick, b u t if you are a pe r son who c o m p l a i n s whenever you are ill and you make l i fe d i f f i c u l t f o r t h o s e a r o u n d you, the l e sson you need t o


learn is to be posit ive while you are ill and appreciate the help o thers are giving you. T h e test is to remain posi t ive dur ing the illness. Another test may be that of fear. If you are te r r i f ied of medical repor ts , you will be in s i tua t ions that will require you to go for medical tes ts over and over again. T h e tes t is fo r you to n o t be f e a r f u l d u r i n g t he process.

6. You over analyse

Look ing w i t h i n yourse l f is a g o o d th ing , b u t when you over analyse, you get s tuck. You keep th ink ing and fail t o take act ion. You will over analyse a s i tua t ion and keep on asking why, instead of accept ing a s i tua t ion as it is, taking action, and moving on.

7- You are weakening the subconsc ious mind

Negat ive t h o u g h t s come only f r o m the physical mind . T h e s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d , even in t h e m o s t t r y i n g o f c i r -cumstances , will see th ings in a posi t ive l ight. So when you give preference to negative t hough t s , you are choos ing the physical m i n d over the subconsc ious mind . T h e physical mind is ge t t ing what it wants, so you are spoil ing it, and the subconsc ious mind is being ignored.

How does a negative person change for the better?

T h e r e is a s i m p l e w o r d t h a t g o e s a very l o n g way in p revent ing you f r o m do ing wrong in all aspects of your l ife: control. Control your thoughts by controlling and training the physical mind. T h e m o m e n t a n e g a t i v e t h o u g h t enters your mind, do no t analyse it. Ge t rid of it immediately. O u t of habit you will enter ta in the t hough t ,


but learn to break that habit . Initially, it will be d i f f icu l t . You migh t even experience a sense of fear when you get rid o f nega t ive t h o u g h t s . " W h a t if I need t o analyse this? W h a t if th is will happen? W h a t if? W h a t if?" Well, what good does worry do? It does no good at all. So cont ro l the negat ive t h o u g h t . T h a t is the f i r s t s tep . T h e next s tep, wh ich is even m o r e i m p o r t a n t , is t o r ep l ace n e g a t i v e t h o u g h t s w i t h p o s i t i v e ones . To be p o s i t i v e m e a n s t o u n d e r s t a n d the h igher n a t u r e o f t h i n g s . W h a t e v e r your path, learn to view it f r o m a spir i tual perspective. T h i s will help you cope with problems because you will unde r s t and tha t they are invaluable . W h e n faced wi th p rob l ems , be mentally and physically occupied.

Problems do no t s t op your path . T h e y are your path.

Both blessings and problems are par t o f the journey.

H o w can you be pos i t i ve when faced w i t h d i s a p p o i n t -ments? By knowing tha t d i s a p p o i n t m e n t s are par t of the learning process . Therefore , do th ings w i thou t expectat ion. H o p e is a b e a u t i f u l th ing, and it m u s t be kept alive b u t expectat ion is a demand that comes f r o m your ego. H o p e is n o t a b o u t t h e o u t c o m e . H o p e is s t a y i n g p o s i t i v e t h r o u g h o u t the p rocess and bel ieving t h a t the o u t c o m e will be the best fo r your growth . We m u s t sur render the o u t c o m e t o G o d , and r e m a i n p o s i t i v e and h o p e f u l t h r o u g h o u t the process . H o p e is what keeps your sp i r i t alive. Expec ta t ion weighs your spiri t down.

If you are at a job that you dislike, being posit ive means u n d e r s t a n d i n g t ha t pe rhaps it is vou r t es t and you are paying o f f a karmic debt , pe rhaps you need to learn to a p p r e c i a t e s o m e t h i n g g o o d t h a t c o m e s y o u r way, o r


perhaps you have been placed there fo r a sho r t while t o help o thers .

It can be devastat ing when you lose someone close to you. It is natural to feel shat tered, b u t spir i t souls do no t want you to m o u r n for them. If they are good souls, they are in a bet ter place so allow yourself t o heal. Make sure you have every i n t e n t i o n of heal ing your se l f because tha t is wha t your loved o n e s want . Sp i r i t sou l s do n o t want ear th ly souls to grieve their whole lives. W h e n you cut your hand the b lood f lows ou t but , in t ime, the w o u n d heals. It is the same with grieving. T h e r e is a t ime to grieve and a t ime to heal.

When we come to the spirit world, we are happy. We are alive and well and most important of all, we are still with you. We need you to believe that. When the pain gets unbearable, focus on this truth and hold on to it. This is what we mean by being positive in the face of a terrible loss. Derive strength from the fact that we are still with you and can guide you i f you let us. O u r M o m and D a d s o m e t i m e s fe l t so lost and miserab le w i t h o u t us t ha t it would have been very d i f f i cu l t fo r us to calm them down and cheer t h e m up w i t h o u t sp i r i t c o m m u n i c a t i o n s . W e explained to t h e m that when they were upset , it saddened us as well. M o s t impor tan t ly , we let t h e m know tha t we were nearer to t hem now than we were on Ear th and tha t we loved them tremendously.

It is easy to be posi t ive when th ings are going well. T h e real test is to be posit ive when life is d i f f icul t , when th ings are n o t g o i n g y o u r way. T h a t is h o w you evolve as a p e r s o n . Positivity is a choice no matter what the situation.


Somet imes , you are unable to con t ro l your mind, or you migh t succeed at contro l l ing your mind , bu t you will n o t know how to be positive. There is a very simple reason for t h i s and it ha s t o d o w i t h c h o i c e . You have t o be c o m p l e t e l y c o m m i t t e d t o c h a n g e and use y o u r wil l . The re fo re , even the physical m ind has to coopera te wi th you. T h e reason people fail is tha t the i r c o m m i t m e n t is weak. T h e i r e f fo r t s are hal f -hear ted and they are no t fully dedicated to change. You choose to be positive. You choose to forgive someone . You choose to be humble . You choose to be c o n t e n t . Success or fa i lure d e p e n d s on t he s t r e n g t h o f your choices. Le t ' s s u p p o s e t ha t you have a t o u g h t ime forgiving someone for the pain they have caused you. Af te r having the knowledge, if you are still unable to forgive, it is because you don ' t want to, no t because you don ' t know how to.

Being brave and keeping a posit ive a t t i t ude when th ings are going badly is the t rue meaning of posit ivi ty. Never lose hope, no ma t t e r how dire the c i rcumstances .

Keys to Positive Thinking:

1. Have ful l and comple te fa i th in God . Know that H e will do what is best fo r you.

2. Accept your karma, tests, and t ra ining. D o no t resist these.

3- Pray. Ask G o d fo r s t r eng th . T h e s t r e n g t h tha t you need to be posit ive in a s i tua t ion can come only f r o m prayer and is given to you only if you ask. Your prayer will bu i ld pos i t ive v ib ra t ions a r o u n d you, and will improve your j u d g m e n t so t ha t you take the r i g h t act ion.


4. Activate the subconsc ious mind . Use it when dealing with problems. D o no t use the l imited unders t and ing of the physical mind.

5. View prob lems as an o p p o r t u n i t y to grow.

6. Exercise. Physical activity, such as yoga (it is vital t o f ind a good teacher) , dance, swimming , any spor t is e s s e n t i a l . T h e m i n d , b o d y and s p i r i t m u s t all be healthy.

7- Sur render t o God . To surrender means to fol low the Godly G o o d Path, to do everything in your capacity, and then to let G o d take care of the ou tcome.

8. D o th ings that you like. Be occupied. They should be s imple th ings that br ing you peace o f mind, such as r e a d i n g , l i s t e n i n g t o m u s i c , c o o k i n g , g a r d e n i n g , swimming or whatever nour i shes your heart and soul.

9. Learn t o coexis t . Share y o u r t ime and exper iences with people you t rus t and make sure you spend t ime wi th peop l e who in sp i r e you and who are pos i t i ve inf luences .

10. H e l p someone else. Somet imes , when you are in pain, th is is the best th ing you can do. A change of focus d is t rac ts you f r o m your own pain and you also learn to be selfless.

I I . Laugh. Be light.

E n j o y y o u r l i f e . You are on E a r t h t o e n j o y y o u r l i f e wi thout ha rming yourself or o thers . Know what makes you happy and know what br ings you down. Do not be of the view that you are on Earth to suffer. Yes, your karmic


debts have to be paid off, but your earthly journey should be joyous. Do not take life too seriously. Have a sense of humour. Be light. Again, the key word is balance. Try not to be t oo in tense about s i tuat ions; on the o ther hand, do no t be f r ivolous and avoid responsibi l i ty either.

Make t he m o s t o f your ear th ly journey . H u m o u r and a sense of play are very impor t an t par t s of l ight. In the spir i t world, everyone has a sense of humour . We love what we do, we love o u r existence, and we laugh a lot . T h e r e is song , dance , and c e l e b r a t i o n . You will u n d e r s t a n d t h e meaning of celebrat ion when you come to the spir i t world. To celebrate is t o know that you are created by God , tha t you are d o i n g H i s work , and t h a t a g rea t deal is s t i l l unknown, even to us. Yes, we celebrate the unknown, the pa r t o f o u r j o u r n e y t h a t st i l l awai ts us . We are j o y o u s because if we are happy now, at th is stage o f our existence, imagine how happy we will be in the seventh universe as we move closer and closer to God . T h i s is surely someth ing to celebrate.

PRIDE AND HUMILITY

"Put your pride in your pocket."

"Do not act humble. Be humble."

Why do human beings have pride or ego?

O n e of the m o s t c o m m o n flaws tha t h u m a n beings possess is pr ide. Every single pe r son has s o m e f o r m of p r ide or ego, w h i c h can be very d a n g e r o u s if n o t c o n t r o l l e d i m m e d i a t e l y . N o s p i r i t u a l j o u r n e y can exis t w i t h o u t humility. Pr ide is applicable to all h u m a n beings at some p o i n t in the i r lives. S o m e peop le have p r ide because o f money , s o m e b e c a u s e o f t h e i r g o o d looks , and o t h e r s because o f the i r intel l igence, b u t s trangely, m o s t peop le have it when they really do n o t have anyth ing to be p r o u d about . T h i s is because of insecuri t ies and complexes. T h e y bu i ld walls as a de fence m e c h a n i s m t o p r o t e c t the false image they have created. T h e y are n o t being genuine and are walking away f r o m the pa th o f t r u th . In today 's world, pr ide is the greatest downfa l l o f individuals , as everyone believes what they are d o i n g is r i g h t . I f peop le d o n o t cont ro l th is pride, their j u d g m e n t will go wrong because they will be unable to experience t rue under s t and ing . An ord inary p e r s o n who may n o t have s t a tu s in the ear thly world, bu t is humble , will be respected in the spiri t world,


un l ike a p r o u d p e r s o n w h o is s u c c e s s f u l in a m a t e r i a l sense . A h u m b l e p e r s o n will a t t r a c t g o o d peop l e , n o t flatterers, and people will come to h im for genuine advice. Bu t p e o p l e w h o are p r o u d a lways end u p lonely , are susp ic ious of the people a r o u n d them, and will never be genuinely liked by others .

Ano the r reason people develop pr ide is due to earthly fame and success . S o m e t i m e s , p e o p l e wi th equal a m o u n t s o f ta lent have d i f fe ren t levels of success. T h i s has to do with their tests , t ra ining and karma. Failure is a test and so is success, t o see how you handle bo th . Success and fai lure do n o t make you super ior or inferior. If taken in the r ight way, fa i lure is actually a bless ing because it crushes your ego and teaches you humili ty. Moreover, success may n o t have b e e n g o o d f o r you at t h a t t i m e . W h e n you have lea rned t o be h u m b l e , you can hand l e the success t h a t comes your way. So when you achieve certain goals, do no t let p r i d e set in. I n s t ead , r e c o g n i z e t h a t you have been helped by a higher power to reach where you are. Be aware of the fact tha t when you accomplish someth ing , there will always be people who will give you u n d u e impor tance jus t to be in your good books. Remember tha t when you have been given success, it is always a tes t . Some t imes , early success w i t h o u t too much e f fo r t makes you believe you are invincible. T h i s early success is a test . It should no t lead to pride. So, slow and steady, s tep by s tep is a safer way to c l i m b t h e l a d d e r o f success . True success is spiritual success and not earthly success. T h e idea is t o g r o w sp i r i tua l ly even t h o u g h you live in an ear th ly physical , material world. So even when earthly success comes, your f o c u s s h o u l d be t o evolve s p i r i t u a l l y a n d t he e a r t h l y success shou ld be used for the greater good of humani ty .

Pride And Humility 289

T h a t is how you lead a balanced life on Ear th . T h e h u m a n flaws that are an o u t c o m e of ego are endless. But if you are a sens ib le h u m a n be ing , you will realise t h a t t h e s e are dangerous flaws to have, as they slowly bu t surely kill the s p i r i t . E a c h t i m e t h e ego gives you a f e e l i n g o f invincibility, remind yourself tha t you are h u m a n and your l i fe can c h a n g e in a s e c o n d , in an i n s t a n t . Instead of feeling great, feel grateful.

In what way is pride harmful?

Pride leads to :

1. Loss of j udgmen t

W h e n you are p r o u d , you opera te completely f r o m the physical mind, and the physical m ind has very l i t t le t o d o w i t h m a k i n g t h e r i g h t s p i r i t u a l c h o i c e s . Your j u d g m e n t is spiri tually impaired because you are n o t us ing the subconsc ious m i n d and your ego prevents y o u f r o m l i s t e n i n g t o a n y o n e else; i t m a k e s y o u believe t ha t your p o i n t of view is the only p o i n t o f view. Also , you are so c o n c e r n e d w i t h w h a t o t h e r people th ink and how they shou ld perceive you tha t you end u p making choices based on what they th ink . Your choices may n o t have any th ing to do wi th t he t r u t h .

2. Spi r i tua l downfal l

P r i d e p r e v e n t s y o u f r o m a c k n o w l e d g i n g G o d . I t m a k e s you be l ieve t h a t t h e r e c a n n o t be a h i g h e r power. It convinces you tha t you are an in te l lec tua l be ing , and as such , you n e e d r a t i o n a l r e a s o n s f o r believing in God . Pride gives t oo much impor tance to


the intellect and no impor tance to the subconsc ious mind , which knows that G o d exists. A truly balanced person ' s intellect and subconsc ious mind will work in a l ignment .

Lower vibrat ions

If you do some th ing negative, the result is negative. T h i n k of this negative energy as a dark cloud a round your head tha t prevents l ight f r o m coming th rough . If l ight (wisdom) cannot come th rough , your j udgmen t b e c o m e s impai red even fu r the r . T h i s creates a cycle wherein you make even weaker choices. W r o n g act ions b u i l d u p nega t ive v i b r a t i o n s . Your low v i b r a t i o n s a f f e c t you, as well as t h o s e a r o u n d you. T h e y will sense this negative c loud a r o u n d you and stay away. Also , n e g a t i v e ene rgy a r o u n d y o u a t t r a c t s m o r e negative energy.

In jus t i ce

T h e ego makes you believe tha t you are always r ight , n o m a t t e r wha t . T h e r e f o r e , i n s t ead of be ing o p e n -m i n d e d , y o u r u n d e r s t a n d i n g o f s i t u a t i o n s will be l imi ted , and you will fo rce your o p i n i o n on o the r s . You will t h u s go agains t the i r f ree will, which is a great in jus t ice . U n f o r t u n a t e l y , you will fail to see it tha t way, as you will be b l inded by your ego.

Jealousy

I t is y o u r ego t h a t c o m p a r e s y o u r j o u r n e y w i t h s o m e o n e else 's . I n s t ead o f g r a t e f u l l y accep t ing the g i f t s you have, the ego will make you focus on what you d o n o t have. N o t only t ha t , it will make you resent the g i f t s and accompl i shments of others . T h e ego makes you an insecure, jealous being.


6. D i s c o n t e n t

O n e o f the m o s t i m p o r t a n t l e s sons a p e r s o n m u s t learn on Ear th is t o be con ten t . Ego is an o u t c o m e of the physical mind . It makes you want more and more . If you have an ego, you are always exerc i s ing t h e phys ica l m i n d and g iv ing it t o o m u c h power. T h e p h y s i c a l m i n d g o e s f a r b e y o n d e a r t h l y needs a n d creates desires. You then give in to those desires and pu r sue wealth, power, and fame. Even af ter acqui r ing these, you are no t sat isf ied; you are still no t con ten t . T h e ego makes you w a n t t h i n g s , b u t w h e n t h o s e w a n t s are m e t , t h e ego c r e a t e s new w a n t s . You c o n t i n u e t o f e e d t h o s e w a n t s , g iv ing t h e m m o r e impor tance and power. But if you are humble , you are exercising the subconsc ious mind , and the need of the subconsc ious mind is focused and very simple — it is only concerned about do ing what is spiri tually r ight . Also, when you are humble enough to follow the advice of the subconscious mind, it gives you something in return — a feeling of peace. Contentment is a result of following the advice of the subconscious mind.

T h e subconsc ious mind gives you advice

I Since you are humble , you fol low that advice

by taking posit ive, spir i tual act ion

As a result of posit ive act ion, the subconsc ious mind gives you a feeling of peace

I T h a t feeling of peace gives you the s t rength to l isten to the subconsc ious m i n d again and take

more spir i tual act ion and therefore rise spiri tually


7- Enemies

D u e t o rash and i r r a t i o n a l b e h a v i o u r , you c rea t e enemies. At the time, your ego will say, "I don ' t care," bu t later on, when it is t oo late, you will regret it.

8. Loss of re la t ionships

Re l a t i onsh ip s are abou t coexis tence, and p r ide goes against the concept of coexistence because it is about s u p e r i o r i t y . T h e r e f o r e , i t is i m p o s s i b l e t o have a healthy re la t ionship as ego will always f o r m barriers.

9- Expec ta t ions

T h e ego creates expectat ions. It has a fixed agenda. I ts way- of t h i n k i n g is: n o m a t t e r what , th i s has t o be done; th is has to come my way. T h i s is the t rue cause o f m i s e r y b e c a u s e t h e ego c a n n o t c o p e w h e n i t s agenda is n o t fulf i l led. It gets impat ien t and does no t u n d e r s t a n d tha t timing is in the hands of a higher power. Moreover, expecta t ions create anxiety because they bui ld unnecessary pressure. T h e ego makes you expect th ings f r o m yourself , f r o m others , and creates a false need to live up to o the r people 's expectat ions. Try n o t to create expectat ions, bu t always keep hope alive. T h e ego does no t know the meaning of hope, as you have t o depend on s o m e t h i n g outside of yourself, which means comple te sur render of the o u t c o m e and leaving room for God ' s Plan. T h e ego cannot handle this, as it knows only con t ro l of self and others .

What exactly does it mean to have hope?

H o p e is no t about holding on; it is about let t ing go. T h i s may be a s t range concept fo r you because the expression


normally used is 'hold on to hope ' . H o p e is nor wrong, bu t do no t hold on to the ou t come . H o p e is no t abou t having fixed expectat ions. It is abou t going t h rough the process in a zes t fu l and enthusias t ic manner . In a sense hope means tha t a person lives positively day by day, and also has fa i th in the f u t u r e . To "keep hope alive" is to go t h r o u g h the process of any s i tua t ion positively, in the best way you can, and know tha t G o d will do what is best fo r you. T h a t way, you are n o t a t t a c h e d t o t h e o u t c o m e , b u t you have u n d e r s t o o d the impor t ance o f the process . T h e ego only knows how to cling on to the ou tcome; surrender, on the o t h e r h a n d , is a n a t u r a l f u n c t i o n of the s u b c o n s c i o u s mind .

How does one deal with the ego?

T h e f igh t between the ego and the subconsc ious mind will las t a l i f e t i m e , b u t you c a n n o t e m b a r k on a s p i r i t u a l journey unt i l you make a s t r o n g e f f o r t t o e l iminate your own ego. Here are three simple s teps to start on this pa th :

1. Analyse yourself

T h e r e are varying degrees o f p r i d e — s o m e h u m a n be ings have m o r e and s o m e have less. However , all h u m a n beings have some sense o f pride. Yes, riches, fame, power, beauty, g i f ts , ta lents etc. are all obvious th ings tha t lead to pride. But the worst kind of pr ide is s p i r i t u a l p r i d e — the p r i d e of t h o u g h t — the ' I ' factor, tha t is, "I am r ight" , "I am humble" , " T h i s has happened because of me", "So many people come to me for help and guidance", "I do a lot of social work", "I am a great healer "So many people are drawn to me" , "I have bu i l t many h o s p i t a l s and s choo l s f o r


people", "I am a very religious person", "I know", "I have achieved so much" , "I am very good at my work/ job /p ro fess ion" .

T h e m o m e n t the 'I ' f a c t o r appears , it is a s ign of p r i d e a n d t h e f i r s t s t e p t o w a r d s y o u r s p i r i t u a l downfal l . All success, ta lent etc. come f r o m G o d . We are H i s ins t ruments , given these g i f t s to share and for the service of man. We have to be gra te fu l and thank G o d for all tha t is given to us and we should humbly accept these blessings and no t feel 'I' did it all.

N o w analyse yourself and accept the fact that you are a p r o u d person. Somet imes , when you give it p roper t h o u g h t , you will feel fool i sh abou t being p roud . Pray to G o d and ask H i m to guide you. T h i s is the m o s t d i f f i cu l t step, to recognise and acknowledge tha t you are p r o u d and to have a true desire to change. It is d i f f i cu l t t o s tar t walking on the spir i tual pa th because th is requi res change. T h e ego knows this; it knows that it will eventually be discarded, and this is what it d o e s n o t wan t . T h e r e f o r e , it will make you res i s t change, so your resolve has to be much s t ronger than your ego.

2. C o n t r o l your pr ide

U n d e r s t a n d t h a t p r i d e is in thought. W h e n you d o s o m e t h i n g g o o d or achieve s o m e t h i n g , a fee l ing of p r i d e may set in, b u t do n o t t h i n k and act p r o u d . D i s t r a c t y o u r m i n d by t h i n k i n g of s o m e t h i n g comple te ly d i f f e ren t . T h e f i r s t few t imes, it will be very hard to cont ro l yourself — like t rying to break a bad h a b i t vou have b e c o m e a c c u s t o m e d t o . Your physical mind has become so used to this bad habi t t ha t you s ta r t bel ieving you c a n n o t do w i t h o u t it.


Slowly, t h e s e t h o u g h t s wil l d i m i n i s h a n d s o o n disappear. T h e urge will be there, bu t the tes t is no t t o give in. Even if you fail the f i rs t few t imes, do n o t be angry or negative; ins tead, be humble enough to accept that you might fail initially. Relax and try again. T h e key is to go on genuinely t rying unt i l you succeed, and you will succeed if you are posi t ive and cons is ten t . You will not ice tha t th ings get s impler and clearer, and you will begin walking on the r ight pa th . M o s t important ly , main ta in your control .

3. Replace p roud t h o u g h t s with humble ones

Wr i t e down your unclear t h o u g h t s or u n d e r s t a n d i n g o f t h i n g s so they can be c lea red and r e p l a c e d by correct t h o u g h t s and unde r s t and ing . In th is manner , tha t small, p roud t h o u g h t will no t develop in to fu l l -blown ego. P roud t h o u g h t s will still arise f r o m t ime t o t ime , b u t you will k n o w to c o n t r o l y o u r m i n d . Remain cons is ten t in your e f fo r t .

Are people born proud or do they acquire this

quality over time?

T h e fact tha t h u m a n be ings have a physical m i n d means there is a very s t rong possibi l i ty o f developing a fu l l -b lown ego on Ear th . Some people have less pr ide than others , and some have more. T h i s is because some souls had worked on c r u s h i n g t h e i r ego in t h e i r p r e v i o u s l ives a n d are humble now, whereas o thers failed to acquire humil i ty and have taken rebir th with the sole p u r p o s e of c rush ing the ego. Unfor tuna te ly , the ego gets more inf lamed on Ear th and they end up acqu i r ing many more flaws due to the ego.


H e r e is a s imple example:

Revenge is one ot the greatest sins because it is p lanned. It is done with negative in ten t ion . Take the case of a person who is on a spir i tual level of Realm 4 Stage 5. H e may no t necessari ly be a revengeful pe rson , which means tha t his s o u l is n o t o f a r e v e n g e f u l n a t u r e . But s o m e h o w he becomes p roud . Someth ing happens in his external world, an ear thly achievement pe rhaps , t ha t feeds his ego. H i s subconsc ious mind gives h im h in t s tha t he is developing p r i d e , b u t he d o e s n o t l i s t e n t o t he adv ice o f h i s s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d because he is en joy ing the sense of pr ide. T h a t is the p rob lem wi th pr ide. It makes you feel power fu l and you get used to the feeling. Over t ime, this pr ide grows, unt i l the ego becomes m o n s t r o u s and wants t o keep a check on eve ry th ing a r o u n d it, especial ly the a c h i e v e m e n t s o f o t h e r s . W h e n s o m e o n e else d o e s s o m e t h i n g good , the ego becomes in f l amed as it always wants t o be n u m b e r one. It wants t o be extra-special . It does n o t realise that G o d has made everyone special and equal . T h a t is why c o m p a r i s o n is wrong . W h e n the ego s t a r t s m a k i n g c o m p a r i s o n s , jealousy s e t s in. W h e n t he c o m p a r i s o n s c o n t i n u e day - in and d a y - o u t , t h e p e r s o n s t a r t s t o b u r n f r o m w i t h i n and anger d e v e l o p s . T h a t burn ing , tha t in tense negative feeling, feeds on i tself like wildf i re and becomes so extreme that it t u rns in to hatred. O n c e you have reached t he s tage where there is h a t r e d wi th in you, you have allowed your subconsc ious m i n d to d i m i n i s h so it has no e f fec t on you, and no a m o u n t of logical reasoning will pacify you. You will be b l inded by that ha t red and you will be driven to take revenge. O n c e you take revenge on someone , the s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d s h u t s dow n and you have very li t t le chance of recovery. So that


soul on Realm 4 Stage 5 may no t initially have revenge as a soul characterist ic, bu t the fact tha t he has n o t kept his pr ide in check has led to his spir i tual downfal l .

P R I D E

I

J E A L O U S Y

i

A N G E R

I

H A T R E D

I

R E V E N G E

Revenge is one of the lowest h u m a n qualities, and spir i tual law has no t o l e r ance t o w a r d s r evenge fu l peop l e . So be aware of pr ide because if it is no t cut o f f immediately, it can become a very power fu l negative force tha t ha rms the spir i t . A person can take revenge in d i f fe ren t ways. Revenge is n o t abou t causing bodily harm; tha t is a literal view of i t . You can take revenge on s o m e o n e by p u t t i n g t h e m down, make them feel small or by manipula t ing them in to do ing wrong deeds. W h e n you knowingly cause s o m e o n e physical , m e n t a l , e m o t i o n a l , or sp i r i t ua l h a r m , you are taking revenge.

What does it mean to be humble?

I . To be aware that you are created by a higher power

A t rue seeker, a person who walks the spiri tual path, is a h u m b l e p e r s o n . S u c h a p e r s o n has a very clear u n d e r s t a n d i n g of what c rea t ion means and is aware


tha t he was created by G o d . To be humble is t o never lose awareness o f th i s t r u t h . We are all c rea ted by G o d and we all belong to H i m . To belong to a wise, just , and compass iona te G o d is a blessing and it is up to us to mainta in that connec t ion by being humble .

I f p r i d e is a b o u t t h e se l f , h u m i l i t y is a b o u t self lessness

To k n o w G o d , and to k n o w H i s qual i t ies , live H i s qual i t ies . T h e very f i r s t qual i ty o f G o d is humi l i ty . H u m i l i t y is a n a t u r a l f o r m o f e x i s t e n c e . I f y o u obse rve n a t u r e , you will u n d e r s t a n d t h a t G o d has created beauty, and what gives H i s creations beauty is n o t only the appearance, bu t the fact that na tu re is a h u m b l e provider. I t is comple te ly selfless. It is th is selfless qual i ty tha t is the essence o f all spir i tual i ty. M o r e o v e r , n a t u r e coex i s t s : s t r e a m s b e c o m e r ivers , r ivers b e c o m e seas, and seas f o r m oceans. T h e r e is balance, uni ty , ha rmony , and above all, h u m i l i t y in nature . T h e s t ream never tells i tself tha t it wants t o be an ocean. It unde r s t ands its place in the universe, accepts its f u n c t i o n humbly with joy, and c o n t i n u e s t o serve a g rea t e r who le . T h i s is h o w G o d w a n t s h u m a n beings to live. T h e t rue ar t o f spi r i tual i ty is selfless service — a quali ty na ture has in abundance.

D o no t act humble. Be humble .

Jus t as pr ide is in t hough t , so is humili ty. T h e ego is a m a s t e r at d i s g u i s i n g i t s i m p u r e i n t e n t i o n s as r i g h t e o u s and good , and f o o l i n g you i n to t h i n k i n g tha t what you are do ing is r ight . T h i s is because the ego is selfish and has to sat isfy its agenda at any cost . T h i s cost can be your own subconsc ious m i n d and soul . So many h u m a n s wear the mask of humi l i t y :


their act ions and words give the impress ion tha t they are humble , b u t their t h o u g h t s are full of pr ide and they feel superior. They migh t foo l people fo r some t ime, bu t these souls are eventually exposed.

4- If you are on the spir i tual path, do no t feel p r o u d and r igh teous .

If you are on the spir i tual path, do no t become p roud abou t it. W h e n you have all the required knowledge to live your life on Ear th , and you still choose to do w r o n g , y o u r s p i r i t u a l d o w n f a l l is f a s t e r and m o r e severe. T h e r e are many peop le on Ea r th who t h i n k t h e y are d o i n g G o d ' s w o r k . T h e y t h i n k t h a t by s p r e a d i n g k n o w l e d g e and t e l l i ng p e o p l e h o w they shou ld live their lives, they are con t r ibu t ing to l ight . But so many so-cal led spiricual leaders are proud of the fact tha t they have knowledge. This is spiritual pride, the worst kind of pride. It is corruption of the s p i r i t at t h e h i g h e s t level . I f you w a n t t o g a i n spi r i tual knowledge and improve, choos ing the r ight guru is the m o s t i m p o r t a n t step. Be aware of the fact tha t many gurus are so power hungry that they know exactly how to man ipu la te the s tuden t . T h e y will feed t h e s t u d e n t ' s ego a n d may use y o u r o w n fea r s t o m a n i p u l a t e you . T h e s p i r i t u a l p a t h is n o t easy. I t involves hard t r u t h s . It requi res you to look wi th in yourself and accept your flaws. T h e wrong guru will feed you only what you want t o hear, no t what you need to. A true guru is always a student as well. T h a t is the f i r s t s ign t ha t can d e n o t e whe the r a g u r u is humble or not .

5. Always remember that you are a s tuden t of God .

All the knowledge you possess , the skills t ha t you


have, and the goodness that exists within you, is no t yours . It flows t h r o u g h you. Your mind , body, and spir i t are f o r t u n a t e to be a channel fo r tha t f low of goodness . T h a t flow keeps you on the r ight track. But when you s tar t taking ownership of tha t f low and begin be l iev ing t ha t it is you w h o is r e s p o n s i b l e f o r i ts ex i s tence , you are s lowly b u t surely r e d u c i n g t h a t flow, unt i l it will one day become a trickle, and will eventually come to a halt. T h a t f low of goodness has n o t lef t you. You have lef t it. You have left it by being p r o u d . Accord ing to sp i r i tua l law, tha t f low will be drawn to humili ty. It will seek ano ther channel tha t is n o t co r rup t in spirit , a channel tha t is open e n o u g h to unde r s t and the concept o f service. As channels, you are servers. By serving, you become co-crea tors . But the m o m e n t you feel p r o u d , you choose to o p e r a t e alone and to d isconnect yourse l f f r o m God , and you will be lef t with your own mind and body, which are extremely l imited. Your spiri t , o f course, will con t inue t o d i m i n i s h m u c h f a s t e r t h a n t he m i n d and body, because it is the one th ing tha t canno t live w i t h o u t G o d , w i thou t n o u r i s h m e n t f r o m the source.

To be o f wor th , you need sp i r i tua l weal th and s t r eng th . T h e ego wan ts t o be in con t ro l and it tells you t h a t by acknowledging G o d , you are powerless. By breaking away f r o m G o d , your ego gives you the i l lusion of power. It will drive you relentlessly to achieve material wealth and fame; i t wi l l m a k e y o u r e s t l e s s , a n d y o u wil l m i s t a k e t h a t res t lessness fo r a posi t ive drive and try and a t ta in m o r e and more in your physical world. By exercising the ego and giving m o r e i m p o r t a n c e to t he phys ica l m i n d t h a n t he subconsc ious mind , you are completely ignor ing the spiri t


and s t r e n g t h e n i n g the d a n g e r o u s musc le of p r ide . T h a t i l l u s i o n b r e a k s o n l y w h e n you d ie . W h e n y o u r s p i r i t is evaluated, you are comple te ly d i s i l lus ioned . T h a t dis-i l lus ionment is the m o m e n t of t r u t h that has arrived t oo late — you realise that your spiri t , which is eternal, is the only t h i n g of t r u e value. You s p e n t your who le l i fe o n th ings that were temporary. You focused all o f your energy on a t ta in ing physical and mater ia l power. Do not think of power. Think of spiritual strength. The things you can see are t e m p o r a r y ; t h e t h i n g s t h a t are n o t v i s ib le are eternal . If you live your life with this t r u t h in mind , you will no t be greedy for endless material wealth and fame. In fact, when that wealth and fame comes, you will be g ra te fu l fo r it, and you will be very aware of the fact tha t you have been p u t in a p o s i t i o n t o i n sp i r e o t h e r s and d o G o d ' s work. To do God's work means to use your position of strength to help others grow. To heal, to s t reng then , and to eventually help someone else's spir i t to soar shou ld be the u l t imate goal of every h u m a n being.

Why do some people feel that humility is a

weakness?

T h i s is because they do n o t unde r s t and the t rue meaning of humil i ty . Self respect goes hand in hand wi th humil i ty . It means t h a t no m a t t e r wha t happens , you will always make choices tha t will never h a r m the sp i r i t — yours or s o m e o n e e l se ' s . I t m e a n s h a v i n g t h e r i g h t j u d g m e n t , k n o w i n g your l imi t s , and n o t h u r t i n g or d i s r e s p e c t i n g someone else. Humi l i t y shou ld no t be seen as a weakness. In f a c t , p r i d e is a w e a k n e s s t h a t p r e v e n t s you f r o m accept ing your flaws. H u m i l i t y helps you work f r o m your

31(1 The Laws Of The Spirit World

s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d , and the s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d is n o t concerned abou t appearances — it will crush the ego and do what is r ight . Somet imes , you will admi t your flaws, bu t you wil l s t i l l fee l r e s e n t m e n t . An a c c e p t a n c e o f f l aws s h o u l d b r i n g you peace, n o t r e s e n t m e n t . It takes s o m e people a very long t ime to admi t tha t they are wrong. T h i s is a s t r o n g sign tha t the ego is at work. H u m i l i t y is o f u t m o s t value because it enables you to access the mora l t r u t h wi th in you and helps you be your own guide. H o w can tha t be a weakness? H u m i l i t y allows you to be really hones t wi th yourself . You will be able to judge wi th in a second if your ego is hu r t or if you are simply being f i r m in y o u r be l ie fs . To take a m o r a l s t a n d is a g o o d t h i n g because you are responding f r o m your spir i tual core. To be humble is not to tolerate evil. A lot of people use humi l i ty as an excuse f o r b e i n g coward ly and t h a t is, i ndeed , a weakness. H u m i l i t y means you f igh t evil by no t encourag-ing it, k n o w i n g t ha t the s t r e n g t h t o do so comes f r o m God .

How will a person know if he or she is proud?

T h e fo l lowing are Signs of Pride:

1. You do n o t believe in the existence of God .

2. It is very hard for you to accept your flaws.

3. W h e n you f ind ou t that you were wrong and someone else was r ight , you cannot handle it.

4- You run away f r o m the t r u th .

5- You th ink you are super ior to others .

6. You th ink only you are g i f ted .

7- You believe you are indispensable.


8. You feel you know everything and have no desire to acquire spir i tual knowledge.

9- You feel your po in t o f view is the only po in t of view.

10. You constant ly p u t people down and make them feel small.

11. You do no t care if you hur t someone ' s feelings.

12. You feel you are r e s p o n s i b l e f o r all t he g o o d t h a t happens to you.

13- You fail to accept the fact tha t there are o the r s who are much bet ter than you in someth ing .

14- You feel prayer is u n i m p o r t a n t .

15. You lack the u n d e r s t a n d i n g tha t everyone has f laws and tha t all people make mistakes.

16. You th ink only about yourself .

17- You are i m p a t i e n t , i r r i t ab le (peop le ' s f laws i r r i t a t e you) , and very s t ubbo rn .

18. You resist change.

19. You can' t handle it if s o m e o n e does n o t agree with you.

(Hi) How does one acquire humility?

1. O p e n t h e s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d . W h e n you o p e r a t e f r o m the subconsc ious mind , humil i ty will become a natura l state of existence for you.

2. Pray. W h e n you pray genuinely and regularly, you are cons tan t ly aware of the fact that you are created by-G o d . T h is will keep you humble .


3. U n d e r s t a n d c o e x i s t e n c e a n d un i t y . G o d c r e a t e d everyone equal. So the m o m e n t you consider yourself s u p e r i o r t o s o m e o n e else, t h e r e is a f law in y o u r t h ink ing . We all come to Ea r th wi th d i f f e r e n t g i f t s fo r ou r own tests , t ra in ing, and mission, so there is no ques t ion of being superior.

4 . Learn how to serve o thers . T h e ego wants t o fu l f i l l i ts own desires, b u t h u m i l i t y leads you to the p a t h of service.

5. Be open and under s t and someone else's po in t o f view.

6. Accept your flaws; only then can you change.

7. Always be o p e n t o s p i r i t u a l knowledge . A h u m b l e pe r son is always a s t u d e n t . However, do not go too deep into spirituality. W h a t we mean by th i s is do n o t get s tuck in the theory. As a s tuden t , practice what -ever you have learned, step by step. After you practice what you have learned, you are strengthening the spirit, but i f you get obsessed with the knowledge alone, and do not work on changing yourself from within, you are strengthening the ego.

8. Be compass iona te . Keep o thers ' feel ings in mind . Be considera te and unde r s t and their s i tua t ions .

9. H a v e p a t i e n c e . Keep in m i n d t h a t p e o p l e are at d i f f e r e n t s tages of sp i r i t ua l deve lopmen t , and t h a t the i r t es t s , t r a in ing , and karma are d i f f e r e n t . T h e y also have varying levels o f sp i r i tua l knowledge . Do not judge them; help them grow.

10. W h e n someth ing good happens to you, or when you achieve someth ing in your earthly world, always thank Cod, and also thank the people on Ear th and in the


spir i t world who have helped you.

11. W h e n you are u n s u r e o f s o m e t h i n g , ask f o r advice f r o m a p e r s o n you t r u s t . Today, o n e o f t h e m a i n problems is that people are t o o p roud to ask fo r help o r advice . T h e y see it as a s ign o f w e a k n e s s . I t requires s t reng th to be open abou t the fact that you need help . But n o t a sk ing f o r he lp and conv inc ing yourse l f tha t you can go t h r o u g h p r o b l e m s w i t h o u t anyone 's help, is a sign of pride.

12. Surrender to G o d . D o your best t o stay on the r ight path, bu t know tha t the o u t c o m e is in G o d ' s hands . H i s Plan is o f a h igher na tu re than what you have in mind .

Spir i tual i ty involves c rush ing of the ego, and tha t can be a t e r r i fy ing t h ing fo r people who are p roud . So if you are very p roud , it will be very d i f f i cu l t fo r you to embark on a spir i tual journey. It is n o t imposs ible fo r a p r o u d pe r son t o change, bu t a p r o u d pe r son will have to work hard to change because the ego will work extra hard t o prevent you f r o m changing. For years and years, you have been roo ted in the physical, mater ia l is t ic world by your ego. Sp i r i tua-lity is abou t cu t t ing those roo t s and growing new ones ou t o f a h igher u n d e r s t a n d i n g . T h e r e can be n o t r u e f l i g h t with ego. Humility helps you take flight and at the same t ime, keeps you g rounded .

THE SHIFT O F THE AXIS

<m

"The shift is entirely man-made, caused by the energy created by man's actions. The more crimes and sins,

the sooner the shift will occur."

"The only way to survive the shift is to stay on the Godly Good Path."

What is the shift of the axis?

N a t u r e is a living th ing. Therefore, it is very sensitive to energy. Since nature is neutral , when human beings follow the wrong pa th their ac t ions build negative vibrat ions and these negative v ibra t ions are absorbed by na ture . Human beings have the ability to change the course o f nature for be t t e r or fo r worse. W h e n h u m a n s cons tan t ly fol low the w r o n g p a t h and show no respec t lo r G o d , the i r fellow beings, or nature, a great deal of negative energy builds up-As a r e su l t , n a t u r e ' s r e s p o n s e is nega t ive . T h e r e is an increase in na tura l d i sas te rs such as ear thquakes , floods-tornadoes , volcanoes, fires, and so on. T h i s is nature ' s way of t e l l i n g h u m a n b e i n g s t o s t o p , t h i n k , a n d chang e -

H u m a n s may have progressed technologically, bu t that Is

n o t t rue progress . Power is t o be used fo r the good h u m a n b e i n g s , n o t f o r p e r s o n a l ga in or f o r negative

T h e Shift O f The Axis 3 0


p u r p o s e s . T h e bas ic f o u n d a t i o n s of g o o d n e s s , love, se l f le s snes s and f r i e n d s h i p have a l m o s t van i shed f r o m Earth . T h i s is no t a sign of progress , bu t a sign of decline.

N a t u r e is a ref lect ion of h u m a n beings. It shows what is wi thin you. All the upheavals that are taking place in your world are an indicat ion of the unrest wi thin humans . Also, what emana tes f r o m you is absorbed by na tu re — if you send o u t pos i t ive energy, n a t u r e will re f lec t tha t in t he f o r m o f peace and h a r m o n y . If you send o u t nega t ive energy, na ture ' s response will be negative. If you carry ou t nuclear tes ts in one place, the result will be an ear thquake in ano ther place. Unfor tuna te ly , we forget that the ent i re planet is ou r h o m e and that we are all connec ted . R i g h t now, h u m a n beings are so far removed f r o m the r ight pa th t ha t n a t u r e is giving a s ign. You live in a wor ld where people are afraid or embarrassed to talk about G o d or to walk on the spir i tual path. The re are o ther people who say they believe in God , bu t do no t live even a second of their lives in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h H i s t e a c h i n g s , and are so d i s c o n n e c t e d f r o m H i s g o o d n e s s t h a t they p e r f o r m un imaginab le acts. T h e r e are people who embark on so -called sp i r i tua l journeys only to feed their own egos, or who run away f r o m their du t i e s and responsib i l i t ies and convince themselves they are reaching for God . G o d ' s laws are made in such a way that when human beings go beyond a certain limit, when they are in comple te d i sharmony with goodness and there exists a ma jo r imbalance, na tu re will give them warnings that they are fol lowing the wrong path . If h u m a n beings do no t change, na ture mus t correct that imbalance th rough a cleansing process because eventually, God s creat ions both humans and na tu re ' mus t exist as th ev are m e a n t to , as p u r e , g e n e r o u s , and peace f u l

The Shift Of The Axis 309

c r e a t i o n s . But b e t o r e t h a t peace is r e s t o r e d , n e g a t i v e energies need to be wiped out . T h e clcansing has already begun, bu t this t ime na ture will no t rest unt i l the Earth is pure once again — a place where h u m a n s live in ha rmony and practice what it means to be t rue i n s t r u m e n t s of the Almighty. To be a t rue i n s t r u m e n t is to live selflessly, fo r the greater good, with comple te fai th m God.

M a n mus t be in balance with nature, remain on the r ight pa th , and progress spiritually. However, on Ear th , the cycle of life is such tha t s o m e t i m e s good is more widespread and negativity is conta ined, or vice versa, and this goes on and on , cycle a f t e r cycle . At s o m e p o i n t , n e g a t i v i t y becomes t oo overwhelming, and this overbearing increase in negativity br ings about a cleansing process, as a ma jo r p o r t i o n of th is negat iv i ty m u s t be wiped ou t . Since the c leans ing process is t o be b r o u g h t abou t by na ture , the magn i tude of natural disas ters is such that there will be a 'pole sh i f t ' . T h e axis of the Ear th will sh i f t physically. A ser ies of ca tac lysmic e a r t h q u a k e s will cause t h i s m a j o r imbalance, which will be fol lowed by f loods , t idal waves, f i res , m o r e ea r t hquakes , volcanic e r u p t i o n s , and so on . T h i s will cause a ma jo r par t of negativity to be wiped out . Th i s in fo rma t ion is n o t mean t to f r igh ten you; it is meant to awaken you to change.

(Hi) Is the shift of the axis caused by God or man?

G o d gave man free will to make choices. T h e r e f o r e , the sh i f t is entirely man-made, as it is caused by the negative energy created by man's act ions. T h e shif t is about cause and effect and is a natural response to human action. It is ent irely in the hands of h u m a n beings. By re jec t ing the


g u i d a n c e of the s u b c o n s c i o u s m i n d , h u m a n b e i n g s are s t ray ing comple te ly f r o m the sp i r i tua l pa th . T h i s is the main reason the sh i f t will happen soon. If you upse t the m i r a c u l o u s and de l ica te ba lance o f na tu re , it will have s t rong repercussions.

What will be the duration of the shift?

A ma jo r par t of the devastat ion will take place within a few hour s . It will be qu i t e fas t and at the t ime, when many have lost their near and dear ones, good people will guide and c o m f o r t them, giving them the s t rength to live and to no t give up hope.

When will the shift of the axis happen?

T h e t im ing is entirely in the hands of human beings. T h e more crimes and sins take place, the sooner the sh i f t will occur.

Who will survive the shift?

It is entirely up to you to survive. T h e cleansing process means tha t a major part of negativity will be wiped ou t . In order t o survive, make sure tha t you are no t par t of the negativity tha t needs to be wiped ou t . Rise spiritually.

What percentage of the world's population will

survive?

2 5% of the world 's popu la t ion will survive.


Where will the shift begin?

T h e sh i f t will begin s imul taneous ly all over the world with a ca tac lysmic e a r t h q u a k e , which will have a c o n t i n u o u s cha in r e a c t i o n w o r l d w i d e , a n d wil l c o n t i n u e u n t i l t h e cleansing process is comple te . Land will be replaced by sea; there will be widespread fires; and there will be massive explos ions wherever nuclear weapons, a rms and a m m u n i -t ion are s tored. T h e devas ta t ion will be m o n u m e n t a l .

Which parts of the world will be safe during and

after the shift?

Places tha t have posi t ive v ibra t ions will be safe e.g. pa r t s o f Canada , N e w Zea l and and Austral ia . Places tha t have negative vibrat ions will be t he least likely to survive.

After the shift, will medicine be required in the

safe areas?

Initially, medicine will be required, so it is be t te r t o s tock u p m e d i c i n e at h o m e . Also , t ry t o take f i r s t a id a n d disaster management courses so tha t you know what t o do if someone is injured.

What does the shift have to do with our spiritual

development?

You have all been r e b o r n on E a r t h d u r i n g th i s t i m e in o rder t o change fo r t he be t t e r d u r i n g a t ime when it is d i f f i cu l t to change because of so much negativity. T h i s is


how you chose to progress: by coming to Earth during difficult times and leading a positive, spiritual life. The very first thing you need to do is change. You need to do this quickly, before the shift of the axis occurs, because that is your test. It is a test you have chosen. Once the shift occurs the cleansing process will have begun and the vibrations on Earth will change, so there will be less temptation; therefore, the test is to change now. Spirit souls want to help you change, but we need your cooperation. If you have no desire to improve, we cannot force you to. Never say that you do not have the time to think about spiritual improvement. When you get too caught up in a physical existence, you forget why you have come to Earth. Consider yourself lucky to have been born during difficult times. As you progress spiritually, you will attach less and less importance to earthly things, and you will fulfill your duties and complete your mission on Earth. Finally, understand that a selfless good deed done now, when negativity is at its peak, will help you progress much faster than if that same good deed is done at a later stage (after the Shift) when the vibration is positive and good is ascendent.

What are spirit souls doing to help souls on Earth

with respect to the shift?

Currently, we are trying very hard to improve souls on Earth in order to help them survive the shift. We are also working to move good souls to safer areas. There is a flurry of activity all around the Earth, of which you are not even aware. We are extremely alert right now, and are keeping track of every single change on Earth. The shift is a necessary cleansing process. It has occurred at regular


intervals in your planet's history; however, this time, human beings have come too close to destroying the very planet that gives them life, supports them, and helps them grow. Human beings have to learn to live in total unity and harmony with nature. So it is up to you to simplify your lives and follow the right path. Once again, the only way for you to survive is to change for the better and follow the right path.

How will human beings be guided and helped

during the shift?

People who are on the higher Realms will be saved. UFOs will send down levitation beams to evacuate good souls who are trapped in dangerous places. Everyone will see these beams and they will be scared, but good souls who are on the higher Realms will understand and they will be guided as to what they have to do. Even if good souls are fallen under the debris and not visible to the human eye, they will be 'seen' and saved. These souls will be guided towards the beams which will lift them into the spacecrafts. Those who are not on the higher Realms and have bad vibrations will fear these beams and will be unable to touch the beam or go into it, even if they want to. Once in the spacecraft, people will be taught survival techniques and will then be relocated on islands that will emerge from the sea. This will be one of the hardest tests people will have to face and they will need a lot of strength and positive attitude before, during and after the shift. Now do you understand why we are asking you to improve taster?

3 1 4 The Laws Of The Spirit World

Will a family remain together after the shift?

I t will depend on how g o o d each individual is. During the shift only your Realm will count and depending on your Realm you will remain un i t ed or separated f r o m your family.

If a pregnant mother has low vibrations and her

unborn child is a good soul what will be their fate?

At the time of the shift no good soul will take rebirth through an evil mother.

SELF ANALYSIS SHEET The following is a Self Analysis Sheet.

It lists all possible negative soul characteristics that a human being can have. In order to change as a human being you need to understand what to change. Therefore, go through this list with an open mind and tick whatever quality applies to you. Analysis needs to be done daily, at the end of the day and you must tick the quality that manifested on that particular day. Please remember that the idea is not to be harsh on yourself. This is a look at your own soul with gentle eyes and a receptive and humble mind. It is about shining the light of understanding on your own soul so that whatever is negative dissolves in that light. Even if the process is difficult at first, please trust that it will eventually lead to your healing.

It is also important to accept and embrace, with humility, whatever is good in you — your positive soul characteristics. So be aware of those and gain strength from them. Use them to overcome the negative but do not get proud of your good qualities. Instead of feeling great — feel grateful.

God Bless!

SELF

ANA

LYSI

S SH

EET

BE H

ON

ES

T W

ITH

YO

UR

SE

LF -

VR

RP

St

. N

o.

Poin

ts t

o A

naly

se

1.

Rev

enge

2.

Prid

e

3.

Phys

ical

and

Men

tal A

buse

(to

sel

f or

othe

rs)

4-

Self

-pity

5.

Selfi

shne

ss

6.

Show

ing

Off

(bo

ast,

brag

, et

c.)

7.

Swin

dlin

g/D

ecei

ving

8.

Poss

essiv

enes

s

9.

Inqu

isiti

vene

ss

10.

Spre

adin

g R

umor

s (b

ack-

bitin

g)

I I.

B

eing

Neg

ativ

e (t

houg

ht o

r ac

tion)

12.

Mat

eria

listic

13 •

Cow

ardi

ce (

keep

ing

quie

t, no

cou

rage

to

spea

k up

)

14 -

Lack

of

Dis

cipl

ine

1 5

- La

zine

ss

16.

Naggi

ng 17

- B

eing

Stu

bbor

n

I 8.

Unp

unct

ual

(not

res

pect

ing

othe

r's t

ime)

1 9.

D

oing

Cha

rity

For

Pub

licity

20.

Jeal

ousy

21.

Lies

2 2.

H

atre

d

2 J.

A

nger

24.

Irri

tabi

lity

25-

Hyp

ocris

y

Inst

ruct

ion

s:

Ever

y ni

ght

refl

ect

on y

our

daily

lif

e an

d re

solv

e ne

ver

to r

epea

t yo

ur m

ista

kes.

Be

very

sin

cere

and

hon

est

with

you

rsel

f

2 6.

R

uden

ess

27-

Dep

ress

ion

or A

nxie

ty

2 8.

A

lway

s C

ompl

aini

ng/G

rum

blin

g

29.

Gre

ed

30.

Impa

tienc

e

31.

Kee

ping

Gru

dges

32.

Enc

oura

ge E

vil

3 3.

A

void

ing

Res

pons

ibili

ty/D

utie

s

3 4-

Sarc

asm

3 5-

T

empt

atio

n To

Do

Wro

ng

3 6.

Dom

inat

ing

3 7-

A

rgui

ng U

nnec

essa

rily

38.

Figh

ting

| 39

. W

orry

ing

! 40

. B

lam

ing

Som

eone

Else

For

You

r Fa

ults

41 •

Tak

ing

Out

You

r Fr

ustr

atio

n O

n So

meo

ne

42.

Not

Pra

ctis

ing

Wha

t Y

ou P

reac

h

| 43

- M

isgu

idin

g So

meo

ne O

n Pu

rpos

e

44-

Hur

ting

Som

eone

's Fe

elin

gs

4 5

• H

avin

g Fu

n A

t So

meo

ne E

lse'

s Ex

pens

e

46.

Livi

ng B

eyon

d Y

our M

eans

47.

Stin

gine

ss

4 8.

W

rong

Jud

gem

ent

49.

Not

Pra

ying

50.

Not

Con

trol

ling

You

rsel

f, M

enta

lly o

r Ph

ysic

ally

51.

Man

ipul

atio

n

Tota

l

Ratoo (left) with friend

Khorshed (second from left) and Rumi (extreme right) in their early days

Ratoo (centre) with friends

Khorshed, Ratoo and Rumi

Khorshed, Vispi and Rumi with their pet dog Chu-Chu

Vispi could balance his entire body rigidly between two chairs, supported only by the edge of his heels and the back of his head

The ill-fated car: MRF 207

Ratoo Bhavnagri after his Navjote ceremony on 1 April, 1959

Visoi Bhavnaqri after his Naviote ceremony on 1 April, 1959

Rumi and Khorshed on their wedding day 6 October, 1949

Khorshed and Rumi Bhavnagri were very fond of animals especially dogs

Vispi Bhavnagri born on 9 August, 1950

Ratoo Bhavnagri born on 13

December, 1951

A N INTERVIEW W I T H KHORSHED RUMI BHAVNAGRI

"^P? How did you start helping people?

W h e n my sons died, my husband and I were very miserable and did nor know how we would face life. O u r sons helped us by c o m m u n i c a t i n g with us, and giving us messages of hope and courage . Later on, when my a u t o m a t i c wr i t ing skills w ere well developed, they said to us, " O u r miss ion is to help people on Ear th , f r o m the spi r i t wor ld , t h r o u g h you both ."

"^P? What was your first reaction when you received your sons' messages? Did you believe in psychic things?

We were very excited, and yes, we have alwavs believed in psych ic t h i n g s . B e f o r e they d ied , V i sp i and I used to discuss the af ter l i fe and reincarnat ion. F rom the t ime I was seven years old, I had a th i rs t lor this kind of knowledge. I had an experience once that has stayed with me even today. Rumi, the kids, and I were going on a t r ip ou t of town w ith some relatives. I always carried sweets with me whenever 1 travelled, bu t th is t ime 1 had fo rgo t t en , so I asked Rumi to s top the car and get some. I was s i t t ing alone in the car,


waiting for them to re turn , when I saw a weeping bullock. I saw tears pour down his face and I wondered why this was happening . Was he suffer ing? The bullock tu rned his head to me and pu t his jaw near the window, where my hand was rest ing, and looked at me in such a way as if he were t rying to tell me: You know why I am grieving, 1 am su f f e r ing a

lo t . At t h a t m o m e n t , R u m i , the kids, and mv rela t ives 1 r e t u r n e d and were s u r p r i s e d to see me t , l ik ing t o t he bu l lock (Vispi to ld me d u r i n g our c o m m u n i c a t i o n tha t negative souls reincarnate on Ear th as beasts of b u r d e n if they w a n t t o p r o g r e s s f a s t e r ) . 1 u n d e r s t o o d f r o m t h i s experience that beasts of bu rden su f fe r a lot, t h o u g h I did no t realise this unt i l m u c h later.

How did you feel a month after the boys died, and how did Vispi take away your misery and depression? What convinced you that you were communicating with them?

Whi le communica t ing with us, Vispi said th ings tha t only he knew about . They also gave me the names of s t rangers and asked me to call t h e m and give them some messages. We t r aced these a b s o l u t e s t r a n g e r s and gave t h e m the messages that we were asked to — this was our proof tha t t h e s e p e o p l e really ex i s t ed and V i s p i ' s m e s s a g e s were accurate. W h e n we were depressed, our sons cheered us up by tel l ing us jokes and showed us how to lead our In •es happily. They made us laugh and would guide us and tell us what to do and how.

Yn Interview With Khorshed Rumi Bhavnagri 327

Ratoo Bhavnagri in his car

Vispi Bhavnagri at the Rustom Baug Pavilion


Did people often ask you why you were disturbing the dead?

Yes, verv of ten . I cons tant ly asked Vispi whether we were hamper ing their progress t h rough c o m m u n i c a t i o n and if we were h a r m i n g t h e m in anv way or s t o p p i n g t h e i r progress. If we were, we would have s topped communica t -ing with them even thou gh we loved to. Vispi said, "On the contrary, we can all progress much fas ter because we can guide you within seconds dur ing our communica t ion , as we have to help you somehow. You may take days or m o n t h s to listen and you may still no t do what is r ight, b u t with our two-way c o m m u n i c a t i o n it will be much be t t e r . " H e assured us t ha t n o t h i n g wou ld h a r m the i r p rogress . I believed him and con t inued to c o m m u n i c a t e with them. He also said that it was much easier and faster t o r ise s p i r i t u a l l y on Larch t h a n in t he s p i r i t w o r l d , depending on how we led our lives.

How do you feel about taking messages for others? Isn't it a big responsibility?

Of course it is, which is why it is necessary to gain more sp i r i tua l knowledge to help people . In the beg inn ing , I used to be verv scared of giving the w r o n g message to someone. Some people did not believe the messages I gave them and thev would no t listen; later, they regret ted not l is tening to the messages, which was the proof I needed at the t ime to let me know that the messages were accurate. At f irst , Vispi used to move the pen, but as I improved, I began taking messages telepathicallv. Now, I hear them m my mind.

\ n I n t e r v i e w W i t h K h o r s h c c l R u m i B h a v n a g r i 3

Who are we to judge if a person is good or bad?

U s m o the word ' judge is not correct . I am not judging anvone, hut with Yispi and Ra too ' s guidance I can make out instinctively il .1 person 's vibration is good or bad, or it they are on a low level. As vou rise spiri tually and gain more knowledge, your subconscious mind guides you more and more and you tend to t rus t your own inst incts . You feel uncomfor t ab le with negative people and vou just want to get away f r o m t h e m . The o p p o s i t e is t r u e of good people who are t rying very hard to improve themselves — vou are instinctively at t racted to them.

Why do some people not believe in the spirit world and think that the ones who do arc crazy?

There are a n u m b e r of reasons why people don ' t believe. Some are scared ol what thev cannot see or unders tand ; s o m e are b r a i n w a s h e d f r o m c h i l d h o o d ; s o m e s imply pretend thev don ' t believe m the existence of Clod; some even deny the i r belief because they arc af ra id that their fami ly and f r i e n d s m i g h t laugh at t h e m ; s o m e do n o t accept this belief because thev are guilty; fo r some, it is easier to stay on the wrong path because they are weak. Mos t of the people w ho come to me for help are teenagers or youngsters m their twenties and early thir t ies — very few old people. Older people are set in their wavs of th inking and deny the existence ol an af ter l i fe , and thev fear the spiri t world in general . 1 he ones who are gui l tv won t come because thev are scared to admit their guilt, as thev know what thev ha\c done: thev generally con t inue to do bad th ings , and don i want o the r s to t m d o u t . so thev a\oid this knowledge.


What were Vispi, Ratoo and Popsic's hobbies?

O u r family was a l w a \ ' S interested in music and driving, and the men loved spor t s . \ ispi and I loved reading and he loved music specially Jim Reeves and Nat King C.ole. Vispi enjoyed t inker ing with car and ship mode ls and he even made his own speakers . T h e mus ic r eco rd ings he made were except ional and I still have some oi t h e m . \Ye all loved animals, especially dogs, and we had many — Coll les, Pomeran ians , Alsa t ians , and a Lhasa Apso, w h o m Vispi trained verv well.

Why is Vispi more heard of and talked about than Ratoo?

W'e hear more a b o u t Vispi as he is he lp ing and giving messages to more Larth souls than Ratoo. R a t o o s work, on the other hand, is to help souls who have just arrived m the spi r i t world by g u i d i n g t h e m . H e also works wi th Vispi by communica t ing with Larth souls.

When did you first communicate for someone else?

In 19 8 1 relatives.

I c o m m u n i c a t e d lo r my c o u s i n and s o m e

\ n I n t e r v i e w W i t h I x h o r s l i e d R u m i B h a v n a i r r i

What arc the major things for which people come to you?

About 50% of the people eome to me to receive spiritual guidance and c o m i o r t through messages. The other 50% is divided a m o n g peop le with p r o b l e m s , i n c l u d i n g fami ly unres t , s e r ious p r o b l e m s between p a r e n t s and ch i ldren , marital p rob lems , and worst of all, evil people d i rec t ing negativity at o thers . People f rom all walks of life come to receive guidance and I try to help them all — if they are w illing to accept, learn, and improve.

If you had one message to give readers, what would that be?

There are many good souls on Larth who lose their loved ones and then follow the wrong path because thev do not know how to handle the pain. We want to assure those people that thev are not alone. The i r loved ones are still wi th t h e m , l o o k i n g a f t e r t h e m f r o m the sp i r i t wor ld . Always remember w hat Yispi told me years ago: "Real, t rue love never dies. N o t even af ter your dea th on Ear th . Love is g rea te r t h a n d e a t h . Love is e t e r n a l . D e a t h is j u s t a t r ans i t i on — f r o m one wor ld to another , f r o m one body to another. D e a t h is n o t at all s o m e t h i n g big, bu t love is ext raordinary ."

GLOSSARY

AKASHIC RECORDS Akashic Records arc also known as the Hall of Memories or the Hall of Journals, hach and everv deed, good or bad, is recorded here under vour soul name. The Akashic Records contain the memories ol all the lues vou have led on harth. When souls on har th are m deep dreamless sleep their subconscious mind makes entries m the Akashic Records.

ANGELS Angels are good souls from Realm 5 Stage 7 and above. Thev have the abilitv and power to perform miracles. Thev can also come down to har th to help human beings in case of emergencies, after taking permission from His Highest Good Soul. Lower level souls cannot be Angels as thev have to take training and have more knowledge on how to guide harth souls.

ASTRAL PLANE The astral plane is a dimension higher than Harth but lower than the Spirit Plane. In that sense it is between Harth and the Spirit World. An astral plane is where astral souls reside. 1 hese astral souls can view Harth Irom the astral plane but cannot view the Spirit Plane or the Spirit World.

ASTRAL BEINGS 1 h e v a r c l o s t s o u l s w h o h a \ e r e j e c t e d t h e a d \ i c e of t h e

Glossary 333

subconscious mind and refused to become spirit beings. An astral being is one that has shed its earthly, physical body but is not a spirit being as yet. It looks just as its human form did at the time of its death.

AURA An aura is an energy field that surrounds the body of every living being. Its colour and intensity reflect the current mood, emotional and physical state. Some human beings have the ability to see auras.

AUTOMATIC WRITING Automatic writing is the process through which spirit beings communicate with human beings on Earth. The spirit being, whom you are communicating with, will move the pen while you hold it lightly on the page. Slowly, over time, words and then sentences will form.

Never attempt automatic writing on your own. It is extremely dangerous to start automatic writing on your own without a protective link.

BLACK MAGIC Black Magic is an occult practice completely against God's laws, where human beings use negative astral souls and entities, and their own negative thoughts, for selfish gains and to cause harm to others.

CHANNEL A medium through which spirit beings can communicate with people on Earth.

CONSCIENCE Also known as subconscious mind. See subconscious mind.


EXTRA SENSORY PERCEPTION [ESP] ESP is the ability to perceive things beyond the five senses of touch, taste, hearing, sight and smell.

GHOSTS See Astral Beings.

GROUP SOULS God created a certain number of souls at the same time. These souls reincarnate on Earth together, in the same group, life after life, so that they can help each other pay off karma, work on their mission and rise spiritually. Group Souls are also known as Soul Mates.

HALL OF JOURNALS See Akashic Records.

HALL OF LEARNING The Hall of Learning is a place in the Spirit World where spirit beings can go to access information. It is like a library full of spiritual truths. It contains knowledge about God's laws, about the nature of the universe and about every single aspect of God 's creation. Informat ion is revealed according to a soul's ability to understand.

HALL OF MEMORIES See Akashic Records.

HALL OF REST If the death of a person on Earth is unexpected and sudden, that soul is taken to the Hall of Rest. As these souls may be traumatised they are given healing rays to calm them.

Glossary 335

HIGH G O O D SOUL[S] A High Good Soul refers to a spirit being from Realm 6 Stage 7 and above.

HIGH G O O D SOUL OF THAT REALM The Ruler, King or Head of each Realm is called the High Good Soul of that Realm — a complete soul f rom the next universe.

HIS HIGHEST G O O D SOUL The Ruler, King or Head of Realm 7 and all the other Realms as well. He is a complete soul from the next universe.

HIGHER SELF See subconscious mind.

INSTINCT Ins t inc t is a God-g iven , gut feeling tha t comes f rom the subconscious mind. This feeling is for your protection as well as those around you.

KARMA Karma is the consequence of a soul ' s t h o u g h t s , words or actions. It is based on the principle of what you sow, you reap. Karma can be a debt that you owe or a blessing that you may receive.

LINK During the process of automatic writing protection is provided by higher spirit beings, through prayers and positive energy, for safe communica t ion between Ear th souls and good spir i t beings. This link can only be joined by an experienced and authorised automatic writer once permission has been granted from the spirit world.


MASTER A master refers to a spir i tual teacher. An evolved soul who comes to Ear th f r o m higher Realms of the Sp i r i t W o r l d with the mission to impar t and spread spir i tual knowledge.

MEDIUM A medium is a person on Earth who is able to communicate with the Spirit World.

MOTIVE The true intent, reason, or driving force, behind a person's thoughts, words or deeds.

PAST LIFE MEMORY The recollection of an event or part of an event that took place in a soul's previous lifetime.

PROPHET When there is extreme negativity on Earth, God sends a very high soul from a higher universe to Earth to guide people. This Prophet gives knowledge to Earth souls so they can improve spiritually. Prophets come down to Earth very rarely, only when the planet is facing a spiritual crisis.

REALMS There are seven Realms or planes of existence in the Spirit World, with one being the lowest and seven being the highest.

SEANCE A seance is a mee t ing of a group of people who wish to communica te with their deceased loved ones or o ther supernatural entities. It is performed by a single medium who acts as go-between for the group and the spirits.

Glossary 337

SHIFT OF THE AXIS God's laws are made in such a way that when human beings go spiritually wrong, beyond a certain limit, nature will give them warnings that they are following the wrong path. If human beings do not change, nature will correct the imbalance through a cleansing process. Since the cleansing process is brought about by nature, the magnitude of natural disasters is such that the Earth's axis will tilt thereby causing a "Pole Shift".

SILVER CORD The Silver Cord is a ray of light that is the connection between your spirit and your earthly body.

SOUL The soul is your eternal spirit body. Just as you have a physical body on Earth, which is guided by the physical nund, the soul is your immortal spirit body and is guided by your subconscious mind.

SOUL CHARACTERISTICS] Soul characteristics are the qualities - positive and negative — that a soul gathers through many lifetimes.

SOUL MATES See Group Souls.

SOUL NAME Every soul is given a soul name when the soul is created. Just as the soul is split into two, so is the name, which remains the same throughout your existence. Your deeds are recorded in the Akashic Records under your soul name.

SPIRIT The Spirit includes your soul and your subconscious mind.


SPIRIT GUIDES Every soul on Earth has a guardian in the Spirit World who guides the earthly soul f rom birth to death. This guardian is known as your Spirit Guide, and it is his or her job to guide you spiritually.

SPIRIT WORLD O u r true home. It is divided into 7 different Realms. Each Realm has 10 Stages.

SUBCONSCIOUS MIND The subconsc ious mind is also known as the Conscience, Higher Mind, Higher Self or Inner Voice. It is your t rue spiritual mind that guides your soul.

TELEPATHY Telepathy is the ability to receive messages from spirit beings in the form of projected thoughts , which are accessed through your subconscious mind.

TWIN SOULS When a soul begins its human journey on Realm 4 Stage 5 it is split into two; a male soul and a female soul. These two souls exist separately and continue their earthly journey individually until both reach Realm 7 Stage 9- There they reunite to become a whole soul before progressing to the next universe.

VIBRATIONS Every object, whether living or otherwise, has a vibration. A vibration is a frequency of energy that flows at different speeds. Vibrations are either good or bad. A good vibration makes you feel comfortable and positive, while a bad vibration makes you feel uncomfortable and negative (you c a n only recognise this if you are a good soul whose subconscious mind is open).

Glossary 339

WALK-IN If the situation on Earth gets harder than you can handle, and you are on the right path, then a good soul f rom the Spirit World known as a Walk-In will occupy your body until the trying period passes. This happens rarely and only in case of emergencies.

RECOMMENDED READING

A Search for the Truth : Ruth Montgomery Here and Hereafter : Ruth Montgomery A World Beyond : Ruth Montgomery The World Before : Ruth Montgomery Strangers Amongst Us : Ruth Montgomery Born to Heal : Ruth Montgomery Threshold To Tomorrow : Ruth Montgomery Companions Along the Way : Ruth Montgomery Herald of the New Age : Ruth Montgomery Aliens Among Us : Ruth Montgomery The World to Come : Ruth Montgomery Do the Dead Suffer? : Lawrence Burt Teachings of Silver Birch : S i lve r B i r ch Guidance from Silver Birch : S i lver B i r ch Philosophy of Silver Birch : S i lve r Bi rch Mystery of Life, Death and the Beyond : F. R u s t o m j e e Life after Life : R a y m o n d M o o d y Jr., M D Death and Its Mystery Before Death : Camille F lammar ion You Will Survive After Death : S h e r w o o d E d d y Life in the World Unseen : A n t h o n y Borg ia A Life After Death : D r . S. R a l p h H a r l o w Twenty Cases Suggestive Of Reincarnation : Ian S t e v e n s o n , M D Faith is the Answer : Norman Vincent Peale Many Lives, Many Masters : Br ian W e i s s , M D Messages from the Masters : Br ian W e i s s , M D Edgar Cayce: The Sleeping Prophet : Jess S t e a r n Many Mansions: The Edgar Cayce Story of Reincarnation : G i n a Cerminara On Atlantis : Edgar Cayce Larth Changes Update : Hugh Lvnn C ayce We the Arcturians : Dr. Norma Milanovich (with Betty Rice and Cynthia Ploski)

AFTERWORD

K h o r s h e d A u n t y always said, " S p i r i t u a l i t y is a ' l i g h t ' subject . D o n ' t go t o o deep in to i t ." Sp i r i tua l i ty is n o t about runn ing away into the mounta ins . I t is about living your life r ight here amongs t people, facing your problems and fulf i l l ing your duties and responsibil i t ies. It is about c o m p l e t i n g your sp i r i tua l m i s s i o n on ear th . W h e n you unders tand this f ine balance, your life will be joyful.

O n e doesn ' t become spiri tual just by reading a thousand books on spiri tuali ty or joining a spir i tual group and then failing its main purpose — selfless service and true action. You mus t s i f t knowledge and let your inst inct lead you to decipher what is r ight and wrong. There is no use get t ing fanatical abou t the knowledge f r o m b o o k s and allowing y o u r ego t o t h i n k t h a t you k n o w it all w i t h o u t t r u e application of the same. Many fall in to this t rap and call themselves teachers w i t h o u t having prac t iced what they preach. Blinded by their egos, the years of gaining spiri tual knowledge are a waste due to no applicat ion and therefore no spiritual growth — all because ol spiri tual pride which is man's biggest downfall . W h a t makes you spiritual is your spiritual action. Only genuine selfless action brings about true change.

Khorshed Aunty always liked small acts of kindness. She always encouraged us to go s tep by s tep with ful l fa i th


with respect to any problem. Spir i tual i ty is a slow but sure climb. We all have flaws and we all make mistakes, bu t we m u s t forgive ourse lves and o thers , and c o n t i n u o u s l y do our best to improve and reach our goals. W i t h the help of G o d and H i s angels, we can do it.

Ju s t like the ca terp i l la r breaks o u t o f t he cocoon , t u r n s in to a bu t te r f ly and takes f l ight , whether you believe it or no t , your spir i t will break free f r o m the physical l imi ta-t ions and take f l ight t o higher realms of g rowth unt i l it is one with the Creator .

G o d Bless!

Shiamak

ABOUT THE AUTHOR

Khorshed Bhavnagr i nee Screwalla was b o r n in M u m b a i (Bombay) , India, in 1925- H e r ch i ldhood dream was to be a teacher, p sycho log i s t or detective. She loved gardening, cooking and music , especially the Hawai ian guitar, and she w a t c h e d a l o t o f c r i cke t . In 1 9 4 9 , she m a r r i e d R u m i Bhavnag r i a n d h a d t w o s o n s , V i s p i a n d R a t o o . S h e d i s c o v e r e d t h a t she s h a r e d he r f a m i l y ' s p a s s i o n f o r au tomobi les and driving. Af ter the dea th of her sons in a car crash in 1 9 8 0 , she s tar ted c o m m u n i c a t i n g with t h e m th rough the process o f Automat ic Wr i t ing . H e r sons to ld her that it was her miss ion to spread spi r i tual knowledge o n E a r t h . In 1 9 9 8 , at t h e age o f 7 2 , she m o v e d t o Vancouver, Canada, where she c o n t i n u e d t o work tirelessly towards her miss ion , un t i l her dea th in Augus t 2 0 0 7 - It was M r s . Bhavnagr i ' s wish tha t th i s b o o k reach as many people as possible .

DISCLAIMER

T h e messages conta ined in this book are ob ta ined t h r o u g h the process of Au toma t i c Wr i t i ng and are n o t the views or o p i n i o n s of the a u t h o r a n d / o r those o f V R R P Spi r i tua l Learning. V R R P Spir i tua l Learning disclaims and accepts no responsibi l i ty a n d / o r liability and gives no representa-t i o n or war ran ty or o t h e r a ssurance as t o the accuracy, comple teness or t imel iness of the con ten t s of the messages in this book or its f i tness for any pu rpose whatsoever.

By reading this book, the reader accepts the disclaimer as above and c o n f i r m s h i s / h e r f u l l r e s p o n s i b i l i t y f o r any ac t ion he / she m i g h t take t h e r e a f t e r and h e / s h e will n o t h o l d V R R P S p i r i t u a l L e a r n i n g r e s p o n s i b l e f o r t h e con ten t s of this book a n d / o r for any such act ion that may be taken by the reader or persons claiming by or under or t h r o u g h h im/her in respect thereof.

V R R P Spir i tual Learning is a g roup of individuals who are c o m m i t t e d to spreading the knowledge provided in " T h e Laws of the Spir i t Wor ld . " They help and provide solace to i n d i v i d u a l s w h o have l o s t t h e i r loved o n e s a n d o f f e r sp i r i tua l guidance. T h e r e have been cases where pe r sons have f raudu len t ly represented themselves to be a part o ;

V R R P Spir i tual Learning, and V R R P Spi r i tua l Learning is not responsible for the same. Please check with V R R P

Spiri tual Learning and con f i rm the au thent ic i ty of people c la iming to be a pa r t of the V R R P S p i r i t u a l Lea rn ing group before in te rac t ing with them.

Automat i c W r i t i n g is the process, or p r o d u c t , of wr i t ing material tha t does n o t come f r o m the consc ious mind of the writer b u t f r o m the Spir i t Wor ld . It takes practice and c o n t r o l and requ i res gu idance and superv i s ion . O n l y an a u t h o r i z e d , e x p e r i e n c e d and l i nked c u r r e n t m e m b e r o f V R R P Spi r i tua l Learning can join your Automat ic W r i t i n g l ink. D O N O T A T T E M P T A U T O M A T I C W R I T I N G O N Y O U R O W N .

ON FEBRUARY 22,1980, KHORSHED AND RUMI BHAVNAGRI'S

WORLD WAS SHATTERED. ONE MONTH LATER, A NEW ONE OPENED.

Khorshed and Rumi Bhavnagri lost their sons, Vispi and Ratoo, in a tragic car crash. With both their sons gone, the couple felt they would not survive for long. They had lost all faith in God until a miraculous message from the Spirit World gave them hope and sent them on an incredible journey.

Elevate Your Life. Transform Your World.

www.jaicobooks.com O c c u l t / S p i r i t u a l i t y

BOOKS IAICO

http://www.jaicobooks.com

The Laws of the Spirit World

Documents